JP7842354B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding amusement machines.

Traditionally, among various types of gaming machines, those known as Type 1 pachinko machines displayed multiple symbols in a changing pattern on a display area, such as a liquid crystal display, located approximately in the center of the game board (hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "symbol changes" or "change display," etc.). These machines are known to transition to a special game, known as a "jackpot," where more prize balls are awarded than in normal gameplay, when the combination of symbols obtained by stopping the changing patterns in multiple rows reaches a specific pattern. The changing symbol display in the display area is not simply a matter of multiple symbols changing; rather, it incorporates effects to heighten the player's anticipation, such as extending the display time when only one symbol is needed to achieve a jackpot, as seen in a state known as a "reach screen." Furthermore, the use of characters in the image of the symbols to create a story in the changing display, and pre-announcement effects that suggest a high probability of transitioning to a special game, also enhance the player's anticipation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-148490

To differentiate it from conventional models, further improvements to its performance as a gaming machine are desirable.

In view of the above-mentioned problems, the present invention aims to provide a technology for improving the performance of a gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, an information display device for displaying information related to the game, and an effect display device for displaying effects. The main control means is capable of determining whether a player wins or loses, and the information display device displays a special symbol in a variable state, indicating the result of the win or loss determination by indicating the special symbol's stop. When the information display device displays a special symbol indicating that the result of the win or loss determination is a win, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game can be played. The machine is equipped with a speaker that outputs sound according to the effects, and the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed by the player's volume change operation. The machine can launch game balls by the player's game ball launch operation. If the power is interrupted and then restored while the player is adjusting the volume, the volume level will not change under the specified conditions of continued operation after the power is restored, even if the player continued adjusting the volume before the power was interrupted and after the power was restored. If the power is interrupted and then restored while the player is launching a game ball, and the player continued launching the game ball from before the power was interrupted and after the power was restored, the game ball will be launched under the specific conditions of continued operation after the power is restored.

Furthermore, any combination of the above components, or any substitution of components or expressions of the present invention between methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., are also valid embodiments of the present invention.

According to one aspect of the present invention, a technology for improving the performance of a gaming machine can be provided.

This diagram shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. This diagram shows the basic structure of the back side of a pachinko game machine. This is a diagram showing the functional blocks of a pachinko game machine. This is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board. This diagram schematically shows the success/failure determination table. This diagram schematically shows the range settings for the winning/losing lottery values for each set value. This diagram schematically shows the pattern determination table. This diagram schematically shows a table of fluctuation patterns. This diagram schematically shows the pre-qualification table referenced in the pre-qualification process. This diagram schematically shows a pre-win/loss determination table corresponding to the game settings. This is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. This diagram schematically illustrates the outline of the mobile phone connectivity system. This is a block diagram that schematically shows the hardware configuration of the main board and sub-board. This is a block diagram that schematically shows the hardware configuration of the performance control system. This is a flowchart showing the control start process for the main board of a pachinko game machine. This is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process in S124 in Figure 15. This flowchart shows in detail the setting confirmation process in S126 in Figure 15. This is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in Figure 15. The flowchart shows the details of interrupt handling. This is a flowchart showing the control start process for a sub-board in a pachinko game machine. This is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S518 in Figure 20. This is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling process when a command is received from the main board. This flowchart shows the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows the interrupt handling process when a sub-CPU receives a command from the control CPU. This flowchart shows the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for the control of various devices. This is a flowchart showing the process of displaying special symbol variations. This is a flowchart showing the process of displaying changing decorative patterns. This is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. This is a flowchart showing the process of winning a small prize. This figure shows an example of a screen display for a visual display device. This diagram schematically illustrates an example of frame image contraction in screen transformation effects. This diagram schematically illustrates an example of frame image oscillation in screen transformation effects. This diagram schematically shows the layer structure of the animation screen in a screen transformation effect. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of the movable prop effect, which is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. This diagram schematically shows multiple buffer regions obtained by dividing the frame buffer. This diagram schematically illustrates the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. This figure shows an example screen for the third special effect pattern. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. This figure shows an example of a guidance screen for custom features. This figure shows an example of the screen for changing the pre-read chance mode. This figure shows an example of the screen for changing the ball entry prediction mode. This diagram shows the relationship between whether or not the stage background image is displayed and whether or not the performance settings can be changed. This diagram shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in the first embodiment that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko game machine. This diagram shows the processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board. This diagram shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in a second embodiment that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko game machine. This figure shows the details of the control unit device in Figure 46. This is a diagram illustrating the basic electrical configuration of a pachinko game machine. This figure shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in a third embodiment that adopts the specifications of a sealed-type pachinko game machine. This diagram shows the details of the control panel. This diagram shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in an embodiment. This is an external perspective view that shows a general overview of the layout of the grand prize area. This diagram shows a schematic representation of the internal structure of the main prize slot, and in particular, the structure of the lower area of the main prize slot. This diagram schematically shows an example of how text effects are displayed. This table shows examples of text-based and preview effects corresponding to different performance stages. This diagram schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the second embodiment. This diagram schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the third embodiment. This diagram schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the fourth embodiment. This figure schematically shows an example of the display of special effects in the fourth embodiment. This figure schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the fifth embodiment. This diagram schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the sixth embodiment. This is a table showing an example of a performance mode that can be executed in the seventh embodiment. This figure schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the eighth embodiment. This table shows an example of the end demo time for a special game in the eighth embodiment. This diagram schematically shows the transitions in the game state in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows examples of displaying volume and light intensity images.

(Prerequisite technology)
In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine, multiple games corresponding to conventional Type 1 pachinko games are mixed together. The second game is given priority so that the first game and the second game are not executed simultaneously. In order to balance these gameplay characteristics, the machine is equipped with multiple starting entry points, multiple special symbol display devices, and multiple reserve lamps. The machine is designed so that the payout from a jackpot in the second game is generally greater than the payout from a jackpot in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when a jackpot is hit (including cases where long-opening unit games with long opening times for the large prize slot and short-opening unit games with short opening times are mixed in a single special game, and even with the same number of unit games, the second game has more long-opening unit games than the first game). Thus, the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, the gameplay is designed so that the player initially aims for an initial jackpot in the first game, and after a jackpot in the first game grants a time-saving bonus, the player repeatedly aims for the second game to obtain a large payout.

Figure 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 mainly consists of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launching handle 107, a speaker 108, a performance button 109, a directional pad 110, and decorative lamps 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 in the desired installation position. The front frame 102 is a frame body that aligns with the opening portion of the outer frame 101 and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, etc.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending game balls to the launch rail, and removing game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the top of the door 104, and the means for controlling the effects outputs sound effects and music according to the game state and effects. Most of the resin material that makes up the exterior of the door 104 is semi-transparent, and decorative lamps 111 are provided inside the transparent interior. The decorative lamps 111 are LEDs that emit light in various colors according to the game state and effects according to the means for controlling the effects, and they perform an effect by flashing, etc.

The game board 80 is located on a game area 81 demarcated by rails 82 and includes a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a big prize opening 20, a first operation opening 31, a second operation opening 32, a general prize opening 33, an out opening 34, a performance display device 60, and a center ornament 64. The center ornament 64 is a decorative resin member provided to form the screen frame of the performance display device 60, extending over the approximate center of the game area 81 and its upper and right sides. It has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance display device 60, and decoration. Below the center ornament 64, a stage 65 is formed on which the incoming game balls roll. Depending on how the balls roll, the direction in which they fall from the stage 65 is divided into a direction towards entering the first start opening 11 and a lateral direction that does not enter the first start opening 11. Above the center ornament 64, a movable mechanism 66 is provided that is driven according to the performance content and performs performance-like actions. The game area 81 is equipped with multiple game pins, windmills, and other mechanisms (not shown) for forming a flow path for the game balls. In this specification, "ball entry," "prize entry," and "ball drop" may be considered synonymous. Furthermore, each prize entry point and each ball entry point may consist of a "pass-through opening" (also called a "gate" or "through checker") through which the game balls pass, and "ball entry," "prize entry," "ball drop," and "pass-through" may also be considered synonymous.

The first starting opening 11 is provided as a starting prize entry opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting prize entry opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are configured so that the player can aim to enter one of them by adjusting the strength of the shot of the game ball according to the player's will. The first starting opening 11 is provided in the lower center of the game area 81, and the second starting opening 12 is provided directly below the first starting opening 11. When the player hits the ball relatively weakly, aiming to direct it towards the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy for the ball to enter both the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball relatively strongly, aiming to direct it towards the right-hand passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12, but it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the first starting opening 11. This is how the flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game pins. However, under normal circumstances, the opening of the second start port 12 is covered by the first start port 11, preventing the inflow of game balls. Therefore, unless the expansion mechanism of the second start port 12 is opened, it is impossible or difficult for balls to enter the second start port 12. The win/loss lottery determines whether or not the game transitions to a special game mode, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, and is conducted each time a ball enters either the first start port 11 or the second start port 12.

Furthermore, the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 may be positioned far enough apart from each other to allow for targeting of either opening depending on the strength of the ball's launch. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 may be positioned separately on the left and right sides of the game area 81, respectively, to make it difficult for a ball aimed at one opening to enter the other. For example, the first starting opening 11 may be positioned so that a ball can enter, or enters easily, when shot relatively weakly with a leftward shot, i.e., aiming to direct the ball towards the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting opening 12 may be positioned so that a ball can enter, or enter easily, when shot relatively strongly with a rightward shot, i.e., aiming to direct the ball towards the right-hand passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 is equipped with a first starting prize detection device 16. The first starting prize detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11 and generates first starting prize information indicating the entry of the ball. The second starting port 12 is equipped with a second starting prize detection device 17, a standard electric mechanism 90 (a so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion/contraction mechanism, and a standard electric mechanism solenoid 91 for opening and closing the standard electric mechanism 90. The second starting prize detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 and generates second starting prize information indicating the entry of the ball.

The first operating port 31 is located on the left side of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball into the first operating port 31 and generates passage information indicating the passage when the ball passes through. The second operating port 32 is located on the right side of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball into the second operating port 32 and generates passage information indicating the passage when the ball passes through. The passage of a game ball into the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery that determines whether or not to open the normal electric mechanism 90. When a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating the result of the opening lottery, is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the opening lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the variation display of the normal symbols stops. When the normal symbols stop on a winning symbol, the normal electric mechanism 90 expands due to the driving force of the normal electric mechanism solenoid 91, increasing the probability of balls entering the second start opening 12. As a modification, the number of operating openings may be reduced to one, and the opening may be located on the left side of the game area 81.

Each of the three general prize slots 33 is equipped with a general prize detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general prize detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general prize slot 33 and generates general prize information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large prize slot 20 includes a large prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large prize slot solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large prize slot 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot 20 and generates large prize slot entry information indicating the entry of the ball when it enters. The large prize slot 20 is a horizontal rectangular prize slot that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The large prize slot 20 is located in the upper right position of the out slot 34. As a modification, another large prize slot may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large prize slot 20, resulting in a configuration with multiple large prize slots. The out slot 34 is an outlet from which game balls that did not enter any of the prize slots are discharged, and is equipped with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects game balls being discharged after passing through the out opening 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection. The out opening 34 is located at the lowest center of the game area 81 so that all game balls that did not enter any of the prize-winning openings can be guided through it. Multiple out detection devices 39 may be installed side-by-side while ensuring a sufficiently wide game ball passage to prevent ball jamming in the out opening 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is positioned below and outside the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes various display sections, such as a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol hold display section 71, a second special symbol hold display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol hold display section 75, a game status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77. Specifically, the first special symbol display section 41, corresponding to the first game, and the second special symbol display section 42, corresponding to the second game, are arranged side-by-side on the lower left side, displaying the changes in the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first win/fail lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and a jackpot as a special game occurs when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second win/fail lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and a jackpot as a special game occurs when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LED display devices consisting of 8 segments, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". An 8-segment LED can represent 8 bits of numerical value by combining the 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, represented by the combination of segments, do not necessarily take the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols that do not generally have meaning, formed by the combination of each segment. These symbols rapidly change and are displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (e.g., "-") and non-display (e.g., all lights off) are repeated for a predetermined time, after which a symbol corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, thereby realizing the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. Alternatively, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 may use LED dot arrays other than 8-segment LEDs, and multiple types of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 may be represented by combinations of lighting patterns and colors.

Furthermore, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily need to have a visual or theatrical role, in this embodiment they are displayed in an inconspicuous size on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 located in the lower left of the game area 81. However, if a method is adopted to express the special symbols without using decorative symbols by giving them a visual or theatrical role, the special symbols may be displayed on another display device, such as a liquid crystal display, instead of an 8-segment LED.

Above the first special symbol display unit 41, a first special symbol reserve display unit 71 is provided as a reserve lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, a second special symbol reserve display unit 72 is provided as a reserve lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the second game. The first special symbol reserve display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps lit or blinking indicates the number of winning/losing lottery values that are reserved in the first game (hereinafter, the number of winning/losing lottery values that are reserved will also simply be called the "reserved number"). The reserved number in the first special symbol reserve display unit 71 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been acquired based on entering the first start opening 11 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 or the execution of the special game, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol fluctuation has not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserve display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps lit or blinking indicates the reserved number in the second game. The number of reserved balls in the second special symbol reserved display unit 72 represents the number of times (number of) a lottery value has been obtained based on balls entering the second start opening 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or the execution of a special game. It indicates the number of balls that have entered the opening before the symbol variation has been executed. The number of reserved win/loss lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the performance display device 60, represented by the number of lit reserved lamps.

On the right side of the symbol display unit 120, a normal symbol display section 45 is provided. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of their illumination. First, the variation of the normal symbol is expressed by simultaneously flashing the first and second lamps, and finally, the stopping symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the illumination states of the first and second lamps. For example, the illumination of the first lamp and the extinguishing of the second lamp express a losing stopping symbol, the extinguishing of the first lamp and the illumination of the second lamp express the first winning pattern, and the illumination of both the first and second lamps expresses the second winning pattern.

Furthermore, a regular symbol reserve indicator unit 75 is provided to the right of the regular symbol display unit 45 as a reserve lamp for regular symbol variations. The regular symbol reserve indicator unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lit or blinking lamps indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variations. The number of reserved regular symbol variations represents the number of game balls that passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32 during the regular symbol variation, indicating the number of regular symbol draws for which the regular symbol variation has not yet been executed.

The symbol display unit 120 is equipped with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game status display unit 76 is a display unit that shows game statuses corresponding to specific game states, such as those described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, it notifies the game status by lighting up when probability fluctuations are occurring, flashing when the ball entry is easy, and turning off when the game is in a normal state. During the execution of a special game, the 7-segment LED displays the number of unit games (rounds) to be played in that special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies abnormalities in part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, multiple lamps that notify the abnormality using lighting patterns corresponding to the type of abnormality. These display units do not necessarily have to be consolidated in the symbol display unit 120; each display unit may be configured individually, or they may be divided into multiple display devices as appropriate. Furthermore, the notification of game statuses, such as specific game states, may be configured to be limited to a predetermined period, such as a certain time after power is restored from a power outage.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, a display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by the center ornament 64. This device displays variations in the performance image, including decorative symbols 61 that are linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. Hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "symbol variations" or "variation displays," etc.

The performance display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that displays decorative symbols 61 in a manner that is linked to the changing display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbols 61 are symbols that visually enhance the display of the lottery result indicated by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The performance display device 60 displays a moving image in the central area of the screen as the decorative symbols 61, for example, a moving image of multiple rows of symbols that mimic a slot machine game. In this embodiment, symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and changed, and the combination of three symbols that are finally displayed indicates a win or a loss. Each of the multiple symbols that make up the decorative symbols 61 consists of numbers, letters, or symbols that are decorated with colors and patterns, but these numbers, letters, and symbols may be combined by adding a common image to all symbols or a different image for each symbol to unify them. This pattern depicts motifs related to the decorative or performance theme set for the pachinko machine 100, and may, for example, depict human or animal characters. The decorative pattern 61 may be configured to switch between being displayed as a single, integrated pattern, and being displayed as separate patterns, with only the numbers, letters, or symbols changing, in accordance with the progression of the performance. The background of the changing decorative pattern 61 displays animated images with theatrical effects related to the decorative or performance theme set for the pachinko machine 100, in conjunction with the pattern changes.

The display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device. The width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be a large size exceeding half. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the display device is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and the player can almost certainly pass the game ball through the right-hand passage by shooting with maximum force as a so-called "right-handed shot," allowing for differentiation between so-called "left-handed shots." The display device 60 may consist not only of a single display device, but also of a combination of multiple display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a main LCD and a sub-LCD, may be combined. The sub-LCD may be placed adjacent to the main LCD, or it may be installed in a location other than the game board, for example, near the launch handle (upper ball tray, right-side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the launch handle, it may be configured as a touch panel that the player can operate. The display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display; it may also be composed of other display devices such as an organic EL display, or it may be composed of mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type or an LED matrix type.

The performance button 109 is an input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the performance content, and the performance content changes depending on how it is pressed. The performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. Normally, the performance button 109 is housed within the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back of the performance button 109, allowing the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 to protrude in a direction approximately perpendicular to the game board. When the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 protrude outwards, they function as a performance lever 112, allowing the player to grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downwards. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine. The directional pad 110 is an input means that the player uses to input directional instructions to the game machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

The method of playing and the control flow in a gaming machine configured as described above will be outlined below. When a player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one onto the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with a force corresponding to the angle of rotation. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game balls launched into the upper part of the game area 81 fall in directions corresponding to how they hit multiple game pins, windmills, center decorations 64, etc. When a game ball falls into one of the prize winning openings, such as the general prize winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, or the large prize winning opening 20, prize balls corresponding to the type of prize winning opening are dispensed into the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray 106. Game balls that fall into the general prize slots 33 and other prize slots are treated as safe balls, while game balls that fall into the out slots 34 are treated as out balls. The discharge of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or safe balls may be guided to an area equipped with the out detection device 39, and all of their discharge may be detected by the out detection device 39. Alternatively, the guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may be omitted, and the number of detected safe balls may be added to the number of detected out balls to determine the total number of discharged balls.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 45 in a variable state, and after the variable display time determined prior to the display has elapsed, it is displayed in a stopped state. If the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state or the second winning state, the normal electric mechanism 90 is expanded based on the winning state of the displayed symbol and the game state at the time of the display. That is, if the game state at the time the symbol stops is the normal game state, and the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. Also, if the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state during a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), or if the normal symbol is displayed in the second winning state during normal play or during a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), a long opening of 6 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. Here, the probability of winning with a regular symbol and the probability of executing a long opening are set to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, there is a 1/100 chance of winning with a regular symbol, and in that case, the probability of executing a short opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the first winning mode) is set to 1/3, and the probability of executing a long opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the opening lottery in a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), there is a 99/100 chance of winning with a regular symbol, and although the selection probabilities of the first and second winning modes are the same as in the normal game state, the setting is such that a long opening is executed regardless of which mode is won. In this state of easy ball entry, the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12 is enhanced by a function that changes the probability of winning with normal symbols (from 1/100 to 99/100) and a function that extends the opening time (extending the opening time from 0.1 seconds to 6.0 seconds when the first winning pattern is displayed). Note that the function that extends the operating period of the normal electric mechanism 90 (long opening) is sometimes called "opening extension."

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the specification is such that the probability of a long opening is higher than the probability of a short opening in the normal state, so that a long opening occurs at a certain rate even in the normal state when a normal symbol is won. As variations, the specification may be such that the probability of a short opening is higher than the probability of a long opening in the normal state, or the probabilities of both may be made equal, or it may be such that it always opens short. In addition, when the ball entry is easy, the configuration may be such that the ease of ball entry into the second start opening 12 is enhanced by using three functions, including a function to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the ball entry is easy state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric mechanism 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is performed in the ball entry is easy state. Furthermore, when the standard electric mechanism 90 expands, this may be announced in advance. Alternatively, the system may predict the holding of the standard symbol variation and announce it before the start of the variation, or it may announce it during the variation of the standard symbol.

As a variation of the opening pattern when the ordinary electric mechanism 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened for a long period, the total opening time may be extended to about 6 seconds by repeating a 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. Alternatively, multiple combinations of opening time and number of openings may be provided, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of a 2-second opening three times, the total opening time is the same as in the case of a 6-second opening once, but including the interval period, the former is longer than the latter. Therefore, especially in the modified configuration in which the second starting opening 12 is positioned in the direction of right-handed shooting, it can be said that the former offers a longer chance of the ball entering the opening, assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the direction of their shot to the second starting opening 12 from that point onward. Furthermore, the system may be configured to have multiple types of winning patterns for the ordinary symbols, and the opening pattern of the expansion mechanism may differ depending on the type of winning pattern. For example, if a regular symbol results in the first win, the opening may be 0.1 seconds once in the normal state and 1 second three times in the easy ball entry state. If a second win occurs, the opening may be 6 seconds once in the normal state and 2 seconds twice in the easy ball entry state.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the performance display device 60. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stops after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variable pattern, from the start to the stop of their variation. The decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variable performance pattern, from the start to the stop of its variation. Multiple types of variable patterns and variable performance patterns are available, each with varying variable times of different lengths. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable performance pattern with the same variable time. Each variation pattern has a defined variation display time as a condition for ending the variation. When this variation display time elapses, the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stops. Below, examples of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 according to the variation performance pattern are provided, along with a brief explanation of the variation performance pattern. Details regarding the variation pattern and how the variation performance pattern is determined will be explained separately.

One example of how the decorative symbols 61 are displayed is that, at the start of the variation, all three rows of symbols are changed, similar to the reels of a slot machine. As the variation nears its end, each row is stopped one by one to display the final combination of symbols. Alternatively, the behavior of the decorative symbols 190 when they stop can be controlled to stop multiple rows simultaneously, rather than one row at a time, to draw attention to other visual effects during the variation display, or to display the symbol variation in a shorter variation time. Furthermore, the behavior of the decorative symbols 190 at the start of the variation can be controlled to delay the start of some rows' variation depending on the subsequent developments (type of visual effect pattern, etc.) in that variation, thereby creating a sense of anticipation.

Next, we will briefly explain the variable animation patterns. Variable animation patterns include normal miss animation patterns, reach miss animation patterns, and reach jackpot animation patterns. Normal miss animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a normal losing combination of symbols. Reach miss animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a losing combination of symbols after reaching a state where one more symbol is needed to win a jackpot. Reach jackpot animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a winning combination of symbols after reaching a state. In particular, patterns that go through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of variation time. Reach patterns with relatively short variation times are called "normal reaches," and reach patterns with long variation times are called "super reaches." Normal miss animation patterns, reach miss animation patterns, and reach jackpot animation patterns each have a normal pattern displayed in the normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in the time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol variation corresponds to a ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability of a jackpot accompanied by a probability variation or an increase in the number of unit games for special games is higher than the first variation corresponding to a ball entering the first starting port 11. Therefore, a chance pattern for indicating a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In this embodiment, a time-saving pattern is used in the time-saving state, but since the probability variation state is accompanied by a time-saving, the time-saving pattern is also used in the probability variation state. However, in a modified version, a different probability variation pattern may be used in the probability variation state than the time-saving pattern. Alternatively, a common pattern may be used for both the time-saving and probability variation states, or a special time-saving pattern may not be used, and only the probability variation pattern may be used in the probability variation state.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols for the win/loss draw reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol change time for a loss is shortened to improve game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened change"). Similarly, when the number of reserved symbols for the win/loss draw reaches 4, the symbol change time for a loss is shortened even further than in the case of 3 symbols to further improve game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "ultra-shortened change"). After the symbol change described above, if the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, the game transitions to a special game state, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize slot 20 begins. The stopping manner of the decorative symbol 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games: regular special games and shortened special games, and there is a significant difference in the profit from the number of prize balls won. Regular special games begin with the display of a presentation screen called the start demo time. After the start demo time screen is displayed, the large prize slot 20 opens and remains open for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls have fallen in, it is closed. This period from opening to closing of the large prize slot 20 is basically called a unit game, but it is possible to repeat short openings multiple times within one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large prize slot 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the regular special game ends with the display of a presentation screen called the end demo time. In regular special games, it is quite possible to expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and 10 unit games will yield a sufficient number of prize balls (also called "payouts"), resulting in a large profit. A special game consisting of 10 repeated unit games may also be referred to as a "10R jackpot," and a special game consisting of 4 repeated unit games may also be referred to as a "4R jackpot." Although the unit games are repeated 10 times, it is possible to achieve a regular special game (sometimes referred to as an "effective nR jackpot") that is effectively equivalent to a smaller number of repeated unit games by opening the large prize winning slot 20 for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) during some unit games.

On the other hand, in a shortened special game, the start and end demo times are short or almost nonexistent (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the large prize slot 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit of play. This unit of play is repeated twice to complete the shortened special game. Because the shortened special game only involves two very short openings of the large prize slot 20, very few balls can enter the slot, resulting in virtually zero or very few balls being dispensed (for example, a few to a few dozen balls, or a payout corresponding to 1-2 balls per round). A special game consisting of two repeated unit plays is sometimes referred to as a "2R jackpot." It should be noted that a shortened special game can also be achieved by using the same number of unit plays as a normal special game, but by opening the large prize slot 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit plays.

Furthermore, after the aforementioned symbol changes, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping represent a predetermined minor win pattern, the game transitions to a minor win game consisting of one unit game, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 is performed. During one unit game constituting the minor win game, the large prize opening 20 is open for approximately 1.6 seconds, resulting in an operation pattern that visually approximates a 2R major win.

If a special game occurs and the winning symbols at that time are in a specific configuration (for example, "777"), a probability variation mode, which is one of the specific games, will start after the special game ends. During the probability variation mode, a win/loss lottery is conducted with a higher probability of winning than in the normal probability state, and a new special game may occur relatively quickly. It is also possible to keep the outcome of the win/loss lottery a specific jackpot, i.e., a jackpot accompanied by a probability variation mode, without explicitly indicating it through decorative symbols or performance content. In this case, even during a probability variation mode, the performance display device 60 will not explicitly indicate whether it is a probability variation mode or not. However, if certain conditions are met, the performance display device 60 may explicitly indicate whether it is a probability variation mode or not.

After the special game ends, during normal gameplay, one of the specific game states, the "easy ball entry" state, is activated. In the easy ball entry state, the probability of winning the opening lottery is increased compared to normal, and the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 90 is extended. This can increase the number of normal symbol wins per unit of time, and also increases the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12, thus increasing the likelihood of balls entering the second starting opening 12. Therefore, the opportunity to win prize balls by entering the second starting opening 12 increases, making it possible to continue playing with almost no decrease in ball count, or even gradually increasing it.

In the "easy ball entry" state, as one of the specific game states, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state; this is known as "time reduction." The variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 returns to its original variation time after a predetermined number of variations, for example, 100 variations. However, if a jackpot occurs before reaching that number of variations, the time reduction also ends. Because the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened during time reduction, the time until a jackpot occurs can be shortened compared to the normal state where the symbols vary at their normal variation times, thus relatively increasing the ease of winning a jackpot. In a modified example, the time reduction for the special symbols may not be implemented in the "easy ball entry" state.

Figure 2 shows the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns the power of the pachinko game machine 100 on and off. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and in particular processes all game operations, such as the lottery when a ball enters the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12. The sub-board 300 is equipped with a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls the display content of the performance display device 60, and in particular changes the performance display content according to the judgment result of the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, and a payout device 154 that dispenses prize balls. The payout device 154 dispenses game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in accordance with the entry of a ball into each prize opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls from the upper ball tray 105 one at a time into the game area 81. The launching control board 157 controls the launching operation of the launching device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to various parts of the pachinko game machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 consists of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, representing the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls (the sum of safe balls and out balls).

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing the setting to one of several settings (also called game settings) corresponding to multiple game specifications. For example, six game settings (settings 1 to 6) are available, and the probability of winning a jackpot can be varied according to the game setting. Specifically, the higher the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification becomes for the player. If the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 are denoted as M1 to M6, the jackpot probabilities for each setting can be determined such that M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3 ≤ M4 ≤ M5 ≤ M6. It is not mandatory to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings; the jackpot probabilities may be the same across different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which an employee of the amusement parlor inserts a setting key, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of several game settings, a setting display unit 173 that illuminates to display the set setting value, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for transitioning to a state where the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state where the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and turned to the ON position, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. To transition to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes called the "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to transition to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the system transitions to the setting change state, the setting display unit 173 displays the number "1" as the initial value for the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a single digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 changes sequentially from 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→... After changing the setting, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, the setting change is confirmed, and the system becomes playable. On the other hand, when the system transitions to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state, the system becomes playable. Furthermore, if the setting key is turned off and the machine is ready for gameplay, the setting display unit 173 will turn off, making it impossible to see the current setting value.

The setting change button 172 may also function as the RAM clear switch. In this case, if the setting key is not turned (setting key off) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, a RAM clear will be performed. On the other hand, if the setting key is turned (setting key on) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting change state along with the RAM clear. Furthermore, if the setting key is off and the RAM clear switch is not pressed while the power is turned on, the system will power back on without a RAM clear. On the other hand, if the setting key is on and the RAM clear switch is not pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting confirmation state. The setting display unit 173 may also function as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 when the game is playable, and as the setting display unit 173 when the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may be omitted, making it impossible to change the game settings.

<Function Blocks>
Figure 3 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine 100. The functions realized using each component will be explained below, but in this specification, in order to align the physical configuration with the functional configuration, the terms already described as physical components, such as the main board 200, payout control board 155, and launch control board 157, may be used as they are for convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 is configured with a power supply board 158 that generates power for use within the game machine based on an AC power supply (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the game machine; a main board 200 that acts as a primary control device for controlling the basic operation and progress of the game; a payout control board 155 that acts as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls; a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the game area; and a sub-board 300 that acts as a secondary control device for controlling theatrical operations and processing.

The main board 200 is electrically connected to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port group (first general prize port 33a, second general prize port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on signals transmitted from the main board 200, such as prize ball payout and signals indicating the control status of the main board 200, thereby indirectly controlling the launch control board 157, and also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball transport device 164. Based on launch permission signals transmitted from the payout control board 155, it controls the ball transport device 164 and the launch device 156 to launch the game balls. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the performance display device 60, the movable mechanism 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the performance input operation device 115 (performance button 109, directional pad 110), and the decorative lamp 111, and transmits and receives various control signals between them.

Data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional, from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. The components necessary for achieving overall operation through unidirectional data transmission are arranged on both the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. Because the unidirectional nature of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from components on the sub-board 300 to components on the main board 200, nor can data transmission requests be made. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot access information generated by the main board 200 unless that information is transmitted. Furthermore, data transmission and reception between the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155, and between the dispensing control board 155 and the launch control board 157, are bidirectional. However, similar to the relationship between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, a configuration of unidirectional data transmission and reception from the main board 200 to the dispensing control board 155, or from the dispensing control board 155 to the launch control board 157, is also possible.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, firing control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and some functional blocks may be mounted on other boards as modifications. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be mounted on the dispensing control board 155. Furthermore, for example, some of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, while the remaining portion is mounted on the dispensing control board 155. In other words, a portion of a functional block may be divided and provided on multiple boards, so that the whole constitutes a single functional block.

<Main board 200>
Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a pre-determination means 235, a general lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, a main display control means 250, a special game control means 260, a small win game control means 265, a specific game control means 270, an opening/closing control means 275, a special symbol adjustment means 276, a main initial processing execution means 280, a main power cut-off processing execution means 282, a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines whether a game ball has entered each prize entry slot. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives first start prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the first start slot 11, and when it receives second start prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the second start slot 12. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives big prize entry information, it determines that the game ball has entered the big prize slot 20, and when it receives general prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the general prize slot 33. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives passage information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation slot 31 or the second operation slot 32. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives discharge information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the out slot 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 displays the value of "number of balls dispensed" ÷ "number of balls out" × 100 on the performance display unit 159 when the probability of a jackpot is in the normal probability state and the ball entry state is normal (a so-called low-low state with low probability and low ball entry). Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers for use in various decisions by the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general pattern lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "65535" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "winning/losing lottery values") used in the winning/losing lottery by the first winning/losing determination means 221 and the second winning/losing determination means 222. In addition, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "pattern determination lottery values") used in the pattern determination (pattern lottery) by the first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in determining the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "99" by predetermined means as random numbers used in the win/fail lottery by the regular pattern lottery means 213. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "2" by predetermined means as random numbers used when determining the regular pattern. Note that the "random numbers" referred to here may be physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter or software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. Alternatively, random numbers may be generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be random numbers generated by the same generation means, or random numbers generated by different generation means.

<General drawing lottery method 213>
The regular symbol lottery means 213 obtains random numbers used for determining the success or failure of regular symbols and random numbers used for determining the stopping symbols of regular symbols from the random number generation means 202 when a game ball passes through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and executes the lottery. The regular symbol lottery means 213 holds a regular symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) which is referenced for determining the success or failure of regular symbols, and a regular symbol determination table which is referenced for determining the stopping symbols of regular symbols to be displayed on the regular symbol display unit 45. The regular symbol success/failure determination table defines the correspondence between lottery values for success/failure and success, and the regular symbol determination table defines the correspondence between lottery values for determining the stopping symbols and regular symbols. Based on the aforementioned success probability and symbol selection probability, the success or failure of regular symbols and the stopping symbols are determined. The regular symbol lottery means 213 determines the stopping symbol for the regular symbol by referring to the regular symbol determination table if the lottery value for determining the win or loss of the regular symbol corresponds to a win, and always determines one losing symbol pattern if the lottery value for determining the win or loss of the regular symbol corresponds to a loss. If the result of the regular symbol win or loss determination corresponds to a win and the regular symbol stops on a predetermined symbol (first winning pattern or second winning pattern), the opening/closing control means 275, described later, expands the regular electric mechanism 90 of the second start opening 12 according to the pattern of the stopped symbol and the game state. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value for the regular symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240, described later. However, the lottery value is held only if it does not exceed a predetermined upper limit of holds held by the hold control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first win/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination means 231, and performs a first win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first start opening 11. Based on the various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 in the first special symbol display unit 41. In addition, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second win/fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and performs a second win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the second start opening 12. Based on the various lottery results from the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 displays a variation of the second special symbol 52 in the second special symbol display unit 42. In addition, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various lotteries and decisions by the first lottery means 211, triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 11. Specifically, it acquires the first win/fail lottery value for win/fail determination by the first win/fail determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stopping pattern of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, and the first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the first variation pattern determination means 231, each from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various lotteries and decisions by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second start opening 12. Specifically, the second win/failure lottery value for win/failure determination by the second win/failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stopping pattern of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, and the second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the second variation pattern determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/fail determination means 221 performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to a special game based on the first win/fail lottery value. The second win/fail determination means 222 performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to a special game based on the second win/fail lottery value. More specifically, the win/fail determination determines whether the outcome is a "big win," indicating a transition to a special game; a "minor win," indicating a transition to a minor win game; or a "miss," indicating no transition to a special game or minor win game. The first win/fail determination means 221 and the second win/fail determination means 222 maintain a win/fail determination table that is referenced in the win/fail determination. Note that the win/fail determination performed when starting the symbol change will be referred to as the "main win/fail determination" as appropriate, in order to distinguish it from the pre-win/fail determination described later. In this specification, when we refer to "table" or "selection criteria," we mean not only data where the correspondence between a first parameter (such as a lottery value) and a second parameter (such as a value indicating a choice) is defined in a table structure, but also broadly include cases where such a correspondence is implemented using a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. Including these, the term "selection criteria" will be used as appropriate, as it is essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when using a table structure, a selection criterion that is essentially one type may be composed of a combination of structurally subdivided tables; however, when we refer to "multiple types of selection criteria," we mean the actual number of table types, not the number of subdivided tables.

The first win/fail determination means 221 and the second win/fail determination means 222 each maintain a table corresponding to their respective win/fail determinations, which is used as a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination. Specifically, they maintain a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination by the first win/fail determination means 221 (also called the "first win/fail determination table") and a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination by the second win/fail determination means 222 (also called the "second win/fail determination table"), and select the table to refer to according to the win/fail determination to be performed. Multiple win/fail determination tables associate the results of big win, small win, and miss determinations with win/fail lottery values, and the win/fail probability is determined according to the range setting of the big wins that are associated. In addition, multiple types of win/fail determination tables are provided to correspond to multiple game settings, for example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, a win/fail determination table is provided that has a different correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result. Furthermore, if the probabilities of big wins, small wins, and losses are the same across multiple game settings, a common win/loss determination table may be provided for all game settings.

Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the win/failure determination table. This figure shows a win/failure determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows the win/failure determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/failure determination table in this figure, the judgment results of big win, small win, and miss are associated with the win/failure lottery value, and the probability of winning a big win and the probability of winning a small win are determined according to the respective range settings associated. The first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure determination means 222 refer to the win/failure determination table in this figure as the main determination. In both the first win/failure lottery by the first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure lottery by the second win/failure determination means 222, a big win occurs under normal circumstances only when the win/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. During probability variation, the range of big wins is expanded, and a big win occurs not only when the win/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. Thus, the range of wins changes depending on the game state. Note that in this diagram, a single win/loss judgment table is used to show the win/loss ranges for both normal and bonus rounds. However, separate win/loss judgment tables may be prepared for normal and bonus rounds, or for the first and second win/loss draws.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/losing value does not fall within the winning range, it will still be considered a minor win if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example shown in this figure, a minor win occurs when the winning/losing value acquired by the first winning/losing determination means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, and a minor win occurs when the winning/losing value acquired by the second winning/losing determination means 222 falls within the range of 64000 to 65535. In other words, the range for minor wins is wider in the first winning/losing determination means than in the second winning/losing determination means, making minor wins more likely. Thus, while all cases that do not result in a winning jackpot are technically "misses," in this example, the winning/losing value range in cases where neither a winning jackpot nor a minor win occurs is specifically referred to as a "miss." In other words, if "winning or losing" is considered from the perspective of "whether or not it is a jackpot," then "minor wins" can be considered as a broader definition of "misses," meaning "not a jackpot." Furthermore, when considering "win or loss" from the perspective of "whether or not it's a win," "minor wins" can be included in the broader definition of "win" along with "major wins." Note that while this diagram shows an example where the tables for determining whether it's a major win or a minor win are implemented as a single win/loss determination table, they may also be implemented as separate tables. Additionally, "minor wins" may be included in only one of the first or second games, or not in either game. In that case, the corresponding win/loss determination table will not have a value set for minor wins.

Figure 6 schematically shows the range settings for the winning/losing lottery values for each setting value. Figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing determination means 221 and the winning/losing determination result. Figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing determination means 222 and the winning/losing determination result. The range of the first and second winning/losing lottery values that result in a jackpot during normal play and during probability variation is 0 to 294 for setting value "1", 0 to 295 for setting value "2", 0 to 296 for setting value "3", 0 to 297 for setting value "4", 0 to 298 for setting value "5", and 0 to 299 for setting value "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a jackpot during normal play, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during normal play. Furthermore, the range of the first and second win/loss lottery values, which result in a jackpot only during the probability variation mode (i.e., a loss during normal play), is 295 to 2949 for setting "1", 296 to 2959 for setting "2", 297 to 2969 for setting "3", 298 to 2979 for setting "4", 299 to 2989 for setting "5", and 300 to 2999 for setting "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of win/loss lottery values that result in a jackpot during the probability variation mode, and the higher the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability variation mode. Note that the range of win/loss lottery values is set so that the ratio of the probability of winning a jackpot during normal play to the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability variation mode remains constant regardless of the setting value. In this diagram, the range of the win/loss lottery values is defined so that the probability of winning a jackpot during the bonus round is 10 times higher than the probability of winning a jackpot during normal play, and this range is common to all settings from "1" to "6". Furthermore, the range of the win/loss lottery values is defined so that the probability of a minor win remains constant regardless of the setting. For all settings from "1" to "6", a minor win occurs when the first win/loss lottery value range falls between 56500 and 65535, and a minor win occurs when the second win/loss lottery value range falls between 64000 and 65535. Win/loss lottery values outside the ranges for a jackpot or minor win result in a "miss". While this diagram shows different jackpot probabilities for each setting, the correspondence between the win/loss lottery values and the win/loss judgment results may be defined so that the jackpot probability is the same across different setting values.

<First pattern determination means 226 and second pattern determination means 227>
Returning to Figure 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stopping symbol at the start of the symbol variation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the win/failure determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 maintain a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referenced in order to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 maintains a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the result of the win/failure determination by the first win/failure determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 maintains a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the result of the win/failure determination by the second win/failure determination means 222. The first win/failure determination means 221 maintains a first symbol determination table for big wins that is referenced when there is a big win, a first symbol determination table for small wins that is referenced when there is a small win, and a first symbol determination table for misses that is referenced when there is a miss. The second win/loss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses, which are referenced when a big win occurs. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to reference according to the result of the win/loss determination. The symbol determination performed when starting the symbol variation is to be distinguished from the pre-symbol determination described later, and is also referred to as the "main symbol determination" as appropriate.

Figure 7 schematically shows the symbol determination table. Figure 7(a) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a jackpot, Figure 7(b) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a loss, and Figure 7(c) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a minor win. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table in this figure as the main determination for the symbol determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence between the number "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. Each type of special symbol is associated with the win/failure determination result of jackpot, minor win, or loss, with "0" to "4" corresponding to jackpots, "5" to "9" corresponding to minor wins, and "10" corresponding to losses. Each type is assigned multiple special symbols, i.e., symbols that are generally meaningless and formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in Figure 7(a), the special symbols types "0" to "4" correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and probability variation after a jackpot. Specifically, type "0" represents a 10R jackpot with probability variation as a specific jackpot, corresponding to "0 to 99" for the first symbol lottery value and "0 to 144" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "1" represents a 4R jackpot (or "effectively a 4R jackpot") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, corresponding to "100 to 149" for the first symbol lottery value and "145 to 149" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "2" represents a 2R jackpot with probability variation, and type "2" corresponds to "150 to 189" for both the first and second symbol lottery values. Type "3" represents a standard 10R jackpot without a probability variation, and Type "3" is associated with both the first and second symbol lottery values being "150 to 189". Type "4" represents a standard 4R jackpot without a probability variation, and Type "4" is associated with both the first and second symbol lottery values being "230 to 255". In this way, the range of the symbol lottery values determines the selection probability for each jackpot type (i.e., the content of the jackpot and whether or not there is a subsequent probability variation).

Furthermore, it is possible to include a greater number of special symbols. In this case, by configuring the system so that one type of jackpot is determined for each of the multiple special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of symbol types while keeping the number of jackpot types low. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide the increased number of symbol types into even more jackpot types. Moreover, it is possible to have different symbol types for the first and second draws. In this case, the system is configured so that one type of jackpot is determined for each of the special symbols selected in the first and second draws. However, it is desirable to set the probability variation ratio to be the same for the first and second draws.

As shown in Figure 7(b), type "10" corresponds to the entire range of symbol lottery values when the win/loss judgment result is a loss. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be displayed when the result is a loss. It is also possible to have multiple special symbols displayed when the result is a loss.

As shown in Figure 7(c), special symbols types "5" through "9" are associated with minor wins. Type "5" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "0 to 49," type "6" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "50 to 99," type "7" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149," type "8" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199," and type "9" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "200 to 255."

In this embodiment, to conserve memory space on the main board 200, the table in Figure 7 is also referenced as the pre-symbol determination table during the pre-symbol determination process. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 transmit a value from "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol as a result of the pre-symbol determination, along with a value indicating whether it is the first or second win/fail lottery and the number of reserved symbols, to the performance determination means 303. Furthermore, the pre-symbol determination table may be further subdivided to enable more complex determinations, or a simplified table combining the determination ranges of winning symbols that execute similar special games may be used. Also, in cases where the symbol is uniformly determined upon a loss, as in this embodiment, a specific symbol may be determined without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value or without preparing a separate symbol determination table for losses.

<First variation pattern determination means 231 and second variation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to Figure 4, the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines a variation pattern from among multiple variation patterns based on a first pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the first special pattern display unit 41 and the performance display device 60. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern from among multiple variation patterns based on a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the second special pattern display unit 42 and the performance display device 60. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each refer to the variation pattern table when starting a pattern variation to determine the variation pattern of that pattern variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a pre-pattern determination to determine which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 each maintain or share a variation pattern table that is referenced to determine the variation pattern when the variation start condition is met, and a pre-pattern determination table that is used to generate information for determining the execution of the pre-reading process when a ball enters the start opening. The variation pattern has a defined variation time from the start to the stop of the variation when the special symbol is displayed in a variation, and the variation time varies in length depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, a variation display time is essentially defined for each pattern as the termination condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the special symbol stops when that variation display time has elapsed. The variation pattern determination performed when starting the symbol variation is also referred to as the "main determination variation pattern determination" as appropriate, in order to distinguish it from the pre-pattern determination. In addition, in order to assist in the selection of the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbol described later, it may be defined as a variation pattern of different types even though the variation time is the same.

Figure 8 schematically shows the variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table in Figure (a) under normal conditions, and to the table in Figure (b) under time-saving conditions.

As shown in Figure 8(a), if the hit/fail judgment result is a miss in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1," a super reach from pattern range number "0," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2," a super reach from pattern range number "1," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, "Normal 1," a normal reach from pattern range number "2," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, "Normal 2," a normal reach from pattern range number "3," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "No Reach Miss," from pattern range number "4," is selected. For "No Reach Miss," different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reserved balls: a 10-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, a 7-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 4.

This diagram illustrates an example where the fluctuations are mainly classified into five types based on their fluctuation time. However, the sub-board 300 provides multiple fluctuation animation patterns for each of these fluctuation patterns, meaning that a total of several dozen fluctuation animation patterns are associated with the respective lottery value ranges for each classification.

The range of pattern selection values assigned to "Normal 1," "Normal 2," and "No Reach, Miss" also differs depending on the number of reserved balls. When the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the range is as shown in Figure (a). However, as the number of reserved balls increases, the range of selection values for "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" narrows, while the range of selection value for "No Reach, Miss" widens. The fewer the number of reserved balls, the wider the range of selection values for variation patterns with relatively longer variation times, increasing the probability of selecting variation patterns with longer variation times. Therefore, the average variation time increases with fewer reserved balls and decreases with more reserved balls. By using a variation pattern table where the correspondence between pattern selection value ranges and variation patterns differs for each number of reserved balls, it is possible to implement control that makes it easier to select variation patterns with longer variation times when the number of reserved balls decreases.

In the normal state, if the win/loss result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is between 0 and 123, "Super 1," a super reach from pattern range number "5," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 124 and 248, "Super 2," a super reach from pattern range number "6," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 249 and 252, "Normal 1," a normal reach from pattern range number "7," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 253 and 255, "Normal 2," a normal reach from pattern range number "8," is selected.

In the normal state, if the win/loss judgment result is a 2R jackpot or minor win, if the pattern lottery value is between 0 and 122, the "Super 3" super reach from pattern range number "9" is selected; if the pattern lottery value is between 123 and 255, the "Normal 3" normal reach from pattern range number "10" is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result as a so-called look-ahead result to the performance determination means 303, they transmit the pattern range number value (0 to 10) along with a value indicating whether it is the first or second win/fail lottery and the number of pending items. In the embodiment shown in Figure 8, a table is exemplified for each win/fail judgment result in the pre-pattern determination. However, regardless of the win/fail lottery result, a single pre-pattern determination table may be used to derive only information regarding the approximate range of the random value, and the control means on the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation will be executed along with the pre-win/fail judgment result.

In the time-saving state, the variation pattern table in Figure 8(b) is referenced, and all variation patterns for time-saving are assigned pattern lottery values. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern lottery values and variation time is the same as in Figure 8(a), except for "No-Reach Loss Shortening," which is selected when a loss occurs. "No-Reach Loss Shortening" is a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time that corresponds to the same lottery value range and pattern range number as "No-Reach Loss" in Figure 8(a). "No-Reach Loss Shortening" also selects different variation patterns depending on the number of reserved balls; a 10-second variation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, and a 1-second variation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or they may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more favorable than the first lottery, and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first, a situation where the reserves for the second lottery run out despite the easy ball entry state due to the time reduction, resulting in the first lottery being executed repeatedly, is undesirable for the player. Therefore, in the case of a losing variation in the first lottery during the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to refer to a variation pattern table that uniformly selects a variation pattern with a long duration (e.g., 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time, regardless of the number of reserves.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to Figure 4, the hold control means 240 includes a special symbol hold means 241 and a regular symbol hold means 242. When a new first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is acquired, if a symbol variation corresponding to the previously acquired first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is displayed, the special symbol hold means 241 holds the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value and stores that win/fail lottery value until the start of the corresponding symbol variation display. Here, for the first special symbol, the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value and the first pattern lottery value are stored, up to a maximum of four each. For the second special symbol, the second win/fail lottery value, the second symbol lottery value and the second pattern lottery value are stored, up to a maximum of four each. The regular symbol hold means 242 stores the regular symbol lottery value acquired by the regular symbol lottery means 213 as a hold ball. These reserved numbers are represented by the number of lights or flashes on the first special feature reserved display unit 71, the second special feature reserved display unit 72, and the general feature reserved display unit 75, respectively. The number of reserved numbers by the special feature reserved means 241 is also displayed on the performance display device 60.

The lottery value for the second win/loss lottery, held in the special symbol holding means 241, is processed preferentially over the lottery value for the first win/loss lottery, and the symbol changes are displayed accordingly. Therefore, even if a winning lottery value is held for the first win/loss lottery, as long as there is a lottery value held for the second win/loss lottery, the symbol changes corresponding to the winning lottery value of the first win/loss lottery will not be displayed. Consequently, even if a winning lottery value is held for the first win/loss lottery, continuing to play until another winning lottery value is held for the second win/loss lottery may result in multiple consecutive wins.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a general symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined in accordance with the judgment result of the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211. The first special symbol control means 251 uses the completion of the display of the variation of the symbols corresponding to the previously performed first win/fail lottery or second win/fail lottery as the starting condition for a new symbol variation. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined in accordance with the judgment result of the second win/fail lottery by the second lottery means 212. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the completion of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first or second win/fail lottery that was performed earlier as the start condition for a new symbol variation.

The first special symbol control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery if the win/fail lottery value for the second win/fail lottery is stored by the special symbol holding means 241. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery regardless of whether the win/fail lottery value for the first win/fail lottery is stored by the special symbol holding means 241. As a result, if lottery values are held for both the first and second win/fail lotteries, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such cases, the lottery value held for the first win/fail lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of held values for the second win/fail lottery becomes zero.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 transmit a variation start command and a variation stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) via the command communication means 205, described later, at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 starts and stops. When transmitting a variation start command, values indicating the hit/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern determined as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating whether it is the first hit/fail lottery or the second hit/fail lottery, are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation start command. When transmitting a variation stop command, a value indicating the stopped symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits variation start commands, variation stop commands, etc. to the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) in order to control the variation display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable display controlled by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub), maintaining their interlock. The regular symbol control means 254 displays the result of the lottery conducted by the regular symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 45.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjustment means 276 keeps the display of the other special symbol 52 on hold while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed. Regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, the special symbol adjustment means 276 prioritizes the display of the second special symbol 52 based on the ball entering the second start opening 12 over the display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first start opening 11. For example, when both the first and second win/loss lottery values are pending, the second win/loss lottery value is always prioritized, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed.

In the modified example, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may selectively change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 according to the order in which the balls enter the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. For example, when the balls enter in the order of first start port 11, first start port 11, and second start port 12, the special symbols will be displayed in the order of first special symbol 51, first special symbol 51, and second special symbol 52. In this case, the special symbol adjustment means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the win/loss lottery values. Since which special symbol should change is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, i.e., the hold order of the win/loss lottery values in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modified example, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined order, regardless of the order in which the balls enter the machine. For example, priority may be given to displaying the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 alternately. For instance, when both the first and second win/loss lottery values are pending, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Since which special symbol should fluctuate simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls enter the machine, the player can easily grasp the order of fluctuations intuitively.

The special symbol adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the variation display of the other special symbol when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 stops in a winning state. In this case, since the variation display of the special symbols does not start while the special game is being played, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Pre-determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 pre-determines information regarding the variation of the first special symbol before the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol control means 251 begins, using various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216, before the execution of various determinations by the first win/fail determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 pre-determines information regarding the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 before the execution of various determinations by the second win/fail determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232, using various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217, before the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 begins.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 maintains a first pre-win/fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first win/fail lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. These determination results are then temporarily stored as pre-determination results, and information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later.

Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the pre-win/failure determination table referenced in the pre-win/failure determination. The first lottery pre-win/failure determination means 236 (pre-win/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first pre-win/failure lottery value determination table in Figure 9(a) when a ball enters the first start opening 11, and sets the value "1" to indicate that if the win/failure lottery value is "0 to 299", as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "300 to 2999", sets the value "2" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "3000 to 56499", sets the value "3" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "56500 to 65535", sets the value "4" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. Next, refer to the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) and set the value "0" as the pre-symbol determination result if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99". If the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", set the value "1" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", set the value "2" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", set the value "3" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", set the value "4" as the pre-symbol determination result. Furthermore, refer to the first pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown) and set the value "A" as the pre-pattern determination result if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9". If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. The pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/loss determination for the first game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later, in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating ball entry into the first start opening 11 (indicating the first win/loss lottery), information indicating the number of held balls, etc.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/loss determination for the second game) refers to the second pre-win/loss lottery value determination table in Figure 9(b) when a ball enters the second start opening 12. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 299", it sets the value "1" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2999", it sets the value "2" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "3000 to 63999", it sets the value "3" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "64000 to 65535", it sets the value "4" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. Next, it refers to the second pre-symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), and if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", it sets the value "0" to indicate this as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value "2" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value "3" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value "4" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value "A" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-determination of win/loss regarding the second game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later, in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating ball entry into the second start opening 12 (indicating that it is the second win/loss lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

Furthermore, the various pieces of information temporarily stored as pre-determination results by the pre-determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area, with a maximum of four items each, similar to the number of reserved items. Alternatively, the pre-determination results may be stored using the reserved storage area stored by the reserved control means 240. The information may also be erased based on the transmission of the pre-determination results by the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas or erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Also, instead of providing a separate table for pre-determination, a judgment table for this judgment may be used, and a pre-determination table may be shared in part or entirely between the pre-win/loss judgment for the first game and the pre-determination for the second game. In this way, by sharing with other judgment tables, a reduction in data capacity in the main board 200 can be expected. Furthermore, the content transmitted as the result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, by transmitting only the result of whether the result is correct or incorrect. Alternatively, the system may be configured to transmit the random numbers obtained by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205, without performing a determination by the pre-determination means 235, and for the sub-board 300 to determine the content of the pre-determination.

The pre-determination means 235 may refer to a pre-win/loss lottery value determination table where the correspondence between the win/loss lottery value and the pre-win/loss determination result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the win/loss determination table described above, multiple types of pre-win/loss lottery value determination tables corresponding to multiple game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/loss lottery value determination table referenced may be switched according to the setting value of the game setting. Alternatively, a pre-win/loss lottery value determination table that can be used in common across multiple game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be determined in advance based on the combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/loss determination result.

Figure 10 schematically shows a pre-win/loss determination table corresponding to the game settings. Figure (a) is the pre-win/loss determination table referenced by the first pre-win/loss determination means 236, and Figure (b) is the pre-win/loss determination table referenced by the second pre-win/loss determination means 237. When the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the pre-win/loss determination result is "11", indicating that a jackpot will be won in all settings 1 to 6. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the pre-win/loss determination result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 2 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the pre-win/loss determination result is "13", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 3 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the pre-win/loss determination result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 4 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. If the winning/losing lottery value is "298", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "15", indicating a jackpot in normal mode with setting 5 or higher, or in all settings during the bonus round. If the winning/losing lottery value is "299", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "16", indicating a jackpot in normal mode with setting 6, or in all settings during the bonus round. Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "21", indicating a jackpot in all settings during the bonus round. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "22", indicating a jackpot in the bonus round with setting 2 or higher. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating a jackpot in the bonus round with setting 3 or higher. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating that a jackpot will occur in settings 4 or higher during the probability variation mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "25", indicating that a jackpot will occur in settings 5 or higher during the probability variation mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "26", indicating that a jackpot will occur in setting 6 during the probability variation mode. Furthermore, if the first winning/losing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second winning/losing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "30", indicating that a minor win will occur in all settings. Furthermore, if the first win/loss lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and if the second win/loss lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the pre-win/loss judgment result will be "40", indicating a loss for all settings. By using such a pre-win/loss judgment table, it is possible to show the appropriate pre-win/loss judgment result for each setting value of the game.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260, when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game, determines that the conditions for activating the special game have been met when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined jackpot configuration, and executes the special game by opening the jackpot opening 20. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second win/fail lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a transition to a special game, determines that the conditions for activating the special game have been met when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined jackpot configuration, and executes the special game by opening the jackpot opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the large prize slot 20 is continued multiple times in a row, and is composed of multiple unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot which repeats the unit game 10 times, a 4R jackpot which repeats the unit game 4 times, and a 2R jackpot which repeats a unit game with a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot only twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second win/loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first win/loss lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the large prize slot 20 is kept open for approximately 30 seconds in a single unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the large prize slot 20 is kept open for only approximately 1.6 seconds in a single unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game has been consumed. Furthermore, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are met, the large prize slot 20 may be opened in the same manner as for a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot.

<Small win game control means 265>
The minor win game control means 265 determines that the minor win game activation condition has been met when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a minor win and the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined minor win pattern, and executes the minor win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the big prize opening 20. Similarly, the minor win game control means 265 determines that the minor win game activation condition has been met when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a minor win and the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined minor win pattern, and executes the minor win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the big prize opening 20.

In a minor win game, one unit game is executed, and the large prize slot 20 is opened and closed twice during each unit game. The minor win game control means 265 opens the large prize slot 20 for approximately 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, then closes the large prize slot 20 to end the minor win game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls normal gameplay in the probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state. If the special symbol is a symbol of a specific jackpot that leads to a transition to probability variation, the specific game control means 270 transitions the game state to the probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state after the special game ends. The probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time reduction state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select variation patterns with short variation times so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. However, in the normal state, the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of winning/losing lottery values held by the hold control means 240 is referred to, and the fewer the number of holds by the hold control means 240, the more likely it is that variation patterns with long variation times will appear. In the easy ball entry state, at least one of three functions is implemented: probability variation for normal symbols, time reduction for normal symbols, and extension of the opening of the second start opening 12, thereby improving the frequency of balls entering the second start opening 12 (ease of ball entry). During the probability variation state, the probability of the win/loss determination result by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 being a jackpot remains at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 extends the opening of the second start opening 12 when a specific jackpot is achieved, and only if the win/loss lottery is the second win/loss lottery, it further shifts the probability of winning the opening lottery to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal probability state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening and closing of the ordinary electric mechanism 90 and the large prize opening 20 of the second start opening 12. When the ordinary symbols stop in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric mechanism solenoid 91, causing the ordinary electric mechanism 90 of the second start opening 12 to open. In the normal state, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the second start opening 12 with a short or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery, and in the easy ball entry state, it opens the second start opening 12 with a long opening time. This increases the ease of ball entry into the second start opening 12, allowing players to continue playing without reducing their ball count. In special games, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large prize opening solenoid 92, causing the large prize opening 20 to open.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after an outage. The main power outage processing execution means 282 executes abnormality response processing, such as power outage processing, on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power outage occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing on the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Means for changing settings 286, means for confirming settings 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" to change the game settings. When the setting key cylinder 171 is ON and the power switch 150 is turned ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed, the setting change means 286 transitions to the setting change state described above. When the setting change state is entered, the setting change means 286 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173. The setting change means 286 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 sequentially in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→... in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as displayed on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned OFF, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 performs a "setting confirmation process" to confirm the game settings. If the setting key cylinder 171 is ON and the RAM clear switch is not pressed, the setting confirmation means 287 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above. When the setting confirmation state is reached, the setting confirmation means 287 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173, nor does it update the setting value stored in the setting memory, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned OFF, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Furthermore, the setting value data managed in the setting memory may use numbers from "0" to "5" instead of the numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" may correspond to setting 1, setting value "1" to setting 2, setting value "2" to setting 3, setting value "3" to setting 4, setting value "4" to setting 5, and setting value "5" to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value for the setting value data, when a RAM error occurs and the RAM is cleared to reset the setting value data to the initial value "0", the system will no longer detect an error, thus simplifying the RAM clearing process in case of an error. In addition, when performing some kind of lottery using the setting value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each setting value in a pre-fetch process, there is the advantage of simplifying the offset processing for that selection. For example, when using "1" to "6" as the setting value data, additional processing such as subtracting 1 from the starting address is required when using these values as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used directly as the offset data. Furthermore, when using numerical values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 may either display the numerical value of the setting value data directly on the setting display unit 173, or they may display a value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data from "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, making the display easier for the administrator of the gaming machine to understand.

<Command transmission method>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payouts, etc., to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command transmission means 207 that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control, etc., to the sub-board 300. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command that instructs the payout of a number of prize balls corresponding to each prize slot based on the ball entry determination means 201's determination of ball entry into each prize slot, and transmits a command indicating the status of an error that occurred on the main board 200. When a symbol change is started, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the performance determination means 303 along with the control command for the symbol change.

The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits a variation start command and a variation stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. When transmitting a variation start command, values indicating the hit/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern determined as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating whether it is the first hit/fail lottery or the second hit/fail lottery, are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation start command. When transmitting a variation stop command, a value indicating the stopped symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation stop command. Furthermore, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits variation start commands, variation stop commands, etc. to the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) in order to control the variation display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the fluctuation displays by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and their coordination is maintained. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result from the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303. The pre-determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer and then transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with information on the type of winning slot (first starting slot 11, second starting slot 12) corresponding to the lottery, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc., regardless of whether the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to that lottery starts immediately or not. It is then deleted from the transmission buffer or later overwritten. As a result, the sub-board 300 can predict the outcome of the symbol fluctuation before it is its turn to start, based on the received pre-determination result, a process known as "prediction." The processing performed by the sub-board 300 based on the pre-determination information will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding special games by the special game control means 260, information regarding minor win games by the minor win game control means 265, information regarding the lottery results by the general drawing lottery means 213, and setting value information for game settings set by the setting change means 286. Furthermore, the sub-control command transmission means 207 appropriately transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding initial processing by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detection means 284, information regarding errors, and information regarding various controls on the main board 200, or various signals transmitted to the main board 200.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a pattern determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub-initial processing execution means 360, a sub-power-off processing execution means 362, a sub-error detection means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side pre-determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 stores multiple performance patterns, each containing a defined image content and display process for the decorative symbol 61 during its variation. These performance patterns include multiple variation performance patterns, each defining the variation process and performance process from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, as well as multiple preview performance patterns, which are displayed separately from the variation display of the decorative symbol and preemptively suggest the high probability of a jackpot before the variation display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determination means 371 holds the pre-determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 includes a normal performance determination means 373 and a pre-read performance determination means 374. The normal performance determination means 373 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., by the performance control means 304, according to the information of the first win/failure lottery judgment result or the second win/failure lottery judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 determines the performance content according to the game setting value transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-read performance determination means 374 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., by the performance control means 304, according to the pre-determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The normal performance determination means 373 selects one of a plurality of variation performance patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205, and reads it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determination means 373 sends the information of the read variation performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referenced in order to select a variation performance pattern. In addition, the normal performance determination means 373 may determine the variation performance pattern by referring to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, or it may determine the variation performance pattern in conjunction with the content of the pre-read performance by the pre-read performance determination means 374. The pre-read performance determination means 374 more accurately identifies the result of the main determination based on the pre-determination result from the command communication means 205 and past pre-determination results and game state information held in the sub-board 300, and based on the identified result, it decides whether or not to execute the pre-read performance before the main determination, and what the content of the execution is. Specifically, the pre-announcement effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in a probability variation game, and then determines whether to transition to a normal game state based on pre-announcement results prior to the currently received pre-announcement result. Based on this determination, it identifies the success or failure of the main determination related to the currently received pre-announcement result, the selected variation pattern, etc., and then determines whether a pre-announcement effect can be executed and the content of the pre-announcement effect based on these identified results. Note that since the effect determination means 303 largely cooperates with the normal effect determination means 373 and the pre-announcement effect determination means 374, it will be described as an effect determination means 303 encompassing both, except for particularly necessary parts.

Each variation animation pattern has a defined variation time as a condition for ending the pattern's variation, and the pattern variation stops when that time has elapsed. The animation determination means 303 selects a variation animation pattern of an animation image with a variation time equal to that of the special symbol variation pattern.

The pattern configuration determination means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 61 according to the result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbols of the special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbols. The pattern configuration determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the performance control means 304. The pattern configuration determination means 301 maintains a pattern range table to be referenced in determining the stop symbols of the decorative symbols.

The stopping symbols of the decorative symbols 61 are formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, if the win/failure determination result by the first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, a specific combination, such as "777" or "111," in which three symbols are aligned, is selected. If the win/failure determination result is a 2R jackpot or a minor win, a specific combination, such as "357," is also selected, but these specific combinations do not necessarily have to be combinations in which three symbols are aligned. If the win/failure determination result is neither a jackpot nor a minor win, a combination in which three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" or "946," and which does not correspond to the specific combinations selected in the case of a 2R jackpot or a minor win, is selected. If the result of the win/loss judgment is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with a near-miss is selected, then a combination with one missing symbol, such as "191" or "727," will be selected.

The decorative symbol variation animation patterns define the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed, that is, the animation process from the start to the stop of the variation. These variation animation patterns include patterns for displaying normal losing symbols, patterns for displaying losing symbols after a near-win state (where one more symbol is needed to win), and patterns for displaying winning symbols after a near-win state. In particular, patterns involving a near-win state include patterns with varying variation times. Each variation animation pattern has a defined variation time as a termination condition for its variation, and the variation stops when that time has elapsed. The animation determination means 303 selects a decorative symbol variation animation pattern with a variation time equal to that of the special symbol, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time-saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a time-saving pattern, the performance determination means 303 selects a variation performance pattern with a predetermined time-saving performance content. The time-saving performance content is a performance that outputs background images and sounds that give the impression to the player that they are in a favorable state due to the time-saving or probability-changing state.

The pre-announcement animation patterns include patterns that temporarily display images, animations, or videos of specific characters or motifs on the screen, patterns that activate mechanical parts, and patterns that output specific sounds. These pre-announcement animation patterns are executed in parallel with the reel spinning, and they preemptively suggest that the reel spinning is likely to stop in a winning pattern. For example, there are standard pre-announcement animations that simply display a single character image on the screen, and group pre-announcement animations that display a group of characters passing from one end of the screen to the other. Furthermore, there are step-up pre-announcement animations that divide the display process into multiple stages, with the number of stages varying, so that a higher number of stages indicates a higher probability of a win.

There are two types of pre-announcement patterns: one that executes after the decorative symbols 61 have entered a "reach" state, foreshadowing the final stopping position of the symbols (post-reach announcement); and another that executes before any of the decorative symbols 61 have stopped, simultaneously announcing that the game will enter a "reach" state (pre-reach announcement).

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance on the performance display device 60 based on the result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-determination result, using a predetermined pre-announcement lottery, and sets the pre-announcement performance, as well as determining the pre-announcement performance pattern to be displayed. The performance determination means 303 maintains a pre-announcement determination table to be referenced to determine whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance, and a pre-announcement type table to be referenced when selecting the type of pre-announcement performance pattern. The pre-announcement determination table is configured so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-determination result. The correspondence between the win/fail lottery result and whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance is defined such that the pre-announcement performance is displayed with a higher probability when the win/fail lottery result is a win than when it is a loss. This allows the display of a pre-announcement performance itself to suggest a high expectation of a big win.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a performance image including the decorative symbols 61 in a variable manner according to the selected variable performance pattern data. The performance control means 304 uses the receipt of a command to start the variation of the decorative symbols 61 as the condition for starting the variation display of a new decorative symbol. If the performance determination means 303 determines that a pre-announcement performance should be displayed, the performance control means 304 displays a pre-announcement performance according to the selected pre-announcement performance pattern on the performance display device 60, superimposed on the variation of the symbols.

The performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery if the win/fail lottery value for the second win/fail lottery is stored, and starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery regardless of whether the win/fail lottery value for the first win/fail lottery is stored or not. As a result, if lottery values are reserved for both the first and second win/fail lotteries, the reserved lottery value from the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out, and the variation of the decorative symbols is displayed. In such cases, the reserved lottery value from the first win/fail lottery is not read out, and the variation of those decorative symbols does not start until the number of reserved values for the second win/fail lottery becomes zero. In this way, the performance control means 304 causes the symbol variation performance, including the variation of the decorative symbols 61, to be displayed on the performance display device 60.

The performance control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamps 111 and the operation of the movable parts 66. The performance control means 304 includes a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The performance display control means 305 controls the display on the performance display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamps 111.

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the display device 60 must display an image indicating that the symbols are changing. Normally, a standard-sized decorative symbol 61 of a certain size is displayed during variation. However, a special effect, where the main effect is something other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61, may be displayed in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the variation of the standard-sized decorative symbol 61. In this case, the player is informed that the symbols are changing by displaying a substitute symbol, which is a smaller decorative symbol than the standard-sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a standard-sized decorative symbol. However, to distinguish it from the substitute symbol, the standard-sized decorative symbol may also be called a "standard decorative symbol" or "main decorative symbol."

Alternative symbols are displayed while the visibility of the regular decorative symbols is impaired, for example, when the regular decorative symbols are not displayed. Alternative symbols are a form of decorative symbol used to visually suggest the outcome of the win/loss judgment. They have a simplified (in other words, simplified, streamlined) display form compared to regular decorative symbols and are displayed through a simplified variation process. Alternative symbols have an external display form corresponding to the part of the regular decorative symbol that indicates the symbol type, for example, a display form representing numbers, letters, or symbols indicating the symbol type. Furthermore, alternative symbols are displayed in a narrower area than the area where the regular decorative symbols are displayed, and are typically displayed in a position that does not easily interfere with the main performance by elements other than the symbols, for example, in the corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. Alternative symbols are displayed relatively smaller than regular decorative symbols, but have a display form that at least allows the symbol type to be visually identified. Note that alternative symbols may be simply scaled-down versions of regular decorative symbols, and may be identical to regular decorative symbols except for size.

Multiple substitute symbols displayed in place of multiple regular decorative symbols suggest a high probability of a favorable outcome for the player in the win/loss lottery, depending on the combination of stopping patterns at the end of the spin. For example, multiple substitute symbols suggest a high probability of a win in that spin when two of the three substitute symbols form a "reach" state. Alternatively, the left and right symbols forming a reach state may be specific symbols that suggest a relatively high probability, such as "3" or "7," or symbols that suggest a relatively low probability, such as "1" or "2," to indicate the level of expectation in that reach state. Note that substitute symbols do not appear to be in a definitive stop state, but rather in a temporary stop state where slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbols, a regular decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the substitute symbols, and that regular decorative symbol may be displayed in a definitive stop state. Furthermore, regular decorative symbols and substitute symbols do not need to be displayed exclusively; there may be an overlap in their display periods. Furthermore, during certain performances where the visibility of the normal decorative symbols is impaired, the display of the normal decorative symbols may be continued while the display of the alternative symbols is shown. Unlike the alternative symbols, during the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, a simplified symbol may be displayed in a predetermined area of the performance display device 60, using an image of the same size as or smaller than the alternative symbol, to indicate that the special symbols are changing. The simplified symbol may consist of a variation display of a combination of three symbols, similar to the normal decorative symbols, or it may consist of a variation display of a single symbol, or it may consist of a sequence of simple symbols ("○", "×", etc.). The simplified symbol may not be related to the variation display patterns of the normal decorative symbols or the alternative symbols, and may display a constant variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbols, and when it stops, it may display a display related to the stop display pattern of the normal decorative symbols. The simplified symbols only need to indicate that the special symbols are currently changing and to at least notify the result of the special symbols; they can be changed as appropriate, such as by displaying a combination of two symbols. The simplified symbols may also be called "simplified decorative symbols," "sub-decorative symbols," "sub-decoration diagrams," "mini decorative symbols," or "mini-decoration diagrams." Separately from the performance display device 60, a fourth decorative symbol, which displays a similar information to the simplified symbols using the light emission patterns of LEDs, may also be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display of special symbol changes, display of results) in cases such as when the performance display device 60 malfunctions. As an example of the display patterns for the fourth symbol, the LEDs may sequentially light up (including flashing and turning off) in "white," "blue," "green," "yellow," "orange," and "red" to indicate the change, or they may flash in a single color depending on the type of special symbol to indicate the change, and the color of the light emission when stopped may indicate whether it is a miss or a win.

The timing means 307 is a timing circuit that outputs time information used for gameplay. The timing means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time since power-on using a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit with a built-in battery that can continue measuring the date and time even when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off or during a power outage may also be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, slight differences in time may occur between game machines due to individual differences or time drift, whereas with a timer circuit, as long as the power is turned on simultaneously, the possibility of time differences occurring between multiple game machines is small.

The performance determination means 303 executes a synchronized performance that begins at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the timing means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized performance is a performance displayed on the performance display device 60 during a synchronized performance period, which is substantially asynchronous to the pattern variation period and game state. The synchronized performance period lasts for several minutes, longer than the duration of one pattern variation, and can encompass multiple pattern variation periods. The performance pattern for the synchronized performance is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the performance pattern specifies the playback of a predetermined song and video. Multiple types of synchronized performance patterns are available, and different types of performance patterns may be selected depending on the date, time, month, day of the week, and time of day.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether it is during normal gameplay or special gameplay. Here, "normal gameplay" includes the period when the so-called standby demo screen is displayed. Specifically, "normal gameplay" includes (1) "normal gameplay with changing symbols displayed," (2) "normal gameplay with stopped changing symbols," where neither the symbols are changing nor the standby demo screen is displayed, and (3) "normal gameplay with the standby demo screen displayed," where neither the symbols are changing nor the standby demo screen is displayed. The synchronization effect can be executed during any of periods (1) to (3), but in periods (2) and (3), the output method for controlling volume reduction, brightness reduction, etc., in the synchronization effect may differ from that in period (1). Furthermore, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile phone linkage system (described later) by operating the effect button 109 or the directional pad 110. When such input is received, the video and audio output of the synchronization effect is suppressed, and screen displays such as effect customization via the mobile phone linkage system take priority.

Synchronized performance is a performance that, for example, plays a predetermined song or video at a predetermined time (referred to as the "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance may be the time reached after a predetermined time interval from the power-on of the pachinko game machine 100, or it may be every hour or half on the hour based on standard time. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may differ, such as one hour later first, then three hours later, or the interval may differ depending on the date or day of the week. It may also be a variable setting that allows the time to be specified by the staff of each game store. However, it is pre-set so that the same synchronized performance is executed at least at the same time among multiple identical machines installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the time reached after a predetermined time interval from the power-on, the game store powers on multiple machines simultaneously. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronized performance is executed simultaneously on all of those machines. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if multiple devices were synchronized, and the simultaneous playback of the same music and video creates a synergistic effect that creates a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie screening were taking place on the spot.

The synchronized performance function is also built into other gaming machines of the same model, and multiple gaming machines on the same gaming island are powered on simultaneously by the arcade staff every day. As a result, all multiple gaming machines powered on simultaneously will reach the synchronized performance start time almost simultaneously, allowing them to execute the synchronized performance at the same time. This is called multi-machine synchronized performance. In this case, not only are the video displays synchronized across multiple machines, but the sound effects and background music are also synchronized across multiple machines. The more machines that are synchronized, the greater the synergistic effect from executing the performance simultaneously.

The performance setting means 308 stores the player's game history. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of performance results. The history of game results is the game results that lead to the payout the player receives as a result of playing, such as the number of balls hit, the number of prize balls, the number of big wins, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of performance results is different from the benefits of playing the game, and is information such as performance scores that are recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance or the right to make certain types of performances appear more frequently. For example, in order to score the number of times a predetermined performance appears or the results of a mini-game and award it to the player, encoded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of their mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained through decoded data is stored on the player's mobile terminal. The system for linking the gaming machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The points mentioned here are necessary to expand the range of customization options for the game's presentation, as described later. The system is designed so that the number of customizable items increases as the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, or every 100 points reached).

The performance setting means 308 stores settings for which of several types of performance content to select as a performance customization, based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, as performance patterns to be displayed during special gameplay, multiple types of performance patterns with different displayed motifs, characters, and music are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is asked to select which performance to display. Alternatively, as design elements for the decorative symbols that change the symbols, multiple types of motifs or character images are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is asked to select which image to display. In these cases, the performance setting means 308 stores the selection when the player operates the performance button 109 or the directional keys 110 during the display of the standby demo screen and selects a performance pattern through that operation. The performance determination means 303 selects the type of performance pattern during special gameplay according to the settings stored by the performance setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after an interruption. The sub-power interruption processing execution means 362 executes abnormality response processing, such as power interruption processing, on the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power interruption, the sub-power interruption processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as part of the power interruption processing.

Figure 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating the outline of the mobile-linked system. As a prerequisite for the mobile-linked system, players register as users in advance by setting an account and password on a dedicated site, the game history server 358, using their mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 on the screen of the performance display device 60, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358. The player then reads this code with the camera on their mobile terminal to access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. From that dedicated site, character information (also called "password information") encoding the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the mobile terminal's screen. The performance display control means 305 displays a password information input screen on the performance display device 60, and the player inputs it via button operations such as the directional keys 110. The input password information is decrypted by the performance setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and performance score history, allowing the player's previous gameplay and performance score status to be carried over. Entering this password information signals the start of recording the player's game history and the start of performance customization by selecting various performance elements. Subsequently, in the pachinko machine 100, as the game and performances progress, the performance setting means 308 continuously adds points awarded to the player as performance benefits, accumulating them as a performance score history. The player can also customize the performance at any time, selecting and setting their preferred elements as various performance elements. Performance points are awarded primarily with each symbol change, with higher points awarded for performance types that have a higher probability of transitioning to a special game, and high points are also awarded when transitioning to a special game.

As a feature for customizing the game's presentation, players can use a portion of their accumulated points to change the presentation elements such as color, background, shape, characters, and music that make up the presentation content displayed on the presentation display device 60, according to the number of points used. The presentation setting means 308 receives instructions from the player to change presentation elements via button operation and changes various presentation elements according to those instructions. For each customizable presentation element, multiple types of items are available, and different values are set for the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or players are given an opportunity to increase the number of customizable items. When the player operates a button to signal the end of the game or presentation customization, the presentation setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as presentation benefits and presentation score history, and the presentation display control means 305 displays this on the presentation display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of their mobile terminal, and by decoding the read two-dimensional code 352, they can acquire the information and store it on their mobile terminal 354. Furthermore, this information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358, which has a dedicated website, via the network 356, and is managed in conjunction with the user's account information. In this way, information such as performance bonuses and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and managed by the game history server 358, allowing the user to carry over the game and performance details to the next game. Also, by continuing to play for a longer period, the number of symbol changes and performances increases, allowing the user to earn points.

Figure 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as the main CPU 290, main RAM 291, and main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores the main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Ball entry signals from each ball entry point and payout signals from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each prize entry point solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). Furthermore, the main CPU 290 transmits commands necessary for performance control to the sub-board 300, along with information such as the results of the win/loss lottery, the result of the symbol selection, and the result of the variation pattern selection. Signals are transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 via one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 consists of two bytes: a one-byte instruction type data, known as MODE data, and a one-byte instruction content data, known as EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one instruction by associating the instruction type data and instruction content data and transmitting them to the sub-board 300. The instruction type data is a bit sequence indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type during the development phase. The instruction content data is a bit sequence indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of both the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data; a value of 1 indicates instruction type data, and a value of 0 indicates instruction content data.

The communication between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is designed to transmit one byte of data per transmission. Therefore, to transmit two bytes of command data, two separate transmissions of one byte each are required. The first transmission sends the upper byte, the MODE data, and the second transmission sends the lower byte, the EVENT data. To account for the possibility of communication failure due to noise or other factors, the main board 200 transmits the same data repeatedly. The sub-board 300 confirms the completion of data transmission when it has read the same data twice consecutively. The main board 200 continues to transmit the same data repeatedly until it has been read twice consecutively, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, and performance control device 313. The sub-ROM 312 is one of the data storage means that holds a sub-control program, which includes performance pattern data defining the performance process and display pattern data defining the performance display process. The sub-control program, including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data, is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and the performance control based on this sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as performance buttons 109 are acquired by the sub-CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). According to the performance pattern data, the sub-CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, and movable mechanism 66 using the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) to control performances through display output, sound output, lamp lighting, and mechanism operation. The sub-CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to the performance control device 313. In this embodiment, an example is described in which the sub-board 300 contains the performance control device 313. However, the sub-board 300 and the performance control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a single board; they may be formed as separate boards connected to each other.

Figure 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, display control circuit 326, and audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of the data storage means that holds material data such as performance image data and motion data used for performance display, and audio data used for audio output, in a data-compressed state. Performance image data are images used for fluctuation display and performance display as performance objects indicating the results of the win/loss lottery, etc., such as sprite images of decorative symbols used for decorative symbol fluctuations, sprite images used for予告 (preview) effects, and video images used for various effects. Motion data is data that defines the actions to be added to images used for various effects at predetermined timings. Audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character dialogue output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310, the specified performance image data and motion data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the performance display using that performance image data and motion data is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, performance image data, and motion data related to the performance display are sent from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are sent from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio output control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this diagram comprehensively represents buses such as the system bus, data bus, and address bus.

The performance image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data from this data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 332, and also as a work area when drawing and image processing are performed by the drawing circuit 336.

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate display images, and stores these generated display images as frames of a moving image in the frame buffer 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores frames of the moving image to be output to the display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the display device 60 in the form of video signals, in the order they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames. While the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from one frame's memory area, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image and stores it in the other frame's memory area.

The data ROM 324 stores "detailed display pattern data" that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326. In this case, the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310 can be described as "outline display pattern data" that defines the general outline of the performance display process. For example, the outline display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of performance display processes, such as the start and stop timings of the decorative pattern's variation, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the start and stop timings of playback. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data defines the finer display control processes, such as the display order of sprite images for realizing the variation of the decorative pattern, and the frame-by-frame display processing order for displaying moving images based on motion data.

When the performance control device 313 performs display control based on the "outline display pattern data" sent from the sub-CPU 310, it reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for that processing from the data ROM 324 and executes the display processing using both display pattern data. Therefore, it can be said that the performance control device 313 executes display control processing based on display pattern data that includes "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". Thus, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "outline display pattern data" stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished and are simply referred to as "display pattern data". For example, when the performance control means performs a specific process based on display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and display pattern data that serves both purposes may be held in the sub-ROM 312 or the data ROM 324.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modified example, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. Furthermore, the processing described as being performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the performance control device 313 may perform the processing described as being performed by the decoder 332, drawing circuit 336, and display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Also, the control RAM 322 included in the performance control device 313 may also function as a drawing memory 334 or a frame buffer 338. Furthermore, the hardware configuration may not include a display control circuit 326 in the performance control device 313. In this case, the processing that would normally be performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, and a performance control device 313. In a modified example, the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, ROM 312, and performance control device 313 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing described as being performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312. For example, the sub-CPU 310 may perform the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub-RAM 311 may also perform the function of the control RAM 322, or the sub-ROM 312 may also perform the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 may not include the performance control device 313. In this case, the processing described as being performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the control start process of the main board 200 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290, which functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), allows access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and performs initial hardware settings such as setting the main CPU 290's internal registers (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the status of the setting key. If the setting key is ON (S105, Y), it checks the status of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (S122, Y), it executes the setting change process (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is OFF (S122, N), it executes the setting confirmation process (S126). Note that if the setting key is OFF at S105 (S105, N), processes S122-S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation status of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power outage information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, the system executes either a power outage recovery process or a main RAM 291 initialization process. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not ON, and both the value of the power outage information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power outage recovery process is executed. In all other cases, i.e., if the RAM clear switch is ON, or if either the power outage information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal even if the RAM clear switch is not ON, the main RAM 291 initialization process is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operation status of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S106), it initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power failure information flag (S108). If the value of the power failure information flag does not match the normal power failure data (N in S108), it initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the value of the power failure information flag matches the normal power failure data (Y in S108), it checks the data stored in the main RAM 291 (S110). As described later, if the process completed normally during the previous power failure, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 checks the data in the main RAM 291 using the checksum. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), it initializes the data in the main RAM 291 (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process to restore the state to what it was before the power was cut off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on success data indicating that the power was turned on successfully is stored in the power-off information flag, and initial settings for various errors and communication with the payout control board 155 are performed. Next, unsent command requests from before the power-off are cleared, and commands indicating the game state are requested. Then, performance commands corresponding to the number of balls held for the operation of the first and second special symbols are requested. Next, the open/closed states of the second start port 12 and the large prize port 20 are restored to their state before the power-off. Finally, processing is performed to notify the operating status of the probability variation function of the special symbols.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on success data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared with zeros, and the initial settings of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the display unit are performed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are retained as they were.

Once the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start the interrupt process described later, and the interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time (e.g., 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process in S124 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is checked, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). If "1" to "6" is used as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and if "0" to "5" is used as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Next, the system moves to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If a change operation is performed using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N in S140), the process in S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the process from S138 to S142 is repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the setting value cannot be seen (S146), and the process returns.

Figure 17 is a flowchart detailing the setting confirmation process in S126 of Figure 15. The system checks the value in the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored. If the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to its initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The system then transitions to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process in S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value. If the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so the setting value cannot be seen (S162), and the system returns.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in Figure 15. The main CPU 290 temporarily disables timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors for power failure (S204). When a decrease in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), an unconditional interrupt request signal is input from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290, and in the power failure storage processing that is executed, power failure confirmation data is stored in the power failure confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power failure confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power failure confirmation flag matches the power failure confirmation data (Y in S206), it proceeds to S212 to execute processing for power failure. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial random number update process is executed to update the initial random number for normal symbol wins, the initial random number for special symbol wins, and the software initial random number for special symbol wins (S208), timer interrupts are enabled (S210), and the process returns to S200. Steps S200 to S210 are then repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are disabled (S202 to S208), the interrupt processing described later is executed after timer interrupts are enabled in S210.

If a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power outage information flag do not match the normal power-on data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on was not saved correctly, and the abnormal power outage data is stored in the power outage information flag (S216), and the process proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power outage information flag match the normal power-on data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on was saved correctly, and the normal power outage data is stored in the power outage information flag (S218). Next, in order to check the data in the backed-up main RAM 291 at the next power-on, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is cut off. The above-mentioned power outage processing is performed by the main power outage processing execution means 282, which is implemented by the main CPU 290.

Figure 19 is a flowchart detailing the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main processing (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt processing. First, it sets the interrupt operation conditions (S300) and restarts the watchdog timer (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, it performs input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312), second start gate valid period setting processing (S314), prize entry monitoring processing (S316), prize ball control processing (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing (S320), normal symbol control processing (S322), normal symbol variation start monitoring processing (S324), start gate monitoring control processing (S326), special symbol control processing (S328), and special electric mechanism control processing (S330) The following processes are executed in order: setting the validity period of the main prize slot (S332), monitoring and controlling the start of special symbol variation (S334), detecting abnormalities (S336), detecting abnormalities in ball entry time (S338), displaying the game state (S340), checking the handle state signal (S342), outputting the LED (S344), outputting the launch control signal (S346), outputting the test signal (S348), outputting the solenoid (S350), sending the performance control command (S352), and outputting external information (S354). The next timer interrupt is then permitted (S356), and the program returns.

In the input processing (S304), data from the input ports of switches, open/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signals, door/frame open signals, magnetic detection signals, radio wave detection signals, and touch status signals mounted on the game board are monitored, and data indicating the input status is created and stored in the main RAM 291. This data indicating the input status consists of level data (data from the input port at the time of the current interrupt) and rising or falling edge data (data indicating the switch that was switched by comparing the input port data at the time of the current interrupt with the input port data at the previous interrupt using exclusive OR).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291. If the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored; if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Similarly, the variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291. If the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is greater than or equal to 0, the subtracted result is stored; if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (soft random numbers) are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the increment result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291, and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (soft random numbers) are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs. When the random number value returns to its initial value, i.e., when the random number range completes a cycle, the initial value is reset and a new random number is generated.

In the initial random number update process (S310), the initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (software initial random numbers) are updated. The initial random numbers are read from the initial random number update table in the main RAM 291, and their values are incremented. If the incremented value exceeds the upper limit, the initial random number value is set to 0. A similar process is performed in the initial random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer decrement process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the various control timers are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table. If the timer value is not 0, the value is sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer update is not performed.

In the second start port validity period setting process (S314), the validity period of the second start port 12 is set. The second start port 12 is set with a validity period during which the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed when a game ball enters it, and an invalid period during which the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed even if a game ball enters it. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for entry into the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so even if a game ball enters the second start port 12, the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies when validity periods and invalid periods are set for the first start port 11, the big prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port 33, etc. If the normal symbol state is "Normal Electric Mechanism Activated," data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the normal symbol state is not "Normal Electric Mechanism Activated," and the value of the second start port valid extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second start port is in its invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), the system checks for the game ball passing through the switch. If the game ball passes through the switch, and the switch is not in an invalid period or is currently in an valid period, and a prize ball is paid out, the prize winning counter is updated. Furthermore, a request is made to create a security output request and send a command to the external information output terminal 160.

In the prize ball control process (S318), the following steps are performed in order: monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, transmitting the command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting the received data from the payout control board 155.

In the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first activation opening 31 and the second activation opening 32 is monitored. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through either the first activation opening 31 or the second activation opening 32, if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and the random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbols is monitored, and if it is determined that normal symbol control is in progress, processing related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric mechanism 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbols is "normal symbol changing," the normal symbol changing process is executed. If it is "normal symbol stopped displaying," the normal symbol stopped displaying process is executed. If it is "normal electric mechanism operating," the normal electric mechanism operating process is executed. If it is "normal electric mechanism operation completion demo in progress," the normal electric mechanism operation completion demo process is executed. In the normal symbol changing process, after the normal symbols have changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol change time has ended, the normal symbol change stop setting is executed, and the state of the normal symbols is set to "normal symbol stopped displaying." In the normal symbol stopped displaying process, the display time of the normal symbol's stopped symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the normal symbol's stopped symbol has ended, the normal symbol operation termination setting corresponding to the hit determination result is executed. If it is a win, the state of the normal symbols is set to "Normal Electric Mechanism in Operation", the operation state of the normal electric mechanism opening extension function at the start of normal electric mechanism operation is saved, and the operation setting of the normal electric mechanism solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the normal electric mechanism opening extension function at the start of normal electric mechanism operation is executed. If it is a loss, the state of the normal symbols is set to "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Standby". During the normal electric mechanism operation process, the entry of game balls into the prize slots related to the normal electric mechanism 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the number of entries into the prize slots related to the normal electric mechanism 90 has reached the maximum number of entries, the operation termination setting of the normal electric mechanism 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start slot are executed. If it is determined that the number of winning entries in the prize slot for the standard electric mechanism 90 has not reached the maximum number of winning entries, the system monitors the opening/closing time of the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 and sets the opening/closing of the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90. If it is determined that the opening of the entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 has finished, the system executes the operation termination setting for the standard electric mechanism 90 and the extension time for the second start slot. If it is determined that the opening/closing time for the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 has not ended, the system does not execute the opening/closing setting for the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90. During the standard electric mechanism operation termination demonstration process, the system monitors the operation termination demonstration time for the standard electric mechanism 90. If it is determined that the operation termination demonstration time for the standard electric mechanism 90 has ended, the state of the standard symbols is set to "Standard Symbol Fluctuation Waiting."

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbols is monitored. If it is in the "waiting for normal symbol variation" state and the value of the normal symbol activation reserve ball count is not 0, it is determined to start the normal symbol variation. If it is determined to start the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol activation reserve ball count is decremented, and the hit detection, stop symbol determination, normal symbol variation pattern number setting, and normal symbol variation time setting are performed. Afterward, the state of the normal symbols is set to "normal symbol variation in progress," and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal symbol state setting, hit detection, and variation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start-up gate monitoring and control process (S326), the machine monitors for game balls entering the first start-up gate 11 and the second start-up gate 12. When a game ball is confirmed to have entered the gate when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, a built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol winning software random number to the acquired built-in random number is stored in the buffer as the special symbol winning random number used for determining a jackpot. In addition, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special symbols. If the reserved balls for the second special symbol are consumed with priority over the reserved balls for the first special symbol, only the update of the reserved balls related to that entry is performed. However, if the order in which the reserved balls for the special symbols are consumed is the order in which they enter, in addition to updating the reserved balls related to that entry, the total number of reserved balls is updated and the order in which they enter is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notification effect command corresponding to the random number stored when a ball enters the start-up gate, the machine checks the state of the game machine, and if it is determined that it is time to send a command, the jackpot notification effect request, the jackpot symbol notification effect request, and the pattern notification effect request are executed in order. Here, the system determines that it is a command transmission period if any of the following conditions are met: (1) when waiting for a win and the probability variation function for the regular symbols is not activated, a random number related to the first special symbol is stored; (2) when waiting for a win and the probability variation function for the regular symbols is not activated, a random number related to the second special symbol is stored; or (3) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored during a big win or a small win. Subsequently, a performance command corresponding to the number of balls held for the special symbol's operation is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of balls held for the special symbol's operation has been updated. As described above, in the pre-read function, four pieces of information—pre-determination information (pre-win/loss determination information, pre-symbol determination information, pre-pattern determination information), and the number of balls held—are sent to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controlled the transmission of commands for pre-determination processing, but in another example, transmission may be performed uniformly when there is a ball entering the start slot, and the sub-CPU 310 may perform various situational judgments, such as whether or not it is a pre-read period. Next, the value of the second start gate validity period flag is checked. If the value of the second start gate validity period flag indicates that the second start gate 12 is in its valid period, the monitoring process for the second start gate entry is executed, similar to the case of a ball entering the first start gate. If the value of the second start gate validity period flag indicates that the second start gate 12 is in its invalid period, the monitoring process for the second start gate entry is not executed. Furthermore, if a game ball entry is confirmed when the number of held balls was 0, the number of held balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of the variation, described later, is executed.

In the special symbol control process (S328), the system checks for the waiting state for a win. If the special electric mechanism is in operation, i.e., during a big win or a small win, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric mechanism is not in operation, the state of the special symbols is checked. If it is "waiting for special symbol variation," the general special symbol control process is terminated. If it is "variation started," the special symbol variation start process is executed. If it is "special symbol variation in progress," the special symbol variation in progress process is executed. If it is "special symbol stopped symbol display in progress," the special symbol stopped symbol display in progress process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is obtained based on the variation pattern random number. The variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined. Commands for variation additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information are requested on the sub-board 300 to start displaying the effects. The state of the special symbols is set to "special symbol variation in progress," and the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern is cleared to 0. During the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation has occurred, the variation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the variation time for the special symbol has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the status of the special symbol is set to "Special symbol stopped, displaying symbol". During the special symbol stopped, displaying symbol time is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time for the special symbol stopped, the special symbol operation termination setting corresponding to the hit determination result is executed. In the event of a jackpot, the special symbols are turned off to terminate their operation. The special symbols are set to "waiting for special symbol variation," the number of times the special electric mechanism will operate consecutively is set, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time reduction function, and the normal electric mechanism opening extension function are deactivated, the game machine is set to "preparing to open the jackpot," the jackpot start demo display time is set, a jackpot start demo command request is made, and a launch position specification command request (a command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended launch position, such as "shoot to the right") is made. If the hit detection result is a minor win, the system checks the termination of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function, updates the variation pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and terminates the operation of the special symbol by setting the special symbol state to "Special symbol variation standby," setting the game machine state to minor win start demo, setting the win start demo display time, requesting a command for the win start demo effect, and requesting a command for the launch position specification effect. If the hit detection result is a miss, the system checks the termination of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function, updates the variation pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and terminates the operation of the special symbol by setting the special symbol state to "Special symbol variation standby," and requests a command for the launch position specification effect.

In the special electric mechanism control processing (S330), the operating status of the condition device and the special electric mechanism is inspected in order to execute processing related to the special electric mechanism. If it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric mechanism is operating, processing related to the special electric mechanism is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric mechanism, the following processes are executed: preparation for opening the large prize slot, special electric mechanism operation, closing the large prize slot, big win end demo, small win start demo, small win special electric mechanism operation, small win large prize slot closing, and small win end demo.

In the process of setting the validity period of the grand prize slot (S332), in order to save the result of the validity period determination of the grand prize slot 20, if the value of the grand prize slot validity time is 0, the grand prize slot invalidation period data is stored in the grand prize slot validity period flag; if it is not 0, the grand prize slot validity period data is stored in the grand prize slot validity period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S334), the operating status of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to begin variation. If the order of consumption of the special symbol's reserved balls is priority consumption of the second special symbol, the special symbol is determined to be ready to begin variation when all of the following conditions are met: (1) it is not during a big win or a minor win; (2) the first special symbol is in variation standby mode; (3) the second special symbol is in variation standby mode; and (4) the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is not zero. If the order of consumption of the special symbol's reserved balls is based on the order of winning, in addition to (1) to (3) above, the special symbol is determined to be ready to begin variation when all of the following conditions are met: (5) the total number of reserved balls for the special symbols is not zero; and (6) this determination matches the consumption order, i.e., the order of winning.

If it is determined that a special symbol is ready to begin spinning, the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is deducted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbols has been updated.

Next, the special symbol win determination is performed. In the win determination, a special symbol win random number is used to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbol is determined. In determining the symbol, if the win determination was a big win, the big win symbol is determined based on the special symbol win random number; if it was a small win, the small win symbol is determined; and if it was a miss, the losing symbol is determined.

If the hit detection result is a jackpot, the system determines the operation of the special symbol's probability variation function based on the group determination number value indicating the type of winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process. It then sets the game state after the jackpot, including the operation of the special symbol's variation time reduction function and the setting of the normal symbol's easy entry state. Next, it executes settings for during the jackpot, such as the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively and the opening time of the large prize slot. Then, based on the hit detection result and the operation state of the normal symbol's probability variation function, it selects a variation pattern table to be referenced after the jackpot, thereby setting the variation pattern selection state. Next, it refers to the table selected based on the game state and the group determination number value indicating the type of winning symbol to set the start demo time and end demo time. Finally, it clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit detection and symbol determination, and sets the special symbol state to "Variation Start".

If the result of the win determination is a minor win, the system selects the variation pattern table to be referenced after the minor win ends, sets the content of the variation pattern selection state, sets the start and end demo times, clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for win determination and symbol determination, and sets the state of the special symbol to "Variation Start". If the result of the win determination is a miss, the system clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for win determination and symbol determination, and sets the state of the special symbol to "Variation Start".

In the anomaly detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, the open/short circuit power supply anomaly detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door/frame opening signal. If there is a change in the error state, it stores the error state and requests the sub-board 300 to display the game machine's error state animation. At this time, the illumination pattern of light-emitting means such as LEDs mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the storage of the error state and the request to display the error state animation are not performed.

In the ball entry time anomaly detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect an anomaly in the ball entry time. If it determines that the continuous ON time (for example, the value of a counter incremented with each interrupt when a switch is ON) is abnormal, it sequentially executes the following: setting the ball entry time anomaly, requesting the transmission of a command, and creating a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160. At this time, the light emission mode of light-emitting means such as LEDs mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the ball entry time anomaly. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, the creation of the security output request is not executed.

In the game status display processing (S340), the system requests the display of the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively, the error status, the number of reserved balls for the regular symbols, and the number of reserved balls for the special symbols. Therefore, display data for each of these is created.

In the steering wheel status signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel status is inspected to monitor the steering wheel's touch state. If the inspection determines that there is a change in the steering wheel status, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is decremented, the steering wheel status is updated, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for steering wheel status effects is executed. If the inspection determines that there is no change in the steering wheel status, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the steering wheel status monitoring timer value is not 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the following steps are performed in order to display the special symbols, the regular symbols, the number of balls held for special symbol activation, the number of balls held for regular symbol activation, the game status, the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively, the operating status of the special electric mechanism when the mechanism continuous activation device is not operating, the ball distribution, the error display, and the payout ratio: display initialization, acquisition of display data, and output.

In the launch control signal output processing (S346), in order to output a signal to prohibit/permit the launch of the game ball, the system sets the launch prohibit/permit status corresponding to the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the power supply abnormality, and after acquiring the launch prohibit/permit data, it outputs the launch prohibit/permit signal.

In the test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data for the standard electric mechanism solenoid 91 and the large prize slot solenoid 92, the system acquires the output data for the standard electric mechanism solenoid 91, acquires the output data for the large prize slot solenoid 92, and outputs the output data. The operation flags and operation timers for each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flags and solenoid operation timers is obtained. Subsequently, the solenoid operation timers are updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output ports.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), the system checks whether there is a request to send a command to the sub-board 300. If a request is found, the system acquires the requested command data, clears the used command buffer with zeros, and then sequentially executes the following: acquiring MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, outputting the MODE data, retaining the MODE data, acquiring EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and outputting the EVENT data.

In the external information output processing (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include: random numbers related to normal symbols, such as normal symbol win random numbers and normal symbol variation pattern random numbers; and random numbers related to special symbols, such as special symbol win random numbers (hardware random numbers), special symbol win software random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers. Furthermore, there are initial value update type random numbers, such as normal symbol win initial value random numbers, special symbol win symbol initial value random numbers, and special symbol win software initial value random numbers, which are used to provide the initial values for the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and special symbol win software random numbers.

The random number for normal symbol wins is updated in the interrupt processing's initial value update type random number update process (S308) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the interrupt processing's normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and the number of normal symbol variation reserves is less than the upper limit of 4, the normal symbol win random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the normal symbol variation should begin, the normal symbol random number is used for determining the win and the stopping symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 232, for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes of the interrupt processing (S306) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process of the interrupt processing (S320), when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of 4, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the normal symbol variation should start, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern.

The special symbol winning random number is generated in the interrupt processing's start gate monitoring control process (S326) when a game ball is confirmed to have entered the game while the number of balls held for the first or second special symbol is less than four. The value of the built-in random number and the special symbol winning software random number are obtained and added together, and the generated number is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol winning random number is used in the interrupt processing's special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) to perform jackpot and minor win determinations.

The special symbol winning software random number is updated in the interrupt processing initial value update type random number update process (S308) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the start gate monitoring control process (S326), when the number of reserved balls for the first or second special symbol is less than 4 and a game ball entry is confirmed, the special symbol winning software random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and used to generate the special symbol winning random number as described above.

The special symbol winning symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example in Figure 7), is updated in the interrupt processing's initial value update type random number update process (S308), and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol winning symbol random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the entry of a game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of balls held for the operation of the first or second special symbol is less than 4. The special symbol winning symbol random number is used in the interrupt processing's special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) to determine the jackpot symbol when the win determination is a jackpot.

The variable pattern random number takes values from, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example in Figure 8), is updated in the various random number update processes of the interrupt processing (S306), and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The variable pattern random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the entry of a game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of balls held for activation of the first or second special symbol is less than 4. The variable pattern random number is used in the special symbol control process of the interrupt processing (S328) to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

The initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins are each within the same range as the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins. They are updated in the initial random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the interrupt process's initial random number update process (S310), and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins are used as initial values for each random number when updating the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins in the initial value update type random number update process (S308).

Since interrupt processing is executed at regular intervals by timer interrupts, the various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt processing are also executed at regular intervals. That is, the random numbers for normal symbol wins, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, special symbol wins, special symbol win software random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are updated at regular intervals. In contrast, the main process (S120) is repeated for the period from when the interrupt processing ends until the next timer interrupt occurs, that is, for a period of time equal to the time measured by the timer minus the time required for the interrupt processing. Since the time required for interrupt processing varies depending on the game state, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is not executed at regular intervals, unlike the various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). This allows the initial random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) to be random each time.

Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the control start process for the sub-board 300 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial processing execution means 360, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the sub-CPU 310, which functions as the sub-initial processing execution means 360. When control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets the stack pointer (S500), disables all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs hardware initial settings such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310 (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and the sub-RAM 311 is initialized by setting initial values for variables in the control program that have initial values, and setting zero-clear data for variables that do not have initial values (S506). The interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes power-up processing and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, which are executed as the highest priority interrupt processing. Next, as a priority level 7 interrupt process with the highest execution priority, there is command processing received from the main board 200. Following that, as a priority level 3 interrupt process, there is reset processing when a CPU malfunction is detected by the watchdog timer. Next in priority level 2 interrupt processes are those related to commands sent and received between the control CPU 320 and the control CPU 320. Finally, as the lowest priority level 1 interrupt processes, there are processes such as communication with the real-time clock and control of various devices such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to these various processes occur simultaneously, they are executed in order of priority, starting with the highest priority set for each interrupt type. Note that the processes shown in this diagram include the highest priority interrupts: power-up processing and reset processing in the event of various abnormalities, and the priority level 3 interrupt: CPU malfunction detection reset processing.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are disabled (S510), and various error information used by this model is set from all error information for all models that has been stored in advance (S512). All lamps, such as the decorative lamps 111, are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process in S518 does not return to this flow, but if it does, it transitions to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

Figure 21 is a flowchart detailing the main processing of S518 in Figure 20. In S506 of Figure 20, the starting address for checking whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 is correctly positioned is obtained (S530). Subsequent processing enables all interrupts (S532), and initialization operations for devices such as motors and solenoids are performed (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the counter for decorative symbols is updated so that the losing combinations of decorative symbols are random (S540), and the input port of the sub-CPU 310 is monitored (S542). Note that S540 is the process for the method of determining the losing decorative symbols using a counter, so if the method of determining the losing decorative symbols uses a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations that result in losing symbols, the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the losing decorative symbols using that lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating the stop symbol for the special symbols is received from the main board 200, as will be described later in S552. The sub-CPU 310, which functions as a sub-error detection means 364, monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, notifies the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the performance button 109 (S546), and executes the prediction lottery (S548). Furthermore, in the notification lottery in S548, in order to send the command for the notification effect that will appear immediately after the start of symbol variation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process is divided into multiple loops rather than being processed in a single loop, and the notification effect that will appear immediately after the start of symbol variation is selected in the earlier loops. If there is an operation request for devices such as the real-time clock, lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if it is immediately after the command analysis, the process returns to S536 (Y in S554), and if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for the lottery is updated as a low-priority process that can be performed in idle time (S556), and the process returns to S536. Furthermore, in S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern for special symbols, the variation pattern for decorative symbols is determined in this S552 process. If the command to be analyzed indicates a stopping symbol for special symbols, and the system uses a lottery sheet to determine the losing symbols for decorative symbols, then the stopping symbol for decorative symbols is determined in this S552 process.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt instruction, which has a priority level second only to reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port. When the same data is read twice in a row, that data is confirmed as a new command (S600, Y). If the confirmed command is the first command (MODE data) (S602, Y), that first command is saved to the temporary memory area (S604). A hardware random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. By obtaining a hardware random number each time a main command interrupt is received from the main board 200 in this way, periodicity in the timing of random number acquisition is avoided, and the randomness of the value is increased. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 reads are possible), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (S600, N).

In S602, if the confirmed command is the second command and not the first command (N in S602), and it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command write pointer, which is the read position in the command buffer (ring buffer for command data), is obtained (S610), and both the first and second commands are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 in Figure 21. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command that was stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, steps S610 onwards are skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned.

Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for performance display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for sending a command related to performance display from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a period of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data to send in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and sent to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub-CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating successful reception. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine returns. If there is no data to send in the buffer (N in S622), steps S624 onwards are skipped, and the original routine returns.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling when the sub-CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub-CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been successfully received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved to the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for the control of various devices. This timer interrupt is for the control of lamps such as decorative lamps 111, the control of solenoids and motors that drive movable parts 66, and the management control of various timers, and occurs with a period of 1 ms. Since it is an interrupt with the lowest priority, priority level 1, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and the input and output of ports that input and output signals indicating input from the performance button 109, signals indicating error detection, signals indicating power outage, and drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids are processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power outage is input, the system immediately proceeds to backup processing. The system updates data related to device control, such as counting based on the control patterns of devices like motors and solenoids, and controlling the on/off state of buffers for writing data to ports (S642) (S644). It also updates timers for timing the effects (S646), updates timers for managing the input validity period of the effect button 109 (S648), and updates task control counters for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 and monitoring runaway behavior of the control CPU 320 to create a 16ms cycle (S650).

Furthermore, the minimum unit for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 is 16 ms. Since one frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, setting an integer multiple of these as the minimum unit for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 makes it easier to synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, when counting a relatively long period, such as a 30-second error notification, using a 1-interrupt (1 ms) cycle would result in an unnecessarily long count value. However, by using a 16 ms cycle, the count value can be shortened.

The task control system has 16 tasks, numbered 0 through 15. One of these tasks controls the switching of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks control the runaway monitoring of the control CPU 320. The switching of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts, according to the count value of the task control counter, achieving a 16ms cycle. The runaway monitoring of the control CPU 320 is assigned, for example, to processes 0 and 8. When the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, i.e., once every 8 interrupts, the system monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 (S652), achieving an 8ms cycle.

The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that inverts between on and off every frame. If this toggle signal remains unchanged for 1600ms, the control CPU 320 is deemed to be malfunctioning. The sub-CPU 310 then sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 performs a reset. Since the control CPU 320 receives the toggle signal at a cycle of one frame (16ms or 32ms), monitoring is performed at a shorter cycle of 8ms. Finally, a timer managing relatively long error notification periods, such as the 30-second error notification mentioned above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. If the second win/fail lottery value is held in reserve (Y in S700), the second win/fail determination means 222 reads the second win/fail lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is a win or a miss (S702). The second win/fail determination means 222 then determines the stopping symbol for the second special symbol 52 (S704). The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern for the second special symbol 52 (S706). Finally, the determination result is sent to the sub-board 300 along with a variation start command to begin the variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second win/failure lottery value is not reserved (N in S700), and the first win/failure lottery value is reserved (Y in S708), the first win/failure determination means 221 reads the first win/failure lottery value and re-determines the win/failure of the first special symbol 51 (S710). The first win/failure determination means 221 then determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712). The first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 (S714). The determination result is then sent to the sub-board 300 along with a variation start command to begin the variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/failure lottery value is not reserved, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The system processes the display of the special symbol's variation (S718), repeats S718 until a predetermined variation time has elapsed and the timing for stopping the symbol display has been reached (S720-N), and when the predetermined variation time has elapsed and the timing for stopping the symbol display has been reached (S720-Y), a variation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the displayed symbol variation at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the display of the special symbol's variation ends.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the changing decorative symbols. The performance determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command from the main board 200 indicating the start of the change and the content of the performance display (S750), and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols according to the received special symbol stop symbol, change pattern and win/fail judgment result (S752), and determines the change performance pattern corresponding to the change pattern (S754). Here, if the premonition setting is turned on by prior determination (Y in S756), if the already determined change performance pattern is not a pattern that includes specific performance content that should be avoided in superimposed display with the予告 performance (N in S758), and if it is not the symbol change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (N in S760), then the setting to display a predetermined予告 performance is executed (S764), and if it is the symbol change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (Y in S760), then the premonition setting is turned off (S762). If the premonition setting is not enabled (N in S756), or if the variation animation pattern includes a specific animation (Y in S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Subsequently, the display of the decorative pattern's variation effect is started (S766), the display processing of the decorative pattern's variation effect is performed (S768), and the display processing of the予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is performed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200 (N in S772). Upon receiving the variation stop command (Y in S772), the pattern variation display is stopped by stopping the decorative pattern in the manner determined in S752 (S774), and the decorative pattern's variation effect ends (S776).

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the performance display control means 305 starts the performance processing for the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize slot 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the large prize slot 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806). If the predetermined opening time has elapsed (Y in S804), or if the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) but the number of balls entering the large prize slot 20 has reached 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the large prize slot 20 (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the performance display control means 305 terminates the performance processing for the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and the execution of the specific game, namely the probability variation, time reduction, or easy ball entry state, begins (S818).

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the process of a minor win game. In a minor win game, a unit game, which is executed only once, is started (S819), the large prize slot 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is maintained until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N in S822). If the opening time has elapsed (Y in S822), the large prize slot 20 is closed (S824). If the set number of openings and closings has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of openings and closings and the process returns to S820 (S828). If the set number of openings and closings has been completed (Y in S826), the minor win game ends.

In the prerequisite technology, the payout for a jackpot in the second game was generally greater than the payout for a jackpot in the first game; that is, the expected value of prize balls won per jackpot was greater in the second game than in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of prize balls won than the second game, or the expected values of prize balls won in the first and second games may be designed to be roughly equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game performed in the first game and the special game performed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which unit games are performed 7 times with a 100% probability may be performed, and in the second game, a special game in which unit games are performed 4 times with a 50% probability may be performed, and a special game in which unit games are performed 10 times with a 50% probability may be performed. Furthermore, in either case, a specific area may be provided in the large prize winning slot, and if a game ball that enters the large prize winning slot enters or passes through the specific area, a special game such as a probability variation state may be implemented during the normal game after the special game ends. In this case, the special game implemented when a jackpot is won in the second game may be configured such that it is easier for the ball to enter the specific area, and the probability of the normal game being implemented in a probability variation state after the special game ends is higher than the special game implemented when a jackpot is won in the first game. For example, a first win may be implemented where a special game in which it is relatively difficult for the ball to enter the specific area is implemented, and a second win may be implemented where a special game in which it is relatively easy for the ball to enter the specific area is implemented, and the probability of the second win is higher in the second game than in the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second win in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Example 1)
This embodiment proposes suitable control and presentation for a pachinko game machine equipped with a screen transformation effect as a special effect. Hereinafter, elements identical to or corresponding to those constituting the pachinko game machine 100 of the prior art will be denoted by the same reference numerals. Furthermore, content already explained in the prior art will be omitted as appropriate, and the explanation will mainly focus on aspects that differ from the pachinko game machine 100 of the prior art.

<Special effects, normal/simple decorative symbols, normal/simple hold images, pre-read effects>
In this embodiment, a special effect is described: a screen transformation effect. The screen transformation effect here refers to an effect that applies transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, oscillation, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame images included in the displayed video, along with the frame images placed around them. There are two types of frame image transformations: one in which a single frame image included in the original video is transformed sequentially (also called "frame-in-frame still effect"), and another in which multiple frame images included in the original video are transformed sequentially (also called "frame-in-frame moving effect"). The frame-in-frame still effect freezes the original video that was being displayed and applies a transformation to the frame image at the time it was frozen, so that a so-called screen capture image is fitted into the frame image as a still image and transformed. The frame-in-frame moving effect applies a transformation to each frame image of the video that was being displayed, so that the original video is fitted into the frame image as a moving image and transformed. The original video frame images are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated and stored in the frame buffer by applying transformations such as scaling, moving, distortion, shaking, tilting, cracking, color inversion, and color conversion to those frame images, thereby displaying new moving images as a screen transformation effect. In this way, by dynamically generating the transformed image for each scene of a moving image, it is not necessary to prepare transformed frame images in advance for numerous scenes in multiple moving images, and it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing an increase in data volume and processing load.

First, let's explain the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed.
Figure 30 shows an example of the screen of the performance display device 60. Figure 30(a) shows the state when the variation is stopped. In the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61, which varies vertically, using most of the area approximately in the center, and the simplified decorative pattern 504 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61, which varies vertically, in the upper right corner. Thus, the decorative pattern 61 of this embodiment is composed of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simplified decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of the first normal decorative pattern 502a, which is the left pattern, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, which is the middle pattern, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c, which is the right pattern.

As pending images, a normal pending image 506 and a simplified pending image 507 are displayed. At the bottom of the performance screen 500, a normal pending image 506 is displayed indicating the number of pending lottery values, with a maximum of four. In the diagram, the first normal pending image 506a, the second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d are displayed horizontally from left to right in the order of ball entry (i.e., the order in which the variation starts). The first normal pending image 506a, the second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d are normally displayed as images resembling balls that light up in a predetermined color (for example, blue). Each pending image displays an image resembling a ball that lights up in a color corresponding to the level of the expected jackpot if it is determined that the probability of winning is high based on the so-called pre-reading at the time of ball entry, that is, the pre-determination information of the lottery value corresponding to each pending. In the example shown in Figure 30(a), only the third normal hold image 506c is displayed as an image resembling a ball, lit in a color different from blue (for example, red). This pre-reading effect, where the image lights up in a color different from blue, is the pre-reading notification effect in this embodiment. For example, the effect determination means 303 determines the color of the normal hold image 506 so that the probability of a big win is lowest with the normal color "blue," and increases in the order of "green," "red," and "rainbow." The number and color (or pattern) of these hold images indicate the number of hold images and the probability of a big win to the player. The symbol variation corresponding to the third normal hold image 506c, which is scheduled to begin thirdly, is the symbol variation that became the target of the pre-reading (the trigger for the execution of the pre-reading notification effect), and is hereinafter also referred to as the "target variation."

In the lower right corner of the presentation screen 500, a simplified hold image 507 is displayed. This simplified hold image is a smaller and more simplified version of the normal hold image 506. The simplified hold image 507 shows the number of normal hold images 506 displayed; in Figure 30(a), the number "4" is displayed.

Figure 30(b) shows the state during symbol variation display. Figure 30(b) shows the state during variation display after the start of symbol variation, following the state in Figure 30(a). The four normal reserve images 506 from the first normal reserve image 506a to the fourth normal reserve image 506d in Figure 30(a) are moved to the left by one reserve image width from their respective positions. The first normal reserve image 506a in Figure 30(a) is moved to the left and displayed as the variation image 508. The variation image 508 is an image that shows the lottery value for which the symbols are currently changing. It has a larger diameter than the normal reserve image 506, and a background pattern is displayed around it, distinguishing it from the normal reserve image 506 and emphasizing that the symbols are changing. Note that the variation image 508 and the normal reserve image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, only the image data of the variation image 508 is contained, and the normal reserve image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the variation image 508. In Figure 30(a), the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are moved one position to the left to become the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, and the third normal hold image 506c. The first normal decorative symbol 502a is displayed having already finished its fluctuation display and in a state of temporary stop, that is, essentially stopped but fluctuating slightly and not yet stopped. The second normal decorative symbol 502b is fluctuating at high speed rotation. The third normal decorative symbol 502c is in a state after high-speed rotation, fluctuating at a low speed as it approaches a stop. The simplified decorative symbol 504 is rotating at high speed, and when all of the first normal decorative symbols 502a, the second normal decorative symbol 502b, and the third normal decorative symbol 502c stop (final stop), the simplified decorative symbol 504 also stops (final stop). Furthermore, a "confirmed stop," unlike a "temporary stop," refers to a stopping state in which there is no fine oscillation and the object remains completely still. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 consists of numbers (or letters or symbols) and images depicting human or animal characters, and the simplified decorative pattern 504 consists only of numbers (or letters or symbols), then the numbers (or letters or symbols) in the simplified decorative pattern 504 will not undergo a temporary stop but only a confirmed stop, and during a confirmed stop, there is no fine oscillation and the object remains completely still. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can undergo a temporary stop, and during a temporary stop, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the images undergo fine oscillation. During a confirmed stop, neither the numbers (or letters or symbols) nor the images undergo fine oscillation and remain completely still. However, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the confirmed stop (for example, 5 seconds), at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or images will undergo fine oscillation even during a confirmed stop.

The simplified hold image 507 displayed in the lower right corner of the presentation screen 500 is an image that shows the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed numerically; in Figure 30(b), the number "3" is displayed. The movable mechanism 520 is a movable decorative lamp shaped like the logo of the game machine's title, and its operation at predetermined timings visually suggests a high probability of a jackpot. As will be described in detail later, this embodiment includes multiple movable mechanisms in addition to the movable mechanism 520.

Figure 31 schematically shows an example of frame image contraction in a screen transformation effect. Figure 31(a) shows a state in which the enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol variation effect, such as a super reach effect, which is based on a story in which the player battles the enemy character 512. During the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect), it is preferable to hide the normal hold image 506 and the image in progress 508, as shown in Figure 31. However, the image in progress 508 may be kept displayed even when the normal hold image 506 is hidden. For example, if the effect develops into a super reach effect, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, but the image in progress 508 may be configured to be displayed for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half). Furthermore, during the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (such as a super reach effect), the decorative symbols 502 are normally hidden as shown in Figure 31, but they may be displayed in a smaller size (or, if the decorative symbols 502 consist of numbers and symbols, only the numbers) and continue to be displayed. For example, if the game develops into a super reach effect, the decorative symbols 502 may be configured to be displayed in a reach effect, in a smaller size and/or as numbers only, for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half). Here, when a frame-freezing effect is executed as a screen transformation effect, as shown in Figure 31(b), the image of the enemy character 512 that was previously displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 31(a) is frozen, the frozen frame image is reduced to a slightly smaller size, and a frame image 510, which was not previously displayed, is displayed around the reduced frame image. When a framed video effect is performed as a screen transformation effect, although not specifically illustrated, transformation processing such as sequential reduction is applied to each of the multiple frame images included in the original video, similar to a framed still effect, and such multiple frame images are also included in the transformation unless otherwise specified. Note that at least a part of this framed image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the area closer to the inside of the framed image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the framed image 510 will be referred to as the framed image 514 from now on. Here, the framed image 510, which was not displayed on the effect screen 500 in the state of Figure 31(a), is displayed around the framed image 514 in the state of Figure 31(b). This part of the framed image 510 is actually an image portion that was not displayed and was not visible on the effect screen 500 because it is located in a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the effect screen 500, even at the time of Figure 31(a), although the display control processing itself is executed by the effect display control means 305. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment the entire frame image 510 is visible. However, it is also possible to make only the upper portion of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the rest of the frame image invisible), or to make only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the top and bottom portions invisible).

Here, the frame image 514, which is a scaled-down version of the frame image in Figure 31(a), does not include the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified held image 507. In other words, the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified held image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect and are displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, normal held image 506, and changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of Figure 30, are switched to a hidden state, are not included in the transformation, and are not included in the frame image 514. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern is ensured by hiding the normal decorative pattern 502 while continuing to display the simplified decorative pattern 504 (making it possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the display of the held image is ensured by hiding the normal held image 506 and changing image 508 while continuing to display the simplified held image 507 (making it possible to recognize whether or not a hold exists and how many holds exist). In the modified version, the decorative symbols 502 and the fluctuating image 508 may also be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to transformation. That is, as mentioned above, if the system is configured to continue displaying the decorative symbols 502 and the fluctuating image 508 during a predetermined symbol fluctuation sequence (such as a super reach sequence), then the decorative symbols 502 and the fluctuating image 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to screen transformation. Similarly, the regular hold image 506 may also be configured to continue displaying during a predetermined symbol fluctuation sequence (such as a super reach sequence), and like the decorative symbols 502 and the fluctuating image 508, it may be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to screen transformation. The framed image 514 is an image obtained by scaling down the frame image in Figure 31(a) as described above, and in addition, by inverting the colors (also known as "negative-positive inversion"). The framed image 514 and the frame image 510 are objects that will be subjected to subsequent transformation processing, and are therefore referred to as target objects 516.

Figure 32 schematically shows an example of frame image oscillation in a screen transformation effect. The target object 516 is further reduced in size from the state shown in Figure 31(b), and then the transformation, which had been two-dimensional until then, is further changed in the depth direction, resulting in a three-dimensional transformation. As a result, the target object 516 becomes an image that appears as if the frame image of the moving image that was displayed immediately before (if it is a still image within a frame effect, it is an image like a captured image of the moving image of the effect frozen in time; if it is a moving image within a frame effect, it is a frame image that switches sequentially) is pasted or projected onto one face of a three-dimensional object. As shown in the figure, the target object 516 has a shape in which the image within the frame 514 is placed inside the curved frame image 510, and although it is not strictly a rectangle, for the sake of explanation from here on we will assume that it is a rectangle, and will refer to its left end as the left edge, its right end as the right edge, its top end as the top edge, and its bottom end as the bottom edge. In Figure 32(a), a four-vertex deformation is performed to make it appear as if the left edge of the target object 516 is moving towards the foreground and the right edge is moving towards the background. Specifically, the left edge is lengthened, the right edge is shortened, the interior angles on the top and bottom of the left edge are smaller than right angles, and the interior angles on the top and bottom of the right edge are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoidal shape. In Figure 32(b), a four-vertex deformation is performed to make it appear as if the right edge of the target object 516 is moving towards the foreground and the left edge is moving towards the background. Specifically, the right edge is lengthened, the left edge is shortened, the interior angles on the top and bottom of the right edge are smaller than right angles, and the interior angles on the top and bottom of the left edge are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoidal shape. By rapidly and alternately repeating the states in Figure 32(a) and Figure 32(b), it is possible to make the target object 516 appear to sway by alternately rotating the left and right edges back and forth.

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a screen transformation performance according to the variation pattern, as the performance content to be displayed on the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60. The screen transformation performance is displayed as a moving image by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining at least the image of the target object 516 (which is a transformed version of the frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing), the background image 518, and an image indicating the game status, and storing this new frame image in the frame buffer 338. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (blacked out), but the display is not limited to this form. For example, a display form that loops a moving image of the word "CHANCE" scrolling like a ticker may also be used.

Figure 33 schematically shows the layer structure of the animation screen 500 in the screen transformation animation. The layer structure of the animation screen 500 consists of the following layers, from the frontmost to the backmost: error display layer 521, volume/brightness display layer 522, game status layer 523, animation layer 524, and background layer 525. The frontmost error display layer 521 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred and the type of error. The next layer, the volume/brightness display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a brightness setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the brightness.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as the simple decorative symbols 504, the simple hold image 507, the in-spin image 508, and the guidance display 530 that guides the player to shoot to the right. The displayed content is constantly updated. As an example, the in-spin image 508 may be displayed in the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the performance layer 524, is a layer that mainly displays the in-spin of the normal decorative symbols 502, the normal hold image 506, and the target object 516. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the content of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 remains fixed unless changes such as deformation or movement are added in the case of a static performance like a screen capture, and in the case of a performance where a video is embedded in the framed image 514, the frame images included in the original video are sequentially embedded. The normal decorative symbols 502 and the normal hold image 506 may also be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in a screen deformation performance. Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the fluctuating image 508 is displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the fluctuating image 508 may also be subject to transformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect. The background layer 525 on the last page is a black background image 518. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it appear as a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the performance layer 524 can also be made to appear three-dimensional. The performance display device 60 has at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group as performance images that can be displayed, and in the screen transformation effect, a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form and a second image obtained by not transforming the first image into a predetermined form are displayed. The first image group refers to a collection of images categorized as images that constitute the transformation target effect described later, that is, images that are subject to transformation processing. The second image group refers to a collection of images other than those that constitute the transformation target effect described later, that is, images that are not subject to transformation processing. The first image is an image that may be subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and may be displayed on the effect layer 524. The first image group may include, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal hold image 506. The second image is an image that is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and is an image that is displayed on a layer other than the effect layer 524. The second image group may include, for example, the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple hold image 507, the changing image 508, and the guidance display 530 as the second image. The special first image is, for example, the transformed target object 516. If the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal hold image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect, the transformed normal decorative pattern 502 or the transformed normal hold image 506 may also be included.

The performance determination means 303 selects one of several types of variable performance patterns as the variable performance pattern. These multiple types of variable performance patterns include those that are subject to screen transformation during the performance process and those that are not subject to screen transformation. Variable performance patterns subject to screen transformation may be defined such that the screen transformation may or may not be executed depending on the results of a separate lottery, or they may be defined so that the screen transformation is always executed. This allows for different presentation styles even with the same variable performance pattern, or even with the same performance progression up to a certain point, depending on whether or not the screen transformation is executed midway through. For example, in the case of a performance sequence leading to a super reach, the sequence can be either "start of variation → formation of reach state → development of super reach performance → no screen transformation during super reach performance → end of super reach performance → end of variation" or "start of variation → formation of reach state → development of super reach performance → screen transformation occurs during super reach performance → end of super reach performance → end of variation."

The performance determination means 303 selects one of several types of pre-announcement performance patterns as the pre-announcement performance pattern. The several types of pre-announcement performance patterns include pre-announcement performances that are subject to screen transformation performance during the performance process (for example, in addition to the performance that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, there is also the step-up pre-announcement performance which is part of the pre-announcement performance before the reach state) and pre-announcement performances that are not subject to screen transformation performance (for example, a pre-announcement performance pattern in which a special normal decorative symbol 502 (for example, a normal decorative symbol 502 with the word "NEXT" attached) is displayed during a pseudo-consecutive performance which is part of the pre-announcement performance before the reach state and the normal decorative symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and then changes again, and a pre-announcement performance pattern in which the movable mechanism 520 is driven after the performance that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance described above has finished, and in conjunction with this, the screen is displayed in rainbow colors). Pre-announcement performances that are subject to screen transformation performance may be defined such that the screen transformation performance is executed or not executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or they may be defined so that the screen transformation performance is always executed. This allows for different presentation styles depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed, even with the same preview animation pattern. The animations that are subject to the screen transformation effect—that is, the symbol change animations and preview animations in which the screen transformation effect can be executed during the animation process—will be hereinafter referred to as "transformation-targeted animations."

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a so-called pre-announcement performance that suggests in advance the high probability that the result of the win/loss lottery will be a win, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entering the start gate, according to the pre-determination information (pre-information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball enters). Furthermore, the probability of the screen transformation performance being executed differs depending on the type of pre-announcement performance (pre-announcement). In other words, if the hold related to the target change is a hold related to a change in which the execution of the screen transformation performance is scheduled, or a hold related to a change in which the execution of the screen transformation performance is highly likely (more precisely, if it is a hold related to a change in which a pre-announcement performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance is executed), then a pre-announcement with a higher expectation level will be executed than in the case of a hold that is not such a hold (in the case of the hold change performance described later, the red normal hold image 506 is a pre-announcement with a higher expectation level than the blue normal hold image 506). In this configuration, even with the same presentation pattern, it is preferable to configure the system so that the probability of a big win is higher when the screen transformation presentation is performed than when it is not. For example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the probability of a big win is higher when the presentation that freezes the enemy character is performed during the super reach presentation (the screen transformation presentation is performed) than when the presentation that freezes the enemy character is not performed during the super reach presentation (the screen transformation presentation is not performed and the enemy character does not freeze). The pre-read notification presentation is, for example, the presentation shown in Figure 30, which indicates the probability of a big win or the probability of the screen transformation presentation being performed by the lighting color of the normal reserve image 506 corresponding to the target change that has been pre-read (reserve change presentation). This makes it possible to make the likelihood of the screen transformation presentation being performed different depending on the type of notification presentation, i.e., the lighting color of the normal reserve image 506. For example, the screen transformation presentation is more likely to be performed in the target change that has been pre-read when a red normal reserve image 506 (for example, a 50% probability of winning) is displayed than when a blue normal reserve image 506 (for example, a 10% probability of winning) is displayed. Such a hold change effect may be performed not only for the normal hold image 506 but also for the in-spin image 508. For example, when the first normal hold image 506a moves to become the in-spin image 508, (1) the first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and the in-spin image 508 also displays a blue normal hold image 506 (more precisely, a blue in-spin image 508), allowing the viewer to understand that the probability of winning a jackpot in the current spin is 10%. (2) The first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and the in-spin image 508 displays a red normal hold image 506 (more precisely, a red in-spin image 508), allowing the viewer to understand that the probability of winning a jackpot in the current spin has increased from 10% to 50%. Furthermore, when a variation pattern for which a screen transformation effect is to be executed is selected, whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed is determined at the start of the symbol variation due to that variation pattern, and the probability of the screen transformation effect being executed differs depending on the type of pre-announcement performed up to the start of that variation. As a variation, the decision on whether or not to execute the screen transformation effect may be made at the time the pre-announcement is executed (when the execution of the pre-announcement is decided), based on the variation (target variation) that triggered the execution of that pre-announcement.

The likelihood of the screen transformation animation being executed varies depending on the type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin. Note that "relevant spin" here refers to the current spin; if a pre-announcement is being performed, it refers to the spin that triggered the pre-announcement (the target spin), not the spin in which the pre-announcement is being performed (the spin before the target). Furthermore, the type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin refers to the type of pre-announcement animation (excluding the screen transformation animation) performed in the spin in which the pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation is performed, and not the type of pre-announcement animation; in other words, it does not refer to the type of pre-announcement animation in a spin prior to the spin in which the pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation is performed. Note that the execution and type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin, the execution and type of pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation, and the execution and type of screen transformation animation are all determined by separate draws at the start of the relevant spin. Thus, even if a spin animation pattern that is the target of the screen transformation animation is selected, the screen transformation animation is not guaranteed to be performed. For example, as a form of the pre-announcement effect for the fluctuation, a dialogue pre-announcement effect (this dialogue pre-announcement effect is performed before the pre-announcement effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is performed in the fluctuation) may be configured such that a giraffe pattern (a display pattern that has a higher probability of a big win than blue) is more likely to result in the execution of the screen transformation effect than a blue speech bubble. As a variation, the execution or non-execution of the pre-announcement effect for the fluctuation, its form, the execution or non-execution of the pre-announcement effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect, and the execution or non-execution of the screen transformation effect may all be determined at once by the same lottery at the start of the fluctuation.

The way the effects are presented can differ even if the content of the effects is the same, depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed. Furthermore, the combination of the content of the pre-announcement effect and the target change effect can create a gradual increase in the sense of anticipation regarding the differences in how the effects are presented. The aforementioned hold change effect and dialogue announcement effect can be executed in both the target change and the change before the target. For example, by displaying a red normal hold image 506 in the pre-announcement, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is high, and then by displaying a blue dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is low. Alternatively, for example, by displaying a blue normal hold image 506 in the pre-announcement, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is low, and then by displaying a giraffe-patterned dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is high. In the modified example, if the system is designed to determine the entire process from the start of the pre-announcement (change before the target) to the target change, or the entire process from the pre-announcement to the timing of the screen transformation effect during the target change, it is possible to prevent the expected execution of the screen transformation effect from being interrupted midway.

Figure 34 schematically shows the process of the movable mechanism effect, which is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. Figure 34(a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable mechanism 520, and Figure 34(b) shows the state in which the movable mechanism 520 has been operated. The movable mechanism 520 in this embodiment includes the first movable mechanism 520a, the second movable mechanism 520b, the third movable mechanism 520c, and the fourth movable mechanism 520d. The first movable mechanism 520a is a movable decorative lamp shaped like the logo of the game machine's title, and at a predetermined timing during a predetermined effect, it moves significantly downwards as shown in Figure 34(b), thereby visually suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. The second movable part 520b and the third movable part 520c are scissor-arm type decorative members, and as shown in Figure 34(b), the second movable part 520b extends from the left side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, and the third movable part 520c extends from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby visually suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. The fourth movable part 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp resembling a saw blade, and as shown in Figure 34(b), it moves significantly upward at a predetermined timing during a predetermined performance, thereby visually suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. As shown in Figure 34(b), the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified hold image 507 are displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility even when all of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d are in operation. Furthermore, by configuring the mechanism so that none of the movable mechanisms operate, i.e., remain in their initial positions, when the reel stops moving and for a predetermined time leading up to the stop (for example, the period from 2 seconds before the reel stops moving until the reel stops moving), it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility, at least at the boundary of the game (i.e., when the game progresses temporarily stop). As a modification, the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified hold image 507 may be configured to be displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility when at least one of the movable mechanisms among the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d is in operation. For example, the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified hold image 507 may be displayed in a position where their visibility is obstructed when the third movable mechanism 520c is operating, but not obstructed when other movable mechanisms are operating. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the frequency of operation of the third movable mechanism 520c is lower than the frequency of operation of any of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, or fourth movable mechanism 520d. Furthermore, it is preferable that the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c operates within a single variation is shorter than the time during which it does not operate. In such a configuration, it is even more preferable that, in all variation patterns (variation times), the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c operates within a single variation is shorter than the time during which it does not operate.

The movable mechanism 520 is located near the performance display device 60 and operates in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device 60. The operation of the movable mechanism 520 and the execution of the screen transformation performance are associated with each other so that the display of the screen transformation performance and the operation of the movable mechanism 520 are executed relatively often simultaneously. For example, the movable mechanism 520 is executed more often simultaneously with the screen transformation performance than with other types of performances that do not involve the screen transformation performance (for example, capture performances, inversion performances, step-up announcements, dialogue announcements, hold change performances, and group announcements). Also, for example, the screen transformation performance is more often accompanied by the operation of the movable mechanism 520 than without. The performance control means 304 operates the movable mechanism 520 according to the operation status of the movable mechanism 520 determined by the performance determination means 303. By linking the screen transformation effect with the operation of the movable mechanism 520 in this way, the three-dimensionality and dynamism of the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60 when the screen transformation effect is executed can be further enhanced. That is, not only is a sense of three-dimensionality and dynamism expressed in the displayed effect content, but a sense of three-dimensionality and dynamism is also created around the effect display device 60. Conversely, in screen transformation effects that do not involve the operation of the movable mechanism 520, the content of the screen transformation effect itself can be made more prominent by refraining from the operation of the movable mechanism 520. Furthermore, when the movable mechanism 520 is in operation and viewed from the front, as shown in Figure 34, the first movable mechanism 520a, the second movable mechanism 520b, the third movable mechanism 520c, and the fourth movable mechanism 520d operate in a position and shape that does not obstruct the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504.

The decorative symbols include a standard decorative symbol 502, which is displayed as the main symbol on the performance display device 60 at least when a special symbol stops, and a simplified decorative symbol 504, which is displayed in a simplified form than the standard decorative symbol 502 when the standard decorative symbol 502 is difficult to see. The standard decorative symbol 502 is a symbol displayed in a larger size than the simplified decorative symbol 504. The standard decorative symbol 502 consists of three symbols, which are stopped one by one in order after the variation display. The simplified decorative symbol 504 also consists of three symbols, but all three are stopped simultaneously after the variation display. The combination of symbols that stop for the simplified decorative symbol 504 is the same as the combination of symbols that stop for the standard decorative symbol 502.

Furthermore, during the execution of the Super Reach performance, the system may be configured to display the normal decorative symbols 502 in a smaller size (displaying alternative symbols) for at least a portion of the time, or the normal decorative symbols 502 may be hidden (the system may be configured not to display alternative symbols either). In such situations, the simplified decorative symbols 504 are always displayed in a fluctuating state. These simplified decorative symbols 504 are displayed in a small size in the upper right corner of the performance display device 60, displaying a fluctuating state while the special symbols are fluctuating and a stopped state while the special symbols are stopped. Similar to the normal decorative symbols 502, three symbols are displayed in a fluctuating and stopped state. By providing these simplified decorative symbols 504, even in situations where it is desirable to make the normal decorative symbols 502 smaller or to hide them (for example, when performing a Super Reach performance, or when a performance using a movable mechanism obscures the center of the performance display device 60), it is possible to inform the user that the symbols are fluctuating (in other words, that the win/loss result has not yet been determined). In other words, this simplified decorative symbol 504 can be said to be a symbol for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502). When this simplified decorative symbol 504 is displayed in a variable state, it is preferable that it continues to display in a variable state from the start of the variable state of the special symbol until it stops. In other words, even if the normal decorative symbol 502 temporarily stops midway (for example, when a special normal decorative symbol 502 that displays text such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo-consecutive display), it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbol 504 is configured not to temporarily stop midway (therefore, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not have a special symbol that displays text such as "NEXT"). (The simple decorative symbols 504 only stop at a confirmed win.) Furthermore, in order to prevent players from mistakenly believing that a losing spin is a jackpot, and in order to prevent players from realizing in advance that a jackpot is in a winning spin, it is preferable to display the spins in a way that maintains a combination of symbols indicating a loss, regardless of whether it is a losing spin or a jackpot spin (for example, if the types of simple decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", the spins are displayed as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...). Furthermore, when the spinning starts from a state where the regular decorative symbols 502 and the simplified decorative symbols 504 are fixed in place, the starting symbol combination (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the spinning) is one symbol combination that has progressed from the symbol combination at the time of the fixed stop. However, when the spinning starts from a state where the simplified decorative symbols 504 are fixed in place, the starting symbol combination will be a predetermined symbol combination, regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. For example, in a situation where both the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are fixed at "243," when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the normal decorative symbol 502 will be "354," but the starting symbol combination for the simplified decorative symbol 504 will be fixed at "123." Similarly, in a situation where both the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are fixed at "333," when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the normal decorative symbol 502 will be "444," but the starting symbol combination for the simplified decorative symbol 504 will be fixed at "123." In addition to this, the simplified decorative symbol 504 has the following characteristics, which clearly differentiate its role from the normal decorative symbol 502.

(1) The display area of the regular decorative symbol 502, which is easily recognizable by the player, is larger than the display area of the simplified decorative symbol 504, which is used for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the regular decorative symbol 502). This configuration is preferable not only when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are in a fixed stop state, when the regular decorative symbol 502 has just formed a reach state (a reach state before it develops into a super reach effect) and the simplified decorative symbol 504 is in a variable display state, but also when the regular decorative symbol 502 is a small symbol during a super reach effect and the simplified decorative symbol 504 is in a variable display state.

(2) The display position of the regular decorative symbol 502 can be set to different positions depending on whether it is in the first performance mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second performance mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby enabling diversity in the performance of the regular decorative symbol 502 depending on the performance mode. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbol 504 only needs to serve the role of compensating for the display state of the regular decorative symbol 502, so it is preferable to keep it in the same display position regardless of whether it is in the first or second performance mode, thus avoiding unnecessary development and design. Details of the performance modes will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the regular decorative symbols 502 can be changed depending on whether it is the first performance mode (for example, normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second performance mode (for example, rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby enabling diversity in the performance of the regular decorative symbols 502 according to the performance mode. For example, in the first performance mode, the regular decorative symbols 502 are composed only of number regular decorative symbols 502 (regular decorative symbols 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second performance mode, the regular decorative symbols 502 are composed of a combination of number regular decorative symbols 502 and ally character regular decorative symbols 502 (regular decorative symbols 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simplified decorative pattern 504 only needs to serve the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to construct the simplified decorative pattern 504 using only the same display pattern, for example, only the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, regardless of whether it is the first or second performance mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design work.

(4) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 can be varied (moved, made into a small symbol) according to the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach is in progress, etc.), thereby allowing for diversity in the display of the normal decorative symbol 502. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbol 504 only needs to serve the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, so it is preferable to keep the display area of the simplified decorative symbol 504 constant (do not move, do not make it a small symbol) to avoid unnecessary development and design work.

(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can be made more varied in its display by varying its fluctuation speed to low, medium, high, or very high depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of the fluctuation, in the middle of the fluctuation, or just before the end of the fluctuation). On the other hand, the simplified decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, so it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by not making the fluctuation speed of the simplified decorative pattern 504 variable, or by reducing the number of stages in which it is variable (for example, only low and high speed). Furthermore, regarding the direction of fluctuation, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 can fluctuate not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allowing fluctuation in multiple directions), while the simplified decorative pattern 504 should only fluctuate from top to bottom.

(6) The regular decorative symbols 502 perform a temporary stop (a temporary stop during the variation of the special symbols, accompanied by slight fluctuations) before the definitive stop (stopping at the timing when the special symbols stop). At this time, by temporarily stopping a specific symbol (for example, a regular decorative symbol 502 with the word "Super" written on it, which foreshadows development into a Super Reach effect), a connection can be made between the effects of the regular decorative symbols 502 and other effects. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbols 504 only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the regular decorative symbols 502. Therefore, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design work by not temporarily stopping the simplified decorative symbols 504 or temporarily stopping specific symbols.

(7) Normally, the decorative symbols 502 overlap with the display area of other pre-announcement effects (for example, comment pre-announcement effects, step-up pre-announcement effects, etc.), meaning they are displayed in superimposition. Such superimposition is permitted in order to create powerful effects using as much of the area on the performance display device 60 as possible. However, in the case of the simplified decorative symbols 504, since they play a role in compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbols 502, it is desirable that the display area of the simplified decorative symbols 504 not overlap with the display area of the other pre-announcement effects (i.e., not displayed in superimposition). However, in relation to special pre-announcement effects that inevitably overlap (for example, group pre-announcement effects displayed on the entire performance display device 60, background pre-announcement effects, etc.), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simplified decorative symbols 504 higher than the display priority of the special pre-announcement effects (setting the simplified decorative symbols 504 to be displayed in front of the special pre-announcement effects). Furthermore, it is desirable that the right-hand shooting notification image (different from the image displayed during special gameplay, this is a special right-hand shooting notification image displayed during high-base state; however, it may be the same image as the one used during special gameplay) be clearly visible to the player. Therefore, it is desirable to design the display area of the simplified decorative symbol 504 and the display area of the right-hand shooting notification image so that they do not overlap (do not display superimposed). However, if the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 and the display area of the right-hand shooting notification image may overlap (display superimposed). In that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the normal decorative symbol 502 lower than that of the right-hand shooting notification image (setting the normal decorative symbol 502 to be displayed behind the right-hand shooting notification image).

(8) During special gameplay, the regular decorative symbols 502 may be displayed individually rather than in combination. For example, if "777" is confirmed to stop and then special gameplay is performed, "7" will be displayed during special gameplay, and if "222" is confirmed to stop and then special gameplay is performed, "2" will be displayed during special gameplay. This allows players to recognize which regular decorative symbol 502 resulted in the jackpot during special gameplay. As an alternative, only the regular decorative symbols 502 corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc., which indicate jackpots of 7R or more or 10R jackpots) may be displayed during special gameplay. Thus, it is desirable that the display area for one regular decorative symbol 502 displayed during special gameplay not overlap with other display areas during special gameplay, such as the round display area, right-hand play display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area; in other words, it should not be displayed in superimposed view (however, it may overlap with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Furthermore, while it is preferable to hide the simplified decorative symbol 504 during special gameplay (because no variation display is performed during special gameplay), it may be displayed during special gameplay. If configured in this way, it is desirable that it not overlap with other display areas during special gameplay, such as the round display area, right-hand play display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area; in other words, it should not be displayed in superimposed view, and it is also desirable that it not overlap with the highlighted display.

(9) In addition to the movement of the regular decorative symbols 502 (for example, movement from top to bottom), the symbols may also be displayed with predetermined actions at the start of the movement, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be called the movement at the start of the movement, the movement during a temporary stop, the movement when a reach is established, and the shaking movement). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "624" at the time of the confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the regular decorative symbol 502 all enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and continues to shake. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and continues to shake. Then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and shakes slightly. Finally, at the time of the confirmed stop, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols are terminated. In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of the movements. Furthermore, in the case of a normal reach (when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "212" at the time of confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the regular decorative symbol 502 all enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and continues to shake. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and continues to shake. After that, to indicate a reach, the left and right symbols rotate and continue to shake again. Then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops and shakes slightly. Finally, at the confirmed stop timing, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any movements.

Furthermore, when the game progresses to a Super Reach sequence (when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "232" at the time of a confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the regular decorative symbol 502 all enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after the "2" temporarily stops, the shaking motion continues. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after the "2" temporarily stops, the shaking motion continues. After that, to indicate that it is a reach, the left and right symbols rotate and then the shaking motion continues again. While the right symbol is performing a shaking motion, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol moves from top to bottom in an enlarged state, and it now overlaps with or has a higher overlap rate with the left and right symbols, which previously did not overlap or had a low overlap rate), and then the background changes from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the super reach animation, and if the super reach animation indicates that it is a miss, the background changes from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left, middle, and right symbols continue to shake motion for a predetermined time, and then, at the confirmed stop timing, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end (the middle symbol does not perform any bouncing or rotating motion). In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of the movements. This configuration allows for greater variety in the presentation of the regular decorative symbols 502, while the simplified decorative symbols 504 only need to compensate for the display state of the regular decorative symbols 502. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the simplified decorative symbols 504 to not perform any particular actions, thus avoiding unnecessary development and design work. Furthermore, even during the period between the stop of movement and the display of the standby demo animation, the regular decorative symbols 502 may perform a shaking motion after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop of movement (for example, 10 seconds later). However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbols 504 do not perform any actions at all. This configuration stimulates the desire to play even during the game standby period (when the symbols are stopped), and the absence of shaking motion by the simplified decorative symbols 504 ensures that the player is notified that the game is in standby mode. Additionally, when the standby demo animation is displayed, the regular decorative symbols 502 are hidden, but it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbols 504 remain displayed. This method emphasizes the display of the standby demo screen while still ensuring that the displayed symbols are visible. However, since no gameplay is occurring during the standby demo, the simplified decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden.

Furthermore, among the regular decorative symbols 502, certain symbols (for example, the middle symbol "7") may be configured to either not perform a predetermined action or to have a lower probability of performing one compared to other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the temporary stop action (a bouncing action) described above (especially for the middle symbol "7" after a reach has been established). By configuring it in this way, the rarity of the action for a particular symbol can be increased. Furthermore, when a standard decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining a standard decorative pattern 502 of a number and a standard decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), both the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number and the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character will perform a swaying motion. However, by making the swaying amplitude (the swaying distance; for example, if it sways up and down, the distance between the highest and lowest positions of the standard decorative pattern 502 during the swaying motion) different, a more dynamic swaying motion can be achieved. In such a configuration, the swaying amplitude of the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number may be made smaller than that of the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character, or the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number may not sway at all, while only the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character sways.

The regular decorative pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and can be subject to transformation; that is, it can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the effect layer 524. On the other hand, the simplified decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and is not subject to transformation; that is, it is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, while in the screen transformation effect it can be included in the image showing the game status, and is displayed on the game status layer 523. The movable mechanism 520 can also be operated in a predetermined situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed with the regular decorative pattern 502 as the target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed while the regular decorative pattern 502 is changing, temporarily stopped, or in a state where a reach is formed; in this situation, the image transformation is performed while continuously playing and displaying the scrolling movement of the regular decorative pattern 502 and the shaking movement when it is temporarily stopped and when a reach is formed, rather than a static screen). When the movable parts 520 are viewed from the front while in operation, the visibility of the normal decorative symbols 502 during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first movable parts 520a, second movable parts 520b, third movable parts 520c, and fourth movable parts 520d while they are in operation. However, as shown in Figure 34, the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first movable parts 520a, second movable parts 520b, third movable parts 520c, and fourth movable parts 520d while they are in operation. As mentioned above, the display may be configured to be in a position where visibility is not obstructed when at least one of the movable parts is in operation. In order to create a sense of unity in the screen transformation effect, the symbol change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal decorative symbols 502 are configured to move in the same dynamic way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the symbols are currently changing, and if the symbols are temporarily stopped, which symbols are temporarily stopped, the simplified decorative symbols 504 are excluded from the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect to ensure the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504. In this case, the operation of the linked movable mechanism 520 is set to an operation mode that does not obstruct the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504. The relationship between the normal decorative symbols 502 and the simplified decorative symbols 504 may also be applied to the relationship between the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) and the simplified hold image 507. In other words, the movable mechanism 520 can also be operated in a predetermined situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed, including the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) as the target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed while the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) is being displayed; in this situation, if the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) is being displayed with a rotation animation or a light-up animation, the image will be transformed while the animation is continuously played and displayed). When the movable mechanism 520 is viewed from the front during its operation, the visibility of the normal hold image 506 (image in motion 508) during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d during operation. However, as shown in Figure 34, the visibility of the simplified hold image 507 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d during operation. As mentioned above, the mechanism may be configured to display the image in a position where visibility is not obstructed during the operation of at least one of the movable mechanisms. In order to create a sense of unity with the screen transformation effect, the symbol change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal hold image 506 (image in motion 508) are configured to move in the same dynamic way. On the other hand, to make it easier to determine whether the symbols are currently changing, and if so, which symbols are temporarily stopped, the simplified hold image 507 is excluded from the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect to ensure its visibility. In this case, the operation of the linked movable mechanism 520 is designed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the simplified hold image 507, thereby more reliably ensuring its visibility.

In the screen transformation effect, regardless of the content of the frame image (the first image to be transformed), the background image 518 (the second image) is the same as the background image 518 in other screen transformation effects that use other images as the target of transformation. For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is a completely black image and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation effect. By standardizing the background image of each screen transformation effect to a black image, it is possible to suppress increases in display processing load and image size. As mentioned above, the background image 518 may also be displayed in a way that, for example, loops a moving image with the word "CHANCE" scrolling like a text overlay.

If a predetermined error occurs in the display device 60 (for example, a door opening error or frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, or a prize ball payout error that stops prize ball payout due to insufficient game balls or the upper and lower ball trays 105 and 106 being full), an error warning image 536 indicating the error (showing the occurrence and type of error) is displayed. Furthermore, if the screen transformation effect is executed while the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue. In this case, as shown in Figure 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the foremost error display layer 521 and not on the effect layer 524, so it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image that is subject to transformation, and no transformation process is performed. This not only allows the execution of the screen transformation effect to be prevented even when an error occurs, but also prevents the visibility of the error warning image 536 from being hindered by excluding it from the target of the screen transformation effect. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume level can be adjusted (volume adjustment) through the player's operation, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33 through the player's operation. Depending on the type of error that occurs during gameplay (type of error warning sound), the sound effects associated with gameplay (for example, the background music for a super reach or sound effects that occur during a screen transformation) are configured not to be output due to the priority output of the error warning sound. For example, if an error occurs during a screen transformation, and that error is a prize payout error, both the error warning sound and the sound effects will be output (however, the error warning sound will be output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, and the sound effects will be output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if it is a door opening error, only the error warning sound will be output, and the sound effects will not be output (or the sound effects will be output at a lower volume than when a prize payout error occurs). Note that the types of errors are just examples. In the event of an error occurring during gameplay, even if a screen transformation animation is performed, the volume setting image 532 is not displayed on the animation layer 524. Therefore, it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image subject to transformation, and no transformation process is performed. This not only ensures that volume adjustment is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also ensures that the visibility of the volume setting image 532 is not hindered by excluding it from the screen transformation animation. The volume setting image 532 can display the currently set volume level (for example, it can display "Volume level is 1" or "Volume level is 5"), and when the volume level is adjusted by the player, the displayed content changes (for example, if the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display switches from "Volume level is 1" to "Volume level is 5"). In this case, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player during the execution of the screen transformation effect, and the player performs further operations during the execution of the screen transformation effect and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the screen transformation animation is executed, and the screen transformation animation is executed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the player performs an operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and the screen transformation animation is executed, thereby adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation animation is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation animation is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. To ensure visibility, it is preferable to configure the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image so that they do not overlap in display (they are displayed in different display areas).

As shown in Figure 30, the display device 60 shows a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds when a hold is stored. Furthermore, when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed immediately to indicate that a hold has occurred, but rather is displayed with an animation (details of which will be described later) that gradually reveals it. Even if a screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506, that is, from the start to the completion of the animation (until the display of the normal hold image 506 is complete), the animation display is not interrupted. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here includes not only the animation display when a hold occurs normally (when a hold occurs without a pre-announcement), but also the animation display executed when the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 is changed as a pre-announcement effect (for example, an animation in which the normal hold image 506 lights up white and then changes color when a hold occurs, or an animation in which a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal hold image 506 to change its color). However, if the system is configured so that the pre-announcement is not executed (no lottery or decision is made) even if a new ball enters, in order to draw attention to the screen transformation effect, and if the system is configured so that the animation display effect when a normal hold occurs is not executed, the specification that does not stop the animation display when the screen transformation effect is executed will only be adopted for the animation display when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-announcement). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-announcement) may include, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that makes it appear by moving from off-screen such as the bottom of the screen, an animation that rotates or shakes, an animation that adds a color change such as flashing for a moment, or an animation that expands or contracts in size for a moment. Normally, the held image 506 is displayed on the performance layer 524. If a screen transformation performance is executed in the middle of the animation display when a hold occurs, the frame images including the images in the middle of the animation display may be sequentially subjected to transformation. Alternatively, the display content may be updated to continue the animation display of the normal held image 506 included in the target object 516 while the screen transformation performance is being displayed, i.e., while the target object 516 is being transformed. In this way, even if a screen transformation performance is executed while the animation display of the normal held image 506 when a hold occurs is being executed, the animation display is not interrupted and continues, preventing any unnaturalness or incongruity in the flow of the performance. Furthermore, even if the hold occurs consecutively and the animation display when a hold occurs consecutively, the animation display of the normal held image 506 corresponding to the later ball entry is executed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display of the normal held image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball entry. Therefore, depending on the timing of the hold event, (1) if the first ball enters while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if a subsequent ball enters while the screen transformation effect and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters are being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters, (2) if the timing to start the execution of the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters is being executed, the screen transformation effect will be executed while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters is being executed, and if a subsequent ball enters while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters and the screen transformation effect are being executed, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed simultaneously. (3) If a ball enters the field later while an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball enters the field is being displayed, an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball enters the field will be displayed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display. Furthermore, in any of situations (1) to (3), even if there are further ball entries in that situation (while simultaneously executing the same actions) and those entries result in a reserve ball with a high probability of winning (for example, a reserve ball that is scheduled to trigger a super reach animation, or a reserve ball that is scheduled to result in a win), it is preferable not to execute the animation display that is normally performed when changing the color or pattern of the reserve image 506 as a pre-announcement effect for that reserve ball in that situation.

In this embodiment, there are multiple types of performance modes, and for each performance mode, it is determined which type of performance, such as symbol variation performances or pre-announcement performances, may be executed.
To explain the performance modes and the performance content executed within each mode in more detail, for example, there are several types of performance modes, such as "Normal Mode,""ChanceMode," and "Rush Mode." Depending on the game state (or the selected variation pattern state) and the number of times the special symbols have been displayed, one of these performance modes is selected, and a variation performance corresponding to the selected performance mode is executed. Basically, "Normal Mode" is set when the game state is normal, "Chance Mode" is set when the game state is time-saving mode, and "Rush Mode" is set when the game state is probability variation mode. When any of the performance modes is set, a background image (background image displayed behind the decorative symbols 61) exclusive to that performance mode is displayed on the screen as a performance (variation performance) that indicates that the player is in that performance mode, and background music exclusive to that performance mode is output from the speaker 108. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each performance mode, so the player can recognize which performance mode they are currently in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage." After 20 or more spins or when a Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) fails, the game transitions from "Stage A" to "Stage B," from "Stage B" to "Stage C," and from "Stage C" to "Stage A." If the Pre-read予告演出 (Pre-read Notification Performance) results in a successful execution (transition) to the "Pre-read Stage," the game transitions from the current stage to the "Pre-read Stage." (When the game transitions to the "Pre-read Stage," the execution of the Super Reach演出 is confirmed. If a jackpot is achieved, matching numbers are displayed on the "Pre-read Stage." If a jackpot is achieved, numbers other than matching are displayed on the "Pre-read Stage," and the game returns to the stage before the transition to the "Pre-read Stage" in the next spin.) Each of the "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage" has a different background music (stage BGM) (different from both the "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode" stage BGM). In "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ends) when the reel stops (confirmed stop) without forming a reach (a miss that does not create a reach state, such as a scattered number like "351"), and starts again from the beginning at the start of the next reel spin. In "Stage B,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the reel stops (confirmed stop) without forming a reach, and continues to be output in the next reel spin (the same configuration applies to "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode").

In this stage, the pseudo-consecutive reel spinning effect can be performed in any of the "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Pre-read Stage." However, in any of these stages, when the pseudo-consecutive reel spinning effect is temporarily stopped (when a predetermined pseudo-consecutive reel spinning symbol (for example, a symbol with the word "NEXT") is displayed near the predetermined temporary stop position as the middle symbol), the stage BGM is not output (it is interrupted). The stage BGM starts from the beginning again when the reel spins again (when the reel spins again after the temporary stop), or switches to a different BGM than the one before the reel spin. Subsequently, if the game progresses to a Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) in "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Pre-read Stage," the background image switches from the background image of the current stage to the background image of the Super Reach演出 (and simultaneously switches to BGM specifically for the Super Reach演出). During the execution of the Super Reach演出, the stage BGM is not output. If the Super Reach演出 displays an indication of a miss, the background image switches back to the background image of the current stage (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach演出 developed) within the spin display where the Super Reach演出 was executed. However, in this situation, until the next spin display begins, even if the stage background image is displayed, neither the stage BGM nor the BGM specifically for the Super Reach演出 is output (it is either silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the Super Reach演出 BGM is output). Therefore, even if the reel stops without a reach (a confirmed stop), the stage BGM will not be interrupted (it will not end). Even in "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Pre-read Stage" (and even in "Stage A" which do not), if the reel stops after a super reach animation, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the reel stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will restart from the beginning at the start of the next reel.

In "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode," the pseudo-consecutive spin animation is not performed. Here, a special animation is performed that suggests the pseudo-consecutive spin animation will be performed (for example, a continuation dialogue予告 such as "It will continue!" which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo-consecutive spin animation, or "Maybe it will continue?" which does not confirm the execution of the subsequent pseudo-consecutive spin animation), suggesting that the pseudo-consecutive spin animation (re-spin display) will be performed later. However, this special animation is only displayed in "Stage A" and "Stage C," and not in "Stage B" or "Pre-read Stage." In other words, both stages where the possibility of the pseudo-consecutive spin animation being performed can be sensed in advance and stages where it cannot be sensed are provided, and by repeatedly transitioning between these stages, an animation is created that will keep the player from getting bored. In "Stage A," a special animation based on character A is performed, while in "Stage C," a special animation based on character B is performed. Furthermore, there are pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events, which are different from special events and, simply by occurring, guarantee that a pseudo-consecutive win event will be executed afterward (for example, an event where the line "Continuity Confirmed!" is always displayed when character C appears). In addition, there are development confirmation events, which are different from both special events and pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events and, simply by occurring, guarantee that a pseudo-consecutive win event will not be executed afterward and that the game will develop into a super reach event (for example, an event where the line "Development Confirmed!" is always displayed when character D appears). These pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events and development confirmation events can be executed in any of the "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Pre-read Stage." In this way, by displaying one or more combinations of special events, pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events, and development confirmation events when a pseudo-consecutive win event is performed or when a pseudo-consecutive win event is not performed, the expected probability of a pseudo-consecutive win event being executed and the expected probability of development into a super reach event can be diversified. Furthermore, during a single spin display, all of the special effects, pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed. In this case, during a certain re-spin display (for example, the first or second re-spin display), there may be patterns in which the special effects are executed, patterns in which the pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effects are executed, and patterns in which the development confirmation effects are executed. Here, in the pattern in which the special effects are executed during a certain re-spin display (for example, the first or second re-spin display), the pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effect may be executed further during that re-spin display after the special effects have been executed.

In this embodiment, different types of effects may be executed depending on which effect mode is being performed. Furthermore, the type of transformation-targeted effect executed differs depending on the effect mode, and the type and presence of suggestive effects indicating the possibility of a transformation-targeted effect also differ. In this embodiment, at the timing when "NEXT" of the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed, the screen transformation effect is not executed (it is not treated as a transformation-targeted effect) in order to let the player know that the pseudo-consecutive effect is being performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the screen transformation effect may be executed (it may be treated as a transformation-targeted effect). In that case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the possibility of a screen transformation effect occurring is lower than that of other predetermined pre-announcement effects (for example, the effect that freezes the enemy character during the aforementioned super-reach effect, or the step-up pre-announcement effect which is part of the pre-announcement effect before entering a reach state).

First, whether the symbol change triggers a screen transformation effect or not, a reach state can be formed during that symbol change. Furthermore, the likelihood of the screen transformation effect being triggered differs depending on the type of symbol change effect and the type of symbol that results in a reach. Specifically, for example, the probability of the screen transformation effect being triggered is higher when a reach occurs with the "7" symbol than when a reach occurs with the "2" symbol, as the type of symbol that results in a reach and the probability of the screen transformation effect being triggered are correlated. More specifically, when a reach occurs with the "7" symbol, the ratio of when the screen transformation effect that freezes the enemy character during the super reach effect is triggered versus when it is not is 5:5, and when a reach occurs with the "2" symbol, the ratio of when the screen transformation effect that freezes the enemy character during the super reach effect is triggered versus when it is not is 2:8. The screen transformation animation may be configured to increase the likelihood of a "7" symbol appearing in a winning combination. For example, if the screen transformation animation is performed during a step-up予告演出 (pre-announcement animation) and a winning combination is subsequently achieved, the probability of a "7" symbol appearing is 10%, while the probability of a "2" symbol appearing is 15%. However, if the screen transformation animation is not performed during a step-up予告演出 and a winning combination is subsequently achieved, the probability of a "7" symbol appearing is 1%, while the probability of a "2" symbol appearing is 20%.

In screen transformation effects, the standard decorative symbols 502 may be included in the effect layer 524 as target objects 516, but the simplified decorative symbols 504 are not included in target objects 516 and may be included in the game status layer 523 as images indicating the game status. Furthermore, even while the screen transformation effect is running, the volume setting image 532 for volume adjustment can be displayed, and the volume can be adjusted according to the player's actions.

If the screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the effect is performed, the volume setting image 532 will continue to be displayed on a different layer from the effect layer 524, namely the volume and brightness display layer 522, which is not included in the frame image that is the target of the transformation. The player can then adjust the volume.

The normal hold image 506 may be subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect, but the simplified hold image 507 is not subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect. Furthermore, since the movable mechanism 520 can be operated even while the screen deformation effect that includes the normal hold image 506 as a target is being executed, care must be taken to ensure that the visibility of the simplified hold image 507 is not obstructed by the movable mechanism 520 when viewed from the front while it is in operation. In this case, the display of the normal hold image 506 may also be designed so that its visibility is not obstructed by the movable mechanism 520, or it may be designed so that it is obstructed. Alternatively, the normal hold image 506 may not be subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect.

The system is configured to output specific sound effects when the screen transformation effect is executed. Specifically, a "ping!" sound effect is output when the screen transformation effect starts (for the first second), a "gugugu" sound effect is output while the screen transformation effect is running (from one second after the start to one second before the end), and a "smack!" sound effect is output when the screen transformation effect ends (for the last second). In this case, the sound effects at the start or end of the screen transformation effect are louder than the sound effects in the middle of the screen transformation effect, assuming the volume level is the same (this relationship is true regardless of which volume level is set), making the screen transformation effect more visually and aurally engaging. Regarding the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect, it is preferable to configure the system so that at the start or end of the screen deformation effect, the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect is small compared to before the start of the screen deformation effect (unlike volume, the reduction rate is small if shrinking occurs, and the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is short if four vertices are deformed), while in the middle of the screen deformation effect, the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect is large compared to before the start of the screen deformation effect (the reduction rate is large if shrinking occurs, and the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is long if four vertices are deformed). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create an effect with an unexpected twist where the visual contrast and auditory contrast are reversed. The volume adjustment has, for example, five levels, and the volume can be set to any of levels 1 to 5, and the effect sounds corresponding to each effect are output at the volume corresponding to the set volume level. Here, even at the same volume level, the volume will differ depending on the type of effect. For example, as mentioned above, the "Pikiiin!" sound effect at the start of the screen transformation animation (for the first second from the start) and the "Pishaan!" sound effect at the end of the screen transformation animation (for the last second from the end) are louder than the "Gugugu" sound effect during the screen transformation animation (from one second after the start to one second before the end), regardless of the volume level set (for example, at volume level 1, the "Pikiiin!" and "Pishaan!" sound effects are 30 dB and the "Gugugu" sound effect is 20 dB; at volume level 5, the "Pikiiin!" and "Pishaan!" sound effects are 80 dB and the "Gugugu" sound effect is 70 dB).
As mentioned above, the normally held image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the target object 516 and displayed as targets for transformation in the screen transformation effect.
Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, the normally held image 506 and the changing image 508 may be specified to not be included in the target object 516 as targets for transformation in the screen transformation effect, but to be displayed in a separate layer, the game status layer 523.

When a predetermined error occurs, the display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that error. If an error occurs during the execution of a screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image subject to transformation and is displayed on an error display layer 521, which is a different layer from the effect layer 524 where the screen transformation effect is displayed.

The Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) has a first and second half, and when a screen transformation effect is performed, a red flashing effect is more likely to occur in the first half, suggesting that development to the second half, which is the so-called "hidden button" effect, is certain or highly likely. Here, the screen transformation effect is preferably performed before the Super Reach演出, for example, when the screen transformation effect is performed in the step-up予告演出 (step-up予告演出) before the reach state is reached. However, in addition, for example, the specification may be such that a screen transformation effect that freezes the enemy character is performed in the first half during the Super Reach演出, and when the screen transformation effect is performed in the first half, a red flashing effect that suggests the appearance of the hidden button effect is more likely to occur in the first half. The hidden button effect is one in which, although no button image or instructions for button operation are displayed on the screen, a specific effect (in this case, a flashing effect) appears when the player operates the effect button 109 at a predetermined timing, and this is performed in the first half. Furthermore, the light-emitting effect is an effect that changes the color of the decorative lamps 111 surrounding the effect display device 60 and the color (image color) of the light-like effect display on the effect display device 60. The expectation level increases in the order of blue → green → red (higher expectation of development to the second half or a big win). The hidden button effect can also be performed by automatically pressing the effect button 109 by holding it down. As a variation, if the screen transformation effect, which freezes the enemy character, is performed in the second half of the super reach effect rather than the first half, then when the screen transformation effect is performed in the second half, compared to when the screen transformation effect is not performed, the light-emitting color of the decorative lamps 111 surrounding the effect display device 60 and the color of the light-like effect display on the effect display device 60 are more likely to be red, rather than blue or green, suggesting a certainty or high expectation of development to the second half of the super reach effect.

When a screen transformation effect is performed, button images other than the normal color (e.g., white), such as red or rainbow-colored button images that suggest a relatively high probability of winning, are more likely to be displayed. These button images are often those displayed before entering a reach state or during a super reach effect. When the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed, other effects are displayed. For example, if a button image is displayed before entering a reach state and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue予告 effect (an effect where the probability of winning varies depending on the dialogue content and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed. If a button image is displayed during a super reach effect (towards the end of the second half) and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (an effect where a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the probability of winning varies depending on the type of character displayed and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a non-standard colored button image is displayed compared to a standard colored button image, the type of animation that is more likely to display when the animation button 109 is operated is one that has a higher probability of a big win (for example, a red dialogue予告 animation is more likely than a blue dialogue予告 animation, and a red cut-in animation is more likely than a blue cut-in animation). In addition, in this embodiment, if a screen transformation animation is performed before the button image is displayed, the non-standard colored button image is more likely to be displayed than a standard colored button image compared to when the screen transformation animation is not performed. An animation that instructs (prompts) the player to perform an action by displaying a button image is called an operation instruction animation (button animation).

Furthermore, this embodiment includes a button appearance prompt, which is a prompt that builds anticipation for whether or not an operation instruction prompt (button prompt) will be initiated. In this button appearance prompt, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the prompt button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, creating the expectation that a button image resembling the prompt button 109 will appear afterward (i.e., that the operation instruction prompt will be initiated). If the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 gradually changes into a button image in this button appearance prompt, the prompt is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 fades out of the screen in this button appearance prompt, the prompt is unsuccessful. Note that when displaying a button image, it is not always necessary to execute such a button appearance prompt; the button image may be displayed directly without going through the button appearance prompt. Here, the button appearance prompt may have multiple display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of changing into a button image than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Furthermore, as another variation, when a button appearance prompt is executed, it may always change to a button image. In such a configuration, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of a big win than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Alternatively, multiple types of button images may be provided (for example, a blue button image and a red button image, with the red button image being more likely to trigger a high-probability prompt than the blue button image, for example, the red dialogue prompt being more likely to be triggered than the blue dialogue prompt), and the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to result in a specific button image (for example, a red button image) rather than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. If the button appearance prompt always changes to a button image when executed, then, in addition to the above, the system may be configured so that a longer button appearance prompt (e.g., 4 seconds) has a higher probability of a big win than a shorter one (e.g., 2 seconds), or so that a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) is displayed than a shorter one (e.g., 2 seconds). Furthermore, if the system is configured to have multiple display modes for the button appearance prompt, the system may be configured so that a button appearance prompt with a higher probability of a big win is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the display (a specific timing after a reach) than in the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach), or the system may be configured so that the button appearance prompt is not executed in the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach), but only in the latter half (a specific timing after a reach).

During the execution of the operation instruction sequence, an operation validity period (input validity time) is set during which the operation of the sequence button 109 is valid. The operation validity period is the period during which the operation of the sequence button 109 is validly accepted. "Validly accepting the operation of the sequence button 109" means that when the sequence button 109 is operated, the sub-board 300 validly accepts the operation of the sequence button 109, and a predetermined process is performed based on that valid operation. The predetermined process is the process of advancing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue announcement performance) is performed. During this operation validity period, the sequence button 109 (the LED element built into the sequence button 109) is illuminated, and a button image resembling the sequence button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the sequence button 109 is valid or to prompt an operation input. In addition, a circular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as the "specific image") is displayed on the screen around the button image. This specific image gradually enlarges as the operation validity period elapses. If the performance button 109 is operated during the operation validity period, the sequence progresses to a dialogue予告 (preview) sequence. When the performance button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to its final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction sequence (button sequence) is a sequence where the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern A). However, other button sequences in this embodiment (button sequences other than the operation instruction sequence) are sequences where the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern B).

In the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), when one of several characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and speaks a predetermined line of dialogue, a specific image is continuously displayed around this character in its final display state. In this dialogue予告演出, the display state (display color) of the line spoken by the character indicates the likelihood of a big win. In this embodiment, three types of display colors for the dialogue are set: "blue," "red," and "giraffe pattern," and the likelihood of a big win increases by one level in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern." When the dialogue予告演出 is started (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a variation of this embodiment, the dialogue予告演出 may be configured as a step-up type演出. This step-up presentation divides the display process of the pre-announcement presentation into multiple stages, with the number of stages displayed varying so that a higher number of stages increases the expectation of a big win. In this embodiment, it is an evolving presentation that changes the presentation style (characters and dialogue) in stages according to a predetermined order, and the level of expectation of a big win is suggested or announced according to the number of stages of development. For example, the step-up presentation may consist of two presentation steps (step-up 1 and step-up 2), and the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in the first presentation step, step-up 1, may be different from the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in the second presentation step, step-up 2.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompt is initiated, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the 109 button will be displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into the button image and the prompt is successful, the operation instruction prompt will be initiated.
(B) When the operation instruction animation is started, the validity period for operating the animation button 109 is set, the animation button 109 is illuminated, and a button image resembling the animation button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining validity period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific circular image (effect image) emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. This display prompts the user to operate the animation button 109 within the validity period for button operation.
(C) As the button operation validity period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and a specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the performance button 109 is operated within the operation validity period, the display switches from the operation instruction performance to the dialogue予告 performance. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to its final display mode and continues to be displayed.
(D) When the dialogue予告演出 begins, a character and the line "This is a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the displayed line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in its final display form. By displaying this specific image across the operation instruction演出 and the dialogue予告演出, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue予告演出 will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (it is suggested that this button effect is the dialogue予告演出).

Furthermore, as a variation of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the system may be configured such that the probability of a big win in the spin display is relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed compared to when it is not executed. Alternatively, the system may be configured such that the longer the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image), the relatively higher the probability of a big win in the spin display, or a highly probable effect indicating whether or not a big win has occurred triggered by the button operation. In this case, when the dialogue予告演出 (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after a reach, which is the latter half of the spin display as described above), it is preferable that the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is set to be longer than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Conversely, the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set to be shorter than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Furthermore, as another variation, multiple display modes for the button image may be provided (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow-colored button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.). In that case, the possibility of executing the button appearance prompting effect and the duration of the effect if executed may be made different depending on the display mode of the button image to be executed afterward. Furthermore, as a further variation, the dialogue notification effect may be made executable and (the button image may be displayed) even during the execution of one or more fluctuation displays (pre-read fluctuation displays which are fluctuations before the target), and the possibility of the button appearance prompting effect being executed during the execution of the pre-read fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the pre-read target's reserved ball is consumed (the fluctuation display), and the possibility of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect (such as the button appearance prompting effect with a red effect as described above or a long-duration (for example, 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect) being executed during the execution of the pre-read fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the pre-read target's reserved ball is consumed (the fluctuation display). As another variation, the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) (or a low-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a high-probability button appearance prompt), and the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach) (or a high-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a low-probability button appearance prompt). In this case, the longer the period between the predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the display) and the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds), the higher the probability of a big win. Alternatively, the button image at the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) may be more likely to be a high-probability image (for example, a red button image is more likely than a blue button image). Furthermore, the button appearance may be configured to use pattern A during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) and pattern B during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach). Furthermore, as will be explained in detail later, the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the variable display) may be set to start from the beginning of the variable display, while the timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach (the second half of the variable display) may be set to start from the beginning of a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect). The timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach (the second half of the variable display) may be set to be longer than the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the variable display).

A screen transformation effect may be executed as a pre-announcement effect based on a prediction. When configured in this way, the screen transformation effect will not be executed from the symbol change currently in progress at the new ball entry timing, which is the pre-announcement timing, but will be executed from the next change (the change following the change in which a new ball entered). Specifically, in the change in which a new ball entered, there is a normal symbol change (the normal decorative symbol 502 changes without the screen changing), and immediately after the start of the next change (for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the change), there is also a normal symbol change (the normal decorative symbol 502 changes without the screen changing), but thereafter, the symbol change continues with the screen transformation effect executed until the middle of the target change that was the target of the pre-announcement (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the target change). A symbol change with the screen transformation effect executed is, for example, the display of the normal decorative symbol 502 with the screen tilted or the screen reduced in size. As mentioned above, during target changes that are the target of the pre-read, the screen transformation animation continues until a certain point, after which it switches to the normal symbol change animation. This switch occurs at least before the super reach animation develops. Even if a power outage or other power failure occurs during the screen transformation animation that continues across multiple symbol change animations, and the power is restored, the original screen transformation animation will generally not be restored during the pre-target animation. However, the screen transformation animation may be executed again during target changes that were the target of the pre-read.

If an error occurs before the execution of the screen transformation effect, preventing the pre-transformation effect from starting for the frame image to be transformed, the screen transformation effect will not be executed even when the pre-transformation effect is due to start. For example, this could occur if a malfunction occurs in the timer used by the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300 to time the effect, preventing the pre-transformation effect from starting for the frame image to be transformed. As a variation, even if the pre-transformation effect fails to start due to a timer malfunction or other issue, the screen transformation effect may be executed by targeting only the currently displayed background effect.

The standby demo screen is displayed on the effects layer 524, but it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effects. In the modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.

If the screen transformation effect is designed to be executed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 109, the start timing of the screen transformation effect depends on the start timing of the operation of the effect button 109. The button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, but it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect. The screen transformation effect is executed after the button image is erased following the operation of the effect button 109. In a modified example, the button image may be displayed on the game status layer 523. Furthermore, in a further modified example, if the timing for displaying the button image is reached during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the button image may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (transformation target), and the effect displayed as a result of the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is displayed may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (transformation target). If a button image starts to appear while a screen transformation effect is running, and the button image finishes displaying earlier than the screen transformation effect finishes, the button image will be displayed as part of the screen transformation effect from start to finish. However, if the button image finishes displaying later than the screen transformation effect finishes, the button image will be displayed as part of the screen transformation effect from start to finish, and then displayed in its normal form (without transformation) until it finishes. This also applies to effects displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while a button image is displayed. If the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 while a screen transformation effect is running, and the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 ends earlier than the screen transformation effect ends, then the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from start to finish. However, if the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 ends later than the screen transformation effect ends, then the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from start to finish, and then displayed in its normal form (without transformation) until the end.

While the screen transformation animation is running, even if a new ball entry occurs and the corresponding prior information is information that would allow for the execution of a pre-announcement animation (for example, a high-probability ball entry that would allow for a super reach animation, or a ball entry that would result in a jackpot), the execution of the pre-announcement animation is restricted. For example, while the screen transformation animation is running, the system may be controlled to prevent the execution of pre-announcement animations triggered by new ball entries, or it may be controlled to prevent pre-announcements from being executed at all.

When a screen transformation effect is performed, the simplified decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a way that it is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. Therefore, the simplified decorative pattern 504, which was displayed in a position within the effect screen 500, i.e., overlapping the frame image 514, may be displayed outside the frame image 514 when the frame image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation effect, for example, overlapping the special first image, the frame image 510, or the second image, the background image 518 (such a display relationship occurs at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation effect (for example, in the middle)). On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. Therefore, in the screen transformation sequence, the decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a position that overlaps with, for example, the special first image, the framed image 514, but not in a position that overlaps with the second image, the background image 518. While it is preferable that this display relationship is always satisfied during the execution of the screen transformation sequence, a modified version may be specified where this display relationship occurs at least at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation sequence (for example, in the middle of the sequence) (at times other than the predetermined timing, it may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the background image 518). Furthermore, as another modified version, the decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simplified hold image 507 is displayed in a form that includes it within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of the transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal hold image 506 is not included within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included within the frame image that is the target of the transformation in the effect layer 524. As a variation, the normal hold image 506 may also be displayed in a form that includes it within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

As mentioned above, in addition to the normal movement (e.g., movement from top to bottom) of the decorative symbols 502, if the display is configured to perform predetermined actions (movement at the start of movement, movement during temporary stop, movement when a reach is established, shaking movement) at the start of movement, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, and during a temporary stop, then it is also possible to configure the system to perform a jackpot action, such as enlarging the symbols when three symbols are lined up to form a winning combination, like "777". In such a configuration, the screen transformation effect is not performed during the jackpot action, but it is preferable to enable the screen transformation effect during the execution of other predetermined actions. Furthermore, while the jackpot action is being performed, the jackpot action is not performed, but it is preferable to enable the execution of other predetermined actions.

If a new hold occurs during the execution of a screen transformation animation, the system may specify that the normal hold image 506 is also included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation, or it may specify that the normal hold image 506 is not included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation. This specification is preferable for the period of variation leading up to the development of a Super Reach animation. Since the normal hold image 506 is hidden during the display of the Super Reach animation, it is not included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation in either case when the screen transformation animation is executed during the Super Reach animation. Furthermore, the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation animation (i.e., the execution period of the screen transformation animation) is set to be longer than the animation display time when the hold occurs, regardless of the type of animation the transformation target is.

The display device 60 shows a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds when holds are stored during a normal performance. Among the normal hold images 506, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the symbol variation display started is switched to a variation image 508 indicating that the symbols are changing. Here, during the execution of a screen transformation performance, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, while the variation image 508 continues to be displayed. One type of screen transformation performance, the frame-freezing performance, freezes the previously displayed performance as if it were a pause display, and then transforms the frame image, which is a still image. Since it is preferable for the performance to not include moving images within that frame image, the normal hold image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, the variation image 508 does not increase or decrease during symbol variation, so it continues to be displayed even during the execution of the screen transformation performance. In a modified example, the variation image 508 may also be hidden during the execution of the screen transformation performance.

While the screen transformation animation is running, the simplified hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the screen transformation animation, the regular hold image 506 is not displayed, but the number of hold items shown in the simplified hold image 507 increases without interfering with the screen transformation animation.

When executing the frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the frame image, which is a still image created by pausing the previously displayed effect, may include the normal hold image 506. If an animation display was being executed when a hold occurred, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. The display of the fluctuating image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and its animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. Note that the simplified hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 will not be displayed additionally, but the number of hold items indicated by the simplified hold image 507 will increase without interfering with the screen transformation effect.

When executing a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the frame image, which is a still image created by pausing the previously displayed effect, may be hidden and not include the normal decorative symbols 502. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbols 504 continue to be displayed in a variable state. Note that the time it takes for one rotation of the simplified decorative symbols 504 to change (as mentioned above, for example, if the types of simplified decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", and the display changes as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., then one rotation is from the first "123" to the next "123") is longer than the time it takes for the effect to remain still during the screen transformation effect. Thus, if it can be recognized that the simplified decorative symbols 504 have completed at least one rotation during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game state is paused or truly stopped (not progressing).

Furthermore, unlike configuration 32, when performing a frame-in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the regular decorative symbols 502 may be included in the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the previously displayed effect as if it were paused. In that case, the regular decorative symbols 502 are fixed in display. That is, the regular decorative symbols 502 do not change or animate. On the other hand, the simple decorative symbols 504 continue to change. Note that the still time of the effect in the screen transformation effect is longer than the time it takes for one rotation of the simple decorative symbols 504 to change (as mentioned above, for example, if the types of simple decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", and they change as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., then one rotation is from the first "123" to the next "123"). Thus, if it can be recognized that the simplified decorative symbol 504 completes at least one rotation during the screen transformation animation, it is possible to determine whether the current game state is simply paused or truly stopped (not progressing).

In a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a still image obtained by color-inverting the previously displayed effect as if it were paused may be included in the target object 516 as the frame-free image 514, and the freezing and color inversion may be processed simultaneously, or the transformation may be processed simultaneously. However, while a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, another frame-freezing effect can be performed that targets a frame image, which is a still image obtained by pausing the effect as if it were paused, but the transformation process will not start while the effect is frozen.
Even while the screen transformation effect is running, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
If the screen transformation animation is performed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the animation occurs, the display of the volume setting image 532 will continue, and the player can adjust the volume simultaneously.

If an error occurs before the execution of the screen transformation effect, and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume (the specified volume), the player can adjust the volume simultaneously, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume/light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the transformation target of the screen transformation effect. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player during the execution of the screen transformation effect, and further player operation is performed during the execution of the screen transformation effect and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the screen transformation animation is executed, and the screen transformation animation is executed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the player performs an operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and the screen transformation animation is executed, thereby adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation animation is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation animation is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in the non-transformed display mode.

If a screen transformation effect, specifically a frame-freezing effect (an effect that temporarily pauses the previously displayed effect), is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, and the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when a hold occurs normally, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-announcement effect.

In screen transformation effects, when the frame images of the previously displayed video (a single frame image that is frozen in time, such as a paused display, in the case of a still-frame effect, or multiple frame images that are switched sequentially, such as in a video effect) are to be subjected to color inversion (transformation), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and volume adjustment can be performed in parallel via the player's operation. Furthermore, the subsequent "color inversion" also applies to both the frame image that is frozen in time, such as a paused display, in the still-frame effect, and the multiple frame images that are switched sequentially in the video effect, as targets for color inversion processing.
If the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the color inversion is performed, the display of the volume setting image 532 will continue even if the color inversion is performed afterward, and the player can adjust the volume in parallel.
If an error occurs before color inversion is performed and an error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue even if color inversion is performed afterward. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the player's operation, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while color inversion is being performed, and further player operation is performed while color inversion is being performed and the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-color-inverted display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the color inversion is performed, and the color inversion is performed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 changes as the player operates while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is being performed, then both the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the color inversion and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-color-inverted display mode.
If a color inversion occurs during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped if the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained (i.e., the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but it is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when a hold occurs as usual, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-announcement effect.

Figure 35 schematically shows multiple buffer regions obtained by dividing the frame buffer.
The performance display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 for temporarily storing frame images that constitute the moving image to be displayed on the performance display device 60. The frame buffer 338 is divided into five buffer areas, each with a capacity to store frame images: a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548.
In the effect pattern that executes the screen transformation effect, for example, three buffer areas are used: the first buffer area 540, the second buffer area 542, and the third buffer area 544.

Figure 36 schematically shows the relationship between the display size of the frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes at least a first buffer area 540 with a capacity to store a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and a second buffer area 542, which is a different area from the first buffer area 540 and has a capacity to store a frame image of a second display size that is the same as or less than the screen area size of the performance display device 60. As schematically shown in Figure 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity to store an image of the target object 516 (i.e., the "frame image of the first display size" described above). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity to store an image within a frame 514 (i.e., the "frame image of the second display size" described above), but it does not have a capacity to store the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 is outside the screen area. As a result, in reality, almost only the portion of the image 514 within the frame is displayed on the performance display device 60 so that it is visible to the player. In other words, when the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the performance display device 60, or even if part of it is displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is almost invisible to the player. At least when displaying an effect that may be subject to screen deformation effects, the first buffer area 540 is used as the frame buffer, and when displaying an effect that is not subject to screen deformation effects, the second buffer area 542 is used as the frame buffer. Multiple types of effect patterns include a first special effect pattern which defines an effect that may be subject to screen deformation effects, and a second special effect pattern which defines an effect that is not subject to screen deformation effects.

As shown in Figure 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542 and are capable of storing the frame image 514, but not the entire target object 516. Thus, only the first buffer area 540 is capable of storing the target object 516, including the frame image 510, while the other buffer areas are limited to storing the frame image 514, but not the entire target object 516. This allows for the securing of five buffer areas even with a frame buffer 338 that does not necessarily have abundant data capacity, by keeping the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary. Furthermore, this avoids conflicts in the use of buffer areas during rendering, suppressing the processing load while efficiently diversifying the effects.

The first special effect pattern is a defined effect pattern in which a first special effect is displayed on the performance display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining an image obtained by transforming a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing so that it can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device 60, an image showing the game situation, and a background image, and storing it in the first buffer area 540. The second special effect pattern is a defined effect pattern in which a second special effect is different from the first special effect, by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining an image obtained by transforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, an image showing the game situation, and a background image, and storing it in the second buffer area 542, and storing it in the second special effect pattern.
For each of the multiple special effect patterns, it is determined which of the multiple buffer areas will be used as the frame buffer.

For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. In this way, multiple types of special effect patterns can be defined that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, allowing for diversity in effects while maintaining the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338.
In the fourth special effect pattern, the first buffer area 540 is specified to be used in the same way as the first special effect pattern, and in the fifth special effect pattern, the second buffer area 542 is specified to be used in the same way as the second special effect pattern. In this way, there may be multiple types of special effect patterns in which the buffer areas used overlap.
The first and second special effect patterns are not executed simultaneously (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap). Similarly, the fourth and fifth special effect patterns are not executed simultaneously (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap). The third special effect pattern is not executed simultaneously with the first, second, fourth, and fifth special effect patterns (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap).

For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (designed to be executable within the same fluctuation and whose execution timings may overlap within the same fluctuation), it is stipulated that each will use a different buffer area. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (designed not to be executed within the same fluctuation, or whose execution timings cannot overlap even if executed within the same fluctuation), if the display of an effect by one special effect pattern is decided while an effect by another special effect pattern is being displayed, the effect by the later-decided special effect pattern will be given priority over the effect by the first-displayed special effect pattern. For example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern, both using the same first buffer area 540, are executed simultaneously, the effect of the first-displayed special effect pattern will be stopped, and the effect of the later-commanded special effect pattern will be given priority and execution will begin. Similarly, if a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the first special effect pattern is stopped, and the execution of the later-commanded special effect pattern is prioritized.

Here, "canceling the execution of the special effect pattern that was being executed earlier" may also mean canceling the execution of the screen transformation effect that was being executed up to that point and returning to playback of the video image before the start of the screen transformation effect. This makes it possible to avoid processing problems that may occur when the buffer area used is conflicted, even if the number of special effect patterns that are the target of the transformation by the screen transformation effect is increased. Also, even if the screen transformation effects overlap, by canceling the screen transformation effect and switching the priority of the effect, it is possible to maintain normal image processing and reduce the burden on image processing. As a variation, the design may be configured so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously (i.e., they may be designed in advance to be executed simultaneously), and in such a configuration, for example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the special effect pattern that was being executed earlier is canceled, and the execution of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is given priority and started. Similarly, if a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the first special effect pattern is stopped, and the execution of the later-commanded special effect pattern is prioritized.

Figure 37 schematically illustrates the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation effect begins, the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is the target object 516, including the frame image 514 and the frame image 510, and is a single frame of the previously displayed video. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and transformed. While the frame images following the previously displayed video were originally intended to be displayed, from this point onward, new frame images generated through transformation and compositing processes are displayed instead. Therefore, in the case of a still frame effect, the enemy character included in this frame image, which was previously displayed in motion, becomes still in this frame image, resembling a captured image of the video. In the case of a video effect, by sequentially switching the frame images read into the drawing memory 334, the enemy character included in those frame images continues to be displayed in motion.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the performance display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the performance display device 60 and is practically invisible to the player, or only a small portion is visible. By shrinking the target object 516 (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the performance display device 60, the entire target object 516 becomes visible. For convenience, in this figure, the size of the target object 516 in S10 is shown as 100%, and in S12, the target object 516 is shown as having been shrunk to approximately 80%. However, in the actual animation rendering process, the process does not involve an instantaneous switch from 100% to 80%, but rather a gradual reduction process where, microscopically, the rendering is repeated, for example, by reducing the size by 1% each time a new frame image is generated. The foreground image 517 and background image 518 are then superimposed on the shrunk target object 516 (S904). In this figure, an example of a foreground image 517 is shown where a lightning bolt-shaped object is superimposed as the foreground of the target object 516. However, other images indicating the game status, such as simple decorative patterns 504 and simple hold images 507, are also superimposed as foreground images, with their content updated for each frame image. In S14, the superimposed images are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is then written to the first buffer area 540, becoming the next frame image that constitutes the moving image.

The target object 516 in S14 is gradually transformed each time a subsequent frame image is drawn. For example, the target object 516 in S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is superimposed on it (S908), and images indicating the game status, such as the updated simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold images 507, and the background image 518 are superimposed. These superimposed images are combined to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written to the first buffer area 540, becoming the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. Subsequently, for each subsequent frame image, the target object 516 is sequentially transformed to superimpose the foreground image 517 and background image 518, and updated images indicating the game status, such as the simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold images 507, are superimposed (S912). This process synthesizes new frame images to constitute the moving image.

The first and fourth special effect patterns create a single effect image consisting of a main image portion with a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and a frame image 510 formed to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion. Initially, at least a portion of the frame image 510, which is located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60, is displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. A new frame image is then sequentially generated by combining this image with an image showing the game status, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. In this way, during the execution of the screen transformation effect, by deliberately showing the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, and applying transformations such as scaling and shaking, an even more dynamic effect can be achieved. If the frame image 510 is to display the normal hold image 506, the screen transformation effect may also transform the image including the normal hold image 506.

The second, third, and fifth special performance patterns are used to create a single performance image using a main image portion with a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the performance display device 60. A new frame image is then generated by sequentially combining an image with a display ratio and shape changed from the performance image with an image showing the game status, thereby displaying a moving image on the performance display device 60.
The frame image 510 is not displayed in the second, third, and fifth special effect patterns. Furthermore, the frame image 510 is not displayed in certain situations, such as during the standby demo screen or during a jackpot.

Figure 38 shows an example screen of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is a screen transformation effect where the transformation timing is determined by the input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing to prompt the player to input an input of the effect button 109. Upon the player's operation of the effect button 109, the frame image transformation is executed by the screen transformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed multiple times, and the frame image transformation by the screen transformation effect is executed each time the effect button 109 is operated according to the button image 550.

In the third special effect pattern, when the effect button 109 is pressed, a new frame image is sequentially generated by combining a deformed image of the frame image at the time of the input with an image showing the game status, and stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. Furthermore, when the effect button 109 is pressed again, a new frame image is sequentially generated by combining a deformed image of the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the time of the input with an image showing the game status, and stored in the second buffer area 542, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60.

Figure 39 schematically illustrates the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, each time the player operates the effect button 109, frame images are alternately stored in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. Specifically, the third buffer area 544 sequentially stores the frame images of the currently displayed moving image, and displays the button image 550 at a predetermined timing (S920). When the player operates the button image 550, the frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S924), and stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S926). The fourth buffer area 546 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image, and displays the button image 550 again at a predetermined timing.

When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S930), and it is stored in the third buffer area 544 as the next frame image (S932). The third buffer area 544 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S936), and it is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S938). The fourth buffer area 546 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image.

In this way, the frame image, which has been moved slightly, is repeatedly stored by alternately using the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. This allows for a balance between the dynamism of the animation and the visual confirmation of its progress, ensuring that the player can clearly see the animation, such as the animation button 109 and the images indicating the game status, while maintaining the sense of dynamism during the animation's execution. Furthermore, when executing computationally intensive animations such as repeated screen transformations, the processing load is distributed and malfunctions can be avoided by dividing the buffer area into multiple sections and processing them alternately.

In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect.
A sixth special effect pattern may be included. The effect produced by the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to the transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect that makes it appear as if the screen transformation effect has been performed. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in an effect manner, but the effect is not one in which the first display element and the second display element are fully synchronized, as in the screen transformation effect (for example, the first display element is the background display, and the second display element is usually a decorative pattern 502 or a display item specific to that effect).

Furthermore, during the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up animation can be performed on the screen of the performance display device 60 based on the detection of balls entering the large prize pocket in the special game. This animation counts up the total number of prize balls (for example, if the currently acquired number of prize balls is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the animation counts up by 1 each time, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). Additionally, when the displayed number of prize balls reaches a specific number, a highlighting display can be performed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the displayed number of prize balls reaches 2500, the display "2500" is shown in a larger size than the displayed number of prize balls, separate from the display in the count-up animation). The specifications described below may be adopted for these animations and displays. Note that when the large prize pocket 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when 9 game balls enter (note that the prize balls for each ball entered are "15"). Thus, the number of game balls that constitutes the termination condition for a unit of game (the condition for closing the large prize winning slot 20) is referred to as the prescribed count.

(1) When a count-up animation corresponding to the entry of game balls within the prescribed number of counts (especially the count-up animation corresponding to the 9th count, which is the prescribed number of counts) is in progress and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, if an over-entry (entry of more balls than the prescribed number of counts) occurs, it is desirable that the system be configured so that the count-up animation corresponding to the over-entry starts only after the count-up for all 15 balls that has not yet been completed has been completed (after the count for 15 balls has been completed). Here, if the over-winning is detected near the end of the interval period (the pause time between the end of each unit game being set and the start of the next unit game or end demo), the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large prize slot 20 during the execution of the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning, which takes place during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the timing of the ball's entry is while the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning is in progress and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up animation corresponding to the ball entering the large prize slot 20 in the next round begins only after the count-up for all 15 balls that have not yet been completed has been finished (after the count-up for 15 balls has been completed).

(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds," meaning that the count-up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds." The execution time of the count-up animation is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the large prize slot 20 (unit prize ball count), and the execution time of the count-up animation is "15 (unit prize ball count) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds." However, even during the execution of a special game, the count-up animation is not performed during the execution of the start demo and the execution of the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count-up animation is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit of game or between the final unit of game and the closing demo. It is the period from the start of the closing operation of the large prize slot 20 until the closure is maintained. This unit of game waiting time or closing demo waiting time is set to "2 seconds" for all rounds of gameplay. Furthermore, by configuring the count-up animation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if the count-up animation is triggered based on a game ball entering the large prize slot 20 near the end of a unit of game, the count-up animation will be completed within the interval time after the end of that unit of game. Therefore, the possibility of the count-up animation extending beyond the interval period into the next unit of game or closing demo is reduced (although it may exceed the interval period in the case of an over-entry), and the divisions between each unit of game or between the final unit of game and the closing demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up animation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo. As mentioned above, the count-up animation time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). The execution time of the ending demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the ending demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. In other words, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace period) of the unit game during which it is possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected (i.e., detected as eligible for prize ball payout and not judged as an illegal entry). However, the execution time of the ending demo is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the special game separated from the unit game, during which it is not possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up performance is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize pocket 20 after the final unit game (even during the ending demo period), if the system is designed to perform the count-up performance, the count-up performance will be completed within the ending demo period. Therefore, the count-up animation does not extend beyond the end demo period and into the display of the reel spins after the special game ends, clearly marking the end of the special game and the start of the first reel spin display.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the large prize pocket 20 in a single game, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls in this single game (the count-up animation for the number of prize balls that can be won in a single game) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot ending demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up animation time) x 10 balls (specified number of balls) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). In this embodiment, the total time for the count-up animation (4.5 seconds) for the specified number of counts is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot completion demo (20 seconds). Therefore, even if multiple count-up animations are performed consecutively due to multiple game balls entering the large prize slot 20 in succession near the end of the final unit game, if the system is configured to perform the count-up animation even after the large prize slot 20 has closed (even during the jackpot completion demo period), the count-up animation will be completed within the jackpot completion demo period. As a result, the count-up animation will not extend beyond the jackpot completion demo period and into the spin display after the special game ends, clearly marking the end of the special game and the start of the spin display for the first rotation.

<Types of conditions that make it easy to get the ball in>
Regarding the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12, there are two states: a low base state (also called the "normal game state") which is a normal state of easy ball entry (not easy ball entry state), and a high base state which is a state in which the ease of ball entry is increased compared to the low base state. The high base state is one of the "specific game state" and the "easy ball entry state".

The specific game control means 270 can set the game state to either a low base state or a high base state.
(1) Low base state In the low base state, which is a non-easy ball entry state (non-time-saving state), if a win is made in the normal symbol lottery (also called the "open lottery") and the normal symbol stops and displays in a winning pattern, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. As a variation, in the low base state, all normal symbol lotteries may be misses and the normal electric mechanism 90 may not open.
(2) High base state In the high base state, when a regular symbol is drawn and the regular symbol stops and is displayed in a winning pattern, the regular electric mechanism 90 is opened for a long period of 5 seconds.

<Change in production settings (custom function related to the frequency of execution of pre-announcement effects)>
The frequency of predetermined pre-announcement effects can be changed by the player using the effects button 109 or the directional pad 110. This effect setting change is a so-called custom function that allows players to freely change the settings of various effects according to their preferences.
For example, if a player changes the settings to relatively lower the frequency of pre-announcement animations, the appearance rate of pre-announcement animations when the pre-judgment result is neither a big win nor a small win will decrease. In this case, the appearance rate of pre-announcement animations when the pre-judgment result is a big win or a small win cannot necessarily be reduced, so the proportion of the limited opportunities for pre-announcement animations that result in a big win or a small win will ultimately increase, and the expectation of special gameplay from pre-announcement animations will increase. This animation mode, which increases the expectation level by lowering the frequency of pre-announcement animations, will be referred to below as the "Pre-announcement Chance Mode".

Figure 40 shows examples of the custom function guidance screens. Figure 40(a) is an example of the first custom guidance screen, Figure 40(b) is an example of the second custom guidance screen, and Figure 40(c) is an example of the standby demo screen. The first custom guidance screen is displayed when 5 seconds have elapsed since the symbol change stopped and the game was not in operation. The first custom guidance screen indicates that pressing the effect button 109 will allow the effect settings to be changed, but it does not show how to adjust the volume and brightness. The first custom guidance screen is semi-transparent, allowing the decorative symbols to be visible even when they overlap with the first custom guidance screen. Furthermore, pressing the effect button 109 while the first custom guidance screen is displayed enables the execution of the machine's custom function (effect setting change).

After the first customization guidance is displayed, if 70 seconds have passed while the game is not in play (i.e., 75 seconds have passed since the start of the non-play period), the second customization guidance will be displayed. In addition to the display format of the first customization guidance, the second customization guidance displays guidance images for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment at the bottom of the display area, i.e., below the first customization guidance. The second customization guidance is semi-transparent, similar to the first customization guidance.

If 165 seconds have passed since the display of the second customization guide, i.e., 240 seconds have elapsed since the start of the non-game period, the standby demo screen will be displayed. On the standby demo screen, the first and second customization guides are hidden, and story displays are shown instead. The standby demo screen is not semi-transparent; if the standby demo screen and decorative symbols overlap, the decorative symbols will be invisible or difficult to see (e.g., the display area of the decorative symbols is smaller than that of the standby demo screen, or the decorative symbols are displayed on a background layer). Furthermore, if the volume control prohibition flag is on, the second customization guide will not display any information related to volume control.

Figure 41 shows an example of the screen for changing the pre-read chance mode. Figure 41(a) is an example of the screen for selecting the setting to change in the performance settings. The player can switch the setting to be changed by pressing the up and down buttons on the directional pad 110. In the example shown, "Pre-read chance mode" is displayed as the setting to be changed. When the player presses the performance button 109 in this state, the selection of "Pre-read chance mode" is confirmed.

Figure 41(b) shows an example screen for setting the "Pre-read Chance Mode" on or off. The player can switch the "Pre-read Chance Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110. When the player presses the performance button 109 in this state, the setting for the "Pre-read Chance Mode" on or off is confirmed. The screen for changing the Pre-read Chance Mode can be displayed not only when the reel is stopped (while waiting to play), but also when the reel is in motion. The player can switch the target of the setting change by pressing the up or down buttons on the directional pad 110, and can switch the "Pre-read Chance Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110. If the reel is in motion, it may be configured so that the setting for the "Pre-read Chance Mode" is confirmed as soon as the player switches the setting by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110, without requiring the player to press the performance button 109. Furthermore, a separate directional pad dedicated to customizing the effects may be provided, distinct from the directional pad used for adjusting volume and brightness. In this configuration, it becomes possible to switch the "Pre-read Chance Mode" on and off while simultaneously adjusting the volume and brightness.

Note that lowering the frequency of pre-announcement animations does not change the animation stage or background video. The only visible difference between this setting and a higher frequency setting is, for example, whether or not a custom name is displayed at the edge of the screen. Animation settings can be changed not only during gameplay standby, but also during symbol changes (except during reach animations such as super reach).

Here, during the execution of a pre-announcement effect such as a hold change effect, the "Pre-announcement Effect in Progress" flag is turned on to indicate that a pre-announcement effect is in progress. The hold change effect is an effect that suggests, through a change in the hold lamp image, that the pre-judgment result of a new ball entry corresponds to a high-expectation effect. The "Pre-announcement Effect in Progress" flag remains on until the end of the symbol change corresponding to the hold that was the target of the hold change effect.

While the pre-read animation flag is on, even if a new ball enters the first or second starting port 11, the execution of the normal pre-read animation based on the prior information related to that new ball entry is restricted. For example, while the pre-read animation flag is on, the system may be controlled to prevent the reading of prior information related to a new ball entry into the first or second starting port 12, or it may be controlled to read the prior information but not to determine whether a high-expectation animation based on that information can be executed, or it may be controlled to determine whether a high-expectation animation related to the new ball entry can be executed but the execution of a new pre-read animation based on that determination result is restricted. This is because if multiple pre-read animations are executed simultaneously, the reliability of the pre-read animation displayed first may be compromised, or the pre-read animation executed later may have a higher expectation level. In this case, it is conceivable that a player might ignore the earlier pre-read animation and expect the later one to be more promising, potentially causing them to interrupt their game.

<Special pre-announcement effect when the ball enters the net>
The special pre-announcement effect upon ball entry is a pre-announcement effect that immediately after a new ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, suggests that there is a high probability of executing a special game if the prior information related to that entry corresponds to a predetermined result (jackpot or minor win). The special pre-announcement effect upon ball entry outputs a loud notification sound when a new ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, and also executes a flashing effect upon winning (also called "winning flash") which causes the decorative lamp 111 to light up brightly. Unlike normal pre-announcement effects that are executed at a predetermined timing based on the start of the symbol variation effect, the special pre-announcement effect upon ball entry is executed at the moment a new ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, and is therefore implemented in a way that catches the player off guard at a timing unrelated to the ongoing symbol variation effect.

In this embodiment, the special pre-announcement mode, which enables the execution of a special pre-announcement animation upon ball entry, can be turned on or off according to the player's preference by changing the animation settings. The player can change the animation settings to turn the special pre-announcement mode on or off by operating the animation button 109 or the directional pad 110. This animation mode, which enables the execution of such a special pre-announcement animation upon ball entry, will hereinafter be referred to as the "ball entry pre-announcement mode."

Figure 42 shows an example of the screen for changing the ball entry prediction mode. Figure 42(a) is an example of the screen for selecting the setting to change in the performance settings. The player can switch the setting to be changed by pressing the up and down buttons on the directional pad 110. In the example shown, "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" is displayed as the setting to be changed. When the player presses the performance button 109 in this state, the selection of "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" is confirmed.

Figure 42(b) shows an example screen for setting the "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" on or off. The player can switch the "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110. When the player presses the performance button 109 in this state, the setting for the "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" on or off is confirmed. The screen for changing the Ball Entry Prediction Mode can be displayed not only when the reel is stopped (while waiting to play), but also when the reel is in motion. The player can switch the target of the setting change by pressing the up or down buttons on the directional pad 110, and can switch the "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110. If the reel is in motion, it may be configured so that the setting is confirmed when the player switches the "Ball Entry Prediction Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110, without needing to press the performance button 109. Furthermore, a separate directional pad dedicated to customizing the visual effects may be provided, distinct from the directional pad used for adjusting volume and brightness. In this configuration, it becomes possible to switch the "ball entry prediction mode" on and off while simultaneously adjusting the volume and brightness.

The probability of a big win or minor win occurring when the special pre-announcement animation is performed upon ball entry may be set to 100%, or it may be set to less than 100%. If set to less than 100%, the animation may be performed even when the ball entry does not actually result in a big win or minor win. Furthermore, even if the special pre-announcement animation mode is set to ON, the special pre-announcement animation may not be performed even if a ball entry results in a big win or minor win.

<Stage background and production settings changed>
Figure 43 shows the relationship between the display of the stage background image and the ability to change the performance settings. In the low base state, the stage background image corresponding to the current performance stage can be displayed, including during the normal reach performance (normal reach period 670). During the normal reach period 670, when the stage background image corresponding to the current performance stage is displayed before developing into a predetermined high-expectation reach performance (for example, a so-called super reach performance), the performance settings can be changed according to the player's input.

On the other hand, if the game progresses to a predetermined high-probability reach animation, the stage background image will be hidden during that high-probability reach animation (Super Reach Period 672). While the stage background image is hidden after progressing to the predetermined high-probability reach animation, the animation settings cannot be changed. During the execution of Super Reach animations, the Super Reach animation video is preferentially displayed across the entire screen instead of the stage background image corresponding to the current animation stage, and animation settings cannot be changed to avoid interfering with the Super Reach animation.

Furthermore, during a specific period (stop display period 674) when the stage background image is displayed after a predetermined high-probability reach animation, the execution of animation setting changes is restricted. The stop display period 674 is the period after the screen blacks out when a super reach animation ends in failure, when the screen returns to the normal stage background image, and then the special symbols are displayed. The stop display period 674 is the period during which the stage background image is displayed from the end of the super reach until the special symbols stop. However, animation setting changes are not executed during this period, and even if the player uses the directional keys 110 to instruct an animation setting change, that change will not be reflected in the animation until the next spin.

Even during periods when performance settings cannot be changed, players can still access the performance settings change screen by pressing the directional key 110, and can also instruct players to change the settings. However, the changes will only be reflected from the next spin. Alternatively, during periods when performance settings cannot be changed, the system may be configured so that the performance settings change screen is not displayed and players cannot instruct players to change the settings, even if they press the directional key 110.

In the modified version, it is possible to change the performance settings even while a special game is in progress (while a unit game is in progress). However, if a consecutive jackpot (winning streak) of 10 or 20 times is achieved, a video celebrating the achievement may be displayed. In that case, to ensure that the player's attention is focused on the celebration video, the performance setting changes would be disabled during the video's display. Furthermore, if the performance setting changes were already being performed when the disabled period for performance setting changes began, the performance setting change screen could be hidden, and the changes could be forcibly executed. For example, if a super reach animation occurs at the moment the cursor is positioned to enter "Yes" on the screen displaying "Do you want to change the performance settings?", the system could be forced to select "Yes" and the performance setting changes could be applied.

The decorative symbols include regular decorative symbols, which are displayed as the main symbols on the display device 60 at least when special symbols are stopped, and simplified decorative symbols, which are displayed in a simplified form than the regular decorative symbols when the regular decorative symbols are difficult to see. Regular decorative symbols are displayed in a larger size than simplified decorative symbols. Regular decorative symbols consist of three symbols, and are stopped one by one in order after the variation display. Simplified decorative symbols also consist of three symbols, but all three are stopped simultaneously after the variation display. The combination of symbols that stop for simplified decorative symbols is the same as the combination of symbols that stop for regular decorative symbols.

Furthermore, it is possible to display a button image that mimics the performance button 109. This button image is displayed as the button image before entering a reach state and as the button image during a super reach performance. When the player actually operates the performance button 109 while this button image is displayed, a performance other than the button image is displayed. For example, if the button image is displayed before entering a reach state and the performance button 109 is operated, a dialogue予告 performance (a performance in which the expectation of a big win differs depending on the content of the dialogue and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed. If the button image is displayed during a super reach performance (towards the end of the second half) and the performance button 109 is operated, a cut-in performance (a performance in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the expectation of a big win differs depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a button image other than the normal color is displayed, a type of performance with a higher expectation of a big win (for the dialogue予告 performance, a red dialogue予告 performance is more likely than a blue dialogue予告 performance; for the cut-in performance, a red cut-in performance is more likely than a blue cut-in performance) is more likely to be displayed when the performance button 109 is operated. Furthermore, the display of button images to instruct (prompt) the player to perform an action is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).

Furthermore, this embodiment includes a button appearance prompt, which is a prompt that builds anticipation for whether or not an operation instruction prompt (button prompt) will be initiated. In this button appearance prompt, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the prompt button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, creating the expectation that a button image resembling the prompt button 109 will appear afterward (i.e., that the operation instruction prompt will be initiated). If the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 gradually changes into a button image in this button appearance prompt, the prompt is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 fades out of the screen in this button appearance prompt, the prompt is unsuccessful. Note that when displaying a button image, it is not always necessary to execute such a button appearance prompt; the button image may be displayed directly without going through the button appearance prompt. Here, the button appearance prompt may have multiple display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of changing into a button image than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Furthermore, as another variation, when a button appearance prompt is executed, it may always change to a button image. In such a configuration, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of a big win than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Alternatively, multiple types of button images may be provided (for example, a blue button image and a red button image, with the red button image being more likely to trigger a high-probability prompt than the blue button image, for example, the red dialogue prompt being more likely to be triggered than the blue dialogue prompt), and the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to result in a specific button image (for example, a red button image) rather than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. If the button appearance prompt always changes to a button image when executed, then, in addition to the above, the system may be configured so that a longer button appearance prompt (e.g., 4 seconds) has a higher probability of a big win than a shorter one (e.g., 2 seconds), or so that a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) is displayed than a shorter one (e.g., 2 seconds). Furthermore, if the system is configured to have multiple display modes for the button appearance prompt, the system may be configured so that a button appearance prompt with a higher probability of a big win is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the display (a specific timing after a reach) than in the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach), or the system may be configured so that the button appearance prompt is not executed in the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach), but only in the latter half (a specific timing after a reach).

During the execution of the operation instruction sequence, an operation validity period (input validity time) is set during which the operation of the sequence button 109 is valid. The operation validity period is the period during which the operation of the sequence button 109 is validly accepted. "Validly accepting the operation of the sequence button 109" means that when the sequence button 109 is operated, the sub-board 300 validly accepts the operation of the sequence button 109, and a predetermined process is performed based on that valid operation. The predetermined process is the process of advancing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue announcement performance) is performed. During this operation validity period, the sequence button 109 (the LED element built into the sequence button 109) is illuminated, and a button image resembling the sequence button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the sequence button 109 is valid or to prompt an operation input. In addition, a circular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as the "specific image") is displayed on the screen around the button image. This specific image gradually enlarges as the operation validity period elapses. If the performance button 109 is operated during the operation validity period, the sequence progresses to a dialogue予告 (preview) sequence. When the performance button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to its final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction sequence (button sequence) is a sequence where the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern A). However, other button sequences in this embodiment (button sequences other than the operation instruction sequence) are sequences where the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern B).

In the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), when one of several characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and speaks a predetermined line of dialogue, a specific image is continuously displayed around this character in its final display state. In this dialogue予告演出, the display state (display color) of the line spoken by the character indicates the likelihood of a big win. In this embodiment, three types of display colors for the dialogue are set: "blue," "red," and "giraffe pattern," and the likelihood of a big win increases by one level in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern." When the dialogue予告演出 is started (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a variation of this embodiment, the dialogue予告演出 may be configured as a step-up type演出. This step-up presentation divides the display process of the pre-announcement presentation into multiple stages, with the number of stages displayed varying so that a higher number of stages increases the expectation of a big win. In this embodiment, it is an evolving presentation that changes the presentation style (characters and dialogue) in stages according to a predetermined order, and the level of expectation of a big win is suggested or announced according to the number of stages of development. For example, the step-up presentation may consist of two presentation steps (step-up 1 and step-up 2), and the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in the first presentation step, step-up 1, may be different from the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in the second presentation step, step-up 2.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompt is initiated, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the 109 button will be displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into the button image and the prompt is successful, the operation instruction prompt will be initiated.
(B) When the operation instruction animation is started, the validity period for operating the animation button 109 is set, the animation button 109 is illuminated, and a button image resembling the animation button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining validity period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific circular image (effect image) emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. This display prompts the user to operate the animation button 109 within the validity period for button operation.
(C) As the button operation validity period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and a specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the performance button 109 is operated within the operation validity period, the display switches from the operation instruction performance to the dialogue予告 performance. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to its final display mode and continues to be displayed.
(D) When the dialogue予告演出 begins, a character and the line "This is a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the displayed line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in its final display form. By displaying this specific image across the operation instruction演出 and the dialogue予告演出, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue予告演出 will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (it is suggested that this button effect is the dialogue予告演出).

Furthermore, as a variation of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the system may be configured such that the probability of a big win in the spin display is relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed compared to when it is not executed. Alternatively, the system may be configured such that the longer the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image), the relatively higher the probability of a big win in the spin display, or a highly probable effect indicating whether or not a big win has occurred triggered by the button operation. In this case, when the dialogue予告演出 (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after a reach, which is the latter half of the spin display as described above), it is preferable that the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is set to be longer than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Conversely, the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set to be shorter than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Furthermore, as another variation, multiple display modes for the button image may be provided (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow-colored button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.). In that case, the possibility of executing the button appearance prompt and the duration of the prompt if executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image to be executed next.

Furthermore, as a further variation, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) may be executed and (button image may be displayed) even during the execution of one or more fluctuation displays (pre-announcement fluctuation displays which are fluctuations before the target) before the activation reserve ball of the pre-announcement target is consumed. The probability of a button appearance prompting effect being executed during the execution of the pre-announcement fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the activation reserve ball of the pre-announcement target is consumed (the fluctuation display). Also, the probability of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect (such as a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect as described above, or a long-duration (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect) being executed during the execution of the pre-announcement fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the activation reserve ball of the pre-announcement target is consumed (the fluctuation display). As another variation, the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) (or a low-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a high-probability button appearance prompt), and the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach) (or a high-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a low-probability button appearance prompt). In this case, the longer the period between the predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the display) and the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds), the higher the probability of a big win. Alternatively, the button image at the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) may be more likely to be a high-probability image (for example, a red button image is more likely than a blue button image). Furthermore, the button appearance may be configured to use pattern A during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) and pattern B during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach). Furthermore, as will be explained in detail later, the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the variable display) may be set to start from the beginning of the variable display, while the timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach (the second half of the variable display) may be set to start from the beginning of a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect). The timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach (the second half of the variable display) may be set to be longer than the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the variable display).

Furthermore, during the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up animation can be performed on the screen of the performance display device 60 based on the detection of balls entering the large prize pocket in the special game. This animation counts up the total number of prize balls (for example, if the currently acquired number of prize balls is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the animation counts up by 1 each time, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). Additionally, when the displayed number of prize balls reaches a specific number, a highlighting display can be performed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the displayed number of prize balls reaches 2500, the display "2500" is shown in a larger size than the displayed number of prize balls, separate from the display in the count-up animation). The specifications described below may be adopted for these animations and displays. Note that when the large prize pocket 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when 9 game balls enter (note that the prize balls for each ball entered are "15"). Thus, the number of game balls that constitutes the termination condition for a unit of game (the condition for closing the large prize winning slot 20) is referred to as the prescribed count.

(1) When a count-up animation corresponding to the entry of game balls within the prescribed number of counts (especially the count-up animation corresponding to the 9th count, which is the prescribed number of counts) is in progress and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, if an over-entry (entry of more balls than the prescribed number of counts) occurs, it is desirable that the system be configured so that the count-up animation corresponding to the over-entry starts only after the count-up for all 15 balls that has not yet been completed has been completed (after the count for 15 balls has been completed). Here, if the over-winning is detected near the end of the interval period (the pause time between the end of each unit game being set and the start of the next unit game or end demo), the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large prize slot 20 during the execution of the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning, which takes place during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the timing of the ball's entry is while the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning is in progress and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up animation corresponding to the ball entering the large prize slot 20 in the next round begins only after the count-up for all 15 balls that have not yet been completed has been finished (after the count-up for 15 balls has been completed).

(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds," meaning that the count-up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds." The execution time of the count-up animation is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the large prize slot 20 (unit prize ball count), and the execution time of the count-up animation is "15 (unit prize ball count) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds." However, even during the execution of a special game, the count-up animation is not performed during the execution of the start demo and the execution of the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count-up animation is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit of game or between the final unit of game and the closing demo. It is the period from the start of the closing operation of the large prize slot 20 until the closure is maintained. This unit of game waiting time or closing demo waiting time is set to "2 seconds" for all rounds of gameplay. Furthermore, by configuring the count-up animation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if the count-up animation is triggered based on a game ball entering the large prize slot 20 near the end of a unit of game, the count-up animation will be completed within the interval time after the end of that unit of game. Therefore, the possibility of the count-up animation extending beyond the interval period into the next unit of game or closing demo is reduced (although it may exceed the interval period in the case of an over-entry), and the divisions between each unit of game or between the final unit of game and the closing demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up animation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo. As mentioned above, the count-up animation time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). The execution time of the ending demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the ending demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. In other words, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace period) of the unit game during which it is possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected (i.e., detected as eligible for prize ball payout and not judged as an illegal entry). However, the execution time of the ending demo is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the special game separated from the unit game, during which it is not possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up performance is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize pocket 20 after the final unit game (even during the ending demo period), if the system is designed to perform the count-up performance, the count-up performance will be completed within the ending demo period. Therefore, the count-up animation does not extend beyond the end demo period and into the display of the spins after the special game ends, clearly marking the end of the special game and the start of the first spin's display.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the large prize pocket 20 in a single game, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls in this single game (the count-up animation for the number of prize balls that can be won in a single game) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot ending demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up animation time) x 10 balls (specified number of balls) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). In this embodiment, the total time for the count-up animation (4.5 seconds) for the specified number of counts is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot completion demo (20 seconds). Therefore, even if multiple count-up animations are performed consecutively due to multiple game balls entering the large prize slot 20 in succession near the end of the final unit game, if the system is configured to perform the count-up animation even after the large prize slot 20 has closed (even during the jackpot completion demo period), the count-up animation will be completed within the jackpot completion demo period. As a result, the count-up animation will not extend beyond the jackpot completion demo period and into the spin display after the special game ends, clearly marking the end of the special game and the start of the spin display for the first rotation.

<Suppression notification effect>
In this embodiment, a gaming machine is equipped with a suppression function. As will be described in detail later, this refers to a function that stops the game and notifies the player when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined value. The MY counter is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is calculated as MY = Safe number (expected number of prize balls) - Out number (number of balls played), and is a count value based on the difference in the number of balls between the safe number and the out number, and is an indicator of the number of game value (the number of balls the player has or the number of balls dispensed by the gaming machine) given to the player.

The MY counter is equipped with a suppression function activation flag to indicate that the count value has reached a predetermined threshold (the specified value described later = "95000"), that is, that the suppression function activation conditions described later have been met. The suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the suppression function activation conditions are met. The suppression function activation flag is also turned OFF when the power is turned on accompanied by a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). Furthermore, the MY counter is updated (added or subtracted) when a game ball enters each prize entry or exit entry. Specifically, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter. The "safe number" refers to the number of game balls (safe balls) that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the number of game balls that enter each prize entry entry, i.e., the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number is not the actual number of prize balls paid out from the payout device, but the planned number of prize balls that has been decided to be paid out. The MY counter adds "3" to the expected number of safe balls (expected prize balls) that will be dispensed when one game ball enters the first starting slot. The MY counter also adds "1" to the expected number of safe balls (expected prize balls) that will be dispensed when one game ball enters the second starting slot. The MY counter also adds "3" to the expected number of safe balls (expected prize balls) that will be dispensed when one game ball enters the general prize slot. The MY counter also adds "15" to the expected number of safe balls (expected prize balls) that will be dispensed when one game ball enters the large prize slot. The MY counter also subtracts the number of outs from the count value. "Outs" refers to the number of game balls (outs) that were launched into the game area and used in the game. In other words, it is the number of game balls (outs) that entered each prize entry point (first start entry point, second start entry point, general prize entry point, big prize entry point, etc.) or out entry point in the game area and were discharged to the back side of the game board. The MY counter subtracts "1" from the outs count each time a game ball enters an out entry point (referred to as an outs ball or a played ball). However, if the MY counter is "0", the MY counter will not be subtracted even if an outs ball (a played ball) is detected. In other words, the count value of the MY counter will not be less than "0" (a negative number), and even if an outs ball (a played ball) occurs when the MY counter's count value is "0", the number corresponding to that outs will not be subtracted, and the MY counter's count value will remain "0". Furthermore, each time the MY counter is updated, a performance command (referred to as the "ball difference signal") is generated and output to identify the count value of the MY counter. Based on this ball difference signal, the suppression function-related performances (pre-notification performance, suppression notification performance) described later are executed.

The suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined threshold (referred to as the "default value"). In other words, the condition for the suppression function to activate (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the count value of the MY counter reaches the default value. The default value is set to "95000", and the suppression function activation condition is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches the default value of "95000". As mentioned above, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. Furthermore, when the count value of the MY counter reaches the default value of "95000" and the suppression function activation condition is met, even if safe balls and out balls occur before the suppression function is released (before the suppression function activation flag is turned OFF), the count value of the MY counter will not be updated (added or subtracted), and the count value of the MY counter will remain at the default value of "95000". In other words, the upper limit for the MY counter is "95000," and even if MY exceeds "95000," the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000." To elaborate, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000," the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000." In other words, as long as MY has not yet reached "95000," the MY counter will be updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a variation, even if MY exceeds "95000," the value of the MY counter will also be updated in conjunction, meaning it may be updated even if it exceeds "95000." Similarly, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000," the value of the MY counter will also be updated in conjunction, meaning it may be updated even if it falls below "95000." Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000," ensuring that the suppression function can be reliably activated. Another variation is to configure the system so that when MY exceeds "95000," the MY counter value is reset to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized/cleared), and the MY counter is not updated (fixed at "0"). Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000," ensuring that the suppression function can be reliably activated.

If the suppression function is activated, the game will enter a stopped state and the game will cease. For example, when the suppression function is activated, the determination of whether special symbols are correct, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination will not be performed, and high base states and special games will also not be performed. In addition, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device will be restricted, and the launch of game balls will be stopped regardless of how the launching device is operated. However, even if the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on wins before the suppression function was activated), the payout operation will be permitted, and the payout of those game balls will be performed without delay. In other words, the MY counter is incremented not based on the actual number of prize balls dispensed, but on the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be dispensed. Therefore, even if not all of the prize balls corresponding to the scheduled number have been dispensed, if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to the increment of the scheduled number of prize balls, the suppression function will activate (since the conditions for the suppression function to activate are naturally met). However, even in this case, the remaining portion of the scheduled number of prize balls (the remaining prize balls that have not been dispensed when the suppression function starts to activate) will be dispensed until the end. As will be explained in more detail later, even when the suppression function is active, a prize ball error (dispensing error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the dispensing of game balls while the suppression function is active, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be issued. Furthermore, even when a special game is not in progress, the payout for the prize balls that triggered the MY counter's count value to reach the predetermined value of "95,000" (for example, when the MY counter's count value is "94,998" and three prize balls are paid out due to a game ball entering the general prize slot) will be fully processed, including the prize balls exceeding the predetermined value of "95,000" (the remaining one prize ball in the above example). (However, naturally, no prize balls will be paid out based on subsequent entries.) While the system transitions to a game-stopped state and a ball-launching-stopped state when the suppression function is activated, this configuration is not limited to this; the system may also be configured to transition to a game-stopped state but not to a ball-launching-stopped state when the suppression function is activated.

Furthermore, the timing of the suppression function's activation differs depending on whether the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is not being played (i.e., the suppression function's activation condition is met) or whether the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is being played (i.e., the suppression function's activation condition is met).

If the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while a special game is not in progress, the suppression function will activate simultaneously or almost simultaneously with the fulfillment of these conditions. In other words, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while a special game is not in progress, the time when these conditions are met and the time when the suppression function is activated will be substantially the same. As a situation while a special game is not in progress, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while the symbols are changing, the suppression function will activate at the moment the conditions for activating the suppression function are met (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000"), regardless of whether the changing symbols are a losing or winning changing symbol. Therefore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while the symbols are changing, the suppression function will activate at the moment the conditions for activating the suppression function are met, without waiting for the changing symbols to stop (even before the changing symbols stop), and the changing symbols will be forcibly terminated midway through the process. Therefore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while the jackpot variation display is in progress, the player will not be able to enjoy the special game that would normally take place after the variation display ends, and will not be able to obtain the benefits (prize balls) that can be obtained in the special game. The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped in the middle of the jackpot variation display, the player will not know the result of the game (that they have won a jackpot) at this point, so even if the game is suddenly stopped in the middle of the variation display, there is little risk of the player feeling dissatisfied or distrustful. Furthermore, in a high base state, even if the MY counter count value reaches the specified value of "95000" due to prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the open second start opening while the second start opening is open for 5 seconds x 1 time, or if the MY counter count value reaches the specified value of "95000" due to prize balls based on the entry of game balls into other general prize openings, it is preferable to forcibly close the second start opening when the specified value is reached (even if there is still time remaining to open).

On the other hand, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, the suppression function will not activate until the special game (jackpot completion demo) ends, and will only activate after the special game (jackpot completion demo) has finished. In other words, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, it is possible to continue playing from the time the conditions for activating the suppression function are met until the end of the special game, meaning that the timing of when the conditions for activating the suppression function are met and the timing of when the suppression function is activated are substantially different. The reason for this is that if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, even if the special game is not immediately stopped and the game is allowed to continue, the player will only acquire a limited number of prize balls in the remaining rounds of play (unit games), and the player will not acquire excessive profits (there will be no sense of unfairness with other players). Furthermore, if the suppression function were to suddenly activate and stop the game during the execution of a special game, it may cause distrust and dissatisfaction among the players. As a variation, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the special game, and may be configured to activate after the end of that final round. Alternatively, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the jackpot ending demo of the special game, and may be configured to activate after the start of that jackpot ending demo. Furthermore, as a further variation, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game (even if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met), the MY counter may be configured to update its count value if safe balls and out balls occur before the special game ends (before the suppression function is activated). In that case, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value "95000" after the conditions for activating the suppression function are met (even if it returns to the state before the conditions for activating the suppression function were met), a configuration in which the suppression function is activated after the end of the special game can be applied. In other words, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, the system may be configured such that the suppression function is guaranteed to activate when the special game ends, even if the MY counter's count value increases or decreases from the specified value of "95000" before the special game ends. Furthermore, in this modified example, after the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game, prize ball payouts based on balls entering the large prize slot are still possible until the special game ends.

Next, we will explain how to deactivate the suppression function. If the suppression function is activated, it can be deactivated by performing a RAM clear process when the power is turned on. In other words, if the suppression function is activated, after turning off the power to the gaming machine, the suppression function activation flag can be switched from ON to OFF by performing a RAM clear (operating the RAM clear switch), thereby deactivating the suppression function. Here, a power restore accompanied by a RAM clear (operating the RAM clear switch) refers to a power restore that transitions to "RAM clear mode" as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). A power restore without a RAM clear refers to a power restore that transitions to "game mode" as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). Note that if the suppression function is activated and the gaming machine is turned off, and then power restored without performing a RAM clear (operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF, and the suppression function will not be deactivated. In that case, the suppression function will remain active even after the power is restored, and the game stop state and firing stop state will continue. Furthermore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), and the power is cut off before the special game ends, followed by a power restoration accompanied by a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will switch from ON to OFF upon power restoration. Therefore, even if the special game resumed after the power restoration ends, the suppression function will not activate. On the other hand, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), and the power is cut off before the special game ends, followed by a power restoration without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF upon power restoration. Therefore, the suppression function will activate when the special game resumed after the power restoration ends.

Next, we will explain how to initialize the MY counter. If the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is OFF), the MY counter will be cleared at the time of power restoration (the MY counter will become "0"), regardless of whether the power restoration involves a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) or not. In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared when the gaming machine is powered on (the count value before the power was cut off will be erased), regardless of whether the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared at the time of power restoration, regardless of whether the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on is the aforementioned RAM clear mode or game mode. On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on after the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the MY counter will not be cleared at the time of the power restoration, and will retain the count value from before the power was cut off (95000). Also, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on after the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the MY counter will be cleared at the time of the power restoration (the count value from before the power was cut off will be erased). As a modification, the MY counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000", that is, when the suppression function activation conditions are met. Furthermore, as a further modification, an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting the initialization of the MY counter may be installed. For example, even if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the pre-notification effect described later, and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) at the time of the power restoration, and will continue to use the count value from before the power was cut off.

Next, we will explain the external information signals related to the suppression function. Among the external information signals, the external information signals related to the suppression function (also referred to as external signals or external information) include the suppression function pre-activation signal and the suppression function activation signal. The suppression function pre-activation signal is an external information signal that indicates that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined trigger before the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value "95000". The predetermined trigger is when the MY counter's count value reaches a specific value (for example, any number between 90000 and 95000 is applicable). As a specific value, for example, "94500", which is 500 values before the specified value "95000", is adopted. Therefore, the timing of the start of output of the suppression function pre-activation signal is not the same or approximately the same timing as the start of execution of the pre-notification effect described later (it is not substantially the same timing). As a variation, when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90000," a suppression function pre-activation signal may be output, and the timing of the output of the suppression function pre-activation signal and the execution timing of the pre-notification effect described later may be the same or approximately the same (they may be substantially the same timing). The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is output continuously from the time the suppression function is activated until the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, this suppression function activation signal starts outputting when the suppression function is activated and stops outputting when power is restored accompanied by a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). Therefore, the timing of the suppression function activation signal start outputting is the same or approximately the same timing as the timing of the suppression function activation start (substantially the same timing).

<Pre-announcement production>
Next, the content of the suppression function-related effects will be explained. The suppression function-related effects include pre-notification effects (pre-suppression function activation notification effects) and suppression notification effects (suppression function activation notification effects). Pre-notification effects are performed before the suppression function is activated and suggest or notify that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. Pre-notification effects are performed when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. That is, the execution condition for the pre-notification effect (referred to as the "pre-notification condition") is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. The predetermined value is set to "90000". The predetermined value which is the count value of the MY counter that becomes the execution condition for suppression notification ("95000") may be referred to as the first predetermined value, and the predetermined value which is the count value of the MY counter that becomes the pre-notification condition (here, "90000") may be referred to as the second predetermined value. The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set arbitrarily by the administrator (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value be "90000" or less). In other words, the execution conditions for the pre-notification effect (pre-notification conditions) are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set arbitrarily by the administrator. On the other hand, the specified value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set arbitrarily by the administrator. In other words, the activation conditions for the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set arbitrarily by the player. The term "administrator" refers to the person who manages the gaming machine, and typically includes employees of the gaming parlor or employees of the gaming machine manufacturer. The pre-notification effect includes the pre-notification display effect and the pre-notification sound output effect. It should be noted that, unless otherwise specified, the term "pre-notification effect" hereafter refers to either "pre-notification display effect only" or "pre-notification effect and pre-notification sound output effect".

The pre-notification display includes, as an image display, the first statement, "When today's payout reaches 95,000 balls, the suppression function will activate. After activation, the game will end and firing will stop," and the second statement, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." "****" represents the remaining MY value until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the ball difference signal. The first and second statements are displayed continuously from the time the pre-notification conditions are met until the suppression function is activated (except when the MY counter's count value drops to the predetermined lower limit of "89,000" described later). The first statement remains fixed throughout the execution of this pre-notification display (pre-notification display), regardless of increases or decreases in the MY counter (the first statement does not change). On the other hand, the second text display is updated and displayed every time the MY counter's count value increases by 500, starting from when the pre-notification conditions are met (when the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90000"). In other words, the second text display is a text display that depends on the MY counter's count value, and the "****" part is updated and displayed every time 500 is added from the predetermined value of "90000". Specifically, first, when the MY counter's count reaches a predetermined value of "90000", the second message displayed is "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation". When the MY counter's count reaches "90500", the second message displayed changes to "Approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation". When the MY counter's count reaches "91000", the second message displayed changes to "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation". When the MY counter's count reaches "91500", the second message displayed changes to "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation". Similarly, the second message displayed changes every time the MY counter's count increases by "500", and finally, when the MY counter's count reaches "94500", the second message displayed changes to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation". While the second text display is updated in units of 500, this configuration is not limiting; it may be updated in different units (e.g., 1 unit, 10 units, 100 units, 1000 units, etc.). Furthermore, the pre-announcement display does not have a dedicated background image; the background of the first and second text displays will show a background image corresponding to the current game situation (stage background image, reach background image, jackpot background image).

Furthermore, the display priority of this pre-notification display effect (the priority of the layer, which determines whether it is displayed on the front or back compared to other images) is higher than the display priority of the background image and normal decorative patterns, and lower than the priority (layer priority) of the right-hand shooting notification image (text effects that suggest the recommended shooting position, such as "Right-hand shooting"), simple decorative patterns, and variable rights display (icon displays that indicate held balls, with a maximum of four held ball icons that can be displayed to correspond to a maximum of four held balls, and a variable icon display that is displayed when a held ball is consumed and the first held ball icon moves, indicating that a variation is in progress, with only one icon that can be displayed) is set. Furthermore, when a player performs volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment, the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-notification display is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the volume adjustment screen (a screen that shows the current volume level, and the display manner of the image showing the volume level changes when the volume is adjusted, for example, a screen in which a musical note mark image is accompanied by one of the number images from 1 to 5 that shows the current volume level, and the number in the number image changes when the volume is adjusted) and the light intensity adjustment screen (a screen that shows the current light intensity level, and the display manner of the image showing the light intensity level changes when the light intensity is adjusted, for example, a screen in which a light bulb mark image is accompanied by one of the number images from 1 to 5 that shows the current light intensity level, and the number in the number image changes when the light intensity is adjusted). Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs in the gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image (an image that notifies that an error has occurred and is displayed in a manner that allows for the identification of the type of error currently occurring; for example, if magnetism is detected, an image with the text "Magnetic Error" is displayed; if a door opening is detected, an image with the text "Door Open Error" is displayed; and if the payout of prize balls stops, an image with the text "Prize Ball Error" is displayed). Normally, decorative symbols can be displayed overlaid with the pre-notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-notification display effect be set higher. Therefore, when the pre-notification display effect is executed while the operation of the normal decorative symbols at the start of variation, temporary stop, reach establishment, or shaking operation is being performed, the display of each operation and the display of the pre-notification display effect are displayed overlaid, but because the pre-notification display effect has a higher display priority (layer priority), the pre-notification display effect will be displayed in the foreground. However, it is preferable that the simplified decorative patterns are not superimposed on the pre-notification display. Furthermore, the standby demo display (a screen displayed when the game is in standby mode, indicating that the game is in standby mode) can be superimposed on the pre-notification display, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-notification display be set higher. In addition, it is preferable that the volume adjustment screen, brightness adjustment screen, and right-hand play notification image are not superimposed on the pre-notification display.

The pre-announcement sound output effect is a feature that outputs a predetermined pre-announcement sound from the speaker. The pre-announcement sound is, for example, a voice message such as, "The suppression function will activate when **** balls remain." The value of "****" is the remaining MY (number of balls) until the suppression function is activated, and it is the same value as "****" in the second statement display. This pre-announcement sound is output from the speaker once or multiple times when the MY counter count value reaches "90000", "90500", "91000", "91500", "92000", "92500", "93000", "93500", "94000", or "94500", that is, when the second statement display is updated. While this pre-announcement sound is being output, that is, while the first and second statements are being displayed and the pre-announcement sound is being output, other sound effects (such as BGM and sound effects) are muted. After the pre-notification sound is output, that is, while the first and second text displays are shown and the pre-notification sound is not output, the system reverts to the original sound effects (such as background music or sound effects). As a variation, while the first and second text displays are shown and the pre-notification sound is output, other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may also be configured to run simultaneously. In such a configuration, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be reduced during the display of the first and second text displays and the output of the pre-notification sound to make the pre-notification sound easier to hear (after the pre-notification sound is output, that is, while the first and second text displays are shown and the pre-notification sound is not output, the volume returns to the original level).

This pre-announcement animation ends when the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" (when the suppression function activation condition is met). In other words, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the animation switches from the pre-announcement animation to the suppression notification animation. However, if the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" (when the suppression function activation condition is met) during the execution of a special game, the pre-announcement animation will continue to run until the end of the special game, at which point the pre-announcement animation will end and the suppression notification animation will begin. As a variation, if the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game (i.e., the conditions for activating the suppression function are met), the pre-notification display may be switched to a special message stating, "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end and firing will stop after the special game ends," triggered by the MY counter's count value reaching the specified value of "95,000." This special message may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. This special message is also a type of pre-notification display and may be called a special pre-notification display (special pre-notification display). Furthermore, as a further variation, the pre-notification display may be configured not to be executed during the execution of a special game. In other words, if a special game is started while a pre-notification display is being executed, the pre-notification display being executed may be interrupted when the special game starts and resumed when the special game ends. In this configuration, it is preferable to restart the pre-notification animation based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game has finished. Alternatively, if the pre-notification conditions are met during the execution of the special game, the pre-notification animation may not start during the execution of the special game (waiting to execute the pre-notification animation until the special game has finished), and may be configured to start the pre-notification animation after the special game has finished. In this configuration, it is preferable to start the pre-notification animation based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game has finished.

Furthermore, the pre-notification animation also terminates if the MY counter's count value falls to a predetermined lower limit (for example, "89000"). In other words, even if the pre-notification animation starts when the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value "90000", if the MY counter's count value falls below the predetermined lower limit "89000" without reaching the predetermined value "95000", the pre-notification animation will terminate without progressing to the suppression animation. Here, even if the MY counter's count value falls below the predetermined value "90000" without reaching the predetermined value "95000" when the pre-notification animation has started, the pre-notification animation will continue to run until it falls below the predetermined lower limit "89000". Note that if the MY counter's count value falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000", the pre-notification animation will not be run again even if the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. However, if special conditions are met between the time the MY counter's count value drops to a predetermined lower limit of "89000" and the time the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90000" again, the system may be configured to execute another pre-notification animation when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90000" again. For example, if the MY counter's count value drops to a predetermined lower limit of "89000", the system may be configured to execute another pre-notification animation when the special conditions are met after the MY counter's count value drops to an even smaller number than the predetermined lower limit of "89000", namely "80000", and the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90000" again. As another variation, if the MY counter's count value falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000," then a special condition may be met when the MY counter's count value subsequently falls to its initial value of "0" (meaning it reaches the lowest value where MY is not deducted even if there is an out ball, or when it is cleared). When this condition is met and the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the pre-notification animation may be executed again. Furthermore, if the MY counter's count value falls below the predetermined value of "90000" but before falling to the predetermined lower limit of "89000," a so-called "winning streak ends" (the winning streak state ends), the pre-notification animation may be canceled even if the MY counter's count value has not yet fallen to the predetermined lower limit of "89000."

Furthermore, as a further modification, without requiring any special conditions, the system may be configured to execute a pre-notification animation again when the MY counter's count value falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000" and then reaches a predetermined value of "90000" again. Furthermore, regarding the second text display, as mentioned above, each time the MY counter's count value reaches one of the thresholds that trigger an update to the pre-announcement animation (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), an update display (showing an increase of 500, the difference from the threshold) is displayed. Conversely, when the MY counter's count value falls below one of the thresholds that trigger an update to the pre-announcement animation (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), an update display (showing a decrease of 500, the difference from the threshold) is also displayed. For example, if the MY counter decreases from "91000" to "90999," the second message display will update (decrease) from "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation." However, even if the MY counter's count falls below the specified value of "90000," the second message display will not update until it drops to the predetermined lower limit of "89000," and will continue to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation." In other words, even if the MY counter's count decreases from "90000" to "89999," the second message display will continue to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" (this continues until it falls below the predetermined lower limit of "89000").

As a variation, when the MY counter's count value falls below the thresholds that trigger the update of the pre-notification animation (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the second text display may be intentionally not updated, and the current display (original display) may be continued. For convenience, in the following explanation, MY500 units, which constitute the update cycle of the second text display, may be considered as one unit, and the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "90000" and "90499" (the pre-notification animation when "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "first unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "90500" and "90999" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "second unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "91000" and "91499" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "third unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "91500" and "91999" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "92000" and "92499" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "5th unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "92500" and "92999" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "6th unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter's count value is between "93000" and "93499" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "7th unit notification animation." Furthermore, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter count is between "93500" and "93999" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 1500 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "8th unit notification animation." Also, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter count is between "94000" and "94499" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 1000 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "9th unit notification animation." Finally, the pre-notification animation that occurs when the MY counter count is between "94500" and "94999" (the pre-notification animation that displays "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation") may be referred to as the "10th unit notification animation."

The suppression notification effect is a visual effect that suggests or notifies that the MY counter's count value has reached the predetermined value of "95,000," that is, that the suppression function has been activated and the game has entered a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" while a special game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000." If the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" while a special game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game has ended. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. During the execution of the suppression notification effect, although not shown in the illustration, the frame lamps (lamps placed on the frame) are all lit up (or all flashing) in red, and the board lamps (lamps placed on the game board) are turned off. The suppression notification display is a feature that displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) to notify that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes special text and a special background image. The special text includes the message, "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, the suppression function has been activated, today's game is over, please be careful not to forget your card." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special text, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the highest priority layer), and when this suppression screen is displayed, any other effect images (normal game screens) become invisible or difficult to see. In addition, if a predetermined error (for example, an error of high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to this predetermined error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen. The suppression notification sound output feature is a feature that outputs a suppression notification sound from a speaker. The suppression notification sound is, for example, the voice saying, "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression alert sound output effect repeatedly outputs a suppression alert sound while the suppression function is active. Alternatively, the suppression alert sound output effect may be configured to output a specific error sound for a short time before repeatedly outputting the suppression alert sound. The suppression alert effect terminates when the suppression function is released. That is, when the RAM clear operation is performed upon power-on, the suppression function is released and the suppression alert effect terminates. The suppression alert display effect continues until the suppression function is released, while the suppression alert sound output effect may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression alert effect was executed, and power is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), it is preferable that the suppression alert display effect continues to run after the power is restored, while the suppression alert sound output effect does not run (even if there is remaining time in the predetermined period).

Furthermore, when the special game is not in progress (while the symbols are changing), if the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" (for example, if a ball enters the general prize slot and reaches the predetermined value of "95,000"), a suppression notification effect will be executed, suggesting or notifying the player that the suppression function has been activated. Note that the game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is a high-base state, and this high-base state ends when the suppression function is activated. Therefore, when this suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the high-base state is turned OFF, and if the second start slot is open, it is forcibly closed midway through, forcibly ending the change display in the high-base state (the currently running change display). Furthermore, even if the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" during a round of special gameplay, the suppression function will not activate until the special game (jackpot completion demo) ends, and the pre-notification effect (10th unit notification effect) will continue to run until the end of the special game (jackpot completion demo). Note that if the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" during the execution of special gameplay, the MY counter's count value will not be updated even if safe balls (planned number of prize balls) and out balls (balls already played) occur before the end of the special game (the MY counter's count value will remain at the predetermined value of "95,000"). Furthermore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000"), the most recent pre-notification animation (10th unit notification animation: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the message "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or as mentioned above, the pre-notification display animation may switch to a special message such as "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end and firing will stop after the special game ends," and this special message may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. In this configuration, the pre-announcement animation (10th unit announcement animation) continues to run even in the 10th round (final round). However, the configuration is not limited to the continuous execution of the pre-announcement animation (10th unit announcement animation). For example, a message such as "The suppression function will activate after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or, as mentioned above, the pre-announcement display animation may switch to a special message such as "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end and firing will stop after the special game ends," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the end of the special game. Subsequently, triggered by the end of the special game, the suppression announcement animation is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated.

Here, the cumulative prize ball display area shows the cumulative number of prize balls earned up to the present time based on game balls entering the big prize slot during a special game in a winning streak. This cumulative prize ball value (cumulative prize ball display) is updated and displayed when a prize ball count-up animation (also simply called a count-up animation) is performed. Here, the prize ball count-up animation is an animation that, when a game ball enters the big prize slot during a special game in a winning streak, adds the value of the prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the big prize slot to the cumulative prize ball value displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area and displays it. The game is designed so that when one game ball enters the large prize slot, "10" prize balls are dispensed (the unit prize ball for the large prize slot is 10). Therefore, when a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area is counted up in units of "10" (a prize ball count-up animation is performed in which "10" is added to the cumulative prize ball value). The cumulative prize ball display area can display a 5-digit number, and more specifically, it can display 100,000 possible values from "0" to "99999" as the cumulative prize ball display. Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball display is "99999". In this case, if the cumulative prize ball display has reached the upper limit of "99999", even if a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball display will not change and will maintain the upper limit of "99999". Thus, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball display, "99999," is set to a larger value than the predetermined upper limit of MY, "95000." In other words, the cumulative prize ball display when the upper limit of "99999" is reached can take a larger value than the predetermined MY value of "95000" which is announced in advance by the pre-notification effect. This allows for accurate notification that the number of prize balls won by the player has exceeded the predetermined MY value of "95000," thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. Furthermore, since the cumulative prize ball display does not take into account out-of-bounds balls and can take a value exceeding the predetermined MY value of "95000," it is preferable to configure it to be able to display up to the upper limit of "99999." As a variation, even if the cumulative prize ball display reaches the upper limit of "99999," if a game ball enters the big prize pocket, a pseudo-prize ball count-up effect (variable display of cumulative prize balls) may be executed. As a pseudo-prize ball count-up effect, for example, the display could show a sequence like 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, where the initial value (99999) and the final value (99999) are the same, but the numbers in between are randomly varied to give the impression that the cumulative number of prize balls is being counted up. As a further variation, when the cumulative number of prize balls display reaches the upper limit of "99999", and a new prize ball payout occurs (when a game ball enters the big prize), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative number of prize balls to suggest or inform that the cumulative number of prize balls display has exceeded its display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999", or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999", the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (the display of "99999" will not be shown thereafter), and the display of "FFFFF" may be kept constant regardless of whether or not a new prize ball payout occurs thereafter. As a further variation, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999", which is the number just before MY's default value of "95000", and when that number is exceeded, the text image of "Limit Achieved" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball count display will not be updated, and the text image of "Limit Breakthrough" may be continuously displayed. As a further variation, when that number is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image of "Limit Breakthrough" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball display may be set to the same number as MY's default value of "95000," namely "95000." If this number is exceeded, the text image "Limit Achieved" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball display is not updated, while the text image "Limit Breakthrough" is continuously displayed. In this configuration, if the number is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball display may be hidden, and instead, the text image "Limit Breakthrough" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball display was previously shown. As a further variation, in order to prevent excessive gambling tendencies from being stimulated in players, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball display may be set to a number sufficiently smaller than the default value of "95000" (for example, "50000"). If this number is exceeded, the text image "Limit Achieved" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball display is not updated, while the text image "Limit Breakthrough" is continuously displayed. Even with this configuration, if the value exceeds the limit, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead, the text image "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count was previously shown. While the display conditions for "Limit Break" can be set as appropriate, it is preferable not to perform the highlighting display (an effect that notifies that the cumulative prize ball count has reached a predetermined value, triggered by a game ball entering the large prize slot during special gameplay) while "Limit Break" is displayed, even if the cumulative prize ball count is at a specific value.

The emphasis effect is a feature that notifies the player that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined specific value, triggered when a game ball enters the big prize slot during a special game. The specific value is a number corresponding to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500 balls), and is set in units of 2500, such as "2500", "5000", "7500", "10000", "12500", etc. The predetermined number of prize balls value "2500" is set to a number smaller than the difference value "5000" obtained by subtracting the predetermined value "90000" from the predetermined value "95000" of the MY counter. As a result, between the time the MY counter count value reaches the planned value "90000" and the time it reaches the predetermined value "95000", that is, between the start of the pre-notification effect and the activation of the suppression function, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once, and the emphasis effect will be executed at least once. This ensures that at least one emphasis animation is performed, even in situations immediately before the suppression function is activated, and provides players with a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Even if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" and the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the prize ball count-up animation while a special game is in progress, the prize ball count-up animation will continue without interruption. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is met (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON) while the prize ball count-up animation is in progress, the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the special game ends, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up animation will not be stopped midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). As will be explained in more detail later, if the prize ball count-up animation is being performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot, and the subsequent prize ball count-up animation is being performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot (the entry that triggers the MY counter's count value to reach the predetermined value of "95,000"), the first and second prize ball count-up animations are seamlessly connected. Since these first and second prize ball count-up animations are structured as a continuous and integrated count-up animation, even if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met during the execution of the prize ball count-up animation, the execution of the prize ball count-up animation can be continued without interruption. As a result, the prize ball count-up animation can be shown to the player until the end without interruption, thus maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter's count value has reached the predetermined value of "95,000". In other words, if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but will continue. Therefore, even if the execution of the prize ball count-up animation is permitted, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up animation is inhibited, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished. Note that while the trigger for the MY counter reaching the predetermined value of "95,000" is described as "a game ball entering the large prize slot," this configuration is not limited to this. The trigger for the MY counter reaching the predetermined value of "95,000" could also be "a game ball entering the general prize slot."

During the execution of a special game, even if the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90000" and the pre-notification condition is met while the prize ball count-up animation is in progress, the system is configured to continue the prize ball count-up animation without interruption. In other words, even if the pre-notification condition is met while the prize ball count-up animation is in progress (when the pre-notification animation begins), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the special game ends, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up animation will not be terminated midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). As will be explained in more detail later, if the prize ball count-up animation is being performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot, and the subsequent prize ball count-up animation is being performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot (the entry that triggers the MY counter's count value to reach the predetermined value of "90000"), the first and second prize ball count-up animations are seamlessly connected. Since these first and second prize ball count-up animations are structured as a continuous and integrated count-up animation, even if the pre-notification conditions are met during the execution of the prize ball count-up animation, the execution of the prize ball count-up animation can be continued without interruption. As a result, the prize ball count-up animation can be shown to the player until the end without interruption, thus maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the MY counter's count value has reached the predetermined value of "90000". In other words, even if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90,000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue until the suppression function is activated. Therefore, even if the execution of the prize ball count-up animation is permitted, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up animation is inhibited, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished. Furthermore, when the prize ball count-up animation and the pre-announcement animation are displayed superimposed, the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-announcement animation is higher than that of the prize ball count-up animation, and the pre-announcement animation will be displayed in front of the prize ball count-up animation. While the trigger for the MY counter reaching the predetermined value of "90,000" is described as "a game ball entering the large prize slot," this configuration is not limited to this; the trigger for the MY counter reaching the predetermined value of "90,000" could also be "a game ball entering the general prize slot."

Even if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" and the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of a special game's highlighting effect, the highlighting effect will continue without interruption. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is met (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON) during the execution of a highlighting effect, the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the highlighting effect will not be stopped midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). As a result, the player can see the highlighting effect to the end without interruption, thus maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000". In other words, if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but will continue. Therefore, even if the execution of the emphasized effects is allowed, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasized effects is inhibited, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished.

During the execution of a special game, even if the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value of "90,000" and the pre-notification condition is met while the highlighting effect is being performed, the system is configured to continue the highlighting effect without interruption. In other words, even if the pre-notification condition is met while the highlighting effect is being performed (when the pre-notification effect is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game continues as is. Therefore, the highlighting effect is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, the player can see the highlighting effect to the end without interruption, and the player's desire to play can be maintained even after the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90,000". In other words, even if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue until the suppression function is activated. Therefore, even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is inhibited, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished. Furthermore, when the emphasis effect and the pre-notification effect are displayed superimposed, the display priority (layer priority) of the pre-notification effect is higher than that of the emphasis effect, and the pre-notification effect will be displayed in front of the emphasis effect.

The time required to display the count-up for one prize ball (the time required to display the count-up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". In other words, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area is displayed in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up animation, which is performed when one game ball enters the big prize slot, is derived by multiplying the time required to count up for one prize ball by the value of the prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the big prize slot (unit prize balls). In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up animation (the time value from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up animation) is "15 (unit prize balls) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". The execution time of the highlighting animation is the time from when the display of the highlighted image (enlarged image) of the cumulative number of prize balls begins until it ends. Regardless of which specific value the cumulative number of prize balls reaches (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, etc.), the execution time of the highlighting animation is set to "3 seconds". This execution time of the highlighting animation (3 seconds) is set to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up animation (0.45 seconds) that corresponds to one game ball entering the big prize slot. Therefore, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value triggered by one game ball entering the big prize slot, the prize ball count-up animation and the highlighting animation will be executed simultaneously or nearly simultaneously. By setting the execution time of the highlighting animation to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up animation that is performed in response to one game ball entering the big prize slot, even when the highlighting animation and the prize ball count-up animation are executed simultaneously or nearly simultaneously, the rare highlighting animation can be made more noticeable, further enhancing the player's satisfaction and sense of accomplishment when the highlighting animation occurs. Furthermore, when the highlighting effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed simultaneously, the display priority (layer priority) of the highlighting effect is higher than that of the prize ball count-up effect, and the highlighting effect will be displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Also, the time between rounds (the time it takes for the large prize slot to remain closed after the Nth round of gameplay and before the N+1th round of gameplay begins) may be set to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to one ball entering the large prize slot (0.45 seconds) and shorter than the execution time of the highlighting effect (3 seconds) (for example, 1.5 seconds).

The execution time of a pre-announcement animation is the time from the start to the end of one pre-announcement animation, and is the time from when the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" to when it reaches the predetermined value "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-announcement animation does not include the execution time of a pre-announcement animation when the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" but does not reach the predetermined value "95000" and falls below the predetermined lower limit value "89000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-announcement animation here refers to the execution time when the pre-announcement animation is completed upon reaching the predetermined value. The execution time of this pre-announcement effect is the time it takes for the MY counter's count value to increase by 5,000 (95,000 - 90,000 = 5,000) units from a predetermined value of 90,000. This increase of 5,000 units requires the number of prize balls obtained from multiple special games (for example, approximately 1,500 balls x 3 or more times in the case of a 10R jackpot). Therefore, basically, it takes the execution time of multiple special games from the start to the end of one pre-announcement effect. Consequently, the execution time of the pre-announcement effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the pre-announcement effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously, the pre-announcement effect, which is a continuous display, is given priority over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, thereby increasing the player's attention to the pre-announcement effect. This makes it possible to reliably inform the player of the current game status (that the suppression function is about to be activated). The pre-notification effects described here are pre-notification display effects, but the same relationship exists when compared to the execution time of the pre-notification sound output effect (for example, 5 seconds of sound output). Also, as mentioned above, the pre-notification effects are updated and displayed each time the MY counter's count value increases by 500 from the predetermined value of 90000, progressing in the order of the 1st unit notification effect → 2nd unit notification effect → 3rd unit notification effect → ... → 10th unit notification effect. However, the execution time of each unit notification effect from the 1st to the 10th unit notification effect that constitutes this pre-notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). In other words, the execution time of each unit notification effect is the time until the MY counter's count value increases by 500, and this increase of 500 requires the number of prize balls obtained from multiple rounds of gameplay (for example, approximately 150 balls x 3 rounds or more). Therefore, basically, it takes the execution time of multiple rounds of gameplay from the start to the end of one unit notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Consequently, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, will be given priority over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, thereby increasing the player's attention to the unit notification effect. This makes it possible to ensure that the player understands how many shots remain before the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second wording display) changes. Furthermore, since the highlight animation is executed in units of 2500 balls won, it will only occur at most once during a single special game (for example, a 10R special game: approximately 1500 balls won). (Only one type of highlight animation will be displayed per special game.) However, since the unit notification animation is executed in units of 500 balls, it can occur multiple times during a single special game (for example, a 10R special game: approximately 1500 balls won). (Multiple types of unit notification animations can be displayed during a single special game.) This allows players to see multiple types of unit notification animations during a single special game, further increasing their attention to the pre-announcement animations.

When the first game ball enters the big prize slot and the big prize slot switch (also called the big prize detection device) detects the entry of the first game ball, the prize ball count-up animation based on this first entry (referred to as the "first prize ball count-up animation") begins. If, while the first prize ball count-up animation is running, the second game ball (a new game ball) enters the big prize slot and the big prize slot switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the first prize ball count-up animation is interrupted and the prize ball count-up animation based on the second entry (referred to as the "second prize ball count-up animation") begins. Specifically, in the aforementioned prize ball count-up animation, if the animation is scheduled to display a count-up from "1000" to "1015," but a new game ball enters the big prize slot and is detected by the big prize slot switch while the animation is running, the animation will be interrupted (for example, the count-up display will be stopped at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up animation will begin. In the subsequent prize ball count-up animation, the remaining part of the previous animation (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") will be omitted, and the count-up display will continue from "1016" to "1030," which is the continuation of the final value "1015." Although some of the count-up displays in the first prize ball count-up sequence (the count-up displays from "1011" to "1015") are omitted, the end (interruption) of the first prize ball count-up sequence and the start of the second prize ball count-up sequence are seamlessly connected, and these first and second prize ball count-up sequences are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display. In this way, of the two prize ball count-up sequences, the priority of the second prize ball count-up sequence is set higher than that of the first prize ball count-up sequence. If the end of the first prize ball count-up sequence and the start of the second prize ball count-up sequence overlap in time, the execution of the first prize ball count-up sequence is interrupted and the execution of the second prize ball count-up sequence is given priority. Therefore, even when game balls continuously enter the large prize slot and two consecutive prize ball count-up animations are executed, the animations can proceed smoothly without interruption. This prevents a timing discrepancy between the entry of game balls into the large prize slot and the execution of the prize ball count-up animation (which could cause discomfort to the player), and allows the prize ball count-up animation to be properly completed during the execution of the special game (round game). As a variation, the system may be configured so that when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up animation is interrupted, the count-up display is forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if it is interrupted at "1010", it switches directly from "1010" to the final value "1015"), and from this final value, the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up animation (count-up display from "1016" to "1030") is started.

During the execution of a special game, if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize slot before one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value, and the MY counter will reach the predetermined value of "95000" (referred to as the "specific situation"). Specifically, in a particular situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485" during the execution of a special game, and the MY counter count is "94998", if one more game ball enters the big prize slot (resulting in a payout of 15 prize balls), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and the highlighting effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize slot before one more game ball enters the big prize slot (resulting in a payout of 3 prize balls), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97500", and the MY counter count will reach the specified value of "95000" (safe balls = 3, out balls = 1, difference in balls = 3-1=2, MY = 94998+2=95000), thus satisfying the conditions for activating the suppression function (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON). In this specific situation, if the gaming machine experiences a power outage and then power is restored, and this power restoration does not involve a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), then the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after the power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be performed. In other words, at the time of this power restoration, the performance information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is reset to zero), so even if the special game (bonus performance) resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball display will start again from the initial value of "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight performance (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of the power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with just one more game ball entering the big prize slot, in the special game that resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will restart from the initial value of "0". As a result, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be performed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0", if the game continues after the power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500"), the highlighting effect will be performed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches that specific value (a multiple of "2500"). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and restored (power restored without clearing RAM) before the conditions for the suppression function to activate are met, the MY counter will be initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Therefore, after this power restoration, the MY counter will start counting again from its initial value of "0". Consequently, even if the MY counter's count value at the time of the power cut-off is only one ball away from reaching the specified value of "95000", in the special game resumed after this power restoration, the MY counter will restart from its initial value of "0". Therefore, even if one more ball enters the large prize slot, the MY counter's count value will not reach the specified value of "95000", and the conditions for the suppression function to activate will not be met (the suppression function activation flag will not be turned ON). However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if gameplay continues after the power is restored and the MY counter's count reaches the specified value of "95000," the conditions for activating the suppression function will be met (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON).

During the execution of a special game, if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize slot before one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value, and the MY counter will reach a predetermined value of "90000" (referred to as the "predetermined situation"). Specifically, under predetermined conditions, when the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485" during the execution of a special game, and the MY counter's count value is "89998", if one more game ball enters the big prize slot (resulting in a payout of 15 prize balls), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and the highlighting effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize slot before one more game ball enters the big prize slot (resulting in a payout of 3 prize balls), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97500", and the MY counter's count value will reach the predetermined value of "90000" (safe balls = 3, out balls = 1, difference in balls = 3-1=2, MY = 89998+2=90000), thus satisfying the pre-notification condition. In this predetermined situation, if the gaming machine experiences a power outage and then power is restored, and this power restoration does not involve a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after the power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the big prize pocket, the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be performed. In other words, at the time of this power restoration, the performance information related to the cumulative number of prize balls that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative number of prize balls counter is reset to zero), so even if the special game (performance during a big win) resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls will be displayed again from the initial value of "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight performance (conditions for reaching a specific value) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of the power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with just one more game ball entering the big prize slot, in the special game that resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will restart from the initial value of "0". As a result, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be performed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0", if the game continues after the power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500"), the highlighting effect will be performed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches that specific value (a multiple of "2500"). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and restored (power restored without clearing RAM) before the conditions for the suppression function to be activated are met, the MY counter will be initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Therefore, after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from its initial value of "0". Consequently, even if the MY counter's count value at the time of the power cut-off is only one ball away from reaching the predetermined value of "90000", in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from its initial value of "0". Therefore, even if one more ball enters the major prize pocket, the MY counter's count value will not reach the predetermined value of "90000", and the pre-notification conditions will not be met. However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0", if the game continues after the power is restored and the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90000", the pre-notification conditions will be met. As a variation, if the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, and the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met, and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (power restored without RAM clearing), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the pre-notification performance may be configured not to resume immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is cut off during the execution of the second unit notification performance (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) (the power is cut off when the MY counter's count value is between "90500" and "90999"), and the power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (power restored without RAM clearing), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the second unit notification performance (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) may not resume immediately after the power is restored, and then the pre-notification performance may resume from the third unit notification performance (approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation) when the MY counter's count value reaches "91000". As a further variation, if the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, and the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met, and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) upon power restoration. However, the pre-notification effect may not be restarted immediately after power restoration. For example, if the power is cut off during the execution of the second unit notification effect (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) (when the MY counter's count value is between "90500" and "90999"), and the power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) upon power restoration, and the second unit notification effect (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) may be restarted immediately after power restoration.

During the execution of a special game, after the conditions for activating the suppression function are met (after the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), there is a situation (referred to as "Situation A") in which the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the big prize slot. Specifically, in Situation A, during the execution of a special game, if the MY counter's count value has already reached the predetermined value of "95000", and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 less than the predetermined specific value of "97500", then when one more game ball enters the big prize slot (resulting in the payout of 15 prize balls), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500", and the highlight effect will be executed. In this situation A, if the gaming machine experiences a power outage and is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined specific value of "97500," and the highlight performance that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is reset to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (performance during a big win) resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball display will start again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight performance (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of the power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with just one more game ball entering the big prize slot, in the special game that resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will restart from the initial value of "0". As a result, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be performed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0", if the game continues after the power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500"), the highlighting effect will be performed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches that specific value (a multiple of "2500"). Furthermore, in this situation A, if power is restored without a RAM clear (i.e., power is restored without a RAM clear after the suppression function activation conditions are met), the MY counter will not be initialized at the time of power restoration (the MY counter's count value of "95000" will not be cleared), and the suppression function activation flag will remain ON. Therefore, the suppression function will activate when the special game (jackpot completion demo) that resumed after the power restoration ends, and the suppression notification animation will be executed simultaneously or almost simultaneously.

During the execution of a special game, after the pre-notification conditions are met, that is, after the pre-notification effect has started, there is a situation (referred to as "Situation B") in which the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the big prize slot. Specifically, in Situation B, during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter has already reached the predetermined value of "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of the MY counter is "90000" or "90500", leaving some leeway before reaching the predetermined value of "95000"), and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 less than the predetermined specific value of "97500", then when one more game ball enters the big prize slot (when 15 prize balls are dispensed), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and the emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation B, if the gaming machine experiences a power outage and is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined specific value of "97500," and the highlight performance that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is reset to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (performance during a big win) resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball display will start again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight performance (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of the power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with just one more game ball entering the big prize slot, in the special game that resumes after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will restart from the initial value of "0". As a result, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be performed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0", if the game continues after the power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500"), the highlighting effect will be performed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches that specific value (a multiple of "2500"). Furthermore, even if the pre-notification conditions are met, if the power is cut off and restored (power restored without clearing RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be initialized upon power restoration (power on). Therefore, when special gameplay resumes after this power restoration, the MY counter will start counting again from its initial value of "0". Consequently, after this power restoration, the state will revert to one where the pre-notification conditions are not met, and the pre-notification animation that was running during the most recent power-off will not be resumed (the pre-notification animation will not be executed). However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0", if the gameplay continues after this power restoration and the MY counter's count reaches the predetermined value of "90000" (the pre-notification conditions are met), the pre-notification animation will be executed.

While the suppression function is active (during the execution of the suppression notification), volume and light intensity adjustments are disabled. In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game stops, even if volume adjustments are made, the volume level will not change (volume adjustments will be disabled). Therefore, even if volume adjustments are made during the execution of the suppression notification, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the voice saying "Suppression function activated") will not change, and the suppression notification sound will always be output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). As a variation, the suppression notification sound may be output in an output manner corresponding to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game stops, even if light intensity adjustments are made, the light intensity level will not change (light intensity adjustments will be disabled). Therefore, even if light intensity adjustments are made during the execution of the suppression notification, the light intensity of the frame lamps related to the suppression notification when all lights are on will not change. However, even if the conditions for the suppression function to activate are met, if a special game is in progress, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification effect is not executed), and therefore, volume and light intensity adjustments are possible during the execution of the special game. Furthermore, if a pre-notification effect is being executed, whether during a reel spin or a special game, adjusting the volume will change the volume level (the volume control becomes effective), and adjusting the light intensity will change the light intensity level (the light intensity control becomes effective). Here, the pre-notification sound output effect may be configured to output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume) rather than according to the set volume level, or it may be configured to output in a manner corresponding to the set volume level.

The relationship between various effects (standby demo effects, effect button operations, and predetermined operations of normal decorative symbols) and the suppression function is as follows: The standby demo effect can be executed (started) even while the pre-notification effect is running, but the standby demo effect cannot be executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is running. Furthermore, the pre-notification effect can be executed (started) and can run concurrently even while the standby demo effect is running, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while the standby demo effect is running, while the standby demo effect is forcibly terminated. Also, the effect button operation can be executed (started) even while the pre-notification effect is running, but the effect button operation cannot be executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is running. Furthermore, the pre-notification effect can be executed (started) and can run concurrently even while the effect button operation is running, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while the effect button operation is running, while the effect button operation is forcibly terminated. Furthermore, even while the pre-notification effect is running, the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols (action at the start of variation, action at temporary stop, action when a reach is established, and shaking action) can be executed (started), but while the suppression notification effect is running, the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols will not be executed (started). Note that even while the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are running, the pre-notification effect can be executed (started) and can run in parallel, while the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are running, but the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols will be forcibly terminated.

<ECO Pachinko Gaming Machine>
Figure 44 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in a first embodiment adopting the specifications of an ECO pachinko game machine. In realizing an ECO pachinko game machine, it is broadly divided into the pachinko game machine and the ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko game machine (each is configured to be detachable from the game hall equipment as a separate unit), and the pachinko game machine is broadly divided into the game board side and the game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be detachable from the game hall equipment, and the game board side is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame side).

The pachinko game machine frame includes an operation unit 1050. The operation unit 1050 consists of a touch panel interface 1052, a ball count display unit 54, a sub-input button SB (effect button), etc. The touch panel interface 1052 is configured to display and utilize game status information of the game machine and game media information recorded on an IC card (game media recording medium) inserted into the ECO unit EU (described later) through the player's touch operation (either contact-type or contactless touch operation). The touch panel interface 1052 also has an effect display function, and is configured to execute game-related effects via commands from the sub-main unit. The ball count display unit 54 displays the number of balls held {the number of game balls that can be used for gameplay (launched within the game area)}. The sub-input button SB is a device for controlling effects from the sub-main unit via the player's operation.

<ECO Unit>
Next, the ECO Unit EU is connected to the payout control board and the operation unit 1050. By inserting an IC card (member card, general card) on which the player's personal game status information (especially information on the number of game media they possess) is recorded, the game status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the operation unit 1050. Furthermore, the operation unit 1050 is configured to allow the player to utilize this game status information, perform lending control and management control for lending electronic money, etc. The ECO Unit EU is also connected to the hall computer via a network and is configured to output game-related information. Authentication processing of the game machine frame and game board is also performed via the ECO Unit EU. The ECO Unit EU is powered from a power source separate from the game machine and is also connected to the operation unit 1050, with the operation unit 1050 receiving power from the ECO Unit EU.

Figure 45 shows the processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board (particularly regarding the addition, subtraction, and transfer of the number of balls held). In this figure, it is assumed that the prize ball payout control board constantly transmits ball count information (information relating to the number of game balls that can be used for gameplay (launched within the game area)) to the ball count display unit 1054, and the ball count display unit 1054 repeatedly updates the ball count display. Furthermore, the figure illustrates the case where no errors occur in each process.

<Ball count addition process>
First, as an example of the ball count addition process, we will explain the ball lending process. First, in (1), when a ball lending operation is performed on the touch panel interface 1052, the "ball lending operation information" in (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 1052 to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "ball lending operation information," executes the consumption of the IC card balance in the ball lending control process in (3) and sends the "request to add to the number of balls held" in (4) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to add to the number of balls held," adds the number of game media equivalent to the consumed balance to the current number of balls held in the ball count addition process in (5). When the process in (5) is completed, the payout control board sends the "addition completion information" in (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "addition completion information," sends the "ball lending completion display instruction" in (7) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052, upon receiving the "ball lending completion display instruction," executes the ball lending completion display described in (8), and the ball lending process is completed.

<Reduction of remaining ball count>
Next, as an example of the process of reducing the number of balls held, the ball consumption process (particularly the process related to the wagon service) will be explained. First, in (1), when the wagon service usage operation is performed on the touch panel interface 1052, the "ball consumption operation information" in (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 1052 to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "ball consumption operation information," transmits the "request to reduce the number of balls held" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to reduce the number of balls held," subtracts the number of game balls to be consumed by the wagon service from the current number of balls held in the ball count reduction process in (4). When the process in (4) is completed, the payout control board transmits the "reduction completion information" in (5) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "deduction completion information," transmits the "ball consumption completion display instruction" (6) to the touch panel interface 1052. The touch panel interface 1052, having received the "ball consumption completion display instruction," then executes the wagon service usage completion display (7), and the ball consumption process ends.

<Transfer of ball count>
Next, as an example of the ball count transfer process, the IC card return process will be explained. First, in (1), when a return operation (IC card return operation) is performed on the touch panel interface 1052, the "return operation information" in (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 1052 to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "return operation information," transmits the "ball count return request" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "ball count return request," stops the game in the ball transfer process in (4) (for example, stops launching game balls), and in the ball count transfer process in (5), confirms that there are no game balls flowing down the game board (floating balls) (for example, waits until the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 returns to its initial value), and transmits the "ball count information" in (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "number of balls held information," temporarily stores the number of balls held based on the received information in the return control process of (7), and sends the "request to clear the number of balls held" of (8) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to clear the number of balls held," clears (zeroes off) the current number of balls held in the ball transfer process of (9), and sends the "completed ball count clearing information" of (10) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "completed ball count clearing information," adds the number of balls temporarily stored in the process of (7) above to the number of balls stored on the IC card inserted into the ECO unit in the return control process of (11). Next, in the return control process of (12), the ECO unit EU ejects (returns) the IC card from the IC card return slot and sends the "return completion display instruction" of (13) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052, upon receiving the "return completion display instruction," executes the return completion display in (14), and the IC card return process between the touch panel interface 1052 and the ECO unit EU is completed. Also, upon completion of the process in (12), the ECO unit EU transmits the "return completion information" in (15) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, upon receiving the "return completion information," cancels the game stop performed in the process in (4) and returns to the playable state in (16), and the IC card return process between the ECO unit EU and the payout control board is completed.

<About the game ball circulation mechanism>
Next, let's explain the circulation of the game balls. In this pachinko game machine, it is possible to play by circulating a certain number of game balls (for example, 100 balls) within the machine (hereinafter, the circulating game balls may be referred to as sealed game balls), and the game can proceed without supplying game balls from outside the machine or dispensing (paying out) game balls outside the machine.

First, the sealed game balls are stored in the sealed game ball tank within the sealed game ball count management device. The sealed game balls in the sealed game ball tank are sent to the launching device by a ball-feeding solenoid mechanism, and the game balls are launched towards the game area on the game board by a launching control device. Next, the game balls launched into the game area enter one of the ball entry points, which are peripheral game equipment, and flow from the game board side to the game machine frame side. These incoming sealed game balls are detected by prize ball permission sensors and out ball detection sensors corresponding to the ball entry points provided in the game area, and are stored again in the sealed game ball tank. Then, under these circumstances, as the enclosed game balls circulate within the pachinko machine, when a game ball is launched towards the game area on the game board, or enters an entry point that is eligible for prize ball payout, the payout control board will award prize balls to the player (by adding or subtracting from the player's ball count).

Furthermore, since the game balls are configured to circulate, the system is designed so that players cannot touch the balls. Specifically, it lacks the upper and lower trays found in the preceding technology. This configuration prevents fraudulent activities such as introducing illegal game balls, including those with smaller diameters than normal, balls with strings attached, or balls brought in from other establishments. It also makes it difficult to remove game balls circulating within the machine to disrupt its proper performance, thus effectively preventing fraud.

Furthermore, a backup power supply for providing power to the backup area is located on the payout control board. This backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit E (power supply board) and is powered by the backup power supply. Even if power is cut off from the power supply unit E during a power outage, the backup power supply can still supply power to the backup area, allowing it to store the ball count counter, history, and various flags, and retain various payout information that is crucial for gameplay.

A backup power supply for the backup area that holds the ball count counter, etc., is provided on the payout control board. This configuration allows it to function as a dedicated backup power supply for the ball count counter, etc., ensuring stable power supply even if harnesses connected to the payout control board are disconnected or detached, thereby increasing the reliability of the backup. Furthermore, by supplying power only to the backup area for the ball count counter, etc., the backup time can be extended even with a smaller backup power supply, and the payout control board can be miniaturized, resulting in space savings. Alternatively, a dedicated backup power supply for the ball count counter, etc., may be provided in the power supply unit E. By providing it in the power supply unit E, the payout control board can be further miniaturized and lightened.

Furthermore, the backup power supply for maintaining the ball count counter, etc., may be shared with the backup power supply for the main board located in power supply unit E. Sharing the backup power supply in power supply unit E simplifies the configuration related to the backup power supply.

Furthermore, volatile memory is used as the RAM for storing the ball count counter and other data. While using volatile memory reduces costs, it requires a backup power supply to back up the volatile memory in case of power outages. Alternatively, non-volatile memory could be used as the RAM for storing the ball count counter and other data. For example, flash memory could be used as the non-volatile memory. This configuration eliminates the need for a backup power supply, allowing for overall miniaturization and weight reduction.

As described above, the system is configured such that when a ball enters the game, it is detected by both the ball entry detection device on the game board and the prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, and the prize balls are awarded to the player only when the prize information transmitted from the main board (for example, information related to the type of prize slot and the number of prize balls) matches the basic number of prize balls stored on the payout control board, thus preventing the acquisition of prize balls through fraudulent means. Furthermore, by providing the prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, the cost of the game board can be reduced (since the replacement of pachinko game machines is mainly done by replacing only the game board, and the game machine frame is often reused). In addition, for prize entries into which prize balls have been awarded to the player, the system is configured to display the type of prize slot and the number of prize balls on a designated display unit (for example, a prize information display device), thus providing a user-friendly game machine that makes it easy for players to understand which prize slot they entered and how many prize balls they received.

Furthermore, the payout control means has a temporary storage means for payout processing-related information for temporarily storing information related to prize balls. This temporary storage means for payout processing-related information further includes a prize counter for counting the number of prizes received from the main board for each prize slot, a ball count counter for counting the player's current number of balls (number of game media that can be used for playing), and a sealed game ball count counter for counting the number of game balls (sealed game balls) currently present in the game machine frame. Here, the ball count counter is a counter that stores the player's current number of balls (number of game media that can be used for playing). As a result of the player playing, the value of the ball count counter may become zero, in other words, the player's current number of balls may become zero. In such cases, it is necessary to stop the launch of game balls. That is, when the value of the ball count counter becomes zero, it is necessary to control the system so that game balls are not launched even if the player operates the launch handle. The launching device includes a launching motor and a ball feeding device (not shown). The launching control board, which is the control circuit of the launching device, controls the operation of the launching motor and the ball feeding device. By interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of drive signals to the launching motor, the launching of game balls can be stopped. Furthermore, the launching control board can also stop the launching of game balls by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of control signals to the ball feeding device.

<Total score display device>
In the gaming machine according to this example, the game balls that are lent out or obtained by entering designated prize slots may be used as a pseudo-game medium that can be processed computationally, while the game balls that are launched may be physical game balls. In such a configuration, a total score display device capable of displaying the total number of launchable game balls may be provided. The total score display device has nine display units formed of 7-segment LEDs and is provided in a position that is easily visible to the player (for example, near the sub-input button SB). The nine (nine-digit) display units consist of five (five-digit) display units for displaying total score information, two (two-digit) display units for displaying acquired score information, and two (two-digit) display units for displaying error information. The total number of launchable game balls displayed on the total score display device is configured to increase when game balls are lent out or when prize balls are obtained by entering designated prize slots. The total number of launchable game balls displayed on the total score display device is stored in a memory device such as RAM. The memory device can be, for example, RAM built into the CPU of the main board. In addition, the total score display device may also be configured to have a separate memory device such as RAM, so that both the main board and the total score display device can store information related to the total number of game balls that can be launched. In this way, the total score display device of the game machine according to this example can not only display the total number of game balls but also store it.

Furthermore, the total score display device can display the following information:
(1) Total Score Information Total score information refers to information that indicates the total number of points that can be scored by launching. Note that the number of launchable game balls may be referred to as points (1 ball = 1 point), and the sum of the number of launchable game balls may be referred to as the total score.
(2) Information on points earned Information on points earned refers to information that indicates the points (also called prize balls) obtained by entering a designated prize slot in one go.
(3) Error Information This is information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the main board and/or the payout control board. As mentioned above, the total score display device has five (five-digit) display units to display total score information, two (two-digit) display units to display acquired score information, and two (two-digit) display units to display error information, for a total of nine display units. Note that the display units for displaying acquired score information and the display units for displaying error information may be used interchangeably. In this case, if an error occurs while acquired score information is being displayed, the display switches from the acquired score information to the error information. For example, when an error occurs, different display modes are used depending on the type of error, such as "E1", "E2", "E3", etc., and "E1" is displayed as an error when power recovery cannot be performed normally. For example, when eight balls are dispensed, "*8" is displayed ("*" indicates off) and a power outage occurs, and power recovery cannot be performed normally, the error may be displayed as "E1", and if power recovery is performed normally, "*8" may be displayed. The number of display units can be changed as needed. For example, it is possible to have four display units for displaying total score information, allowing for the display of up to four digits, or to have six display units for displaying total score information, allowing for the display of up to six digits.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine capable of launching 100 game balls per minute, if the payout rate is 2 after continuously launching game balls for one hour, the calculation would be "In: 100 x 60 = 6000, Out: 12000". If the gaming arcade's operating hours are 14 hours, the calculation would be "In: 84000, Out: 168000". In such a case, the total score displayed on the total score display device at the end of the arcade's operating hours would be approximately "168000 - 84000 = 84000". Therefore, in this configuration, it is preferable to have five display units on the total score display device to display the total score information, capable of displaying up to five digits of information.

Among the various types of errors, if an unrecoverable error occurs that cannot be recovered without performing a RAM clear process when settings are changed (an error that cannot be recovered from the situation immediately before the error occurred), when recovering, the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared, but as mentioned above, the information regarding the total score is not cleared, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player (for example, if an unrecoverable error occurs when the total score is "2000", it is possible to prevent the score from becoming "0" when recovering from the unrecoverable error). Furthermore, even if the RAM area (address) containing the information regarding the total score is also cleared, the information regarding the total score is also stored in the CR unit, and when recovering from an unrecoverable error, the information regarding the total score is transmitted from the connection terminal board to the main board and/or payout control board, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player. In addition, if the total score display device is equipped with RAM, by storing the information regarding the total score in that RAM, it is possible to prevent any disadvantage to the player even if an unrecoverable error occurs and the player recovers from the unrecoverable error. In other words, if there is a means to back up the total score information (a storage area for backing up the total score information) in the event of a power outage or when the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage even if an irrecoverable error occurs. (The total score information may be stored in the storage area within the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board and in a backup storage area, or it may be stored only in a storage area that is not erased even when the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared (a backup storage area).)

<Information regarding the number of balls won/lost>
In the gaming machine according to this example, the machine may be configured to allow the player to check the difference in the number of game balls (scores) over a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period from when the player starts playing) {the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the total number of game balls launched from the total number of game balls dispensed}. For example, a display unit for showing the difference in the number of game balls may be provided in a position where the player can always see it, or it may be configured to be displayed on the performance display device. If the performance display device is configured to display information regarding the difference in the number of game balls, it may be configured to display information regarding the difference in the number of game balls at all times in a display area of the performance display device, or it may be configured to display information regarding the difference in the number of game balls on the performance display device on a menu screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB during the operation valid period (or by operating the sub-input button SB again on the menu screen) (if the player wishes to check the difference in the number of game balls, it may be configured to allow the player to check the difference in the number of game balls at any time by operating the sub-input button SB). Furthermore, the difference in balls may be defined as the increase or decrease in the total score from a predetermined timing, such as the start of the game. For example, if the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 2500 points (balls), the difference in balls will be +500 points (balls). If the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 1500 points (balls), the difference in balls may be -500 points (balls). In addition, when displaying the difference in balls on a predetermined display unit (for example, a performance display device), the display color (display pattern) may differ depending on the value of the difference in balls, such as displaying positive values and 0 in black, and negative values in red.

Furthermore, the main board may be configured to measure and calculate information regarding the difference in the number of balls, including the current number of balls and the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current number of balls from a predetermined number, and to store this information on the main board. Alternatively, a board other than the main board (for example, the payout control board KH) may measure and calculate information regarding the difference in the number of balls, including the current number of balls and the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current number of balls from a predetermined number, and to store this information on the main board. The main board may also be configured to transmit the stored information to the sub-board. Additionally, the main board may be configured to receive information regarding the difference in the number of balls from other devices and to be able to access this information.

Furthermore, the configuration regarding the number of balls won may be as follows:
(1) When the number of balls in the game reaches a predetermined number, the game will be stopped. For example, even if the player operates the launch handle, no game balls may be launched, balls entering the prize slots may be invalidated, and various lotteries on the main board may not be executed.
(2) The system may be configured to allow electromagnetic recording of information regarding the number of balls won on a predetermined recording medium, and further, when a player starts playing, the system may be configured to read the information stored on the recording medium and continue playing by inheriting the information regarding the number of balls won. In such a configuration, even if a player plays on multiple gaming machines in one day, the number of balls won can be inherited and measured, and the total number of balls won by the player in one day can be determined. In addition, when the number of balls won by a player in one day reaches a predetermined number, the game may be stopped as described above, and information that the number of balls won has reached the predetermined number for stopping the game may be recorded on the recording medium, and the system may be configured so that the player cannot play (cannot borrow gaming balls) for a predetermined period (for example, until the next business day). Furthermore, if a player plays on multiple gaming machines in a single day, it is preferable to configure the system to allow tracking of which player played which machine. For example, it is preferable to record identification information on the recording medium that identifies which player is playing, and to configure the system to allow access to the total number of balls won in a given day by referring to this identification information when a player starts playing.

Furthermore, when the game is stopped, the system may be configured to transmit information indicating that the game has been stopped to another control board, such as a sub-board. For example, when transmitting information to a sub-board, it becomes possible to perform controls to display a predetermined information or to change the display mode of the ongoing effects, etc., based on the transmitted information.
(1) When the game is stopped, the display device may be configured to display a message indicating that the game has been stopped, such as: (1-1) displaying a message indicating that the game has been stopped on a layer in front of the currently displayed message, occupying more than half the area of the display area of the display device; (1-2) displaying a predetermined warning image (for example, "Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed in moderation") on a layer in front of the currently displayed message; or (1-3) erasing the currently displayed message and displaying a message indicating that the game has been stopped across the entire display area of the display device. Furthermore, when displaying a message indicating that the game has been stopped, a dedicated audio message may be output (for example, "The game will end. Please be careful not to get addicted"), or the game effect lamp may be lit in a lighting pattern dedicated to that message.
(2) If the number of balls in the game reaches the predetermined number while a jackpot is in progress, during the start demo time, or during a symbol change related to the jackpot symbols, (2-1) the process of stopping the game is not executed, and the game is stopped when the number of balls in the game decreases by more than the number of balls increased by the jackpot, or (2-2) the game is stopped, and the game can only be resumed by an operation that is not possible for the player (for example, an operation that can only be performed by the arcade manager), or the game cannot be resumed unless a RAM clear is performed when the settings are changed.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to transmit information regarding the number of balls played from the main board to the sub-board when the game has not yet reached a predetermined number at which the game will stop. In such a configuration, the sub-board may be configured to display or output an audio message indicating that the game is about to stop when the number of balls is only a certain number away from reaching the predetermined number at which the game will stop (for example, when 100 more balls are needed to reach the predetermined number). Additionally, for example, if the predetermined number is -2500 points (balls), the sub-board may be configured to execute a more frequent pre-announcement effect (e.g., a conversation effect) during symbol changes when the number of balls is relatively far from the predetermined number (e.g., +1000 balls) than when the number of balls is relatively close to the predetermined number (e.g., -2000 balls).

<Effects when the total score reaches the upper limit>
Furthermore, while the total score may increase when game balls are dispensed, an upper limit may be set on the total score, and the system may be configured so that the total score does not increase once it reaches the predetermined value. For example, if the size of the memory area for the total score is 2 bytes, the total score that can be stored will be from 0 to 65535, and the upper limit of the total score will be 65535. In such a configuration, if the total score is 65510 and game balls enter the big prize slot, resulting in a payout of 15 balls, the score of 15 points (balls) will be added to the total score, making the total score 65525. On the other hand, if the total score is 65530 and game balls enter the big prize slot, resulting in a payout of 15 balls, adding the score of 15 points (balls) would exceed the upper limit of 65535. Therefore, the score of 5 points (balls) will be added to the total score, making the total score the upper limit of 65535. Furthermore, if the total score is at its upper limit, the system may be configured not to increase the total score even if it receives information from the CR unit CRU (sometimes referred to as the ECO unit) to increase the total score (for example, inserting banknotes into the CR unit CRU becomes invalid, or the operation of the button on the CR unit CRU for dispensing points becomes invalid). Furthermore, if the total score reaches (exceeds) the upper limit due to a win, the system may be configured to generate an error and stop the game from progressing. In addition, if the total score reaches (exceeds) the upper limit due to a win, the total score may be displayed by changing the display format, such as displaying the higher digits in hexadecimal, or using a scrolling or switching display.

<Structure of information regarding gaming value>
The game machine may be configured to transmit information indicating that the value of one game ball or one point is a first value (for example, 4 yen) and information indicating that the value of one game ball or one point is a second value lower than the first value (for example, 1 yen) from a connection terminal board, which is a terminal board provided inside the game machine, to the main board (hereafter, the main board may be called the payout control board). The information indicating the first value and the information indicating the second value may be referred to as game value information. Furthermore, in such a configuration, the main board may be configured to store which information, the information indicating the first value or the information indicating the second value, was received. Furthermore, the system may be configured to allow verification of whether the game value information stored on the main board matches the game value information received from the connection terminal board. The timing of this verification may include: (1) checking for constant matching, (2) each time a predetermined number of game balls are launched (for example, by measuring the number of balls launched), (3) at predetermined intervals (for example, every hour), (4) after power is restored following a power outage, or (5) after a RAM clear process related to setting changes is performed. Additionally, if the system determines that the game value information stored on the main board does not match the game value information received from the connection terminal board, for example, if the game value information stored on the main board is the first value and the game value information received from the connection terminal board is the second value, the system may be configured to stop the game until the game value information matches, making it impossible to launch game balls, invalidating balls entering the prize pockets, or making it impossible to perform the score (total score) settlement process.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the game is stopped, if the system is configured to transmit information from the main board to the sub-board indicating that the game has been stopped, then: (1) When the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game is stopped and an animation indicating that the game has been stopped is performed, while when the main board stores game value information, which is the second value, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game is not stopped and no animation indicating that the game has been stopped is performed. (2) When the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game is stopped and the game is stopped (1) The system may be configured to perform an animation indicating that the game has been stopped, while if the main board stores game value information, which is a second value, the game will not be stopped regardless of the number of balls, and no animation indicating that the game has been stopped will be performed. (2) If the main board stores game value information, which is a first value, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined value (for example, -2500 balls), the game will be stopped and an animation indicating that the game has been stopped will be performed. If the main board stores game value information, which is a second value, and the number of balls reaches a specific value (for example, -10000 balls) which is less than the predetermined value, the game will be stopped and an animation indicating that the game has been stopped will be performed. Although the system has been configured to perform an animation indicating that the game has been stopped based on the number of balls, it is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to perform an animation indicating that the game has been stopped based on information regarding the loan amount of points (game value, game balls, points held) that can be calculated based on the number of balls and game value information. Furthermore, the presentation style when the main board stores game value information (the first value) and the presentation style when the main board stores game value information (the second value) may be different. By configuring it in this way, the presentation style can be based on the amount of money the player is spending, thereby effectively preventing excessive gambling.

<Structure of the game termination procedure>
Furthermore, the system may be configured to have a settlement button, allowing the player to transmit score information from the main board to the connection terminal board by operating the settlement button (the game can be terminated by this operation). In the event of a power outage while the score information is being transmitted, the system may be configured so that after the power is restored, (1) the main board transmits the score information again to the connection terminal board, and (2) the connection terminal board sends a request signal to the main board requesting that it transmit the excess score information again, after which the main board transmits the score information again to the connection terminal board.

Furthermore, if the settlement button is operated while the door unit is open, the system may be configured to either (1) execute the score settlement process, or (2) not execute the score settlement process. Also, if the door unit opens immediately after the settlement button is operated, the system may be configured to allow the score settlement process to continue without interruption.

When the settlement button is operated while the settings are being checked, the system may be configured to: (1) execute the score settlement process when the set value is verifiable; (2) execute the score settlement process when the set value is no longer verifiable; (3) not execute the score settlement process when the set value is verifiable; or (4) not execute the score settlement process when the set value is no longer verifiable.

When the settlement button is operated in settings change mode, the system may be configured to perform the following actions: (1) execute the score settlement process while remaining in settings change mode; (2) exit settings change mode and execute the score settlement process; (3) not execute the score settlement process while remaining in settings change mode; or (4) exit settings change mode and not execute the score settlement process.

When the settlement button is operated while the main game symbols are changing, the system may be configured to either (1) execute the score settlement process while the main game symbols continue to change, or (2) not execute the score settlement process while the main game symbols continue to change.

When the settlement button is pressed during a big win (or small win), the system may be configured to either (1) execute the score settlement process while the big win (or small win) is still running, or (2) not execute the score settlement process while the big win (or small win) is still running.

As described above, even if an unintended event (power outage, error) occurs while transmitting or receiving score information between the main board and the connection terminal board, accurate transmission or reception of score information is still possible. Furthermore, in the above configuration, or in addition to the above configuration, the transmitting side may be configured to (1) include data indicating the completion of transmission in the score information (for example, having termination bit information in the case of serial communication), and (2) transmit termination information after transmitting the score information. The receiving side may also be configured to send reception completion information to the transmitting side after receiving the transmitted score information.

Figure 46 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment adopting the specifications of an ECO pachinko machine. The difference from Figure 44 lies in the configuration of the control unit 1050. Specifically, the control unit 1050 is equipped with a ball count display device MU and an ECO unit control panel ES.

Next, Figure 47 shows the details of the operation unit 1050 in Figure 46. The ball count display device MU is equipped with a ball count display unit 1501, a settlement amount setting display unit 1502, an information display unit 1503, a full settlement button 1504, a partial settlement button 1505, and a settlement unit setting button 1506. The ECO unit operation panel ES is equipped with a settlement completed display unit 601, a re-play button 602, a card balance display unit 603, a lending button 604, a card return button 605, and a status display unit 606.

The ball count display unit 1501 is composed of, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment LED and can display up to "999,999" balls stored (held) by the gaming machine. The settlement amount setting display unit 1502 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and can display up to "9,999" unit game balls when settling a portion of the ball count. The unit settlement amount can be set for each digit by operating the upper or lower buttons of the settlement unit amount setting buttons 1506, which are arranged corresponding to each digit. The information display unit 1503 is composed of an LED capable of displaying English letters (not shown) and can display error information and settlement confirmation, which will be described later, when an error occurs. Specifically, if there is a communication abnormality between the payout control board and the ball count display unit 1501, "E1" will be displayed, and if there is a communication abnormality between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, "E2" will be displayed, and so on. Furthermore, it is preferable that the ball count display unit 1501 be configured so that no information other than the ball count (e.g., error information) is displayed. Note that the above number of digits is merely an example and can be changed without issue.

The full settlement button 1504 is composed of a mechanical switch, etc., and is used to settle the game balls (held balls) stored (retained) by the gaming machine. Its operating surface is configured to be the largest within the game ball count display unit (MU). To prevent accidental operation, the full settlement process requires multiple operations. The partial settlement button 1505 is composed of a mechanical switch, etc., and is used to settle a portion of the game balls (held balls) stored (retained) by the gaming machine. Its operating surface is smaller than that of the full settlement button 1504. Similar to the full settlement process, to prevent accidental operation, the partial settlement process requires multiple operations.

Next, the ECO unit operation panel ES will be described. The settlement display unit 601 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the ball count display unit 1501, and can display the number of balls a player has, managed by the ECO unit, up to "999,999". The card balance display unit 603 is composed of a 3-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the balance (number of uses) recorded on the IC card. The lending button 604 is composed of a mechanical switch, for example, and is a button to be operated when lending out game balls within the range of the balance (number of uses) recorded on the IC card. The card return button 605 is composed of a mechanical switch, for example, and is a button to be operated when the player removes the IC card. The re-play button 602 is composed of a mechanical switch, for example, and is a button that, when operated by the player, makes the settled game balls displayed on the settlement display unit 601 available for use. As will be explained in more detail later, control and display control in response to various button inputs on the ECO unit's operation panel ES will be performed by the control unit on the ECO unit itself.

Figure 48 shows the schematic electrical configuration of a pachinko game machine. Pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a CPU that performs various calculations, a ROM that stores a program that defines the calculations performed by the CPU in advance, and a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the CPU (various data generated during gameplay and computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). They are also equipped with a payout control board that controls the launch of game balls and the addition and subtraction of game ball data corresponding to the consumption of game balls due to prize ball awarding and launching, a game ball count display unit MU which is equipped with various display units such as the aforementioned game ball count display unit 1501 and various input operation units such as the full settlement button 1504, an ECO unit connection terminal board for relaying information transmitted and received between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, and an ECO unit operation panel ES which is equipped with various display units such as the aforementioned card balance display unit 603 and various input operation units such as the lending button 604. The ECO unit connection terminal board allows communication of information with the ECO unit EU, which is installed outside the pachinko gaming machine and is equipped with appropriate control functions. In this specification, the ECO Unit EU is sometimes described as part of a pachinko game machine; however, here it will be described as a separate device from the pachinko game machine.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board controls the operation of the player's balls during the game (addition, subtraction, etc.) based on information from the main board and the ECO unit EU (mainly information to be added to the player's ball count), the launch detection sensor or the ball feeding sensor described later (mainly information to be subtracted from the player's ball count), and is configured to display the ball count information and control the operation of the launching device (launching handle, launching motor, ball feeding device, etc.).

Furthermore, the payout control board includes a transmission/reception control means for sending and receiving information related to prize balls, a payout control means for managing the processing related to prize ball payouts, a launch control means for managing the processing related to the launch of game balls, and an initial processing control means for power outages and power recovery for processing during power outages on the payout control board side.

Here, the transmission/reception control means includes a reception control means for controlling the reception of information and a transmission control means for controlling the transmission of information. Furthermore, the reception control means includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the main board, and an ECO unit-side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the ECO unit EU.

Next, the payout control means includes a temporary storage means for payout processing-related information for temporarily storing information related to prize balls. This temporary storage means further includes: a prize counter for counting the number of prize balls received from the main board into each prize slot; a ball count counter for counting the player's current number of balls (the number of game balls available for play); and a sealed game ball counter for counting the number of game balls (sealed game balls) currently present within the game machine frame.

Next, the launch control means includes a launch control-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information related to the launch control of the game balls.

Next, the power outage/power restoration initial processing control means includes a power outage information temporary storage means for temporarily storing (backing up) information during a power outage. Although not shown in the diagram, a backup power supply for powering the power outage information temporary storage means is provided on the payout control board. This backup power supply is connected to a power supply unit and is powered by it. Even if power from the power supply unit is interrupted during a power outage, the backup power supply can still supply power to the power outage information temporary storage means. This allows the system to retain information stored in the payout control board, such as the number of unpaid balls, the number of balls held (e.g., the value of the ball count counter, the number of sealed game balls counter, etc.), and various flags, even during a power outage. This ensures that various payout information, which is crucial for gameplay, is retained. Note that the value of the sealed game ball counter may be configured to be cleared upon power restoration. Needless to say, the power outage information temporary storage means can be configured using a common RAM with the payout processing related information temporary storage means, or by temporarily storing the payout processing related information temporary storage means itself.

<ECO Unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is similar to the card unit R and is connected to the ECO unit operation panel ES via the ECO unit connection terminal board. By inserting an IC card (member card, general card) on which the player's personal status information (for example, card balance and number of gaming media held) is recorded, the status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the ECO unit operation panel ES. Furthermore, by operating the input operation section (loan button 604, card return button 605) of the ECO unit operation panel ES, it is possible to control the lending of gaming balls using the card balance and number of gaming media held recorded on the IC card, as well as perform control processing based on various information transmitted from the gaming machine.

<ECO Unit Connection Terminal Board>
The ECO unit connection terminal board, as will be described in detail later, is a board for connecting the dispensing control board and the ECO unit EU, and the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and various signals are transmitted and received through this ECO unit connection terminal board.

Furthermore, although the ECO unit connection terminal board is illustrated to receive signals bidirectionally from the dispensing control board, the ECO unit operation panel ES, and the ECO unit EU, the ECO unit EU is merely configured to control the ECO unit operation panel ES; the dispensing control board is not configured to receive status information related to the ECO unit operation panel ES.

<Ball count display device>
Next, the ball count display device MU includes a ball count display unit 1501 for displaying the number of balls held, a settlement number setting display unit 1502 for displaying the number of game balls to be settled for partial settlement (described later), an information display unit 1503 capable of displaying error information when an error occurs, and an input operation unit that can be operated by the player. The input operation unit of the ball count display device MU includes a full settlement button 1504 for settling all acquired game balls, a partial settlement button 503 for settling some of acquired game balls, and a settlement unit setting button 1506 for setting the number of game balls to be partially settled.

<ECO Unit Control Panel>
Next, the ECO unit operation panel ES includes a settlement display unit 601 that displays the number of game balls that have been settled, a card balance display unit 603 that displays status information (for example, card balance) recorded on the IC card (member card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU, a status display unit 606 that displays an error when a communication abnormality occurs between the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and an input operation unit for the ECO unit operation panel. The input operation unit on the ECO unit operation panel ES includes a replay button 602 that is operated when playing again with settled game balls, a loan button 604 for lending out game balls, and a card return button 605 for removing the IC card (member card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU.

Next, we will explain the information (e.g., information and signals) that is transmitted and received. First, we will explain the information transmitted and received between the pachinko machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU. As mentioned above, the system is configured so that information is transmitted and received between the machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU via the ECO unit connection terminal board.

Specifically, the signals (information) transmitted from the ECO unit EU to the pachinko machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) include an operation panel drive signal to operate the ECO unit operation panel ES, a loan request signal to dispense game balls, a unit RDY signal indicating that the ECO unit is ready to receive information from the game machine, and status information managed by the ECO unit, such as the error status of the ECO unit. On the other hand, the signals (information) transmitted from the gaming machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) to the ECO unit EU include gaming machine information {setting value information, prize ratio information for each setting, ball entry status information, external output information (jackpot signal, probability change signal, symbol change signal, prize entry signal, prize ball signal, lending signal, etc.), ball count information, etc.}, operation information (settlement information) from the input operation section of the ball count display device, the gaming machine RDY signal indicating that it is ready to receive information from the ECO unit EU, and operation signals from the input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel ES. The lending request signal and the unit RDY signal are input to the payout control board, while the gaming machine information, settlement information, and gaming machine RDY signal are output from the payout control board.

Next, we will explain the information transmitted and received between the ECO Unit Operation Panel ES and the ECO Unit EU via the ECO Unit Connection Terminal Board. The ECO Unit Operation Panel ES transmits operation signals to the ECO Unit EU indicating that the loan button 604 and the card return button 605 on the input operation section of the ECO Unit Operation Panel ES have been operated. Meanwhile, the ECO Unit EU outputs operation panel drive signals to the ECO Unit Operation Panel ES to drive display units such as the settlement display unit 601, the card balance display unit 603, and the status display unit 606. Various information (e.g., card balance information) recorded on the IC card inserted into the ECO Unit EU is then displayed on the corresponding display unit of the ECO Unit Operation Panel ES (e.g., the card balance display unit 603).

Next, we will explain the information transmitted and received between the payout control board and the ball count display device (MU). The payout control board transmits ball count information (for example, information from the ball count counter stored in the temporary storage means for payout processing-related information) and abnormal information for displaying error information on the information display unit 1503 of the ball count display device (MU). The ball count display device (MU) transmits input operation information for the input operation unit (full payout button 1504, partial payout button 1505, payout unit setting button 1506) of the ball count display device (MU) to the payout control board.

Furthermore, if both the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are pressed simultaneously (i.e., if both are detected being pressed in a single timer interrupt), the system is configured to prioritize the partial settlement process. Additionally, if one button is pressed before the other, the system is configured to process the earlier press as valid.

Furthermore, if both the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are pressed simultaneously in a single timer interrupt, neither process may be performed. This configuration allows, for example, when cleaning the ball count display device MU of the operation unit 1050 becomes necessary while there are remaining balls. By maintaining the state of pressing both the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 simultaneously while wiping, it is possible to avoid accidentally pressing either the full settlement button 1504 or the partial settlement button 1505. While it is desirable to prevent either process from being performed based on the detection of both the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 being pressed in a single timer interrupt, this is not the only criterion for determining simultaneous pressing. Alternatively, if the other button is pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) of the detection of one button being pressed, it may be considered a simultaneous press. Needless to say, it is easy to adopt a similar configuration for the loan button 604 and return button 605 on the ECO unit control panel ES.

In this way, during the full settlement process, the first operation of the full settlement button 1504 triggers a settlement confirmation display (for example, a display using the information display unit 1503, etc., asking "Do you wish to settle all payments?"), and the second operation of the full settlement button 1504 executes the full settlement. Furthermore, the settlement confirmation display shown after the first operation is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). If the full settlement button 1504 is operated after it has been erased, the settlement confirmation display is re-examined. In other words, the full settlement is only executed if the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the first operation. This ensures that even if the full settlement button 1504 is accidentally operated, the full settlement is performed immediately, preventing the game from stopping. As a measure to prevent accidental operation of the full settlement button 1504, it is also possible to execute the full settlement process only if the full settlement button 1504 is continuously operated for a certain period of time (for example, held on for 3 seconds or more).

Furthermore, it is desirable to configure the system so that, in the event of a gaming machine malfunction due to communication errors (for example, an malfunction that causes the game to stop), settlement information is stored in a specific memory area and cannot be deleted by normal clearing. Additionally, it is desirable to configure the system so that, in the event of such a malfunction, settlement information cannot be retransmitted to the ECO unit unless special maintenance operations are performed. This will help deter fraudulent activities using communication malfunctions.

In this way, during the partial settlement process, the first operation of the settlement unit setting button 1506 triggers a settlement confirmation request process (for example, a process that displays "Do you wish to proceed with partial settlement?" on the information display unit 1503, etc.) to settle the set amount of partial settlement (the amount of settlement displayed on the settlement unit setting display unit 1502). The second operation executes the partial settlement. The settlement confirmation display shown after the first operation is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). If the partial settlement button 1505 is operated after this time, the settlement confirmation display will be shown again. In other words, partial settlement is only executed if the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the first operation. This prevents accidental operation of the partial settlement button 1505 when the number of balls remaining is low, which could result in immediate settlement and gameplay interruption. Furthermore, since the player can arbitrarily set the amount of partial settlement and the setting value for the second settlement can be reflected, efficient partial settlement can be achieved.

Furthermore, to prevent accidental operation of the partial settlement button 1505, it is possible to execute the partial settlement process only if the partial settlement button 1505 is operated continuously for a certain period of time. It is also desirable to disable the input of the settlement unit setting button 1506 for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the first operation of the partial settlement button, thereby preventing the change of the partial settlement amount. Moreover, it is preferable to set a default value (e.g., 100 units) for the partial settlement amount before the player first operates the settlement unit setting button 1506, thereby enabling a certain amount of partial settlement without the player having to set the amount.

Here are some variations on how to set the settlement amount.

(Multiple types of settlement units are predetermined, for example, 250, 500, 750, 100)
(A configuration defined as 0th grade, etc.)
(1) Multiple settlement units (for example, 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.) may be predetermined, and the system may be configured so that when the settlement unit setting button 1506 corresponding to each settlement unit is operated, the settlement amount can be set according to that unit. Specifically, when the settlement unit setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "250" is operated, "250" is added to the display of the settlement amount setting display unit 1502, and when the settlement unit setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "500" is operated, "500" is added to the display of the settlement amount setting display unit 1502, and so on.
(2) When multiple settlement units are predetermined (for example, 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.), if the number of balls held is less than the minimum settlement unit and the minimum settlement unit is set as the settlement amount, the system is configured to settle the entire amount. Specifically, when the number of balls held is "249" and the minimum settlement unit of "250" is set, the system is configured to settle "249", and when the number of balls held is "2400", it is possible to set a partial settlement up to "2250".

(The settlement unit size is predetermined in multiple types, for example, 100, 200, 300, etc.)
If the number of balls held is "99" or less, settlement is only possible with a full settlement. Alternatively, if the number is set to "100" or more, the system will configure it to settle only the number of balls held. For example, if the number of balls held is "1850", partial settlement is possible up to "1800".

(The system is configured so that the number of settlement units corresponds to the number of prizes exchanged at each amusement arcade.)
For example, if a game parlor has set a minimum exchange rate of 40 balls for drinks and 150 balls for cigarettes, the corresponding exchange units can be set using multiple exchange unit setting buttons 1506 (for example, button 1 = 40 balls, button 2 = 150 balls, etc.). This configuration allows for smooth prize exchange because the desired number of balls can be partially exchanged for the desired prize with a single input or a small number of operations, without having to set the number of balls beforehand. It is not necessary to display the prize and the number of balls exchanged together; displaying only the number of exchanges is also acceptable.

Furthermore, the following configuration can be applied as a display method when the number of balls displayed on the ball count display unit 1501 is reduced due to the operation of the full settlement button 1504 or the partial settlement button 1505.
(1) Switching the display of the number of balls remaining For example, if the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated for the second time, the display on the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 is switched from "1,000" to "0". If the partial settlement button is operated for the second time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of partial settlements set by the settlement unit setting button 1506 is displayed. If the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the set number of partial settlements is "750", the display on the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 is switched from "1,000" to "250".
(2) Displaying a decrement For example, if the ball count display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated for the second time, the display on the ball count display unit 1501 will change from "1,000" to "999" to "998" to "0". If the partial settlement button is operated for the second time, the display will decrement to the value obtained by subtracting the number of partial settlements set by the settlement unit setting button 1506. If the ball count display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the set number of partial settlements is "750", the display on the ball count display unit 1501 will change from "1,000" to "999" to "998" to "250".
(3) The number of balls remaining will flash for a predetermined time before the display is switched. For example, if the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is pressed for the second time, the display on the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 will flash "1,000" for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and then switch to "0". If the partial settlement button is pressed for the second time, the number of balls remaining will flash and then display the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement amount set by the settlement unit setting button 1506. If the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 displays "1,000" and the set partial settlement amount is "750", the display on the number of balls remaining display unit 1501 will flash "1,000" for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and then switch to "250".

As described above, various configurations can be applied to switch the display of the number of balls held during settlement. However, if the display of the number of balls held is switched immediately after the settlement button is pressed (as in examples (1) and (2) above), the player will be settled without being able to confirm how many balls they had. Therefore, it is preferable to configure it as in (3), which allows the player to know how many balls they have.

Furthermore, as a variation of the display method used when subtracting the number of balls held as described above, it is also possible to configure it as follows.
1. The configuration in "(3) The display of the number of balls remaining blinks for a predetermined time before switching the display" does not necessarily require blinking; it is sufficient if the player can keep track of the number of balls remaining. For example, it may be configured to keep the display lit for only 3000ms.
2. The configuration "(3) The number of balls remaining will flash for a predetermined time and then the display will be switched" or the configuration "1. The number of balls remaining will light up for a predetermined time and then the display will be switched" can also be applied to the configuration "(2) The display will show a decrement." In other words, it is also possible to configure the display to show a decrement after the number of balls remaining will flash or light up for a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms).

As explained above, it is also possible to change the loan request signal (content of the request) from the ECO unit in response to the operation of the loan button 604 and the re-play button 602 depending on the situation when the loan button 604 is operated. Specifically, it is conceivable that only the settled game balls are recorded on the IC card, or that both the balance and the settled game balls are recorded. In this case, the system may be configured to use the settled game balls displayed on the settled display unit 601 rather than using the recorded balance. Furthermore, instead of treating the dispensing button 604 and the re-play button 602 as separate input functions for dispensing, it is also possible to configure the system so that when the re-play button 602 is operated once, it lights up, and when the dispensing button 604 is operated at this time, the game becomes playable using the already settled game balls. If the re-play button 602 is turned off (for example, by operating the re-play button 602 again), and the dispensing button 604 is operated, the balance recorded on the IC card is deducted, and game balls are dispensed.

Although the term "button" was used in this explanation, the term "button" is not limited to physical buttons; it may also refer to button displays as images. Specifically, each display unit may be composed of a touch panel, and by operating (pressing) the button image displayed on the display unit, it may be possible to perform actions such as full settlement, partial settlement, and setting the settlement unit amount. Furthermore, although the system is configured to perform settlement (full settlement, partial settlement) through multiple operations, it is not limited to this; it may also be configured to perform settlement through long presses, etc. By configuring the system to perform settlement through multiple operations or long presses, even if the full settlement button 1504 or partial settlement button 1505 is accidentally operated, settlement will not be performed immediately, but rather the settlement will be performed in a manner that reflects the player's intention.

Figure 49 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in a third embodiment that adopts the specifications of a sealed-type pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine is a sealed-type pachinko game machine and is broadly divided into the pachinko game machine and the rental unit KU installed outside the pachinko game machine (each is configured to be detachably attached to the game hall equipment as a separate unit). The pachinko game machine is further divided into the game board side and the game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be detachably attached to the game hall equipment, and the game board side is configured to be detachably attached to the game machine frame side). Below, we will first explain the configuration mainly related to the pachinko game machine.

First, a pachinko game machine has an operating unit 1050. The operating unit 1050 consists of a game ball count display W10, sub-input buttons SB, a directional pad SB2, a counting button W40 (also called a transfer button), etc. The game ball count display W10 displays the number of balls held {the number of game balls that can be used for gameplay (launched within the game area)}. The sub-input buttons SB and directional pad SB2 are devices for controlling the effects on the sub-board side through the player's operation. The number of balls held is sometimes referred to as the counter value of the ball count counter. Furthermore, the game ball count display W10 is positioned in a location visible to the player.

Figure 50 shows details of the control unit 1050. First, the game ball count display W10 is composed of six digits arranged in a horizontal row of seven segments, and can display up to 999,999 balls stored (held) by the game machine. The number of balls is stored using a ball count counter. Further details regarding the display of the game ball count display W10 will be described later.

Furthermore, while the maximum number of balls that can be displayed on the game ball count display W10 is set to "999,999," this configuration necessitates a memory area capable of storing "1,000,000" balls (one digit more than "999,999") in order to determine if this limit has been exceeded. Therefore, the upper limit for the number of balls that can be displayed may be set to a value such as "990,000," where the number of displayed digits does not change even if the number of balls exceeds this limit. This configuration allows for a simpler process to determine whether the number of balls has exceeded the upper limit.

Furthermore, the frame control display (a display unit consisting of six digits arranged in a horizontal row of seven segments, capable of displaying base values (such as base values in low-base states that can be displayed on the performance display unit) and the number of balls held (counter value of the ball count counter), installed on the back of the gaming machine and visible from the back of the gaming machine; in other words, unlike the game ball count display unit W10, it is not visible to the player) can also display the number of balls held. Therefore, the upper limit for the number of balls that can be displayed is "999,999". However, similar to the game ball count display unit W10, the upper limit for the frame control display unit may also be set to a value such as "990,000", where the number of display digits does not change even if the number of balls held exceeds that upper limit.

If the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit of what can be displayed, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as the action taken:
(1) The RAM on the main board is not updated. (2) The RAM on the frame control board W (which controls the display of the game ball count indicator W10, the display of the frame control indicator, and communication with the dispensing unit KU, etc., and controls the number of balls held) is not updated. (3) The dispensing of game balls by the dispensing device KU is not performed. (4) It becomes impossible to launch game balls. (5) Even if a game ball enters the prize pocket, no prize balls are awarded. (6) The number of balls held is counted by operating the counting button W40. (7) Special games are not performed.

Furthermore, if the number of balls exceeds a predetermined value (a value smaller than the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed, for example, 40,000), the system may be configured to issue an error notification or prompt the player to count their balls. Specifically, if the number of balls exceeds 40,000, the system may issue an error notification via a lamp on the main board, or a notification prompting the player to count their balls via a lamp on the main board, or the display device SG on the sub-board may display "Please count your balls," or the speaker on the sub-board may announce "Please count your balls." By configuring the system in this way, even if the system is configured so that no prize balls are awarded when a ball enters the prize slot after the number of balls exceeds the upper limit, the player can recognize that they should count their balls at 40,000, a value smaller than the upper limit, thus preventing the player from suffering the disadvantage of not receiving prize balls.

In this configuration, the system may be configured to either clear an error related to the ball count exceeding a predetermined value (40,000 in this example) or terminate the counting notification when the number of balls falls below a predetermined value (e.g., terminate the notification via lamps on the main board, hide the "Please perform counting" message on the sub-board's display device SG, terminate the "Please perform counting" voice notification from the sub-board's speaker, etc.).

Furthermore, the condition for clearing the above error or terminating the counting notification may be configured to be a specific value (for example, 37,000 balls) where the number of balls held is less than a predetermined value. By configuring it in this way, the annoyance of frequent errors occurring or being cleared (notifications being executed or terminated) due to the number of balls being repeatedly exceeded or fallen below a predetermined value (40,000 balls in this example) can be eliminated.

Next, the counting button W40 is used to output the number of balls held to the dispensing unit KU. Note that outputting the number of balls held to the dispensing unit KU is sometimes referred to as counting the number of balls held or settling the number of balls held. The detailed operation of the counting button will be described later.

Furthermore, a display unit may be provided to show the number of game balls counted by operating the counting button. For example, when the counting button is operated, the system may be configured to display the number of game balls counted on a 4-digit 7-segment LED for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the sub-input button SB and the directional pad SB2 are the same as those described above and are connected to the sub-board. Operating the sub-input button SB and the directional pad SB2 allows you to advance the button-based pre-announcement effects, select and confirm items on the menu screen, and adjust the volume and brightness.

In this example, the game ball count display W10 and the frame control display are configured to display the counter value of the ball count counter as the number of balls the player has. It should be noted that the counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as the number of balls data, and in this case, the number of balls data is numerical data. Furthermore, the counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as the number of balls. Also, the game ball count display W10 may be referred to as the first display unit, and the frame control display unit may be referred to as the second display unit.

The game machine is configured to execute a game ball count clear process when the game ball count clear button is turned on (operated). The game ball count clear button is located on the back of the game machine and cannot be operated by the player. By having a game ball count clear button and enabling the execution of the game ball count clear process, even if the game hall closes with a number of remaining balls (for example, if a player leaves only one ball), the game ball count clear process can be executed before the start of business the next day, preventing situations where players start business with remaining balls.

When the game machine is powered on with the ball removal button turned ON (operated), it is configured to enter the ball removal state. The ball removal button is located on the back of the game machine and cannot be operated by the player. When in the ball removal state, the game balls inside the pachinko machine can be removed (for example, a portion of the path through which the ball passes after entering the ball entry slot is opened). In the ball removal state, game balls can still be launched, but the game progresses halted (winning entries into the prize slots are invalid, symbol changes do not occur, jackpots do not occur, etc.). Note that "winning entries into the prize slots are invalid" means that the game machine may not detect the entry of a game ball into the prize slot, or it may detect the entry of a game ball but no prize balls are awarded based on the entry.

The following are characteristic configurations of this embodiment.
<Structure 1>
The normal hold image 506 in Figure 30 includes a first hold image indicating a normal hold and a second hold image suggesting a high probability of transitioning to a special game. The first hold image is, for example, a hold image that lights up in white. The second hold image is a hold image that lights up in a different color so that it can be visually distinguished from the first hold image (first normal hold image 506a, second normal hold image 506b, fourth normal hold image 506d), as shown in the third normal hold image 506c in Figure 30(a). In particular, it lights up in a conspicuous color, such as red or rainbow colors, to suggest a high probability of success. The normal hold image 506 is also referred to as a hold icon.

During the display of the symbol variation corresponding to the first held image (a symbol variation executed when the held image corresponding to the first held image is consumed), a screen transformation effect can be executed as a special effect. Similarly, during the display of the symbol variation corresponding to the second held image (a symbol variation executed when the held image corresponding to the second held image is consumed), a screen transformation effect can also be executed as a special effect. The screen transformation effect is the effect described in Figures 32 and 33, etc., and is an effect that applies transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, oscillation, tilting, cracking, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame image included in the displayed video, along with the surrounding frame image. The frame image subject to this transformation includes the normal held image 506 corresponding to the remaining held image. It should be noted that when simply referred to as "held image," it refers to the normal held image 506.

<Structure 2>
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the starting prize slot, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed immediately, but rather displayed with a predetermined animation that gradually reveals it, in order to indicate that a hold has occurred. After the normal hold image 506 begins to be displayed with the predetermined animation, a specific animation (for example, the normal hold image 506 sways from side to side and completes one back and forth, rotates 360 degrees clockwise, or flashes for 0.2 seconds after 1.8 seconds) can be displayed in a loop. The display state of the animation of the normal hold image 506 is maintained by repeatedly displaying this specific animation in a loop multiple times. The predetermined animation is the part of the animation process in which the normal hold image 506 gradually appears until it is fully visible. The specific animation is the part of the animation pattern in which the normal hold image 506, which has fully appeared in the predetermined animation, sways from side to side and completes one back and forth. A specific animation is displayed repeatedly in a loop, causing the normally held image 506 to continuously sway from side to side. This animation continues until the symbol variation corresponding to the normally held image 506 begins.

At least one of the predetermined animation display and specific animation display can be displayed even while the screen transformation effect as a special effect is being executed (that is, the animation display can be executed even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed), and at least one of the predetermined animation display and specific animation display can be displayed when the normal hold image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect (that is, the normal hold image 506 is displayed in a transformed state, and the animation display can be executed in a manner synchronized with that transformed state; specifically, if the normal hold image 506 is displayed at an angle, the animation display will also be executed in a manner in which the normal hold image 506 is at an angle). This makes the screen transformation effect a unified whole across the entire screen. Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined animation display in the first held image and the predetermined animation display in the second held image have different display modes (for example, the former is an animation that is gradually displayed from the bottom, and the latter is an animation that is gradually enlarged). It is also possible that when the predetermined animation display in the first held image starts, a hold image sound corresponding to the first held image (for example, a "beep" sound with an output period of 0.5 seconds and output at a low volume) is output, and when the predetermined animation display in the second held image starts, a hold image sound corresponding to the second held image (for example, a "boom!" sound with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) is output. Alternatively, even when the predetermined animation display in the first held image starts, no hold image sound may be output (there is no hold image sound corresponding to the first held image), and when the predetermined animation display in the second held image starts, a hold image sound corresponding to the second held image (for example, a "boom!" sound with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) may be output. Furthermore, it is desirable that the specific animation displayed in the first held image and the specific animation displayed in the second held image have the same display mode (for example, an animation that sways from side to side and completes one cycle), but they may also have different display modes (for example, the former being an animation that sways from side to side and completes one cycle, and the latter being an animation that rotates 360 degrees clockwise). Note that no sound effect corresponding to the execution of the specific animation display is output (there is no sound effect triggered by the start of the loop display of the specific animation display).

<Structure 3>
If a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is not being executed, the first hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the newly occurred hold, and in this case, the first hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. If a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the first hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the newly occurred hold, and in this case, the first hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. On the other hand, if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is not being executed, the second hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the newly occurred hold, and in this case, the second hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. However, if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the second hold image will not be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the newly occurred hold; that is, the second hold image will not be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. This allows for prioritizing the execution of screen transformation effects to avoid overlapping situations that should draw attention.

<Structure 4>
The game includes a winning animation that can be executed at the start of displaying either the first reserved image or the second reserved image. The winning animation is, for example, a winning flash animation (also called a "winning flash animation") that generates a predetermined type of light emission animation (for example, the frame lamp or panel lamp lights up red, and this illumination is performed for 5 seconds or until the reserved image that triggered the illumination is consumed) and an audio output animation (for example, the sound "Zubabababa!" which is output for 3 seconds at a loud or extra-loud volume). The winning animation may also be, for example, the special ball entry pre-announcement animation described in Figure 42, and it is desirable that the animation outputs a loud notification sound and causes the decorative lamp 111 to light up brightly when a new ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12.

If the first reserved image is displayed while the screen transformation animation is running, the winning animation will not be performed. This allows the screen transformation animation to be prioritized to avoid overlapping situations that should draw attention. As a variation, if the winning animation and the special winning animation are different animations, the system may be configured so that, while the winning animation is not performed, the special winning animation is still performed if the first reserved image is displayed while the screen transformation animation is running.

<Structure 5>
If a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 can be transformed in the screen transformation effect and then display the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the new hold. On the other hand, even if a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, the hold count display (simple hold image 507 in Figure 30) is not transformed in the special effect (i.e., it is not transformed like in the screen transformation effect) and is updated and displayed. For example, if a new hold occurs when the hold count display is 0, the hold count display is updated from 0 to 1. More specifically, if a screen transformation effect is executed when there are two holds, and a new hold occurs during the execution of that screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the third hold is transformed (for example, enlarged or tilted) and displayed, while the hold count display is updated from 2 to 3 without its display form being transformed (for example, enlarged or tilted).

The execution time for the animation display of the regular held image 506 is longer than the update time for the held count display, and the execution time for the screen transformation effect is longer than the execution time for the animation display of the regular held image 506. The execution time for the screen transformation effect varies depending on the duration for which the transformation is maintained, but as an example, it is desirable to have a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 60 seconds. The update time for the held count display is, for example, equivalent to one frame of a video display (if the video frame rate is, for example, 30 fps, one frame is 1/30 of a second). The execution time for the animation display of the regular held image 506 is, for example, 0.3 to 1 second. The execution time for the screen transformation effect is, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, the relationship is: update time for the held count display < execution time for the animation display of the regular held image 506 < execution time for the screen transformation effect (time for maintaining the transformation of the frame image).

<Structure 6>
In the first performance pattern in which the screen transformation effect is performed, there is a higher probability than in the second performance pattern in which the screen transformation effect is not performed that a predetermined high-expectation effect (for example, a super reach effect or a high-expectation movable mechanism effect described later) will be performed in which the normal hold image 506 is not displayed during the symbol change. The symbol change effect pattern when the first performance pattern is performed is a high-expectation symbol change effect pattern (a winning or losing spin in which a super reach effect is performed after a reach occurs) (or there is a high probability that it will be), such as a symbol change effect pattern in which a super reach effect is performed. Also, the symbol change effect pattern when the second performance pattern is performed is a normal losing symbol change effect pattern (a losing spin that ends quickly without a reach occurring) (or there is a high probability that it will be).

During the execution of a predetermined high-expectation effect, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, but the hold count display remains visible. This allows the screen transformation effect to have a cohesive feel across the entire screen, while also providing a period of time before the high-expectation effect is executed, and ensuring that the player's understanding of the current game state is not hindered during this time.

<Structure 7>
In a specific symbol variation that is executed when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a specific result (miss) different from a predetermined result (hit), and which is accompanied by the execution of a predetermined high-expectation effect, the screen transformation effect can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before developing into the predetermined high-expectation effect. The display of the stage background image before developing into the predetermined high-expectation effect is the normal reach period 670 as explained in Figure 43. On the other hand, the screen transformation effect is not executed while the stage background image is displayed after the predetermined high-expectation effect in the specific symbol variation is re-displayed. The period during which the stage background image is re-displayed after the predetermined high-expectation effect is the stop display period 674 as explained in Figure 43. In this way, by differentiating whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed before and after the execution of a high-expectation effect, such as a super reach effect, it is possible to concentrate the noteworthy situation only in the first half, creating anticipation for the subsequent development, while not hindering the lingering feeling of a miss in the second half. During the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, the normal hold image 506 can be displayed, the number of hold images can be displayed, the normal decorative symbols 502 can be displayed, and the simplified decorative symbols 504 can be displayed. However, during the entire period or at least a portion of the period in which a predetermined high-expectation performance is executed (super reach period 672), the normal hold image 506 is not displayed, the number of hold images can be displayed, the normal decorative symbols 502 are not displayed, and the simplified decorative symbols 504 can be displayed. Furthermore, during the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, even if a new hold is generated, the first hold image can be displayed with a predetermined animation or a specific animation, but the second hold image is not displayed with a predetermined animation or a specific animation (it is not displayed at all).

<Structure 8>
Normally, the decorative symbol 502 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, a mode swaying from side to side, or a mode where the numbers or characters are facing diagonally) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the display of the symbol variation in the first display mode (for example, a static mode or a mode where the numbers or characters are facing forward) has stopped. The first display mode is the symbol variation mode of the normally decorative symbol 502, and is the process from the start to the stop of the variation of the normally decorative symbol 502. The second display mode is, for example, a display mode in which the normally decorative symbol 502 is swaying. If the game is in a standby state after a predetermined period, for example 3 seconds, has elapsed since the normally decorative symbol 502 stopped varying (in other words, if there are no reserves since the normally decorative symbol 502 stopped varying and therefore no new variation display has started), the display mode switches to the second display mode in which the normally decorative symbol 502 is swaying.

Normally, when the decorative symbol 502 is in the first display mode, the screen transformation effect can be executed, but when the decorative symbol 502 is in the second display mode, the screen transformation effect is not executed. This prevents the visibility of the movement of the decorative symbol 502 when it is moving in a special way, such as in the second display mode.

<Structure 9>
The suppression notification animation in the aforementioned suppression function is an animation (suppression function activation notification animation) that notifies the end of the game when the count value MY, which is specific information relating to the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value (for example, "95000"). If the suppression notification animation is executed when the specific information reaches a predetermined value while a screen transformation animation is in progress, the screen transformation animation is interrupted. When the count value MY, which is the specific information, reaches a predetermined value (for example, "95000"), the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. This allows the suppression function based on the predetermined value to be activated appropriately and maintain an appropriate state after activation, thereby accurately notifying the player. The count value MY may be specified to increment from 0 to the predetermined value of 95000, or to decrement from 95000 to the predetermined value of 0, etc., as long as the upper limit of the count is effectively 95000.

<Composition 10>
The suppression notification effect is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo deformation like the screen deformation effect), and the screen deformation effect is not newly executed while the suppression notification effect is running. The suppression notification effect is not displayed on the effect layer 524 in Figure 33, for example, and is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo deformation like the screen deformation effect). The suppression notification effect is displayed on the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 in Figure 33, for example, and is preferentially displayed on a layer in front of the effect layer 524 where the screen deformation effect is displayed. This allows the suppression function based on predetermined values to be activated appropriately, and maintains an appropriate state after activation, thereby accurately notifying the player.

<Composition 11>
The aforementioned pre-notification animation for the suppression function is an animation (pre-activation suppression function notification animation) that suggests the suppression function will soon be activated when the count value MY, which is specific information, reaches a specific predetermined value (for example, "90000"). The pre-notification animation is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation animation (i.e., it does not undergo deformation like the screen deformation animation), while the screen deformation animation can be newly executed while the pre-notification animation is running. The pre-notification animation is not displayed in the animation layer 524 in Figure 33, for example, and is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation animation (i.e., it does not undergo deformation like the screen deformation animation). This allows for the appropriate and flexible activation of the pre-notification of the suppression function, and by maintaining an appropriate state after activation, accurate notification can be provided to the player.

<Composition 12>
The pre-notification effect and the screen transformation effect can be executed simultaneously (the screen transformation effect can be started while the pre-notification effect is running, and the pre-notification effect can be executed when certain information reaches a certain predetermined value while the screen transformation effect is running), while the pre-notification effect is displayed in front of the screen transformation effect. The pre-notification effect is displayed, for example, on the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 in Figure 33, and is preferentially displayed on a layer in front of the effect layer 524 where the screen transformation effect is displayed. This allows the pre-notification of the suppression function to be activated appropriately and flexibly, and maintains an appropriate state even after activation, thereby accurately notifying the player.

<Composition 13>
The pre-notification animation for the suppression function and the display of the number of reserved balls can be executed simultaneously (the pre-notification animation can be executed when certain information reaches a certain predetermined value while the display of the number of reserved balls is being executed), but they are not displayed on top of each other. The display of the number of reserved balls is, for example, the simplified reserved ball image 507 in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, and the pre-notification animation can be displayed simultaneously at a position that does not overlap with the simplified reserved ball image 507.

<Composition 14>
In a special situation where there is a specific reserved ball related to a high-expectation variation pattern that enables screen transformation effects (for example, a variation pattern that executes a super reach effect), and the difference in the number of balls until the specific information reaches a predetermined value is 1, if two or more balls are awarded for a predetermined 1 ball entry without a power outage before the specific reserved ball is consumed, the screen transformation effect will not be executed after the award balls are awarded. This is because the suppression function is activated after the award balls are awarded. Furthermore, once the count value MY reaches the predetermined value and the suppression function activation flag is turned ON, even if the power is turned off and then back on, the suppression function activation flag will not be cleared and will not turn OFF unless the power is turned off and then back on with a RAM clear. Therefore, the suppression notification effect will also be activated after the power is restored.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned special circumstances, if a power outage and subsequent power restoration occur before the consumption of a specific reserved ball, and then two or more prize balls are awarded for a predetermined single ball entry, the screen transformation animation may be executed after the prize balls are awarded. This is because, in the above-mentioned special circumstances, if a power outage and subsequent power restoration occur before the consumption of a specific reserved ball, and then two or more prize balls are awarded for a predetermined single ball entry, the count value MY will be cleared. In this way, the execution of the screen transformation animation is prioritized unless an irregular situation occurs, and the possibility of executing the screen transformation animation is retained even if an irregular situation occurs, thereby preventing a narrowing of the range of animations.

<Composition 15>
If a predetermined situation exists before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined standby effect (standby demo screen, standby demo effect) indicating that the game is in standby mode can be executed. During the execution of the predetermined standby effect in that predetermined situation, the screen transformation effect is not executed, but the display of the number of reserved balls can be executed. The standby effect referred to here is, for example, the effect shown in the screen example in Figure 40(c), but the display of the number of reserved balls, such as the simplified reserved ball image 507, may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the standby effect is displayed.

After (or during) the suppression notification animation is executed, none of the predetermined standby animations, screen transformation animations, or hold count displays will be performed. This is because the game ends due to the suppression function. In this way, while appropriately informing the player of the game's standby status, if the suppression function is activated from that state, the notification can be implemented in a way that does not mislead the player into believing they are still in standby mode, and does not impede the visibility of the displayed content.

<Composition 16>
Furthermore, even during the standby animation, it is possible to switch to a suppression notification animation (end the standby animation) when specific information reaches a predetermined value. Also, even during the standby animation, it is possible to simultaneously execute a pre-notification animation when specific information reaches a specific predetermined value.

<Composition 17>
During the start demo time, which is the start of a special game, when a launch notification is performed to encourage the player to fire towards the big prize pocket during the start demo performance, the screen transformation performance is not performed, and the suppression notification performance is not performed even if certain information reaches a predetermined value. The launch notification performance referred to here is not a small right-firing guidance like the guidance display 530 shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, but a performance that strongly recommends the player to fire in a certain direction by displaying the text "Aim for the attacker!" in large letters on the full screen. The guidance display 530 is also performed simultaneously while the launch notification performance is running, and the launch notification performance is not performed during subsequent rounds of gameplay (especially from the second round onwards) or during the end demo time, but the guidance display 530 is still performed. In addition, the launch notification performance is not performed even in a high base state, but the guidance display 530 is still performed.

On the other hand, in the demo sequence for the start of a jackpot, while the launch notification sequence is being executed, the screen transformation sequence is not performed. However, when certain information reaches a specific predetermined value, the pre-notification sequence can be executed simultaneously. That is, the pre-notification sequence may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the launch notification sequence is displayed. In this way, both the execution of the special game, which is an opportunity to gain profit, and the notification that it is time to shoot to the right can be executed reliably and without hindering visibility. While the pre-notification sequence and the launch notification sequence may be executed simultaneously and displayed overlappingly, it is preferable that the pre-notification sequence and the guidance display 530 be executed simultaneously but not displayed overlappingly (they have separate display areas).

<Composition 18>
It is possible to execute a movable mechanism effect using a movable mechanism that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs theatrical actions, and it is possible to execute a high-expectation movable mechanism effect as a movable mechanism effect that suggests a high expectation of transitioning to a special game. The movable mechanism is, for example, the movable mechanism 520 in Figure 34, and by operating at a predetermined timing, it theatrically suggests a high expectation of transitioning to a special game. However, while the movable mechanisms 520a to 520d in Figure 34 operate during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the high-expectation movable mechanism effect in configuration 18 is an effect that is not executed during the execution of the screen transformation effect. For example, an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 109 at the timing that is the winning or losing branching point at the end of a super reach effect other than the screen transformation effect, and when the player presses the effect button 109 and a jackpot occurs, the movable mechanism appears.

While the screen transformation animation is running, the high-expectation movable mechanism animation is not executed (and conversely, while the high-expectation movable mechanism animation is running, the screen transformation animation is not executed). However, even while the screen transformation animation is running, the initial operation of the movable mechanism, which is triggered by power restoration after a power outage, can still be performed. The initial operation of the movable mechanism is, for example, the operation of the movable mechanism when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, and it involves setting the movable mechanism to an operational state and then returning it to its initial position. Specifically, this means that the display changes during the initial operation when the power is turned on or restored after a power outage, the screen transformation animation starts at a predetermined timing in the display, and the initial operation is not yet completed at that predetermined timing.

During the execution of the high-expectation movable mechanism animation, the normal decorative symbols 502 and normal hold image 506 are hidden, but the simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold image 507 (hold count display) are displayed. On the other hand, during the initial operation of the movable mechanism, the normal decorative symbols 502, simplified decorative symbols 504, normal hold image 506, and simplified hold image 507 (hold count display) can all be displayed. This allows for synchronized animations that do not interfere with the most exciting animation, the high-expectation movable mechanism animation. Conversely, for the initial operation of the movable mechanism, which is a similar or identical operation, the animation restrictions that hide the normal decorative symbols 502 and normal hold image 506 are removed, allowing for more flexible animation execution. In other words, the initial operation of the movable mechanism can be executed in parallel with the initialization process after power-on, prioritizing recovery from power loss while also allowing the animation to progress.

<Composition 19>
As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the performance settings can be changed according to the player's input, specifically regarding the frequency of the pre-read performance. When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is the first frequency (for example, it is displayed 30% of the time when it is a winning reserved image and 1% of the time when it is a losing reserved image). When the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is the second frequency, which is lower than the first frequency (for example, it is displayed 30% of the time when it is a winning reserved image and 0.3% of the time when it is a losing reserved image, or it is displayed 20% of the time when it is a winning reserved image and 0.2% of the time when it is a losing reserved image). By changing the performance settings on the screen as shown in Figures 41 and 42, it is possible to set whether to use the first mode (a mode where the frequency of pre-read performances is normal with the pre-read chance mode turned off) or the second mode (a mode where the frequency of pre-read performances is low with the pre-read chance mode turned on).

<Composition 20>
During the execution of the screen transformation effect, the display frequency of the first reserved image when a reserved state occurs is the same regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set. During the execution of the screen transformation effect, the execution of the pre-reading effect that displays the second reserved image may be restricted so as not to interfere with the screen transformation effect. In this way, by standardizing the execution frequency of the pre-reading effect during the execution of the screen transformation effect, it is possible to create a situation where the focus is on the screen transformation effect that is currently being executed, rather than on whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed. As a modification, in a variation in which the screen transformation effect is executed, if a super reach effect is executed after the execution of the screen transformation effect, and it is suggested or announced in the super reach effect that it is a miss (for example, the normal decorative symbol 502 is displayed in a display manner other than matching numbers, or an effect of being defeated by an enemy character is executed), and the aforementioned stop display period 674 occurs, the display frequency of the first reserved image when a reserved state occurs during the stop display period 674 may also be configured to be the same, and the execution of the pre-reading effect that displays the second reserved image may be restricted.

<Composition 21>
Even while the screen transformation effect is running, it is possible to adjust the volume settings as shown in Figure 40(b), but it is not possible to change the effect settings on the screen as shown in Figures 41 and 42. However, in the modified version, it may be possible to make it possible to adjust the volume settings as shown in Figure 40(b) even while the screen transformation effect is running, while also being able to change the effect settings on the screen as shown in Figures 41 and 42.

<Composition 22>
The volume adjustment screen, as shown in Figure 40(b), is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformation like the screen transformation effect), and the effect setting change screens, as shown in Figures 41 and 42, are also not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., they do not undergo transformation like the screen transformation effect). The number of colors used in the volume adjustment screen is small, for example, only one color such as green, which is fewer than the number of colors used in the decorative patterns 502. The decorative patterns 502 usually use a large number of colors (for example, two colors for the numbers, ten colors for the characters attached to the numbers, for a total of twelve colors). The number of colors used in the effect setting change screen (for example, three colors) is also smaller than the number of colors used in the decorative patterns 502. The colors used in the effect setting change screen are small, such as two to three colors, for example, black text displayed within a white frame.

<Composition 23>
The content of the performance can be changed by a first operation by the player (for example, pressing the performance button 109 while a specific performance is in progress). Specifically, by pressing the performance button 109 while the button image is displayed (during the operation valid period), the button image will disappear, and instead a performance triggered by the press (such as the aforementioned dialogue予告 performance) will occur, or, as with the aforementioned light-up performance, by repeatedly pressing the button, the color of the decorative lamps 111 surrounding the performance display device 60 and the color (image color) of the light-like effect display on the performance display device 60 will change. The volume can be adjusted by a second operation by the player (for example, pressing the up or down key of the directional pad 110 while the volume adjustment screen as shown in Figure 40(b) is displayed; the same applies even during variable display, but if the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, pressing the up or down key of the directional pad 110 will display the volume adjustment screen, and then pressing the up or down key of the directional pad 110 again from there) (the display manner of the image showing the volume level displayed on the volume adjustment screen will also change, that is, it will change to an image showing the changed volume level). Mode settings can be performed by a third operation by the player (for example, pressing the directional keys 110 or the performance button 109 while the performance setting change screen, as shown in Figures 41 and 42, is displayed; however, if a variation display is in progress, pressing the performance button 109 is not necessary, and the performance setting change screen will be displayed by pressing the left or right keys on the directional keys 110, from which the player can press the left or right keys on the directional keys 110 again).

If the first operation is continued (for example, if the performance button 109 is pressed and held while a specific performance is in progress), it is treated as a continuous input of the first operation, i.e., it is processed as an automatic rapid-fire sequence of multiple consecutive presses. On the other hand, if the second operation is continued (for example, if the up or down keys of the directional pad 110 are pressed and held while the volume adjustment screen is displayed), the second operation is not treated as a continuous input (automatic rapid-fire), but as a single press of the up or down key. Therefore, pressing and holding the up or down key will not cause the volume to continuously increase or decrease. Similarly, if the third operation is continued (for example, if the directional pad 110 or performance button 109 is pressed and held while the performance setting change screen is displayed), the third operation is not treated as a continuous input (automatic rapid-fire), but as a single press of the directional pad 110 or performance button 109. Therefore, pressing and holding the directional pad 110 or performance button 109 will not cause the mode setting operation to be continuously input and the setting to continuously switch (it will not repeat on → off → on → off → ...).

<Composition 24>
If the second operation is continued before power-on and continues after power-on, the volume will not change after power-on. For example, if the directional key 110 is held down by accident when power-on, the volume will not increase or decrease accidentally after power-on, but will remain at the default value. The second operation before power-on cannot detect the rising edge of the press signal indicating that the button has been pressed, so even if the button is held down until after power-on, it will not be considered pressed, and the press will not be detected unless it is pressed again and a press signal rises. In this way, unintended volume changes and other unexpected situations can be prevented.

<Composition 25>
If the third operation continues before power-on and continues after power-on, the mode will not change after power-on. For example, if the directional pad 110 or the effect button 109 is held down due to an accidental operation when power-on, the mode will not be changed by mistake after power-on and will remain at the default value. Since the rising edge of the press signal indicating the third operation before power-on cannot be detected, even if the button is held down until after power-on, it will not be considered as having been pressed, and the press will not be detected unless it is pressed again and a press signal rises. In this way, unforeseen situations such as unintended mode changes can be prevented.

<Composition 26>
If a second operation corresponding to volume up is performed before power-on and continues after power-on (for example, the up key on the directional pad 110 is held down), the volume will not change after power-on. However, if a second operation corresponding to volume down is performed while the second operation corresponding to volume up is still being performed after power-on (for example, the up key on the directional pad 110 is held down), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected and the volume will change.

If a second operation corresponding to volume down is performed before power-on and continues after power-on (for example, the down key on the directional pad 110 is held down), the volume will not change after power-on. However, if a second operation corresponding to volume down is performed after power-on (for example, the down key on the directional pad 110 is held down) and a second operation corresponding to volume up is then performed (for example, the up key on the directional pad 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected, and the volume will change.

In this way, while it is possible to achieve appropriate volume changes (preventing unintended volume changes in irregular situations), it is also possible to allow one of the operations (adjustments) to be performed even in irregular situations. This allows some operations to be performed normally even in irregular circumstances, and enables flexible reflection of the operation.

<Composition 27>
If a third operation corresponding to a mode change is performed before power-on and continues after power-on (for example, the left key of the directional pad 110 is held down), the mode will not be changed after power-on. However, if a third operation corresponding to a mode change is performed after power-on (for example, the left key of the directional pad 110 is held down) and a different third operation corresponding to a mode change is performed (for example, the right key of the directional pad 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected and the mode will be changed.

If a third operation corresponding to a mode change is performed before power-on and continues after power-on (for example, if the right key of the directional pad 110 is held down), the mode will not change after power-on. However, if a different third operation corresponding to a mode change is performed while the third operation corresponding to a mode change is still being performed after power-on (for example, if the left key of the directional pad 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected, and the mode will be changed.

In this way, by allowing one of the operations (adjustments) to be performed even in irregular situations, some operations can be executed normally, allowing for flexible reflection of the input.

<Composition 28>
The second operation (for example, the up/down buttons on the directional pad 110 that instruct volume adjustment) and the third operation (for example, the left/right buttons on the directional pad 110 that instruct mode change) can both be pressed and detected simultaneously, and based on this, volume adjustment and mode change can be performed in parallel, and the volume adjustment screen and the mode change screen can be displayed simultaneously.

<Composition 29>
The period during which volume adjustment can be performed during symbol variation is longer than the period during which mode setting can be performed during symbol variation. Furthermore, there are two types of symbol variation: a predetermined symbol variation that is performed when the result of the win/fail judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result and does not involve a reach animation (a losing variation that ends quickly without a reach occurring), and a specific symbol variation that is performed when the result of the win/fail judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result and is accompanied by a high-expectation reach animation (a losing variation in which a super reach animation is performed after a reach occurs). The difference between the period during which volume adjustment can be performed during the predetermined symbol variation and the period during which mode setting can be performed is smaller than the difference between the period during which volume adjustment can be performed during the specific symbol variation and the period during which mode setting can be performed. Specifically, in a losing spin (120 seconds) where a super reach animation is performed after a reach occurs, mode settings cannot be performed for at least 55 seconds from the start of the super reach animation, while mode settings can be performed for the rest of the time, while volume adjustment can be performed from the start to the end of the spin (120 seconds), while in a losing spin (5 seconds) that ends quickly without a reach occurring, volume adjustment and mode settings can be performed from the start to the end of the spin (5 seconds). As a variation, since volume adjustment can be performed but animation setting changes cannot during a symbol spin accompanied by a high-expectation reach animation, the difference between the period during which volume adjustment can be performed and the period during which animation setting changes can be performed during a symbol spin accompanied by a high-expectation reach animation may be configured to be substantially equal to the period during which volume adjustment can be performed. In this way, by enabling the execution of exciting effects without informing players of the possibility of changes in the presentation style, it prevents the difficulty in grasping the level of expectation of the effects, while loosening restrictions on making those exciting effects easily perceived aurally, allowing players to instantly change how they perceive the effects to suit their own preferences.

<Composition 30>
If the third operation continues before the period during which mode settings cannot be performed (the period during which the aforementioned performance setting changes are invalid, the period during which performance setting changes are not permitted), and continues during the period during which mode settings cannot be performed, and continues after the period during which mode settings cannot be performed (for example, if the left or right key of the directional pad 110 is held down), the mode will not change during the period during which mode settings can be performed, which is the period after the period during which mode settings cannot be performed.

<Composition 31>
If a third operation (e.g., pressing the right key) to issue a first instruction for changing the performance settings is being performed while the system is in a state where such an operation is being carried out before the period during which the performance settings change cannot be performed, and then a third operation (e.g., pressing the right key) to issue a second instruction for changing the performance settings is being performed after the system has switched to the period during which the performance settings change can be performed, the rising edge of the press signal will be detected, and the performance settings change based on the second instruction will be executed.

<Composition 32>
During high-expectation mechanical device effects, volume adjustment is possible and the settings screen for volume adjustment can be displayed, but mode settings cannot be performed and the settings screen for mode settings cannot be displayed. However, during the initial operation of movable mechanical devices, which is performed when the power is restored after a power outage, volume adjustment is possible and the settings screen for volume adjustment can be displayed, as well as mode settings can be performed and the settings screen for mode settings can be displayed. In this way, during the most exciting effects, such as high-expectation movable mechanical device effects, the possibility of changes in the effects' tendencies is not presented to the player, preventing it from becoming difficult to grasp the level of expectation. At the same time, restrictions on making the exciting effects more audible are relaxed, allowing players to instantly change how they perceive the effects to suit their own preferences.

<Composition 33>
In the high base state, a period is provided during which mode setting cannot be performed. If a power outage and subsequent power restoration occur during this period of non-performance in the high base state, and the system then transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may differ from the mode set before the non-performance period occurred in the high base state. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs during the non-performance period in the high base state, and the system then transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state will be the same as the mode set before the non-performance period occurred in the high base state. For example, if the Super Reach period 672 and the Stop Display period 674 in the high base state are set as the execution impossible period, and the pre-read chance mode is set to ON before the execution impossible period, then if a power outage and power restoration occur during the execution impossible period, and the system returns to the high base state, and then transitions from the high base state to the low base state due to the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (such as the specified number of times the high base state has been stayed elapsed, or a big win or small win game that triggers the transition to the low base state has been executed), then the pre-read chance mode is set to OFF instead of ON in the low base state. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs during the execution impossible period, and the system transitions from the high base state to the low base state due to the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (such as the specified number of times the high base state has been stayed elapsed, or a big win or small win game that triggers the transition to the low base state has been executed), then the pre-read chance mode is set to ON in the low base state. Thus, even in situations where the game state changes and the mode setting cannot be applied or changed, the mode setting can be forcibly applied by the act of power interruption and restoration. Furthermore, if power interruption and restoration are not performed in such situations, the high base state will end, and the most recent mode setting will be automatically adopted.

<Composition 34>
The system includes a transfer instruction means that accepts player input to instruct the transfer of stored ball count information to an external unit. The transfer instruction means is, for example, the counting button W40 shown in Figures 49 and 50. The counting button used as the transfer instruction means may also be called the "transfer button". When stored ball count information is transferred by operation of the transfer instruction means, a ball count transfer sound can be output to suggest or notify the transfer of the stored ball count information. A screen transformation effect can be executed while the ball count transfer sound is being output in conjunction with operation of the transfer instruction means. If a suppression notification effect is executed because specific information reaches a predetermined value while a screen transformation effect is being executed while the ball count transfer sound is being output, the execution of the screen transformation effect is interrupted, but the output of the ball count transfer sound is not interrupted.

<Composition 35>
If a pre-notification animation is executed during the execution of a screen transformation animation while a ball count transfer sound is being output in conjunction with the operation of the transfer instruction means, and specific information reaches a specific predetermined value, the execution of the screen transformation animation will not be interrupted, nor will the output of the ball count transfer sound be interrupted. In this way, screen transformation animations are performed without restriction so that players do not miss high-probability animations even while game balls are being transferred. However, even in such situations, if a situation arises where the game should be ended, the screen transformation animation will be forcibly interrupted, thus ensuring fairness in the game while suppressing excessive gambling.

<Composition 36>
The volume can be adjusted even while the ball transfer sound is being output in conjunction with the operation of the transfer instruction means, and a settings screen for volume adjustment can also be displayed. The player's preferences can be reflected even during the transfer of game balls.

<Composition 37>
Mode settings can be performed even while the ball transfer sound is being output in conjunction with the operation of the transfer instruction means, and the setting screen for mode settings can also be displayed. The player's preferences can be reflected even during the transfer of game balls.

<Composition 38>
Even during periods when mode settings are unavailable (periods when execution is impossible), the system can still output a ball count transfer sound in response to operations on the transfer instruction means.

<Composition 39>
During the stage background after a predetermined high-expectation performance (the aforementioned stop display period 674), the performance sound is muted, but the ball count transfer sound can be output. Volume adjustment is possible even during this muted period, but mode setting may be disabled or enabled.

<Composition 40>
During reel spins, it is possible to execute reel spin text effects (the aforementioned dialogue予告演出 that is displayed in part or all of the screen, and the text effect that displays text corresponding to the conversation between ally and enemy characters at the bottom of the screen during the super reach effect). There are multiple types of text colors for the predetermined reel spin text effects (for example, the text in the dialogue予告演出), in order of expectation level: white, green, red, giraffe pattern, and rainbow. The text color in the text effects (text color in reel spin text effects, jackpot text effects, and error text effects) refers to the color of the text itself, or the color of the area around the text (color of the speech bubble, border, or effect around the text).

<Composition 41>
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to display text effects during a jackpot (dialogue, song titles, and lyrics corresponding to the story that unfolds during the execution of the special game). The text color of the predetermined text effects during a jackpot (for example, the text in the song title or lyrics display) is different from the text color (green or giraffe pattern) of the predetermined text effects during reel spinning (for example, the text in the dialogue予告演出) which are for low expectation or very high expectation. (White for the lowest expectation / rainbow for the highest expectation). In other words, it is possible to perform a text effect during the variable display that displays predetermined characters, and it is possible to perform a text effect during the special game that displays specific characters, and the text effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color around the characters displayed in the predetermined text effect during the variable display, has a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow), and is configured such that the expectation of transitioning to the special game is higher when the second color is displayed than when the first color is displayed as the text effect corresponding color in the predetermined text effect during the variable display, and the expectation of transitioning to the special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the second color is displayed, and it is configured such that the expectation of transitioning to the special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the first color is displayed as the text effect corresponding color in the predetermined text effect during the variable display, and it is possible to display predetermined colors that can be displayed as the text effect corresponding color in the predetermined text effect during the variable display, but does not display at least the second color. Furthermore, this may also be applied to the cumulative prize ball count display (the text used when displaying the prize ball count-up) and the highlighted display (the text used when the prize ball count reaches a milestone of 2500 units).

<Composition 42>
Certain text effects during reel spins (for example, text in dialogue予告演出) are subject to transformation in screen transformation effects, but certain text effects during jackpots (for example, text in song titles or lyrics displays) are not subject to transformation in screen transformation effects (i.e., they do not undergo transformations like those seen in screen transformation effects).

<Composition 43>
Unlike the text displayed during the specified jackpot animation (for example, the title of a song or lyrics), the text displayed during the specified spin animation (for example, the dialogue announcement animation) can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball count display and highlighting that are the targets of the count-up animation, but it must not be superimposed on the cumulative prize ball count display that is the target of the count-up animation (it may or may not be superimposed on the highlighting).

<Composition 44>
During an error, it is possible to execute predetermined error text animations (such as the full tank detection error text "Please remove the ball" displayed when the tank is full, the door open error text "The door is open" displayed when the door is open, the magnetic detection error text "Magnetic field detected" displayed when a magnetic field is detected, and the setting value error text "Setting value error" displayed when a setting value error occurs). However, the color of these texts will be different from the low-expectancy or very high-expectancy text colors (green or giraffe pattern) used in predetermined text animations during reel spins (for example, the text in the dialogue予告 animation). In other words, it is possible to perform a variable text effect that displays predetermined characters during the variable display, and it is configured to be able to determine multiple types of errors, and it is possible to perform an error text effect that displays predetermined characters when an error occurs, and the variable text effect corresponding colors, which are the color of the characters themselves or the color of the characters around the characters displayed in the predetermined variable text effect, have a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow), and it is configured such that the expectation of transitioning to a special game is higher when the second color is displayed than when the first color is displayed as the variable text effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable text effect, and the expectation of transitioning to a special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the second color is displayed, and it is configured such that the expectation of transitioning to a special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the first color is displayed as the variable text effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable text effect, and it is possible to display predetermined colors that can be displayed as the variable text effect corresponding colors in the predetermined variable text effect, but at least the second color is not displayed.

<Composition 45>
Certain text effects during fluctuations (for example, text in dialogue予告演出) are subject to transformation in screen transformation effects, but certain text effects during errors (for example, full tank detection error text) are not subject to transformation in screen transformation effects (i.e., they do not undergo transformations like those in screen transformation effects).

<Composition 46>
Pre-defined error text effects (for example, magnetic detection error text) are not subject to deformation in screen deformation effects (i.e., they do not undergo deformation like screen deformation effects).

<Composition 47>
The system includes two error text effects: a first error text effect (a full tank detection error message displayed when the tank is full, and a door open error message displayed when the door is open) and a second error text effect (a magnetic detection error message displayed when a magnetic field is detected, and a setting value error message displayed when a setting value error occurs).

<Composition 48>
Regarding the first error text effect, unlike the predetermined text effects during fluctuations (for example, the text in the dialogue予告 effect), it can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball display and highlighting that are the targets of the count-up effect, but it will be displayed superimposed on at least one of the cumulative prize ball display or highlighting that are the targets of the count-up effect (the first error text effect has a higher display priority). On the other hand, when the second error text effect is executed, the cumulative prize ball display and highlighting that are the targets of the count-up effect will not be executed at the same time.

<Composition 49>
The first error text effect can be executed simultaneously with both a predetermined variable text effect (for example, text in a dialogue予告 effect) and a predetermined jackpot text effect (for example, text in a song title or lyrics display), but the second error text effect cannot be executed simultaneously with either a predetermined variable text effect or a predetermined jackpot text effect (only the second error text effect is executed during the second error).

<Composition 50>
Operation of the performance button 109 may trigger the execution of a predetermined text animation during reel spinning (for example, a text animation in a dialogue予告 animation that can be executed by operating the performance button), but it will not trigger the execution of any other predetermined text animations (a predetermined text animation during a big win, a predetermined text animation during an error). Operation of the directional pad 110 may trigger the execution of a predetermined text animation during a big win (for example, a text animation in the display of song titles and lyrics related to music output during a big win game that can be switched to directional pad operation), but it will not trigger the execution of any other predetermined text animations (a predetermined text animation during reel spinning, a predetermined text animation during an error). Operation of the performance button 109 or the directional pad 110 will not trigger the execution of a predetermined text animation during an error (for example, a full tank detection error text). In other words, it is possible to perform a text effect during fluctuation display that displays predetermined characters, to perform a text effect during special gameplay that displays specific characters, to be able to determine multiple types of errors, to perform an error text effect that displays predetermined characters when an error occurs, to have a first operating means (e.g., an effect button) and a second operating means (e.g., a directional pad) as operating means that can be operated by the player, to be able to perform a predetermined text effect during fluctuation triggered by operation of the first operating means, but not to be able to perform a predetermined text effect during fluctuation triggered by operation of the second operating means, to not perform a predetermined text effect during jackpot triggered by operation of the first operating means, but to be able to perform a predetermined text effect during jackpot triggered by operation of the second operating means, to not perform a predetermined error text effect when the first operating means is operated, and not to perform a predetermined error text effect when the second operating means is operated.

<Composition 51>
In a predetermined text animation during reel spinning (for example, a dialogue予告演出), a specific color (for example, a giraffe pattern) is composed of multiple colors (yellow and brown). This specific color is also used in other preview animations (for example, full-screen previews such as stage change previews), but the detail of the colors differs from that in the predetermined text animation during reel spinning (for example, the gradient width between yellow and brown is narrower in the text animation during reel spinning, or if it is composed of a brown pattern on a yellow background, the brown pattern is smaller).

Furthermore, the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following embodiments.

[First aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
When displaying the aforementioned held image, it is possible to start the display accompanied by a predetermined animation.
The system has multiple types of the aforementioned specific effects, and the expected value of transitioning to a special game in the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect differs depending on the type of the aforementioned specific effect that is executed in the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The aforementioned types of reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image that has a higher probability of transitioning to a special game than the first reserved image.
The special effect can be executed even while the symbol variation corresponding to either the first reserved image or the second reserved image is being displayed.
After the pending image begins to be displayed with the predetermined animation, a specific animation, which is different from the predetermined animation, can be displayed in a loop.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed even while the special effect is being performed, and at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed after the held image has been transformed in the special effect.

[Second form]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
When displaying the aforementioned held image, it is possible to start the display accompanied by a predetermined animation.
The system has multiple types of the aforementioned specific effects, and the expected value of transitioning to a special game in the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect differs depending on the type of the aforementioned specific effect that is executed in the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The aforementioned types of reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image that has a higher probability of transitioning to a special game than the first reserved image.
After the pending image begins to be displayed with the predetermined animation, a specific animation, which is different from the predetermined animation, can be displayed in a loop.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, if a hold occurs during the execution of the special effect, and the hold image corresponding to the hold is the first hold image, the first hold image can be displayed with at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display, but if the hold image corresponding to the hold is the second hold image, the second hold image cannot be displayed with at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display.

[Third aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
When displaying the aforementioned held image, it is possible to start the display accompanied by a predetermined animation.
The system has multiple types of the aforementioned specific effects, and the expected value of transitioning to a special game in the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect differs depending on the type of the aforementioned specific effect that is executed in the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The aforementioned types of reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image that has a higher probability of transitioning to a special game than the first reserved image.
An effect that can be executed when a hold occurs, and which can be executed at either the start of display of the first hold image or the start of display of the second hold image, includes an effect when a win occurs.
A pachinko machine characterized in that when the first reserved image is displayed during the execution of the special performance, the winning performance is not performed.

[Fourth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
When displaying the aforementioned held image, it is possible to start the display accompanied by a predetermined animation.
The system has multiple types of the aforementioned specific effects, and the expected value of transitioning to a special game in the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect differs depending on the type of the aforementioned specific effect that is executed in the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the aforementioned specific effect.
The number of holds stored by the hold control means can be displayed separately from the hold image as a hold count display at a predetermined position.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
If a new hold occurs during the execution of the special effect, the hold image may be transformed in the special effect and then display a hold image corresponding to the new hold, while the hold count display is updated and displayed without being transformed in the special effect.
The execution time of the predetermined animation display of the held image is longer than the update time of the held count display, and the execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the predetermined animation display of the held image.
In the first performance pattern in which the special performance is executed, the probability of a predetermined high-expectation performance being executed is higher than in the second performance pattern in which the special performance is not executed.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, while the predetermined high-expectation performance is being executed, the reserved image is hidden, but the reserved number display can be displayed.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
It is possible to display a stage background image that is set according to the performance stage.
If the game progresses to a predetermined high-expectancy sequence, the stage background image will be hidden during that sequence.
A pinball game machine characterized in that, in a specific symbol variation that is executed when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and which is a symbol variation accompanied by the execution of a predetermined high-expectancy performance, the special performance can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before it develops into the predetermined high-expectancy performance, but the special performance is not executed while the stage background image is displayed again after the completion of the predetermined high-expectancy performance in the specific symbol variation.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserves.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The device has decorative patterns that visually represent the result of the judgment of whether the result is correct or incorrect, and the decorative patterns include a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as the main pattern on the visual display device, and a simplified decorative pattern that is displayed in a simplified form than the normal decorative pattern.
The aforementioned standard decorative pattern can be displayed in a second display mode after a predetermined period has elapsed since the pattern change display was stopped in the first display mode.
A pachinko machine characterized in that the special effect can be performed when the normal decorative pattern is in the first display mode, while the special effect is not performed when the normal decorative pattern is in the second display mode.

[Seventh aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserves.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
If the suppression notification effect is executed because the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect, the special effect is interrupted.
The aforementioned suppression notification effect is not subject to modification in the aforementioned special effect, and the aforementioned special effect is not newly executed while the suppression notification effect is being executed, characterized in that the pinball game machine.

[8th type]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
If the aforementioned specific information reaches a specific predetermined value different from the aforementioned predetermined value, a pre-notification animation will be performed to inform the player that the game is scheduled to end.
If the suppression notification effect is executed because the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect, the special effect is interrupted.
The aforementioned suppression notification effect is not subject to modification in the aforementioned special effect, and the aforementioned special effect is not newly executed while the suppression notification effect is being executed.
The aforementioned advance notification effect is not subject to modification in the aforementioned special effect, while the aforementioned special effect can be newly executed during the execution of the advance notification effect.
A pinball game machine characterized in that the pre-notification effect and the special effect can be executed simultaneously, while the pre-notification effect is displayed in front of the special effect.

[Ninth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
A pachinko machine characterized in that, in a special situation in which there is a specific reserved ball which is a reserved ball related to a variable pattern that can execute the special performance, and the difference in the number of balls until the specific information reaches the predetermined value is one ball, if there is no power outage before the specific reserved ball is consumed and two or more balls are awarded for a predetermined single ball entry, the special performance will not be executed after the award balls are awarded, whereas if there is a power outage and power restoration before the specific reserved ball is consumed and two or more balls are awarded for a predetermined single ball entry, the special performance may be executed after the award balls are awarded.

[Tenth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
The number of holds stored by the hold control means can be displayed separately from the hold image as a hold count display at a predetermined position.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
If the predetermined conditions are met before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined waiting effect indicating that the game is in standby mode can be executed, and while the predetermined waiting effect is being executed in the predetermined conditions, the special effect is not executed, but the display of the number of reserved items can be executed.
A pachinko machine characterized in that, after the execution of the suppression notification effect, none of the predetermined standby effect, the special effect, or the display of the number of reserved items are executed.

[Personal 11]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
If the aforementioned specific information reaches a specific predetermined value different from the aforementioned predetermined value, a pre-notification animation will be performed to inform the player that the game is scheduled to end.
A pachinko machine characterized in that, in a situation where a launch notification performance prompting the launch towards the big prize pocket is performed during a big win start demo performance that is performed at the start of the special game, the special performance is not performed, the suppression notification performance is not performed, while the pre-notification performance can be performed simultaneously.

[Twelfth aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
The number of holds stored by the hold control means can be displayed separately from the hold image as a hold count display at a predetermined position.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The device has decorative patterns that visually represent the result of the judgment of correctness, and the decorative patterns include a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as the main pattern on the visual display device, and a simplified decorative pattern that is displayed in a simplified form than the normal decorative pattern.
It is possible to perform a movable prop performance using a movable prop that is driven according to the content of the performance and performs theatrical actions.
As a movable mechanism effect, it is possible to perform a high-expectation movable mechanism effect that suggests or notifies that there is a high probability of transitioning to the special game.
While the aforementioned special effect is being performed, the aforementioned high-expectation movable mechanism effect is not performed. However, even while the aforementioned special effect is being performed, the initial operation of the movable mechanism, which is triggered by the restoration of power after a power outage, can be executed.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, while the high-expectation movable mechanism effect is being performed, the normal decorative symbols and the reserved images are hidden, but the simplified decorative symbols and the reserved number display are displayed, and while the initial operation is being performed, any of the normal decorative symbols, the simplified decorative symbols, the reserved images, and the reserved number display can be displayed.

[The 13th aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot, it is possible to display a hold image corresponding to that hold.
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
The aforementioned types of reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image that has a higher probability of transitioning to a special game than the first reserved image.
When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second held image is the first frequency, while when the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second held image is the second frequency, which is lower than the first frequency.
The pinball game machine is characterized in that, during the execution of the special effects, the frequency of displaying the first hold image when a hold occurs is the same regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set.

[14th aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserves.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
If the first operation is continued, it is considered a continuous input of the first operation; however, if the second operation is continued, it is not considered a continuous input of the second operation; and if the third operation is continued, it is not considered a continuous input of the third operation.
If the second operation is continued before power-on and continues after power-on, the volume will not change after power-on.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, if the third operation is continued from before power-on and continues after power-on, the mode is not changed after power-on.

[Pattern 15]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
If the first operation is continued, it is considered a continuous input of the first operation; however, if the second operation is continued, it is not considered a continuous input of the second operation; and if the third operation is continued, it is not considered a continuous input of the third operation.
If the second operation is continued before power-on and continues after power-on, the volume will not change after power-on.
If the third operation is continued before power-on and continues after power-on, the mode will not be changed after power-on.
The pinball game machine is characterized in that, if the second operation corresponding to increasing the volume is continued from before the power is turned on and the second operation corresponding to increasing the volume is continued after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on, but if the second operation corresponding to decreasing the volume is performed while the second operation corresponding to increasing the volume is continued after the power is turned on, the volume changes.

[Personal Description 16]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
The period during which volume adjustment can be performed during pattern variation is relatively longer than the period during which mode setting can be performed during pattern variation.
The system includes a predetermined symbol variation, which is executed when the result of the win/fail judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and is a symbol variation without a reach animation, and a specific symbol variation, which is executed when the result of the win/fail judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and is a symbol variation accompanied by a high-expectation reach animation, wherein the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be performed and the period during which the mode setting can be performed during the predetermined symbol variation is smaller than the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be performed and the period during which the mode setting can be performed during the specific symbol variation.
A pachinko machine characterized in that, if the third operation is continued from before the period during which the mode setting cannot be performed, continues during the period during which the mode setting cannot be performed, and continues after the period during which the mode setting cannot be performed, the mode will not be changed during the period during which the mode setting can be performed, which is the period after the period during which the mode setting cannot be performed.

[17th aspect]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
It is possible to perform a movable prop performance using a movable prop that is driven according to the content of the performance and performs theatrical actions.
As a movable mechanism effect, it is possible to perform a high-expectation movable mechanism effect that suggests or notifies that there is a high probability of transitioning to the special game.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
During the execution of the aforementioned high-expectation movable mechanism effect, the volume adjustment can be performed and the setting screen for the volume adjustment can be displayed, but the mode setting cannot be performed and the setting screen for the mode setting cannot be displayed.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, during the execution of the initial operation of the movable mechanism, which is performed when the power is restored after a power outage, the volume can be adjusted, a setting screen for adjusting the volume can be displayed, the mode can be set, and a setting screen for setting the mode can be displayed.

[18th Feature]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserves.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
Regarding the ease with which the ball enters the designated prize slot, there are two states: a low base state, which is the normal state of ease with which the ball enters, and a high base state, which is a state in which the ease with which the ball enters is increased compared to the low base state.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
In the aforementioned high base state, a period is provided during which the mode setting cannot be performed.
A pinball game machine characterized in that, if a power outage and power restoration occur during the period of inability to execute in the high base state, and the machine subsequently transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may differ from the mode set before the period of inability to execute in the high base state; on the other hand, if no power outage occurs during the period of inability to execute in the high base state, and the machine subsequently transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state is the same as the mode set before the period of inability to execute in the high base state.

[Pattern 19]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserved values.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device includes at least one first image belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group.
A special effect can be performed to display a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form.
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to signal the end of the game.
If the aforementioned specific information reaches a specific predetermined value different from the aforementioned predetermined value, a pre-notification animation will be performed to inform the player that the game is scheduled to end.
The system further includes a transfer instruction means that accepts a player's operation to instruct the transfer of stored ball count information to an external unit,
When the stored ball count information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, it is possible to output a ball count transfer sound that suggests or notifies the transfer of the stored ball count information.
The special effects can be executed while the ball count transfer sound is being output.
If the suppression notification effect is executed while the special effect is being performed during the output of the ball count transfer sound, the execution of the special effect will be interrupted, but the output of the ball count transfer sound will not be interrupted.
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, if the pre-notification effect is executed while the special effect is being executed during the output of the ball count transfer sound, the execution of the special effect is not interrupted, and the output of the ball count transfer sound is not interrupted.

[Pattern 20]
A game board in which the game area is formed,
A starting prize entry point is provided at a predetermined position in the aforementioned game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
When opened, it becomes a large prize slot into which game balls can be inserted or can be easily inserted,
A win/fail determination means that performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, when a ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern to indicate the result of the aforementioned success or failure determination,
The process of displaying the variation of the aforementioned pattern includes a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, and a symbol change corresponding to a previous ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot is displayed, a reserve control means stores a predetermined number of lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the aforementioned starting prize slot as reserves.
If the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a predetermined result, a special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize slot,
A display device that shows theatrical content,
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device,
The system includes a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball enters the aforementioned starting prize slot, the system transmits prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to that ball to the performance determination means.
Based on the aforementioned prior information, a specific animation that suggests the expected transition to a special game related to the hold corresponding to that prior information can be executed during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to that prior information.
The system has two modes for determining the frequency of execution of the aforementioned specific performance, and the player can choose which of the two modes to use.
The system further includes a transfer instruction means that accepts a player's operation to instruct the transfer of stored ball count information to an external unit,
When the stored ball count information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, it is possible to output a ball count transfer sound that suggests or notifies the transfer of the stored ball count information.
The player can change the predetermined presentation content through a first operation,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player.
The mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player,
The volume adjustment can be performed even while the ball count transfer sound is being output, and the settings screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed.
A pinball game machine characterized in that the mode setting can be performed even while the ball count transfer sound is being output, and a setting screen for the mode setting can also be displayed.

(Example 2)
In this embodiment, a small win leading to a big win is more likely to occur during the time-saving mode, and special games and time-saving modes can be repeated continuously, which is a difference from the premise technology. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or corresponding to the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 100 of the premise technology will be denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, content already explained in the premise technology will be omitted as appropriate, and the main focus will be on the differences from the pachinko game machine 100 of the premise technology.

<Payout potential in small-win games>
Figure 51 shows the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine 800 in the embodiment. The first start opening 11 is located in the lower center of the game area 81, below the center ornament 64. The first start opening 11 is positioned so that game balls launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength, in other words, left-handed shots) can enter or enter easily. On the other hand, the second start opening 12, the big prize opening 20, and the operation opening 30 are positioned so that game balls launched with a strength different from the first strength (relatively strong strength, in other words, right-handed shots) can enter or enter easily. Game nails and windmills are arranged in the game area 81, and a path for the game balls is set up so that left-handed shots do not enter the second start opening 12, the big prize opening 20, and the operation opening 30, and right-handed shots do not enter the first start opening 11.

The second starting opening 12 has a standard electric mechanism 90, which is a ball entry variation mechanism that can be displaced to change the state from one in which game balls are relatively difficult to enter to one in which they are relatively easy. The standard electric mechanism 90 is also called an electric tulip (electric chu), and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The standard electric mechanism 90 may be a sliding type (for example, a specification in which a sliding member moves forward or backward to make ball entry easier), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

Inside the large prize slot 20, there is a specific area through which a small win develops into a large win when a game ball passes. The specific area passage detection device 804 detects when a game ball passes through this specific area. The specific area opening/closing solenoid 806 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state where game balls cannot pass and an open state where game balls can pass. In response to the control of the opening/closing control means 275, the specific area opening/closing solenoid 806 controls the switching member to open the specific area if the result of the win/loss determination is a small win. When a ball entering the specific area is detected, a decision is made to proceed to a special game. If no ball entry into the specific area is detected, the game returns to normal after the small win game ends.

The special game in this embodiment includes a first special game (also called "symbol jackpot") which is executed when the symbols at the time of stopping result in a jackpot, and a second special game (also called "minor win development jackpot" or "minor win V") which is executed when the symbols at the time of stopping result in a minor win and then the minor win develops into a jackpot. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the prerequisite technology, that is, it is triggered by a symbol jackpot. The second special game is a special game that is triggered when the game ball passes through a specific area during a minor win game (also called "V-win"), and is associated with the activation of a condition device and a continuous mechanism device.

A status indicator lamp 802 is provided at the lower right outer position of the game area 81 to indicate the game state of the game machine 800. The status indicator lamp 802 is composed of, for example, two lamps. The first lamp indicates whether the machine is in a time-saving state (in this embodiment, accompanied by a state where ball entry is easy for the normal electric mechanism), and the second lamp indicates whether the machine is in a game state where right-handed shooting is recommended (a state where ball entry is easy for the normal electric mechanism, or an activated special electric mechanism). The first lamp lights up when the machine is in a normal game state in a time-saving state and turns off when it is in a normal game state. The second lamp lights up when the machine is in a game state where right-handed shooting is recommended, i.e., in a time-saving state, a minor win game state, or a special game state, and turns off when it is in a normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status indicator lamp 802 functions as a so-called right-handed shooting indicator light, displaying in a specific manner whether the machine is in a game state where right-handed shooting is recommended.

The probability of winning with the first special symbol and the probability of winning with the second special symbol are both 1/390. In the Pachinko Machine 800, since there is no probability variation function for the special symbols, the probability of winning with the symbols does not change and is always drawn at a constant probability for each probability determined by the setting value. Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize with the first special symbol is 0, and the probability of winning a minor prize with the second special symbol is 1/10. As a modification, the probability of winning a minor prize with the first special symbol may be greater than 0 (for example, 1/500), but it must be set to a value smaller than the probability of winning a minor prize with the second special symbol. Note that in the modification, the machine may have a specification that includes a probability variation function for the special symbols.

In a minor prize game, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize opening 20 for a predetermined time of 1.8 seconds or less (for example, 1.6 seconds), and during that time, controls a specific area inside the large prize opening 20 to also be open.

The special game control means 260 activates the special electric mechanism 856 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 causes the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 806, opening the large prize opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small prize game control means 265 activates the special electric mechanism 856 once at the start of a small prize game. The small prize game control means 265 causes the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 806, opening the large prize opening 20 multiple times during a single small prize game.

The large prize opening 20 is equipped with an opening/closing member (a sliding plate 840, described later) for switching between an open and closed state. When the large prize opening 20 is in the closed state, the game balls roll over the opening/closing member. Figure 52 is a schematic external perspective view showing the configuration of the large prize opening 20. The sliding plate 840 can also be described as the opening/closing door of the large prize opening 20. As shown in Figure 52(a), the sliding plate 840 is displaceable between a closed state that covers the large prize opening 20 (box-shaped member 842) and an open state that retracts inward, as shown in Figure 52(b). When the sliding plate 840 is in the closed state, the large prize opening 20 is also in the closed state, and when the sliding plate 840 is in the open state, the large prize opening 20 is also in the open state.

The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 840 of the large prize opening 20. The slide plate 840, provided on the upper surface of the large prize opening 20, is slightly inclined downwards to the left with respect to the horizontal. As a result, the game balls rolling on the slide plate 840 tend to accelerate, and even if the slide plate 840 is displaced from a closed state to an open state, there is a risk that the game balls may not be properly guided into the box-shaped member 842.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by making the game balls rolling on the slide plate 840 move in a zigzag pattern, the distance the game balls travel is increased, and the momentum of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 840 is reduced, thereby increasing the time the game balls remain on the slide plate 840. This increases the time the game balls remain on the slide plate 840, even when the large prize opening 20 is repeatedly opened for very short periods, thereby increasing the probability of the game balls entering the opening during these short periods.

Figure 52(a) shows the large prize opening 20 when the slide plate 840 is in the closed state. As shown in the figure, within the range in which the game balls roll on the slide plate 840, a plurality of protrusions 846a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions 846b are also provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. Furthermore, the plurality of protrusions 846a on the game board side and the plurality of protrusions 846b on the transparent plate side are arranged alternately along the flow path on the slide plate 840. The plurality of protrusions 846b on the transparent plate side are attached to a transparent plate 844 that extends upward from the box-shaped member 842. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 846b to the transparent plate 103 that covers the front side of the game board 80, it is possible to prevent the protrusions 846b from being exposed to the outside and easily damaged when the transparent plate 103 is opened for maintenance of the game machine, etc. Furthermore, by constructing the transparent plate 844 from a transparent material, the visibility of the game balls entering the large prize opening 20 can be maintained. In the modified version, protrusions or recesses for forming a zigzag flow path may be formed on the slide plate 840.

By arranging multiple protrusions 846a and 546b alternately on the slide plate 840, the game balls can be made to move in a zigzag pattern, causing their momentum to slow down. For example, if game balls are continuously launched towards the large prize opening 20 by right-handed shooting (e.g., one ball launched at 0.6-second intervals), and are decelerated so that it takes 2 to 3 seconds for them to roll on the slide plate 840 and fall to the left side of the large prize opening 20, then approximately 3 to 5 game balls will always be present on the slide plate 840. As a result, even when the slide plate 840 is opened for a short time, multiple game balls can be guided together into the large prize opening 20, as shown in Figure 52(b). The game balls that fall into the box-shaped member 842 pass through the passage opening 848 one by one for prize detection.

The number of game balls that remain on the slide plate 840 and the time they remain can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the large prize opening 20, the number and spacing of the protrusions 846a and 846b, etc. In this embodiment, it is designed so that 1 to 3 game balls remain on the slide plate 840 when continuous right-handed shooting is performed, and even when the slide plate 840 is displaced to an open state for a short time (e.g., 0.052 seconds), it is adjusted so that approximately 1 to 3 game balls enter the box-shaped member 842 during one short opening. Therefore, with the configuration of the large prize opening 20 in this embodiment, if the appropriate shooting operation (e.g., right-handed shooting) is performed at the appropriate timing during a minor win game (e.g., after the right-handed shooting notification), the game balls can be entered into the large prize opening 20 with almost certainty.

Note that the configuration of the large prize opening 20 shown in Figure 52 is merely an example, and a large prize opening 20 with a different structure from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening and closing member (slide plate 840) of the large prize opening 20 may include multiple opening and closing members provided at separate locations, and these multiple opening and closing members may be controlled to open and close simultaneously.

Figure 53 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the large prize opening 20, and in particular the structure of the lower region 850 of the large prize opening 20. The sliding plate 840 opens and closes the entrance to the large prize opening 20 in accordance with the control of the large prize opening solenoid 92. The large prize opening solenoid 92 controls the sliding plate 840 to the open state, operating the sliding plate 840 to open the entrance to the large prize opening 20, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the large prize opening 20. The large prize opening solenoid 92 also controls the sliding plate 840 to the closed state, operating the sliding plate 840 to block the entrance to the large prize opening 20, thereby preventing game balls from flowing into the large prize opening 20. Game balls that enter the large prize opening 20 flow to the left and then flow into the lower region 850 of the large prize opening 20 through a passage 848 that allows one ball at a time to pass through. The large prize detection device 25 detects the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 20 in order to award prize balls, and specifically detects game balls that have passed through the passage opening 848 and fallen into the lower area 850.

A discharge path 854 is provided in the lower region 850 of the large prize winning opening 20. The discharge path 854 is a path for discharging game balls that have entered the large prize winning opening 20 to the outside of the large prize winning opening 20, and is typically a path for discharging them to the outside of the pachinko game machine 800. Furthermore, a specific area opening/closing device 852 is provided in the lower region 850, in the middle of the flow path from the passage opening 848 to the discharge path 854. The specific area, which is the condition for transitioning from a small win to a large win, corresponds to the area below the specific area opening/closing device 852. It becomes passable when the specific area opening/closing device 852 is open, and impassable when the specific area opening/closing device 852 is closed.

The specific area opening/closing device 852 operates to switch between an open state, which allows passage to the specific area, and a closed state, which prevents passage to the specific area. The specific area opening/closing device 852 has a sliding member or valve member that operates in accordance with the control of the specific area opening/closing solenoid 806. The specific area opening/closing device 852 operates to open the passage to the specific area, thereby entering an open state where game balls can pass through the specific area, and operates to close the passage to the specific area, thereby preventing game balls from passing through the specific area. The specific area opening/closing device 852 transitions to the open state when the large prize opening 20 opens, and after the large prize opening 20 closes, it waits for a design value that anticipates the game balls inside flowing down to the position of the specific area opening/closing device 852, and then operates to close after the large prize opening has closed, with a delay of the large prize opening's transition to the closed state.

The specific area passage detection device 804 is located below the specific area opening/closing device 852 and detects the passage of a game ball through a specific area. When a game ball passes through a specific area, the specific area passage detection device 804 generates specific area passage information indicating that the ball has passed through. Upon receiving the specific area passage information, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area.

In this embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the minor prize game end when the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in this embodiment). In other words, both the termination condition for the special electric mechanism 856 in the unit game of the special game and the termination condition for the special electric mechanism 856 in the minor prize game include the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 reaching 10. Specifically, the special game control means 260 terminates one unit game of the special game when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 reaches 10, assuming that the termination condition has been met. The minor prize game control means 265 terminates the minor prize game when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 reaches 10, assuming that the termination condition has been met. Note that hitting the V-slot is not the end condition for the mini-bonus game; the mini-bonus game continues even after hitting the V-slot until the end condition is met.

The opening time of the large prize opening 20 in a minor win game is set to a short time that allows the game balls rolling on the sliding plate 840 to enter the large prize opening 20. In addition, the minor win game control means 265 can, during one minor win game (during one operation of the special electric mechanism 856), repeatedly open the large prize opening 20 for a short time up to a predetermined upper limit via the opening/closing control means 275. This upper limit is a number of times greater than or equal to the number of balls that enter the large prize opening 20 (i.e., 10 balls), which is the termination condition for one unit game and minor win game in the special game (in other words, the termination condition for the operation of the special electric mechanism 856). In the embodiment, it is 15 times, which is more than the above number of balls that enter. The minor win game control means 265 closes the large prize slot 20 and ends the minor win game when the number of balls entering the large prize slot 20 during the minor win game reaches 10, even if the number of times the large prize slot 20 has been opened during the minor win game is less than the upper limit (15 times).

The mini-win game control means 265 repeats a set of short-time opening (opening time 0.036 seconds) and short-time closing (closing time 0.6 seconds) of the large prize opening 20 for the first to sixteenth openings in a mini-win game. Furthermore, for the seventeenth and eighteenth openings of the large prize opening 20 in a mini-win game, the mini-win game control means 265 executes a set of short-time opening (opening time 0.036 seconds) and long-time closing (closing time 3 seconds) of the large prize opening 20. Additionally, for the ninth opening of the large prize opening 20 in a mini-win game, the mini-win game control means 265 executes a short-time opening (opening time 0.036 seconds), and then closes the opening for 0.9 seconds when the 19th opening is completed or when a specified number of game balls, which is the operation termination condition, have entered the opening. In this case, the total opening time during the minor win game is 0.684 seconds.

This configuration allows for the placement of only one large prize slot in the game area 81. In other words, by combining the large prize slot for obtaining a V-win and the large prize slot for increasing payouts, a wider area of the game board can be secured for displaying effects and operating mechanical devices, thereby enhancing the excitement of the gameplay. Furthermore, since the same special electric mechanical device 556 operates during minor win games as during special games, the same number of balls are paid out. Based on the aforementioned opening mechanism controlling minor win games, a predetermined number of balls entering the machine, which is the condition for the special electric mechanical device to terminate, can be expected. This allows for the acquisition of a payout equivalent to one unit of special game play, providing players with a satisfying sense of winning.

As explained in relation to Figure 52, if the player continues to shoot game balls, the game balls will accumulate on the sliding plate 840 of the large prize opening 20. Therefore, even if the opening time of the large prize opening 20 in a minor win game is short, at least one ball can be expected to enter. However, there is a possibility that the player may be late in shooting the game balls to the right, for example, if they do not notice the start of the minor win game. Therefore, by setting the number of times the large prize opening 20 opens in a minor win game to be greater than or equal to the number of balls that enter the large prize opening 20 to terminate the minor win game (more than that number in the embodiment), it becomes easier to obtain a payout in a minor win game equivalent to one unit game of a special game.

Furthermore, for the 17th and 18th openings of the large prize slot 20 during a minor win game, making the closing time after opening relatively longer encourages players to notice, preventing the minor win game from ending without any balls being launched, thus missing the opportunity to win a major prize that develops from a minor win. It also prevents the second special symbol, which normally has a high probability of generating a minor win (minor win V), from changing due to the end of the time-saving mode based on the occurrence of a minor win game. However, if the number of long-duration closures is increased too much, the number of out balls (so to speak, wasted balls) that pass through the sliding plate 840 of the large prize slot 20 when the player continuously launches balls will increase. Therefore, by limiting the long-duration closure of the large prize slot 20 during a minor win game to two times, it is possible to suppress both the end of the minor win game without a V-win and the increase in out balls. Furthermore, a general prize slot may be placed downstream of the large prize slot 20, where game balls that did not enter the large prize slot 20 have a high probability (for example, 95%) of entering, with a prize payout of 1 ball. This general prize slot may also be an operating slot (with a prize payout of 1 ball). Doing so can further reduce the number of balls that go out of play.

In this embodiment, the opening time of the large prize opening 20 during the minor prize game was set to 0.036 seconds for each of the multiple openings. However, as a modification, at least one opening time may differ from the others. For example, the minor prize game control means 265 may open the large prize opening 20 for 0.036 seconds 18 times and open it for 0.108 seconds once during the minor prize game. In other words, it is sufficient for the opening to be performed 10 or more times for the duration at which at least one of the game balls rolling on the sliding plate 840 of the large prize opening 20 is expected to enter the large prize opening 20.

<A-shorter hours and C-shorter hours>
Here, in addition to the route to an easy ball entry state triggered by the execution of a special game (also called A time reduction), there is another route to an easy ball entry state triggered by the result of the win/loss judgment being anything other than a jackpot (also called B time reduction or C time reduction).

(1) A-Shortened Time A-Shortened Time is the most common route to transition to the Easy Ball Entry State. When the result of the win/fail judgment is a big win, or a small win that develops into a big win, and a special game is played, the player transitions to the Easy Ball Entry State after the special game ends. The Easy Ball Entry State transitioned to via A-Shortened Time is an Easy Ball Entry State whose termination condition is when the number of symbol changes after the special game ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, a predetermined number set in advance within the range of 1 to 10,000 times), or when the next big win occurs. In the embodiment, the number of symbol changes as the termination condition is set to, for example, 1, 10, 32, 50, 64, or 100.

(2) B-Shortened Time B-Shortened Time is a transition route also known as the ceiling function, which is a route that transitions to the easy ball entry state without going through a jackpot when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, an upper limit of 900) after the end of the special game and without the next jackpot occurring. The ceiling number in B-Shortened Time may be set to 2.5 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 798 to 957 times) the denominator of the probability of a jackpot occurring (for example, 319). Only one type of ceiling number (for example, 900 times) is set for B-Shortened Time. When the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches the predetermined ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the game transitions to the easy ball entry state after the symbol change that reaches the ceiling number (the symbol change from the symbol change that reaches the ceiling number will be a symbol change in the easy ball entry state). In other words, the game enters the easy ball entry state from the symbol change that reaches the ceiling number. Furthermore, since the game transitions to an easy ball entry state after the end of a symbol variation that has reached the ceiling count (after it stops), for example, even if there are no remaining reserves for the first lottery value or the second lottery value after the end of a symbol variation that has reached the ceiling count, and the next symbol variation after the one that reached the ceiling count does not start, the game will be in an easy ball entry state during the game waiting period (while the symbols are stopped) after the end of a symbol variation that has reached the ceiling count (after it stops). The cumulative number of symbol variations is initialized by the occurrence of a jackpot or a RAM clear process, but it is not initialized when transitioning to B time reduction. If B time reduction ends without a jackpot occurring, the ceiling count for B time reduction will not be initialized unless a jackpot occurs afterward, and therefore, if no jackpot occurs afterward, the game will not transition to B time reduction again. As a variation, if the B-time reduction ends without a big win occurring, the game may return to the B-time reduction even if no big win occurs afterward (for example, the game may return to the B-time reduction after 900 symbol changes, which is a predetermined ceiling number, have occurred since the end of the first B-time reduction). In the embodiment, the B-time reduction does not have to be adopted.

(3) C Shortened Time C Shortened Time is a path to transition to an easy ball entry state when the result of the win/fail judgment is anything other than a big win, and the win/fail lottery value or symbol lottery value falls within a specific range. C Shortened Time is a different transition path from both A Shortened Time and B Shortened Time, and is a path to transition to an easy ball entry state when the ball stops on a specific symbol (hereinafter also called "C Shortened Time symbol") that is different from the big win symbols or small win symbols that trigger the transition to an easy ball entry state after a big win, as in A Shortened Time. There may be multiple types of C Shortened Time symbols. C Shortened Time symbols may be losing symbols, in which case C Shortened Time symbols can be said to be losing symbols that lead to a transition to an easy ball entry state, or losing symbols that trigger the transition to an easy ball entry state, and since they are not triggers for big wins or small wins, they can be triggers for transitioning to an easy ball entry state without going through the execution of big wins or special games. Details of the easy ball entry state transitioned to by the C time reduction will be described later, but it may differ from the easy ball entry state transitioned to by the A time reduction in conditions such as the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 90. In addition, depending on the type of game state when the symbols stop, there may be a transition to the easy ball entry state triggered by stopping on a C time reduction symbol, or there may be a stop on a C time reduction symbol at all.

<Types of conditions that make it easy to get the ball in>
Regarding the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12, there is a low base state (also called the "normal game state") which is the normal state of ease of ball entry (non-easy ball entry state), and a high base state which is a state in which the ease of ball entry is increased compared to the low base state. The high base state is one form of the "specific game state" and the "easy ball entry state". Furthermore, there is a special base state (also called the "slightly shortened time") which is a state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than the low base state and lower than the high base state. The special base state is also a form of the "specific game state" and the "easy ball entry state" because the ease of ball entry is higher than the low base state. However, the ease of ball entry in the special base state is substantially the same as or equivalent to the ease of ball entry in the low base state, and is set to an ease of ball entry that is only slightly higher than the low base state to an almost negligible degree.

The specific game control means 270 can set the game state to one of the following: low base state, high base state, or special base state.

(1) Low base state In the low base state, which is a non-easy ball entry state (non-time-saving state), if a win is made in the normal symbol lottery (also called the "open lottery") and the normal symbol stops and is displayed in a winning manner, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. As a variation, in the low base state, all normal symbol lotteries may be misses and the normal electric mechanism 90 may not open.

(2) High Base State In the high base state, when a regular symbol is drawn and the regular symbol stops and is displayed in a winning position, the regular electric mechanism 90 is opened for a long period of 5 seconds. Note that the ease of ball entry may be made different between the high base state as A time reduction and the high base state as C time reduction. For example, the high base state as A time reduction may have at least one of the following characteristics compared to the high base state as C time reduction: (a) the probability of winning with a regular symbol is higher, (b) the variation time of the regular symbol is shorter, or (c) the opening time of the regular electric mechanism 90 is longer. Alternatively, for example, the high base state as C time reduction may have at least one of the following characteristics compared to the high base state as A time reduction: (a) the probability of winning with a regular symbol is higher, (b) the variation time of the regular symbol is shorter, or (c) the opening time of the regular electric mechanism 90 is longer. In either case, the high base state as A time reduction and the high base state as C time reduction offer easier ball entry than the special base state (the probability of winning with normal symbols is higher, the variation time of normal symbols is shorter, and the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 90 is longer).

(3) Special Base State In contrast, in the special base state, when a normal symbol is drawn and the normal symbol stops and displays in a winning pattern, the normal electric mechanism 90 opens for 0.11 seconds, which is slightly longer (by 0.01 seconds) than the short opening in the low base state, but overwhelmingly shorter than the long opening in the high base state. Therefore, the ease of ball entry in the special base state is only slightly higher than the ease of ball entry in the low base state, but overwhelmingly lower than the ease of ball entry in the high base state.

Here, in the low base state (i.e., non-easy ball entry state or non-time-saving state), if the first special symbol results in a jackpot or a jackpot that develops into a minor win, there is a 50% chance of transitioning to the easy ball entry state as a time-saving A state. On the other hand, in the easy ball entry state, if the second special symbol results in a jackpot or a jackpot that develops into a minor win, there is a 100% chance of transitioning to the easy ball entry state as a time-saving A state. Furthermore, since the special base state is a form of the easy ball entry state as well as the high base state, if the first special symbol results in a jackpot or a jackpot that develops into a minor win in the special base state, there is also a 100% chance of transitioning to the easy ball entry state as a time-saving A state. In the special base state, even if you shoot to the right, the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 90 is extremely short and there is almost no chance of winning in the second start opening 12, so you will shoot to the left and aim for the first start opening 11, which is essentially the same way of playing as in the low base state. Therefore, in the special base state, the number of game balls decreases at the same pace as normal left-handed play, but it can be said to be a favorable state in that if a jackpot occurs, it is possible to transition to A time-saving mode with 100% probability. In the high base state, a right-handed play notification image is displayed (different from the image displayed during special play, this is a right-handed play notification image specifically for the high base state that is displayed during the high base state, although it may be the same image as the image displayed during special play), but no right-handed play notification image is displayed in the special base state. Here, the system includes a right-hand shooting notification image A that is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) during a high base state, and a right-hand shooting notification image B (a different image from right-hand shooting notification image A) that is displayed for a specific time (e.g., 3 seconds) during a special game. If the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "95000" while right-hand shooting notification image A is displayed, the suppression function is activated and right-hand shooting notification image A is erased even if the predetermined time has not elapsed, and the suppression notification effect is executed. On the other hand, if the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "95000" while right-hand shooting notification image B is displayed, the suppression function is not activated and right-hand shooting notification image B is displayed until the specified time has elapsed (the suppression function is activated after the special game ends, and the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game ends). Furthermore, if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" while right-hand shooting notification image A is displayed, the pre-notification animation will be executed, but right-hand shooting notification image A will also continue to be displayed simultaneously for a predetermined time. If the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" while right-hand shooting notification image B is displayed, the pre-notification animation will be executed, but right-hand shooting notification image B will also continue to be displayed simultaneously for a specific time.

As an alternative specification, if the first special symbol is a miss in a low base state (i.e., a non-easy ball entry state or a non-time-saving state), the C time-saving symbol may stop with 100% probability, transition to a high base state as C time-saving with 20% probability, and transition to a special base state as C time-saving with 80% probability. In this specification, if the first special symbol results in a jackpot or a jackpot that develops from a minor win in a low base state or special base state, the machine may transition to a high base state as A time-saving with 80% probability, and transition to a special base state as A time-saving with 20% probability. In this specification, if the second special symbol results in a jackpot or a jackpot that develops from a minor win in a high base state, the machine may transition to a high base state as A time-saving with 80% probability, and transition to a special base state as A time-saving with 20% probability. In this specification, in the special base state, the player cannot transition to the high base state unless they win a big or small prize (more specifically, in the special base state, if the first special symbol is a miss, the C time-saving symbol will stop with 100% probability, but this stop does not trigger a transition to either the high base state or the special base state; in other words, even if the C time-saving symbol stops, the current special base state is maintained). In contrast, in the low base state, even a miss can lead to a transition to the high base state, so the low base state can be said to be a more favorable state than the special base state. In this specification, the low base state is sometimes called C time, to indicate that there is a possibility of transitioning to C time-saving. The player transitions to the low base state when the power is restored with a RAM clear, or when the high base state ends (triggered by the execution of a specified number of fluctuation displays, or the execution of a special game that triggers a transition to the low base state). Furthermore, in a high-base state, if the first special symbol is a miss, the C time-saving symbol will stop with 100% probability. However, this stop does not trigger a transition to a special base state; in other words, even if the C time-saving symbol stops, the current high-base state is maintained.

The following describes several embodiments. The embodiments described below can be combined with any features relating to the pachinko game machine described in the above-described embodiments, and can also be combined with any features relating to the embodiments described below.

In the following embodiment, when the game state during the next symbol change after the symbols stop becomes a specific game state, it may be said that the game is "set to a specific game state." Here, "set" may mean transitioning to a different game state, resetting the game state after a minor win or special game, or maintaining and continuing the current game state.

(First Embodiment)
In the first embodiment, multiple types of pre-announcement effects can be executed while the symbols are changing, and a string effect can be executed that displays a string corresponding to the content of the pre-announcement effect when it is displayed. The string effect can suggest the level of expectation of the pre-announcement effect (the expectation of a special game being executed when the pre-announcement effect is executed, that is, the expectation of whether the change in which the pre-announcement effect is executed is a big win change) through display methods other than the content of the string. For example, the level of expectation can be suggested by display methods such as the display color, display size, font, and background color of the string. The frequency of execution of the string effect can be set by input from the player, and for example, it can be configured to switch between a first setting in which the string effect is not executed (or is less likely to be executed) and a second setting in which the string effect is executed (or is more likely to be executed). Depending on the setting of the string effect execution frequency, not only may the execution frequency of the string effect differ, but the display frequency of the pre-announcement effect may also differ. For example, in the first setting in which the string effect is not executed (or is less likely to be executed), the display frequency of the pre-announcement effect may be lower than in the second setting in which the string effect is executed (or is more likely to be executed).

Figure 54 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a text animation display. In the game status display area 700 in the upper right of the screen, simple decorative symbols 702, simple hold images 704, right-hand play indicators 706, etc. are displayed. In the example of Figure 54, the right-hand play indicator 706 is displayed, but the game state in which the text animation is executed is not limited to the right-hand play state in which the right-hand play indicator 706 is displayed, but may also be the left-hand play state in which the right-hand play indicator 706 is not displayed. Below the game status display area 700, a text animation display area 710 is provided in which the text animation is displayed. In the example of Figure 54, the first text animation 712, "Steam Appearance", the second text animation 714, "Box Appearance", and the third text animation 716, "Electric Flashing" are displayed. In the center of the screen, a variation animation 720 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is displayed. The screen also displays the予告演出 722, 724, and 726 corresponding to the text animations 712, 714, and 716. The first preview effect 722 is an effect in which steam erupts from the top of the screen, corresponding to "Steam Appearance" indicated in the first text-based effect 712. The second preview effect 724 is an effect in which cardboard boxes float by, corresponding to "Box Appearance" indicated in the second text-based effect 714. The third preview effect 726 is an effect in which lights flash, corresponding to "Flashing Lights" in the third text-based effect 716.

The string animations 712-716 can indicate the level of expectation for the corresponding preview animations 722-726 through their display characteristics, other than the content of the string. In the example in Figure 54, the display colors of the strings in the first string animation 712 and the second string animation 714 are the normal colors of white and black, while the display color of the string in the third string animation 716 is red. Therefore, the expectation level of the third preview animation 726, which corresponds to the third string animation 716, is higher than that of the first preview animations 722 and 724, which correspond to the first string animations 712 and 714. In this case, for example, the first preview animations 722 and 724 are executed in the normal colors to indicate a low expectation level, while the third preview animation 726 is executed in red and flashes rapidly to indicate a high expectation level.

The string animation and its corresponding pre-announcement animation can be executed, for example, triggered by the start of the symbol change, and can be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 5 seconds) from the start of the symbol change. The execution order of the string animation and its corresponding pre-announcement animation is not particularly limited; the pre-announcement animation may be executed after the start of the string animation, or after the start of the pre-announcement animation, or both may be executed simultaneously. When multiple string animations are executed, they may be executed simultaneously or sequentially at different timings. When multiple string animations are executed, the corresponding pre-announcement animations may be executed simultaneously or sequentially at different timings. The execution order of multiple string animations may be the same as or different from the execution order of the corresponding pre-announcement animations. The pre-announcement animation and its corresponding string animation can be executed, for example, during the period until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or until the decorative symbols enter a reach state, and do not need to be executed after the temporary stop display or after the reach state. When a pre-announcement effect and a corresponding text-based effect are executed, the decorative symbols may then be temporarily stopped, enter a reach state, or be stopped without a temporary stop or reach state. Furthermore, the text-based effect and the corresponding pre-announcement effect may or may not be executed when the symbol change begins. For example, in the symbol change following a symbol change in which a text-based effect and a corresponding pre-announcement effect were executed, the text-based effect and the corresponding pre-announcement effect may or may not be executed.

The preview animation corresponding to the text animation may be related to the background animation (the animation that displays the background of the decorative symbols) that is displayed at the start of the symbol change. The preview animation corresponding to the text animation may also be an animation in which a part of the background animation changes, or where some kind of display (such as an object image) is added to the background animation. The preview animation corresponding to the text animation may differ depending on the content of the background animation. For example, if the background animation is configured to switch depending on the animation mode or animation stage, the content of the executable text animations and preview animations may differ depending on the animation mode or animation stage. Even if the background animation is configured to switch depending on the animation mode or animation stage, there may be text animations and preview animations that can be executed in common regardless of the animation mode or animation stage.

Figure 55 is a table showing an example of text-based and preview animations corresponding to the performance stage. In the example in Figure 55, 13 patterns of animations are provided as text-based and corresponding preview animations that can be performed in the first and second stages, respectively. An expectation level is set for each preview animation, and in the example in Figure 55, the expectation level is set in five stages from "1" to "5". When the expectation level is "1", the expectation level of performing the special game is approximately 1%, when the expectation level is "2", the expectation level of performing the special game is approximately 3%, when the expectation level is "3", the expectation level of performing the special game is approximately 10%, when the expectation level is "4", the expectation level of performing the special game is approximately 66%, and when the expectation level is "5", the expectation level of performing the special game is 100%. When the expectation level is "1" or "2", the display color of the text-based animation is white, when the expectation level is "3" or "4", the display color of the text-based animation is red, and when the expectation level is "5", the display color of the text-based animation is rainbow. Furthermore, the number of performance stages is not limited to two; it may be three or more. Similarly, the number of string animations and corresponding preview animation patterns that can be executed in each of the multiple performance stages is not particularly limited; it may be fewer or more than the example in Figure 55. The number of expectation levels for the preview animation and the number of display colors for the string animation are also not particularly limited; they may be fewer or more than the example in Figure 55.

In the first stage, there are several types of text-based and corresponding preview effects: steam appears (numbers 1 and 6), something floats down a river (numbers 2, 7, and 10), lights flash (numbers 3, 8, and 10), and a lottery-style drawing appears (numbers 4, 5, 9, 11, and 12). In the steam appearance effect, the content of the corresponding preview effect can be distinguished by the text displayed in the text-based effect; the text "steam appears" in text-based effect number 1 and the text "red steam appears" in text-based effect number 6 are different from each other. The same applies to the river-floating effect; the text "a box floats down the river" in number 2, the text "a boat appears" in number 7, and the text "a giraffe-patterned boat appears" in number 10 are different from each other. On the other hand, in the flashing light effect, the text displayed in the text animation is always "flashing light," so it cannot be distinguished by the text itself. However, since the display colors of the text animations are different, the content of the corresponding予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) can be distinguished by the display color of the text animation. In the appearance of the Amidakuji (ladder lottery), the text displayed in the text animation is always "Amidakuji appearance," so it cannot be distinguished by the text itself, and in some cases, the content of the corresponding pre-announcement effect cannot be distinguished by the display color of the text animation either. For example, the text animations for numbers 4 and 5 display the text "Amidakuji appearance" in white, so the content of the corresponding pre-announcement effect cannot be distinguished by the text animation alone. Similarly, the text animations for numbers 9 and 11 display the text "Amidakuji appearance" in red, so the content of the corresponding pre-announcement effect cannot be distinguished by the text animation alone.

In the second stage, the types of text-based and corresponding preview effects include road effects (numbers 1 and 6), crane effects (numbers 2, 7, and 10), flying object effects (numbers 3, 8, and 10), and effects featuring a lottery-like drawing (numbers 4, 5, 9, 11, and 12). The road effects are a substitute for the steam effect in the first stage. The crane effects are a substitute for the river-flowing effect in the first stage. The flying object effects are a substitute for the flashing lights effect in the first stage. By using these substitute effects, it is possible to execute preview effects that are consistent with the background effects in the second stage, which differ from those in the first stage. On the other hand, the lottery-like drawing effect is a common effect that can be executed in both the first and second stages, and is configured to be executed independently of the respective background effects in the first and second stages.

The execution of text-based animations and corresponding pre-announcement animations can be determined, for example, by an animation lottery performed at the start of a symbol change. For example, the execution of each type of animation can be determined by lottery, and the expected value of one or more animations selected for execution can also be determined by lottery. This makes it possible to avoid having pre-announcement animations of the same type but with different expected values (for example, "steam erupting" at number 1 and "a large amount of red steam erupting" at number 6) executed during the same symbol change, while allowing two or more types of pre-announcement animations (for example, "steam erupting" at number 1 and "a box floating by" at number 2) to be executed during the same symbol change. The selection criteria for the lottery determining whether or not to execute a pre-announcement animation may be switchable according to the setting of the execution frequency of text-based animations. For example, in the first setting where text-based animations are not executed (or are less likely to be executed), the execution frequency of pre-announcement animations may be set low, and in the second setting where text-based animations are executed (or are more likely to be executed), the execution frequency of pre-announcement animations may be set high. The frequency of the text animation can be set by the player during the waiting demo when the game is not running, or it can be set by the player during gameplay.

In the first embodiment, there are multiple types of pre-announcement effects that can be displayed on the display device during the symbol variation display. During the symbol variation period from the start of variation to the stop display, there are cases where a pre-announcement effect is displayed and cases where it is not. Furthermore, during the symbol variation period, two or more types of pre-announcement effects may be displayed. When a pre-announcement effect is displayed, a string animation corresponding to the content of the pre-announcement effect can be executed, and the string animation can suggest the level of expectation of the pre-announcement effect through its display method other than the content of the string. The execution frequency of the string animation can be set by input from the player, and the display frequency of the pre-announcement effect differs according to the setting of the string animation execution frequency.

According to the first embodiment, the content and expected value of the pre-announcement effect can be explained using text-based effects, making it easy for players unfamiliar with pre-announcement effects to enjoy them. Furthermore, players familiar with pre-announcement effects can set the frequency of text-based effects to their liking.

(Second Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, there are three game states: a low base state, a high base state, and a special base state. In the low base state and the special base state, the variable member, the ordinary electric mechanism 90, is not opened (or is not substantially opened), so the first game, which aims to get the ball into the first start opening 11, is mainly performed. In the high base state, the opening of the variable member makes it easy or possible for the ball to enter the second start opening 12, so the second game, which aims to get the ball into the second start opening 12, is mainly performed. The first special symbol is set to have only a jackpot and a miss, and the jackpot probability is, for example, 0.3% to 1%. The second special symbol is set to have a jackpot, a small win, and a miss, and the jackpot probability is, for example, 0.3% to 1%, and the small win probability is, for example, 20% to 80%. A minor win is triggered when the second special symbol results in a minor win, and the second special game is triggered when the game ball passes through a specific area during the minor win game (i.e., the minor win develops into a major win). In the second embodiment, there are three high base states: a first high base state, a second high base state, and a third high base state. The third high base state has a longer duration of high base states compared to the first and second high base states, and is more advantageous than the first and second high base states. In the second embodiment, a gate-breaking type of gameplay is provided, where the player progresses from the first high base state to the second high base state, and then from the second high base state to the third high base state, overcoming two narrow hurdles.

Figure 56 schematically shows the transition of game states in the second embodiment. In the low base state and the special base state, when a special game is executed triggered by the first special symbol resulting in a jackpot, the system is set to the high base state (first high base state) after the special game is executed. In the high base state, when a special game is executed triggered by the second special symbol resulting in a minor win, the system is set to the high base state after the special game is executed. The second special symbol has a first minor win symbol (minor win A) and a second minor win symbol (minor win B) as minor win symbols, and a first losing symbol (losing A) and a second losing symbol (losing B) as losing symbols. For example, minor win A and minor win B are minor win symbols that allow a special game to be executed on the condition that they pass through a specific area, and for example, a 3R or 10R special game can be executed. Losing A is a so-called C time-saving symbol, and the system is set to the special base state when Losing A stops. Miss B is a regular miss symbol, not a so-called C time-saving symbol, and does not trigger a special base state.

In the second embodiment, the termination conditions for the high base state can be set to include conditions related to the number of wins and conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds. When the symbols stop, the win count determination process, the game state reference process, and the time-saving round determination process are executed in order. For example, if a win occurs in the high base state and the number of wins reaches a predetermined number, satisfying the termination conditions for the high base state, the high base state ends in the win count determination process, and the game state at the time of the game state reference process becomes the low base state. On the other hand, if a loss occurs in the high base state and the number of wins does not reach the predetermined number, and the termination conditions for the high base state are not satisfied, the game state at the time of the game state reference process remains the high base state. Subsequently, if the number of time-saving rounds reaches a predetermined number, satisfying the termination conditions for the high base state, the high base state ends in the time-saving round determination process and becomes the low base state, but the game state at the time of the game state reference process immediately preceding this is the high base state.

The first high base state has "one time-saving round" and "one minor win" set as termination conditions for the high base state. One time-saving round means that the high base state ends when the symbols stop and are displayed once. One minor win means that the high base state ends when the minor win symbols stop and are displayed once. If a special game is executed in the first high base state triggered by minor win A, the system is then set to the first high base state. If a special game is executed in the first high base state triggered by minor win B, the system is then set to the second high base state. If minor win A or minor win B occurs in the first high base state, the termination condition of "one minor win" is satisfied, and the system becomes a low base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, the destination when a minor win occurs and a special game is executed in the first high base state is determined based on the fact that the low base state is referenced when the symbols stop. Specifically, if a special game based on minor win A is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the first high base state. If a special game based on minor win B is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the second high base state. In the first high base state, if a miss A occurs, the game transitions to a special base state triggered by the stop display of miss A (C time-saving symbol). In the first high base state, if a miss B occurs, the game transitions to the low base state triggered by the stop display of miss B. This is because the high base state ends after the condition of "one time-saving round" is met. In the first high base state, if the minor win game executed triggered by minor win A or minor win B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to the low base state. This is because the high base state ends after the conditions of "one minor win" and "one time-saving round" are met.

In the second high-base state, the termination condition for the high-base state is set as "one time-saving round," but not "one minor win." When a special game is executed in the second high-base state triggered by minor win A, the state is then set to the third high-base state. When a special game is executed in the second high-base state triggered by minor win B, the state is then set to the third high-base state. When minor win A or minor win B occurs in the second high-base state, the state remains high-base at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, the destination when a minor win occurs and a special game is executed in the second high-base state is determined based on the fact that the high-base state is referenced when the symbols stop. In other words, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high-base state, the state transitions to the third high-base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high-base state, the state also transitions to the third high-base state. In the second high base state, if a miss A occurs, the game transitions to a special base state upon the display of miss A (C time-saving symbol). In the second high base state, if a miss B occurs, the game transitions to a low base state upon the display of miss B. This is because the high base state ends after fulfilling the "one time-saving round" condition. In the second high base state, if the mini-win game triggered by a mini-win A or mini-win B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to a low base state. This is because the high base state ends after fulfilling the "one time-saving round" condition.

The third high base state has "100 rounds of time reduction" set as the termination condition for the high base state. When a special game is executed triggered by a minor win A in the third high base state, the game is then set to the third high base state. When a special game is executed triggered by a minor win B in the third high base state, the game is then set to the third high base state. When a minor win A or minor win B occurs in the third high base state, the game remains in the high base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, the destination when a minor win occurs and a special game is executed in the third high base state is determined based on the reference of the high base state when the symbols stop. That is, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high base state, the game transitions to the third high base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high base state, the game also transitions to the third high base state. In the second high base state, when a miss A occurs, the game transitions to the special base state triggered by the display of the miss A (C time reduction symbol) stopping. In the second high-base state, if a miss (B) occurs, the remaining number of time-saving rounds, which is the termination condition in the time-saving round count determination process, is reduced by one, triggered by the display of the miss (B). If the remaining number is not zero, the state is set to the third high-base state; if the remaining number is zero, the state is set to the low-base state. Furthermore, in the third high-base state, if a small win game triggered by a small win (A) or small win (B) does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the remaining number of time-saving rounds, which is the termination condition in the time-saving round count determination process, is reduced by one. If the remaining number is not zero, the state is set to the third high-base state; if the remaining number is zero, the high-base state ends and the state is set to the low-base state.

In the second embodiment, for example, when the second special symbol results in a minor win, the probability of winning minor win A can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of winning minor win B to approximately 18%, the probability of winning losing A (C time-saving symbol) to approximately 13%, and the probability of winning losing B to approximately 7%. In this case, the probability of transitioning from the first high base state to the second high base state can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of transitioning from the second high base state to the third high base state can be set to approximately 80%, and the probability of re-transitioning from the third high base state to the third high base state can be set to approximately 87%. As a result, a gameplay feature can be provided in which the player transitions to a more advantageous game state as they overcome obstacles. According to the second embodiment, by combining multiple minor win symbols (minor win A, minor win B) and the C time-saving symbol (losing A) as the second special symbol, such obstacle-overcoming type gameplay can be provided.

In the example shown in Figure 56, the number of time reductions required to terminate the first high base state is 1, and the number of time reductions required to terminate the second high base state is also 1. However, these numbers may be more than 1, for example, 2, 4, 9, 15, etc. Furthermore, the first number of time reductions required to terminate the first high base state, the second number of time reductions required to terminate the second high base state, and the third number of time reductions required to terminate the third high base state may be the same or different. The third number may be the same as the second number, more than the second number, or less than the second number. The third number may be the same as the first number, more than the first number, or less than the first number. The second number may be the same as the first number, more than the first number, or less than the first number. The relative sizes of the first, second, and third numbers may be any combination of these.

In the second embodiment, the system can be set to the second high base state when a specific winning symbol (e.g., minor win B) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state. The system can be set to the third high base state when a specific winning symbol (e.g., minor win B) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the second high base state. The system can be set to the special base state when a first losing symbol (e.g., losing A or C time-saving symbol) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state, the second high base state, and the third high base state. When a second losing symbol (e.g., losing B or normal losing symbol) is displayed as a stop a predetermined number of times (e.g., once) on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state and the second high base state, the system can be set to the low base state when the stop display occurs for that predetermined number of times. If the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the third high base state, shows a second losing symbol (for example, losing symbol B or a normal losing symbol) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 99 times), the system will not be set to the low base state upon the first occurrence of that predetermined number of stops.

According to the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a gameplay experience that involves overcoming two narrow checkpoints, thereby suppressing the overall gambling aspect of the game while providing a gameplay experience that offers the expectation of potentially securing greater profits if the checkpoints are successfully overcome.

(Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the game state has a low base state and a high base state, and the high base state has a first high base state, a second high base state and a third high base state. The third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that it does not have a special base state and does not use the C time-saving symbol as the second special symbol. In the third embodiment, by using a combination of a small win symbol that enables special gameplay by small win V and a small win symbol that does not enable special gameplay by small win V, the same barrier-breaking gameplay as in the second embodiment is provided. The third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment described above, and the common points will be omitted from the explanation as appropriate.

Figure 57 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of game states in the third embodiment. In the low base state, when a special game is executed triggered by the first special symbol resulting in a jackpot, the system is set to a high base state (first high base state) after the special game is executed. In the high base state, when a special game is executed triggered by the second special symbol resulting in a minor win, the system is set to a high base state after the special game is executed. The second special symbol has minor win symbols, namely the first minor win symbol (minor win A), the second minor win symbol (minor win B), the third minor win symbol (minor win C), and the fourth minor win symbol (minor win D). For example, minor win A and minor win B are minor win symbols that allow a special game to be executed on the condition that a specific area is passed, and for example, a 3R or 10R special game can be executed. On the other hand, minor wins C and D are minor win symbols in which passage through a specific area during the minor win game is impossible (because the large prize opening 20 is only open for 0.1 seconds, and the specific area opening/closing device 852 opens 5 seconds before the large prize opening 20 opens or 5 seconds after the large prize opening 20 closes, making passage through the specific area practically impossible or extremely difficult), and the special game triggered by minor win V cannot be performed. The second special symbol may further include a losing symbol different from the minor win symbols.

In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, conditions related to the number of wins and conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds can be set as termination conditions for the high base state. When the symbols stop, the win count determination process, the game state reference process, and the time-saving round determination process are executed in order.

The first high base state has the following termination conditions: "10,000 rounds of time reduction" and "one of the minor wins A to D". "10,000 rounds of time reduction" means that the high base state ends when the symbols stop and are displayed 10,000 times, and that there is no actual termination condition based on the number of symbol stops. A number other than 10,000 may be set, as long as it is a large number that can be considered virtually infinite. For example, any relatively large number (e.g., 1,000 or more, 2,000 or more) such as 3 times or 10 times or more the denominator of the jackpot probability can be set. Alternatively, instead of "10,000 rounds of time reduction," the system may be configured so that there is no termination condition based on the number of symbol stops, or the termination condition may be "0 rounds of time reduction". "One of the minor wins A to D" means that the high base state ends when any of the minor wins A to D symbols stop and are displayed once. Specifically, the high-base state ends when a minor win A, minor win B, minor win C, or minor win D occurs. The termination conditions related to the type of minor win symbol displayed can be set for each type of minor win symbol, with a specific number of stops required for termination. In the first high-base state, the termination conditions can be set to 1 stop for minor win A, 1 stop for minor win B, 1 stop for minor win C, and 1 stop for minor win D. Alternatively, instead of setting termination conditions for each type of minor win symbol, a termination condition based on the occurrence of a minor win may be set.

In the first high base state, if a special game is executed triggered by a minor win A, the game is then set to the first high base state. In the first high base state, if a special game is executed triggered by a minor win B, the game is then set to the second high base state. In the first high base state, if a minor win A or minor win B occurs, the termination condition of "one minor win A" or "one minor win B" is met, and the game becomes a low base state at the time of the game state reference process when the symbols stop. Therefore, the destination when a minor win occurs and a special game is executed in the first high base state is determined based on the reference to the low base state when the symbols stop. That is, if a special game based on minor win A is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the first high base state, and if a special game based on minor win B is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the second high base state. In the first high base state, if a minor win C or minor win D occurs, the special game is not executed, and the game is then set to a low base state. This is because the high-base state ends when the conditions of "one small win C" or "one small win D" are met. If a loss occurs in the first high-base state, the game returns to the first high-base state. This is because the high-base state does not end until the condition of "10,000 rounds of time reduction" is met. Furthermore, if, in the first high-base state, the small win game triggered by a small win A or small win B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game returns to the low-base state. This is because the high-base state ends when the termination conditions of "one small win A" or "one small win B" are met.

The second high base state has "10,000 rounds of time reduction" and "one occurrence of either minor win C or D" as termination conditions for the high base state. The second high base state differs from the first high base state in that no termination conditions are set for minor wins A and B. In the second high base state, for example, the termination conditions can be set to 0 times for minor win A, 0 times for minor win B, 1 time for minor win C, and 1 time for minor win D. Note that "0 times" in the termination conditions for the high base state triggered by such minor wins means that the minor win is not set as a termination condition for the high base state (that is, no matter how many times that minor win occurs, the high base state will not end. As a variation for this, a number that is practically unattainable, such as 10,000 times, may be set, or the number may not be set at all). In the second high base state, if a special game is executed triggered by minor win A, the state is then set to the third high base state. In the second high base state, if a special game is executed triggered by a minor win B, the game is then set to the third high base state. If a minor win A or minor win B occurs in the second high base state, the conditions for ending the high base state are not met, and the game remains in the high base state at the time of the game state reference process when the symbols stop. Therefore, the destination when a minor win occurs and a special game is executed in the second high base state is determined based on the fact that the high base state is referenced when the symbols stop. That is, if a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high base state, the game transitions to the third high base state, and if a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high base state, the game also transitions to the third high base state. In the second high base state, if a minor win C or minor win D occurs, the special game is not executed and the game is then set to the low base state. This is because the conditions "minor win C once" or "minor win D once" are met and the high base state ends. If a loss occurs in the second high base state, the game is set to the second high base state. This is because the high-base state will not end until the condition for "10,000 time-saving spins" is met. Furthermore, in the second high-base state, if the mini-bonus game triggered by mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to the second high-base state. This is because the conditions for ending the high-base state are not met when mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B occurs.

The third high base state has "10,000 rounds of time reduction" and "1 small win C" as termination conditions for the high base state. The third high base state differs from the second high base state in that no termination condition is set for small win D. In the third high base state, for example, the termination conditions can be set to 0 times for small win A, 0 times for small win B, 1 time for small win C, and 0 times for small win D. If a special game is executed triggered by small win A in the third high base state, the game is then set to the third high base state. If a special game is executed triggered by small win B in the third high base state, the game is then set to the third high base state. If small win A or small win B occurs in the third high base state, the termination conditions for the high base state are not met, and the game remains in the high base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a minor win occurs in the third high base state and a special game is executed, the destination is determined based on the fact that the high base state is referenced when the symbols stop. That is, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high base state, the game transitions to the third high base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high base state, the game also transitions to the third high base state. When a minor win C occurs in the third high base state, the special game is not executed and the game is then set to the low base state. This is because the condition of "minor win C once" is met and the high base state ends. When a minor win D occurs in the third high base state, the special game is not executed and the game is set to the third high base state. This is because when a minor win D occurs in the third high base state, the condition for ending the high base state is not met. When a loss occurs in the third high base state, the game is set to the third high base state. This is because the high base state will not end until the condition of "10,000 time-saving rounds" is met. Furthermore, in the third high-base state, if the mini-bonus game triggered by mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to the third high-base state. This is because the conditions for ending the high-base state are not met when mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B occurs.

In the third embodiment, for example, when the second special symbol results in a minor win, the probability of winning minor win A can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of winning minor win B to approximately 18%, the probability of winning minor win C to approximately 13%, and the probability of winning minor win D to approximately 7%. In this case, the probability of transitioning from the first high-base state to the second high-base state can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of transitioning from the second high-base state to the third high-base state can be set to approximately 80%, and the probability of re-transitioning from the third high-base state to the third high-base state can be set to approximately 87%. As a result, a gameplay feature can be provided in which the player transitions to a more advantageous game state as they overcome obstacles. According to the third embodiment, by combining multiple minor win symbols (minor win A, minor win B, minor win C, minor win D) as the second special symbol, such obstacle-overcoming type gameplay can be provided.

In the example shown in Figure 57, the termination condition for the high base state is set to one occurrence of minor win C or minor win D. However, the number of occurrences of these may be more than one, for example, two, four, nine, or fifteen times. Furthermore, the first count, which is the termination condition for the first high base state, the second count, which is the termination condition for the second high base state, and the third count, which is the termination condition for the third high base state, may be the same or different. The third count may be the same as the second count, more than the second count, or less than the second count. The third count may be the same as the first count, more than the first count, or less than the first count. The second count may be the same as the first count, more than the first count, or less than the first count. Any combination of the magnitudes of the first, second, and third counts may be adopted. Furthermore, the number of small wins C and D that constitute the termination condition may be different for each of the first and second high-base states.

In the third embodiment, the system can be set to a second high base state when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win B) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state. The system can be set to a third high base state when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win B) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the second high base state. The system can be set to a low base state when the second winning symbol (e.g., minor win C) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state. The system can be set to a low base state when the third winning symbol (e.g., minor win D) is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state or the second high base state. The third high-base state can be set when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win B) or the third winning symbol (e.g., minor win D) stops and is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the third high-base state.

In the third embodiment, it is possible to provide a gameplay experience that involves overcoming two narrow checkpoints, thereby suppressing the overall gambling aspect of the game while providing a gameplay experience that offers the expectation of potentially securing greater profits if the checkpoints are successfully overcome.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the game states include a low base state, a high base state, and a special base state, and the high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state, and a third high base state. The fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that it uses a C time reduction symbol as the first special symbol. In the fourth embodiment, a so-called C time gameplay is provided, which allows transition to the high base state when a specific losing symbol is drawn in the low base state. The fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the embodiments described above, and the common points will be omitted as appropriate.

Figure 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of game states in the fourth embodiment. In the low base state, the game is set to a time-saving state (high base state or special base state) when the first special symbol results in a specific miss. The first special symbol has four types of miss symbols: the first miss symbol (miss A), the second miss symbol (miss B), the third miss symbol (miss C), the fourth miss symbol (miss D), and the fifth miss symbol (miss E). In the low base state, the game can be set to the first high base state when miss A is displayed, the game can be set to the second high base state when miss B is displayed, the game can be set to the third high base state when miss C is displayed, and the game can be set to the special base state when miss D is displayed. Misses A to D are C time-saving symbols that enable the transition to the time-saving state. Miss E is a normal losing symbol. When Miss E is displayed during a low base state, the game is set to a low base state. On the other hand, in a special base state, even if the first special symbol is a specific losing symbol (e.g., Miss A to C), the game is not set to a high base state, but to a special base state. In a special base state, the game is also set to a special base state when Miss D is displayed, and when Miss E is displayed. In a special base state, 900 spins are set as the end condition for the time-saving rounds, and the game is set to a low base state after 900 symbol stops.

In the low base state and special base state, when the first special symbol results in a jackpot, a special game is executed, and after the special game is executed, the base state is set to high. The first special symbol has three jackpot symbols: the first jackpot symbol (jackpot A), the second jackpot symbol (jackpot B), and the third jackpot symbol (jackpot C). In the low base state or special base state, if jackpot A occurs, the base state is set to high first after the special game; if jackpot B occurs, the base state is set to high second after the special game; and if jackpot C occurs, the base state is set to high third after the special game. In the high first base state, the time-saving rounds are set to end at 50 rounds; in the high second base state, the time-saving rounds are set to end at 100 rounds; and in the high third base state, the time-saving rounds are set to end at 10,000 rounds. Therefore, the third count, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the third high-base state, is greater than the second count, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the second high-base state, and greater than the first count, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the first high-base state. Also, the second count is greater than the first count. Therefore, the third expected value, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring and a special game being executed in the third high-base state from the time of transition to the third high-base state until the third high-base state ends, is higher than the second expected value, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring and a special game being executed in the second high-base state from the time of transition to the second high-base state until the second high-base state ends, and higher than the first expected value, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring and a special game being executed in the first high-base state from the time of transition to the first high-base state until the first high-base state ends. Also, the second expected value is higher than the first expected value. Note that the specific numerical values for the first, second, and third counts are not limited to the example shown in Figure 58, and different counts may be set.

In the high-base state, when a special game is triggered by a minor win on the second special symbol, the high-base state is set after the special game is completed. Although not shown in Figure 58, the second special symbol can have a first minor win symbol (minor win A), a second minor win symbol (minor win B), and a third minor win symbol (minor win C). If minor win A occurs, the state is set to the first high-base state after the special game; if minor win B occurs, the state is set to the second high-base state after the special game; and if minor win C occurs, the state is set to the third high-base state after the special game. In the high-base state, when a predetermined number of spins, which is the end condition for the time-saving mode, is reached, the state is set to the low-base state after the symbols stop at that predetermined number of spins.

In the fourth embodiment, the expected value of a high-base win, which occurs when a specific losing symbol appears in the low-base state, transitioning to the high-base state, and before the high-base state ends, is set to a predetermined probability or less (for example, 20% or less) from the viewpoint of suppressing the gambling aspect of the low-base state (C time). In the low-base state, if the probability of losing is defined as the first probability, the probability of losing is defined as the second probability, and the probability of losing is defined as the third probability, the expected value of a high-base win can be expressed as the sum of the product of the first probability and the first expected value, the product of the second probability and the second expected value, and the product of the third probability and the third expected value. That is, (expected value of high-base win) = (first probability × first expected value) + (second probability × second expected value) + (third probability × third expected value). For example, if the first expected value is 10%, the second expected value is 25%, and the third expected value is 100%, then by setting the first probability to 10%, the second probability to 15%, and the third probability to 15% (and setting the fourth probability, which is the probability of getting a miss D, to 59%, and the fifth probability, which is the probability of getting a miss E, to 1%), the expected value per high base can be set to approximately 19.8%. In this case, the probability of transitioning to a high base, which is the sum of the first, second, and third probabilities, can be set to 40%, and the probability of transitioning to a high base can be set to a value greater than the predetermined probability (for example, 1.5 times or more, or 2 times or more, the predetermined probability).

In the low-base state according to the fourth embodiment, a special effect (C-Time effect) can be executed to encourage the possibility of transitioning to a high-base state by displaying the C-Time reduction symbol. The special effect may, for example, be an effect that encourages the player to anticipate which of the special symbols indicating the transition destination will be displayed. The special symbols include "Time Reduction 50 Times," indicating a transition to the first high-base state upon stopping with Miss A; "Time Reduction 100 Times," indicating a transition to the second high-base state upon stopping with Miss B; and "Hyper," indicating a transition to the third high-base state upon stopping with Miss C. The special symbols also include "Normal Stage," indicating a transition to a special base state upon stopping with Miss D, and "Continue," indicating a re-challenge upon stopping with Miss E. If a jackpot occurs during the execution of the special effect, the special symbol "Jackpot" may be displayed, or the normal decorative symbols may be displayed in a jackpot pattern (e.g., "333," "777").

Figure 59 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display of a special effect in the fourth embodiment. In the example of Figure 59, a special effect is performed in which three rows of decorative symbols displayed in the center of the screen are stopped by pressing the effect button 109 and aligned to a special symbol. The stopping order of the three rows of decorative symbols is, for example, left, right, and middle, and pressing the effect button 109 realizes a gameplay experience similar to stopping the three reels of a slot machine in order. Figure 59(a) shows an example of the display at the start of the special effect, in which three rows of decorative symbols (or reels) 730 are displayed in the center of the screen in a variable manner, and three effect buttons 732 are displayed corresponding to each row of decorative symbols (or reels) 730. Figure 59(b) shows an example of the display after pressing the effect button 109 twice, in which the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the "100 Time Reduction" special symbol, and the central decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Figure 59(c) shows an example of the display after pressing the performance button 109 three times. The central decorative symbol stops displaying "100 Time-Saving Rounds," and the three rows of decorative symbols all show the same special symbol (100 Time-Saving Rounds). In this case, the first special symbol stops displaying "Miss B," and then the game transitions to the second high-base state.

Figure 59(d) shows an example of the display after pressing the performance button 109 three times, but unlike Figure 59(c), it shows a case where the three rows of decorative symbols do not line up with the same special symbol. In Figure 59(d), the central decorative symbol is displayed as "Continue," indicating that the special performance can be executed again within the same symbol change. In this way, when the same special symbol lines up in the special performance, the game transitions to a high base state corresponding to the lined-up special symbols (except when "Normal Stage" or "Continue" lines up), but when the same special symbol does not line up, the special performance is executed again within the same change. In that case, an upper limit may be set on the number of times the special performance can be executed within one symbol change. In the example shown in Figure 59, the upper limit on the number of times the special performance can be executed is 5 times per symbol change, and the message "You have 5 chances!!" is displayed. If the first special symbol stops with a miss (E), the fifth special effect in a single symbol spin (when "You have one chance!!" is displayed) will always result in the three rows of decorative symbols aligning as "Continue" special symbols. In the next symbol spin, the special effect will be executed up to five more times, and in the next symbol spin, "You have five chances!!" will be displayed again. In other words, each time the first special symbol results in a miss (E), the symbol spin will be repeated to execute up to five special effects. Note that if "Continue" aligns in a single symbol spin, it will always align in the fifth special effect (the same special symbol will not align in the first to fourth special effects). Also, if "Normal Stage" aligns in a single symbol spin, it will always align in the fifth special effect (the same special symbol will not align in the first to fourth special effects). Furthermore, if any other special symbols line up, they will do so during one of the first five special animations (meaning the timing is random, and the same special symbols may line up during one of the first four special animations).

In the fourth embodiment, the display device can be set to a first high base state when a first losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol A) is displayed in a stopped state while the display device is fluctuating in a low base state. It can be set to a second high base state when a second losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol B) is displayed in a stopped state while the display device is fluctuating in a low base state. It can be set to a third high base state when a third losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol C) is displayed in a stopped state while the display device is fluctuating in a low base state. It can be set to a special base state when a fourth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol D) is displayed in a stopped state while the display device is fluctuating in a low base state. If a fifth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol E) is displayed in a stopped state while the display device is fluctuating in a low base state, the low base state is maintained.

In the fourth embodiment, the third expected value (e.g., 100%) for the probability of a win occurring in the third high-base state and a special game being executed before the third high-base state ends may be higher than the first expected value (e.g., 10%) for the probability of a win occurring in the first high-base state and a special game being executed before the first high-base state ends, and the second expected value (e.g., 25%) for the probability of a win occurring in the second high-base state and a special game being executed before the second high-base state ends. The probability of transitioning to a high base state (e.g., 40%), which is the sum of the first probability (e.g., 10%) for the first losing symbol to stop in a low base state, the second probability (e.g., 15%) for the second losing symbol to stop in a low base state, and the third probability (e.g., 15%) for the third losing symbol to stop in a low base state, is greater than the expected value of a high base win (e.g., 19.8%), which is the sum of the product of the first probability (e.g., 10%) and the first expected value (e.g., 10%) (e.g., 1%), the product of the second probability (e.g., 15%) and the second expected value (e.g., 25%) (e.g., approximately 3.8%), and the product of the third probability (e.g., 15%) and the third expected value (e.g., 100%) (e.g., 15%).

In the fourth embodiment, during the display of symbol fluctuations in a low base state, a special effect can be executed to suggest or announce the base state that is set when a symbol stops. Even if a fifth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol E) stops in a low base state, the special effect can be executed during the fluctuation display before the fifth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol E) stops. If a fifth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol E) stops in a low base state and the low base state continues, the special effect can be executed during the fluctuation display of the next symbol after the fifth losing symbol (e.g., losing symbol E) stops.

In the example shown in Figure 58, three high-base states are provided as high-base states that can be transitioned to by stopping the C-time-saving symbol. However, the number of high-base states that can be transitioned to by stopping the C-time-saving symbol is not limited to three; it may be two, or four or more. For example, either the first or second high-base state described above, along with the third high-base state, may be adopted as high-base states, resulting in two high-base states that can be transitioned to by stopping the C-time-saving symbol. Even in these cases, the expected value per high-base state is preferably set to a predetermined probability or less (e.g., 20% or less) from the viewpoint of suppressing the gambling aspect of the low-base state (C-time). Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing the expected rate of transition from the low-base state to the high-base state, the probability of transitioning to the high-base state is preferably higher than the predetermined probability (e.g., 20%), and more preferably, it is 1.5 times or more, 2 times or more, or 3 times or more of the predetermined probability.

According to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to suppress the overall gambling aspect of the game while increasing the probability of transitioning to a high-base state during C-Time, thereby enhancing the appeal of C-Time.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Figure 60 is a schematic diagram showing the transitions in the game state in the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment has the same game transitions as the fourth embodiment, but differs from the fourth embodiment in that it is configured to allow multiple special effects (C-time effects) to be executed in the low base state. The fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, and the common points will be omitted as appropriate.

In the low-base state according to the fifth embodiment, there are two special effects (C-Time effects) to encourage the possibility of transitioning to the high-base state by displaying the stop of the C-Time reduction symbol. The first special effect can be executed when the low-base state is set upon the end of the first high-base state or the end of the second high-base state. The first special effect can also be executed when the low-base state is set upon the end of the third high-base state or the execution of an initialization process (or RAM clear process). The initialization process is the initialization process of the main RAM 291, executed by the main initial processing execution means 280 when the RAM clear switch is operated.

The second special effect is configured to have a longer execution time compared to the first special effect. For example, the time it takes for the symbols to change when the second special effect is performed is longer than the time it takes for the symbols to change when the first special effect is performed. For example, the time it takes for the symbols to change when the first special effect is performed is 5 seconds, and the time it takes for the symbols to change when the second special effect is performed is 10 to 30 seconds (10 seconds if the effect of pressing the effect button 109 three times is performed once, and 30 seconds if it is performed five times). In the first special effect, for example, by pressing the effect button 109 once or pressing it multiple times in quick succession, the wall is destroyed and a special symbol that suggests or notifies the next destination is displayed (the state to which it transitions to afterwards differs depending on which special symbols are lined up after the wall is destroyed, but if "Continue" is lined up, it is a miss E display so the first special effect is performed again in the next spin). In the second special effect, for example, the effect process can be the same as the special effect according to the fourth embodiment shown in Figure 59. The first special effect may be configured to be executed only during the first symbol change after setting to a low base state, and not during subsequent symbol changes in the low base state. On the other hand, the second special effect may be configured to be executable not only during the first symbol change after setting to a low base state, but also during subsequent symbol changes in the low base state. For example, if the low base state is set upon the end of the first or second high base state, the first variation pattern selection criterion may be referenced to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time suitable for executing the first special effect. Conversely, if the low base state is set upon the end of the third high base state or the execution of an initialization process, the second variation pattern selection criterion may be referenced to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time suitable for executing the second special effect.

The first and second high-base states, before the first special effect is executed, offer less advantage compared to the third high-base state. Therefore, the sense of loss upon the end of a high-base state is relatively small. For this reason, it is preferable from the player's perspective to have a relatively short and simple special effect that doesn't excessively fuel the expectation of returning to a high-base state. On the other hand, the third high-base state, before the second special effect is executed, is a very advantageous game state for the player, resulting in a relatively large sense of loss upon its end. Furthermore, the low-base state after the initialization process is only set at special times, such as when the arcade opens, so the player's expectations are very high. In such cases, by making the second special effect relatively long, it is possible to execute a special effect that appropriately fuels the expectation of returning to a high-base state or even entering a high-base state immediately. In this way, by varying the special effects that can be executed depending on the trigger for setting the low-base state, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect that matches the current psychology of the player, while also increasing the variety of special effects.

In the fifth embodiment, the system can be set to a low base state upon the termination of a high base state or upon the execution of an initialization process. During the display of changing symbols in the low base state, a special effect can be executed to suggest or announce the base state that will be set upon the stopping of symbols. The special effects include a first special effect that can be executed in the low base state, which is set upon the termination of a first or second high base state, and a second special effect that can be executed in the low base state, which is set upon the termination of a third high base state or upon the execution of an initialization process. The execution time of the second special effect is longer than that of the first special effect.

In the fifth embodiment, while suppressing the overall gambling aspect of the game, it is possible to increase the probability of transitioning to a high-base state during C-Time, thereby enhancing the appeal of C-Time. By varying the C-Time effects that can be executed depending on the trigger for transitioning to a low-base state, the appeal of C-Time can be further enhanced.

(Sixth Embodiment)
Figure 61 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of game states in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are two game states: a low base state and a high base state, and the high base state has three substates: a first high base state, a second high base state, and a third high base state. In the sixth embodiment, the destination high base state differs depending on the type of winning symbol of the special symbols. The sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the embodiments described above, and the common points will be omitted as appropriate.

In the low base state, when the first special symbol results in a jackpot, a special game is executed, and after the special game is executed, the machine is set to either the first high base state or the second high base state. The first special symbol has two jackpot symbols: the first jackpot symbol (jackpot A) and the second jackpot symbol (jackpot B). In the low base state, if jackpot A occurs, the machine is set to the first high base state after the special game, and if jackpot B occurs, the machine is set to the second high base state after the special game. In the high base state, when the second special symbol results in a minor win, a special game is executed, and after the special game is executed, the machine is set to either the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state. The second special symbol has two minor win symbols: the first minor win symbol (minor win A) and the second minor win symbol (jackpot B). Here, when the second special symbol results in a minor win, the probability of winning minor win A can be set to approximately 50%, and the probability of winning minor win B can also be set to approximately 50%.

In the sixth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, conditions related to the number of wins and conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds can be set as termination conditions for the high base state. When the symbols stop, the win count determination process, the game state reference process, and the time-saving round determination process are executed in order.

The first and second high-base states share the same termination condition for the time-saving rounds, which is set to 32 rounds. The first and second high-base states are configured to allow the execution of common effects; for example, a common effect mode can be set. The first high-base state has "one small win" as the termination condition for the high-base state, while the second high-base state does not. This is a difference between the first and second high-base states. The third high-base state has the termination condition for the time-saving rounds set to 10,000 rounds. Therefore, the third round, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the third high-base state, is greater than the second round, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the second high-base state, and also greater than the first round, which is the termination condition for the time-saving rounds in the first high-base state. The third high-base state has "one small win" as the termination condition for the high-base state.

In the first high-base state, if a minor win A occurs, the game is set to the first high-base state after a special game. If a minor win B occurs, the game is set to the second high-base state after a special game. If a minor win A or B occurs in the first high-base state, the "one minor win" termination condition is met, and the game state becomes low-base at the time of the game state reference process when the symbols stop. Therefore, the transition destination when a minor win occurs in the first high-base state and a special game is executed is determined based on the fact that the low-base state is referenced when the symbols stop.

In the second high-base state, if a minor win A occurs, the game is set to the third high-base state after a special game. If a minor win B occurs, the game is also set to the third high-base state after a special game. In the second high-base state, if a minor win A or minor win B occurs, the conditions for ending the high-base state are not met, and the game becomes high-base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a minor win occurs in the second high-base state and a special game is executed, the destination is determined based on the fact that the high-base state is referenced when the symbols stop.

In the third high-base state, if a minor win A occurs, the game is set to the first high-base state after a special game. If a minor win B occurs, the game is set to the second high-base state after a special game. When a minor win A or B occurs in the third high-base state, the "one minor win" termination condition is met, and the game becomes a low-base state at the time of the game state reference process when the symbols stop. Therefore, the transition destination when a minor win occurs in the third high-base state and a special game is executed is determined based on the reference of the low-base state when the symbols stop. The probability of transitioning to the first high-base state when a minor win occurs in the third high-base state is the same as the probability of transitioning to the first high-base state when a minor win occurs in the first high-base state. Similarly, the probability of transitioning to the second high-base state when a minor win occurs in the third high-base state is the same as the probability of transitioning to the second high-base state when a minor win occurs in the first high-base state.

If a minor win occurs in the second high-base state and a special game is executed, the game is set to the third high-base state, making it almost certain that the next special game will be won in the third high-base state. In the third high-base state, the number of time-saving spins that trigger the termination condition is set to 10,000, so the probability of a minor win occurring before reaching 10,000 symbol changes is almost 100%. Therefore, if a win occurs in the second high-base state, it is almost certain that the profit of two special games will be obtained. On the other hand, if a minor win occurs in the first high-base state and a special game is executed, the game is not set to the third high-base state, so it is not certain that the next special game will be obtained. Therefore, if a win occurs in the first high-base state, it can be said that the profit of one special game is certain, but it cannot be said that the profit of two special games is certain. Therefore, while the first high-base state and the second high-base state share the same expected profit from the number of time-saving rounds and one special game round, they differ in whether or not profit from two special games is guaranteed.

In the sixth embodiment, the system is configured so that the player can set between a notification mode, which informs the player whether the system is in the first high base state or the second high base state, and a non-notification mode, which does not inform the player. The notification setting may be made by the player's input operation during a waiting demo when the game is not being played, or by the player's input operation while the game is being played. The notification setting may be made, for example, during a special game that is executed when the first special symbol results in a jackpot (i.e., a first win) in the low base state. When the notification mode is set, the player may be informed of which base state it is in before the small win symbol stops and is displayed in the first high base state or the second high base state. When the notification mode is set, the notification may be made at the start of the symbol variation when the small win symbol stops and is displayed, during the variation, or immediately before the variation stops. When set to notification mode, notifications may be made at the start of the first symbol variation in the first high base state or the second high base state, during the variation, or immediately before the variation stops. In this case, notifications may be made continuously over multiple symbol variations in the first high base state or the second high base state, and characters or images that suggest or notify the base state may be continuously displayed in a predetermined area of the screen. If set to notification mode, the notification may be given before the first high base state or the second high base state is set, or during the special game that triggers the transition to the first high base state or the second high base state (for example, if set to notification mode, "Entering first performance mode!" or "Entering second performance mode!" may be displayed during the special game's end demo depending on the type of high base state to be transitioned to afterward, and if set to non-notification mode, "Entering first performance mode!" may be displayed during the special game's end demo regardless of the type of high base state to be transitioned to afterward), or the notification may be given during the symbol variation when the winning symbol or winning symbol that triggers the execution of the special game is stopped and displayed. For example, if set to notification mode, the message "In First Performance Mode!" or "In Second Performance Mode!" may be displayed during the period from the start to the end of the high-base state, depending on the type of high-base state that follows. If set to non-notification mode, regardless of the type of high-base state that follows, the message "Entering First Performance Mode!" may be displayed during the period from the start to the end of the high-base state.

In the sixth embodiment, the high base state includes a first high base state in which the number of times the second symbol changes to mark the end of the high base state is a predetermined number (for example, 32 times), a second high base state in which the number of times the second symbol changes to mark the end of the high base state is a predetermined number (for example, 32 times), and a third high base state in which the number of times the second symbol changes to mark the end of the high base state is greater than the predetermined number (for example, 10,000 times). In the first high base state, the system can be set to the first or second high base state after the execution of a special game triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the execution of a special game. In the second high base state, the system can be set to the third high base state after the execution of a special game triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the execution of a special game. In the third high base state, the system can be set to the first or second high base state after the execution of a special game triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the symbol being stopped on the symbol display device that has been displayed with the changeover being triggered by the execution of a special game. The probability of a special game being executed after the first high-base state is set and the game being set to the first high-base state is the same as the probability of a special game being executed after the third high-base state is set and the game being set to the first high-base state. The probability of a special game being executed after the first high-base state is set and the game being set to the second high-base state is the same as the probability of a special game being executed after the third high-base state is set and the game being set to the second high-base state. In the first and second high-base states, it is possible to announce whether the game is set to the first or second high-base state before the winning symbols stop, and the presence or absence of this announcement can be set by input from the player.

According to the sixth embodiment, when a win occurs in the common presentation mode and a special game is executed, the player can be given the expectation that the winnings from the special game may be not just one round, but two rounds, thereby improving the gameplay. Furthermore, by providing both a mode that announces whether the winnings from the special game will be one round or two rounds, and a mode that conceals this information, the gameplay can be tailored to the player's preferences.

(Seventh Embodiment)
The seventh embodiment has the same game transitions as the sixth embodiment. The seventh embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that the performance modes that can be executed in the first high base state and the second high base state are configured to differ depending on whether or not the player sets whether or not to give a notification. The seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the seventh embodiment described above, and the common points will be omitted as appropriate.

Figure 62 is a table showing an example of a performance mode that can be executed in the seventh embodiment, and shows the performance modes that can be executed in the first high base state and the second high base state. When the player sets the game to non-notification mode (no notification), the first performance mode, which is executed in common in the first high base state and the second high base state, is set. In other words, the first performance mode is set in non-notification mode and the first high base state, and the first performance mode is also set in non-notification mode and the second high base state. When the player sets the game to notification mode (with notification), the first performance mode is set in the first high base state, and the second performance mode is set in the second high base state. The second performance mode is a performance mode that definitively notifies that the game is in the second high base state, and for example, characters or images that notify that the game is in the second high base state are continuously displayed in a predetermined area of the screen. On the other hand, the first performance mode suggests a high base state, but does not explicitly indicate or announce whether it is the first or second high base state. For example, text or images indicating a high base state are continuously displayed in a predetermined area of the screen.

When set to non-notification mode and first-stage performance mode, special performances can be executed during symbol changes, and alternative performances can also be executed instead of special performances. Special performances are high-expectation performances that suggest or announce a high probability of executing a special game; for example, performances that confirm a minor win or a major win. A special performance might be one in which an enemy character, a rival of the main character, appears, and then develops into a battle performance where the main character and the enemy character battle. For example, after the execution of a special performance, symbols indicating a minor win or a major win may stop and be displayed, and the battle performance will develop during the special game that is executed as a result of the symbols stopping. If the main character wins the battle performance, it is confirmed that the game will transition to the third high-base state, suggesting or announcing that the acquisition of the next special game is certain. On the other hand, if the main character loses the battle performance and the enemy character wins, it is confirmed that the game will not transition to the third high-base state, suggesting or announcing that the acquisition of the next special game is not certain.

The alternative animation is an animation during symbol variation that shares the same execution time as the special animation, and is executed using the same variation pattern as when the special animation is performed (for example, when a 20-second losing variation time or a 30-second big win/minor win variation time is selected, either the special animation or the alternative animation will be performed). The alternative animation, like the special animation, is a high-expectation animation that suggests or notifies that there is a high probability of a special game being performed, for example, an animation that confirms that a minor win or a big win will occur. The alternative animation is, for example, an animation in which an ally character who is the partner of the main character appears, and then develops into a battle animation in which the main character and the ally character fight together. For example, after the execution of the alternative animation, a symbol that will result in a minor win or a big win is displayed, and the battle animation is performed during the special game that is triggered by the symbol stopping. In the battle animation after the alternative animation, the content of the animation does not branch and the player always wins the battle, and then it is suggested or notified whether or not there is a transition to the third high base state. Furthermore, even without extending to a special gameplay sequence, during the symbol variation where an alternative animation is performed, a friendly character who acts as a partner to the main character may appear, followed by a battle animation in which the main character and the friendly character fight together. In this case, it is preferable that the transition to the third high-base state is not indicated (i.e., a victory in the battle indicates a big win or a small win, while a defeat indicates a loss).

When set to non-notification mode and first performance mode, either a special performance or an alternative performance can be executed in the first high-base state, and either a special performance or an alternative performance can be executed in the second high-base state. If a special performance is executed in the first high-base state, the enemy character wins the battle performance, and it is confirmed that the game will not transition to the third high-base state. In this case, after the special game ends, the game will transition to either the first or second high-base state, but because it is non-notification mode, it is not possible to know which state the game will transition to. If a special performance is executed in the second high-base state, the main character wins the battle performance, and it is confirmed that the game will transition to the third high-base state. In this case, after the special game ends, the game will transition to the third high-base state, and it will be announced that the game is in the third high-base state.

When set to Notification Mode, if the first high-base state is active, the game will be set to the first performance mode. When both Notification Mode and the first performance mode are active, special performances are unavailable, and alternative performances are available instead. In Notification Mode and the first performance mode, after a special game triggered by a minor or major win, the game can transition to the first or second high-base state, but it cannot transition to the third high-base state. Therefore, if special performances were enabled, the performance where the ally character wins would be unavailable, potentially diminishing the player's expectation that the ally character will always lose. To address this, when both Notification Mode and the first performance mode are active, special performances are disabled, and alternative performances are available instead. This prevents the performance from becoming predictable, where the ally character's defeat is foreseeable.

When set to Notification Mode, if the game is in the Second High Base state, it will be set to the Second Performance Mode. When set to Notification Mode and Second Performance Mode, special performances are possible. When in Notification Mode and Second Performance Mode, it is possible to transition to the Third High Base state after the special game triggered by a minor or major win, allowing for a special performance where the ally character wins. Since players who have selected Notification Mode can predict the ally character's victory through the execution of the special performance, the transition to the Third High Base state can be suggested or announced at the start of the special performance, increasing the player's anticipation. When set to Notification Mode and Second Performance Mode, alternative performances may be disabled. However, when set to Notification Mode and Second Performance Mode, alternative performances may also be possible.

In the seventh embodiment, in the first high base state and the second high base state, the player can set either a notification mode, which notifies the player of which state is set to the first high base state or the second high base state before the winning symbol stops, or a non-notification mode, which does not notify the player. When set to notification mode, the first performance mode is set in the first high base state, and the second performance mode is set in the second high base state. When set to non-notification mode, the first performance mode is set in both the first and second high base states. In non-notification mode and first performance mode, special performances can be executed, while in notification mode and first performance mode, special performances cannot be executed, and alternative performances can be executed instead of special performances.

According to the seventh embodiment, when a win occurs in the common presentation mode and a special game is executed, the player can be given the expectation that the profit from the special game may be not just one round, but two rounds, thereby improving the gameplay. Furthermore, by providing a mode that announces whether the profit from the special game will be one round or two rounds, and a mode that conceals this, the gameplay can be tailored to the player's preferences. Moreover, by appropriately setting the special and alternative presentations that can be executed in the announcement mode and the non-announcement mode, it is possible to provide presentations that can more appropriately enhance the player's sense of anticipation.

(Eighth Embodiment)
Figure 63 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of game states in the eighth embodiment. The eighth embodiment has a game transition similar to the third embodiment shown in Figure 57, but differs from the third embodiment in that it further has a fifth minor win symbol (minor win E) as a minor win symbol of the second special symbol, and the game state transitions according to the number of times minor win E stops. The eighth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the embodiments described above, and explanations of common points will be omitted as appropriate.

In the low base state, when the first special symbol results in a jackpot, a special game is executed, and after the special game is executed, the base state is set to the high base state (first high base state). In the high base state, when the second special symbol results in a minor win, a special game is executed, and after the special game is executed, the base state is reset to the high base state. The second special symbol has minor win symbols: the first minor win symbol (minor win A), the second minor win symbol (minor win B), the third minor win symbol (minor win C), the fourth minor win symbol (minor win D), and the fifth minor win symbol (minor win E). For example, minor win A and minor win B are minor win symbols that allow a special game to be executed upon passing through a specific area, and for example, a 3R or 10R special game is executed. On the other hand, minor wins C, D, and E are minor win symbols in which passage through a specific area during the minor win game is impossible (because the large prize opening 20 is only open for 0.1 seconds, and the specific area opening/closing device 852 opens 5 seconds before the large prize opening 20 opens or 5 seconds after the large prize opening 20 closes, making passage through the specific area practically impossible or extremely difficult), and the special game triggered by minor win V cannot be performed. The second special symbol may have a losing symbol different from the minor win symbols.

In the eighth embodiment, as in the embodiments described above, conditions related to the number of wins and conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds can be set as termination conditions for the high base state. When the symbols stop, the win count determination process, the game state reference process, and the time-saving round determination process are executed in order.

The first high base state has the following termination conditions: "10,000 rounds of time reduction" and "one occurrence of any of the minor wins A through D". In the first high base state, no termination condition is set for minor win E. In the first high base state, for example, the termination conditions can be set to 1 time for minor win A, 1 time for minor win B, 1 time for minor win C, 1 time for minor win D, and 0 times for minor win E. If a special game is executed triggered by minor win A in the first high base state, the game is then set to the first high base state. If a special game is executed triggered by minor win B in the first high base state, the game is then set to the second high base state. If minor win A or minor win B occurs in the first high base state, the termination conditions of "one occurrence of minor win A" or "one occurrence of minor win B" are met, and the game returns to the low base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a minor win occurs in the first high base state and a special game is executed, the destination is determined based on the fact that the low base state is referenced when the symbols stop. That is, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the first high base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the second high base state. In the first high base state, if minor win C or minor win D occurs, the special game is not executed and the game is then set to the low base state. This is because the high base state ends when the condition of "minor win C once" or "minor win D once" is met. If minor win E occurs in the first high base state, the special game is not executed and the game is set to the first high base state. This is because if minor win E occurs in the first high base state, the condition for ending the high base state is not met. If a loss occurs in the first high base state, the game is set to the first high base state. This is because the high base state does not end until the condition of "10,000 time-saving rounds" is met. Furthermore, in the first high-base state, if the mini-bonus game triggered by mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the system will be set to a low-base state. This is because the high-base state ends when the termination condition of "one mini-bonus A" or "one mini-bonus B" is met.

The second high base state has the following termination conditions set: "10,000 rounds of time reduction," "one occurrence of either minor win C or D," and "100 occurrences of minor win E." The second high base state differs from the first high base state in that no termination conditions are set for minor wins A and B, but a termination condition is set for minor win E. In the second high base state, for example, the termination conditions can be set to 0 times for minor win A, 0 times for minor win B, 1 time for minor win C, 1 time for minor win D, and 100 times for minor win E. If a special game is executed in the second high base state triggered by a minor win A or minor win B, the state is then set to the third high base state. If a minor win A or minor win B occurs in the second high base state, the termination conditions for the high base state are not met, and therefore the state remains high base at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a minor win occurs in the second high base state and a special game is executed, the destination is determined based on the fact that the high base state is referenced when the symbols stop. That is, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high base state, the game transitions to the third high base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high base state, the game also transitions to the third high base state. In the second high base state, if minor win C or minor win D occurs, the special game is not executed and the game is then set to the low base state. This is because the high base state ends when the conditions of "minor win C once" or "minor win D once" are met. In the second high base state, if a minor win E occurs, the remaining number of spins (for example, the initial value is 100) set as the termination condition for minor win E is reduced by 1. If the remaining number of spins satisfies the first condition (the remaining number of spins is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example, 1 or more), the special game is not executed and the game is set to the second high base state. If the remaining number of spins satisfies the second condition (the remaining number of spins is less than a predetermined number, for example, 0), the special game is not executed and the game is set to the low base state. This is because if the remaining number of spins for minor win E satisfies the first condition, the termination condition for the high base state is not satisfied, and if the remaining number of spins for minor win E satisfies the second condition, the termination condition for the high base state is satisfied. If a miss occurs in the second high base state, the game is set to the second high base state. This is because the high base state will not end until the condition of "10,000 time reduction spins" is satisfied. Furthermore, in the second high-base state, if the mini-bonus game triggered by mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to the second high-base state. This is because the conditions for ending the high-base state are not met when mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B occurs.

The third high base state has "10,000 rounds of time reduction" and "1 small win C" as termination conditions for the high base state. The third high base state differs from the second high base state in that no termination conditions are set for small wins D and E. In the third high base state, for example, the termination conditions can be set to 0 times for small win A, 0 times for small win B, 1 time for small win C, 0 times for small win D, and 0 times for small win E. If a special game is executed in the third high base state triggered by a small win A or small win B, the game is then set to the third high base state. If a small win A or small win B occurs in the third high base state, the termination conditions for the high base state are not met, and the game remains in the high base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a minor win occurs in the third high base state and a special game is executed, the destination is determined based on the fact that the high base state is referenced when the symbols stop. That is, when a special game based on minor win A is executed in the high base state, the game transitions to the third high base state, and when a special game based on minor win B is executed in the high base state, the game also transitions to the third high base state. When a minor win C occurs in the third high base state, the special game is not executed and the game is then set to the low base state. This is because the condition of "minor win C once" is met and the high base state ends. When a minor win D or minor win E occurs in the third high base state, the special game is not executed and the game is set to the third high base state. This is because when a minor win D or minor win E occurs in the third high base state, the conditions for ending the high base state are not met. When a loss occurs in the third high base state, the game is set to the third high base state. This is because the high base state does not end until the condition of "10,000 time-saving rounds" is met. Furthermore, in the third high-base state, if the mini-bonus game triggered by mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B does not pass through a specific area (i.e., the special game is not executed), the game is set to the third high-base state. This is because the conditions for ending the high-base state are not met when mini-bonus A or mini-bonus B occurs.

In the eighth embodiment, for example, when the second special symbol wins a minor win, the probability of winning minor win A can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of winning minor win B to approximately 18%, the probability of winning minor win C to approximately 13%, the probability of winning minor win D to approximately 7%, and the probability of winning minor win E to approximately 0.1%. In this case, the probability of transitioning from the first high base state to the second high base state can be set to approximately 62%, the probability of transitioning from the second high base state to the third high base state can be set to approximately 80%, and the probability of re-transitioning from the third high base state to the third high base state can be set to approximately 87%. Furthermore, by making the probability of winning minor win E extremely small, it is possible to substantially prevent a transition to a low base state due to minor win E being displayed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the second high base state. In the eighth embodiment, by combining multiple minor win symbols (minor win A, minor win B, minor win C, minor win D, minor win E) as the second special symbol, a gameplay feature that involves overcoming obstacles can be provided.

In the eighth embodiment, when a minor win A or minor win B occurs and a special game is executed, the game state referenced at the time the symbols stop is configured such that the demo time for the special game that is subsequently executed is different. Figure 64 is a table showing an example of the demo time for the special game in the eighth embodiment. When a minor win A or minor win B occurs in the first high base state, the game state at the time of the game state reference processing at the time the symbols stop is in the low base state. In this case, the demo time for the special game triggered by a minor win A or minor win B is set to the first time value (for example, 8 seconds). When a minor win A or minor win B occurs in the second high base state or the third high base state, the game state at the time of the game state reference processing at the time the symbols stop is in the high base state. In this case, if the remaining number of small wins E satisfies the first condition (more than the predetermined number, for example, 1 or more), the demo time for the special game triggered by small win A or small win B is set to the second time value (for example, 34 seconds). If the remaining number of small wins E satisfies the second condition (less than the predetermined number, for example, 0, which is less than 1), the demo time for the special game triggered by small win A or small win B is set to the third time value (for example, 0.1 seconds). For example, in the second high base state, if the remaining number of small wins E satisfies the first condition, the demo time for the special game becomes the second time value. In the second high base state, if the remaining number of small wins E satisfies the second condition, the demo time for the special game becomes the third time value. On the other hand, in the third high base state, the remaining number of small wins E does not satisfy the first condition but satisfies the second condition, so the demo time for the special game becomes the third time value. Here, the second time value (e.g., 34 seconds) is greater than the first time value (e.g., 8 seconds) and greater than the third time value (e.g., 0.1 seconds). By increasing the second time value, the entry animation indicating entry into the third high-base state can be executed during the special game's end demo time. If the third high-base state is not set after the special game, the end demo time can be set to the first time value, which is shorter than the second time value, so that the entry animation is not included in the animation time. Also, if the state is reset to the third high-base state from one state to the third high-base state, the end demo time can be set to an extremely short third time value to improve game efficiency. Note that the aforementioned "first time value" may be set to 0.1 seconds, which may make it more difficult to determine which type of high-base state is being transitioned to after the end demo time has elapsed. Furthermore, the "predetermined number of times" in the aforementioned "first condition" and "second condition" may be set to "2" or "10" instead of "1".

In the eighth embodiment, the high base state includes a second high base state and a third high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win A or minor win B) is displayed in a stopped position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the second high base state. The low base state can be set when the second winning symbol (e.g., minor win C) is displayed in a stopped position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the second high base state. The low base state can be set when the third winning symbol (e.g., minor win D) is displayed in a stopped position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the second high base state. The third high base state can be set when the third winning symbol (e.g., minor win D) is displayed in a stopped position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the third high base state. In the second high-base state, if the number of times the fourth winning symbol (e.g., minor win E) is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner, satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of times minor win E is displayed is between 1 and 99), the demo time (e.g., 34 seconds) for the special game that is executed when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win A or minor win B) is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner, satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of times minor win E is displayed is between 1 and 99), then the demo time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) for the special game that is executed when the first winning symbol for the special game that is executed when the first winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner, satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of times minor win E is displayed is between 1 and 99), then the demo time for the special game that is executed when the first winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner, satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., 0.1 seconds).

According to the eighth embodiment, by varying the end demo time of the special game according to the remaining number of small wins E, the end demo time of the special game can be made different when the special game is acquired in the second high base state and when it is acquired in the third high base state. As a result, it is possible to provide end demo effects with different effects content and durations depending on the transition of the base state, and to provide effects that can more appropriately enhance the player's anticipation.

(Ninth Embodiment)
Figure 65 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of game states in the ninth embodiment. The ninth embodiment has the same game transition as the eighth embodiment shown in Figure 63, but differs from the eighth embodiment in that it further has a sixth minor win symbol (minor win F) as a minor win symbol for the second special symbol. The ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above embodiments, and the common points will be omitted from the explanation as appropriate. As an example, when the second special symbol wins a minor win, the probability of winning minor win A can be set to approximately 40%, the probability of winning minor win B to approximately 15%, the probability of winning minor win C to approximately 13%, the probability of winning minor win D to approximately 7%, the probability of winning minor win E to approximately 0.1%, and the probability of winning minor win F to approximately 25%.

The sixth minor win symbol (minor win F), like minor wins A and B, is a minor win symbol that allows a special game to be executed upon passing through a specific area, for example, a 10R or 3R special game to be executed. The first high base state and the second high base state have "minor win F once" set as the termination condition for the high base state. If a special game is executed as a result of minor win F in the first high base state or the second high base state, the game is then set to the first high base state. If minor win F occurs in the first high base state or the second high base state, the termination condition "minor win F once" is satisfied, and the game becomes a low base state at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, if a special game based on minor win F is executed in the low base state, the game transitions to the first high base state. On the other hand, the third high base state does not have "minor win F once" set as the termination condition for the high base state. When a special game is executed following a minor win F in the third high-base state, the game is subsequently set to the third high-base state. Since a minor win F in the third high-base state does not satisfy the termination conditions for the high-base state, the game becomes high-base at the time of the game state reference processing when the symbols stop. Therefore, when a special game based on a minor win F is executed in the high-base state, the game transitions to the third high-base state. As a result, if a minor win F occurs in the second high-base state, the game transitions from the second high-base state to the first high-base state. The termination demo time for the special game when a special game based on a minor win F is executed may also be configured in the same way as in the eighth embodiment.

In Figure 65, the fifth minor win symbol (minor win E) is not shown, but the ninth embodiment may have the same fifth minor win symbol (minor win E) as the eighth embodiment. The ninth embodiment does not necessarily have to have the same fifth minor win symbol (minor win E) as the eighth embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, a common presentation mode is set for the first high base state and the second high base state, and the player is kept in the dark about whether they are in the first or second high base state. That is, in the first and second high base states, no characters or images suggesting or indicating the base state are displayed in the background presentation corresponding to the presentation mode. The presentation modes for the first and second high base states in the ninth embodiment can be the same as, for example, the first presentation mode when the non-notification mode is set in the seventh embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, when a special game is executed as a trigger for a minor win in the first high base state or the second high base state, a special performance can be executed as a big win performance during the special game to hype whether or not the player will transition to the third high base state. In the special performance, a performance simulating a slot machine game is executed, and in at least one game performance executed during the special game, a performance process is displayed that aims to stop a special symbol indicating a transition to the third high base state. For example, up to four game performances can be executed, and in each game performance, three rows of reels are displayed as rotating, and after the performance button 109 or performance lever 112 is operated, the reels stop and a special symbol indicating success or failure is displayed. If successful, an entry performance indicating a transition to the third high base state is executed, and if unsuccessful, the next game performance can be executed. Each game performance may be executed in accordance with the progress of the rounds of the special game. For example, when a 10R special game is played, a visual prompt to aim for a V-win is displayed in Round 1. If a V-win is achieved and the special game is played, a V-win success animation is played in Round 2. The first game animation is played in Rounds 3 and 4, the second game animation is played in Rounds 5 and 6, the third game animation is played in Rounds 7 and 8, and the fourth game animation is played in Rounds 9 and 10. A transition animation indicating the next game is played during the ending demo time. If a player succeeds in any of the first three game animations, the subsequent game animations are not played, and an alternative animation different from the game animation is played until the end demo begins (for example, an animation featuring aliens congratulating the player continues until Round 10, and the background music (BGM) changes from instrumental to instrumental). Special animations may be playable when a 10R special game is played, but not when a 3R special game is played.

The probability (or frequency) of a special effect being executed during a special game may differ depending on whether the special game is executed when a minor win occurs in the first high-base state or when a minor win occurs in the second high-base state. For example, the probability of a special effect being executed during a special game when a minor win A occurs in the second high-base state may be higher than the probability of a special effect being executed during a special game when a minor win A occurs in the first high-base state. For example, the probability of a special effect being executed during a special game when a minor win B occurs in the second high-base state may be higher than the probability of a special effect being executed during a special game when a minor win B occurs in the first high-base state. However, if a minor win occurs in the second high-base state and a special game is executed, and a special effect is performed during that special game, the game effect in that special effect will always succeed. However, if a minor win occurs in the first high-base state and a special game is executed, and a special effect is performed during that special game, the game effect in that special effect will always fail (all four times will fail). As a variation, if a minor win occurs in the second high-base state and a special game is executed, and a special effect is performed during that special game, the game effect in that special effect will succeed 80% of the time. However, if a minor win occurs in the first high-base state and a special game is executed, and a special effect is performed during that special game, the game effect in that special effect may always fail (all four times will fail) or fail 99% of the time (with a 1% success rate).

In the ninth embodiment, a common performance mode is set in both the first high base state and the second high base state. The frequency of execution of special performances in the special game, triggered when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win A) is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner in the second high base state, is higher than the frequency of execution of special performances in the special game, triggered when the first winning symbol (e.g., minor win A) is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable manner in the first high base state.

According to the ninth embodiment, by setting a common presentation mode in the first and second high-base states, it is possible to conceal from the player whether they are in the first or second high-base state. As a result, when a special game is won in the common presentation mode, it is possible to provide diversity in game transitions, such as the game transitioning to the third high-base state or not. On the other hand, by internally distinguishing between the first and second high-base states, it is possible to individually execute presentations appropriate to the game transition determined by the base state, thereby providing presentations that are more appropriate to the player's expectations.

(Tenth Embodiment)
The tenth embodiment has a game transition similar to that of the eighth or ninth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, when a lottery value corresponding to a specific minor win (e.g., minor win A) that allows the execution of a special game is obtained in the first high base state or the second high base state, a special effect is configured to be executed that suggests or notifies the expected transition to the third high base state when a special game is executed as a pre-read effect that can be executed during the symbol change or as a change effect (for example, an effect executed in the symbol change corresponding to the lottery value that was the target of the pre-read, but not limited to that, an effect executed in the symbol change that does not execute a pre-read effect) (i.e., when a big win symbol or a minor win symbol is displayed when the change display stops).

In the tenth embodiment, if a lottery value corresponding to a minor win A is held, a special effect as a pre-announcement effect can be executed over multiple symbol changes until minor win A is displayed. For example, when a lottery value corresponding to minor win A is held, a chance zone is entered, and a special effect is executed in which the player battles an enemy character in the chance zone. If the player wins against the enemy character in the special effect, minor win A is displayed in the winning symbol change, and a special game triggered by minor win A becomes playable. The special effect does not have to be a pre-announcement effect; a special effect may be executed when the chance zone is entered at the start of a symbol change in which minor win A is displayed (the symbol change related to the aforementioned change effect), and the player wins a battle against the enemy character. Alternatively, a special effect may be executed when a lottery value corresponding to a losing symbol is obtained. In this case, a special effect is executed in which the player loses a battle against the enemy character in the symbol change in which the losing symbol is displayed. Therefore, the success or failure of the special effect suggests or informs the expected probability of executing a special game triggered by a minor win. In the tenth embodiment, as the symbols corresponding to minor win A, a minor win symbol that enables the execution of a special effect (e.g., minor win A1) and a minor win symbol that does not execute a special effect (e.g., minor win A2) may be used. In this case, the special effect may be executed when a lottery value corresponding to minor win A1 is obtained, and not executed when a lottery value corresponding to minor win A2 is obtained. Furthermore, the system may be configured not to execute a special effect for minor win E, which does not transition from a high base state other than the third high base state to the third high base state.

In the tenth embodiment, there may be a first special effect and a second special effect. Both the first and second special effects have in common that they suggest or notify the expected probability of executing a special game triggered by a minor win, but they differ in whether or not they suggest or notify the destination after the execution of the special game (in that sense, the "first special effect" has different properties from the "special effect" and may be called a "specific effect" different from the "special effect," in which case the "second special effect" may simply be called the "special effect"). The first special effect is a special effect that does not suggest or notify the destination after the execution of the special game, and when the first special effect is successful and results in a minor win, and the special game is executed triggered by the minor win, the destination after the special game may be the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state. On the other hand, the second special effect is a special effect that suggests or announces that the transition destination after the execution of the special game is the third high-base state, and can be said to be a special effect with a higher expectation than the first special effect. Therefore, if the second special effect is successful and results in a minor win, and the special game is executed as a result of the minor win, it is confirmed that the transition destination after the special game will be the third high-base state. Alternatively, it may be confirmed that the transition to the third high-base state is confirmed at the time the second special effect is executed, or the execution of the second special effect may always result in a success effect, not a failure effect. Furthermore, when the second special effect is executed, the "HYPER" special symbol, which suggests or announces the confirmed transition to the third high-base state, may be displayed.

The first special effect can be executed in both the first and second high-base states because the transition to the third high-base state is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the second special effect cannot be executed in the first high-base state, but can be executed in the second high-base state, because the transition to the third high-base state is guaranteed. In other words, the second special effect can be executed in the second high-base state, which becomes possible to set to the third high-base state after executing a special game triggered by a minor win A, but cannot be executed in the first high-base state, which does not set to the third high-base state after executing a special game triggered by a minor win A. Furthermore, in the third high-base state, neither the first nor the second special effect is executed during the fluctuation display, and even if a minor win occurs in the third high-base state and a special game is executed, no special effects (game effects) are executed during that special game.

In the tenth embodiment, special effects can be executed in the first and second high-base states to suggest or inform the expected transition to the third high-base state when a special game is performed. These special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect. The first special effect can be executed in both the first and second high-base states, while the second special effect cannot be executed in the first high-base state but can be executed in the second high-base state.

According to the tenth embodiment, by enabling the execution of a common special effect in both the first and second high-base states, the player can be kept in the dark about whether they are in the first or second high-base state. As a result, when a special game is won after the execution of a special effect, the game may or may not transition to the third high-base state, providing diversity in game transitions. On the other hand, by internally distinguishing between the first and second high-base states, the game can execute either the first or second special effect appropriate to the game transition determined by the base state, providing an effect that is more appropriate to the player's expectations.

The embodiments described above may be specified by the following aspects.

[21st aspect]
A starting opening into which game balls can be inserted,
A means for determining success or failure that performs a success or failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the aforementioned starting opening,
A symbol display device that shows a changing pattern and indicates the result of the win/loss determination by indicating the stopping of the pattern,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the symbol display device, a special game control means is provided that, triggered by the display of the symbol, enables the execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay.
An effect display device that shows effects,
It comprises an input operation means for receiving input operations from the player,
During the display of the aforementioned symbols, there are multiple types of pre-announcement effects that can be displayed on the performance display device.
During the symbol variation period from the start of the variation to the stop display, the aforementioned pre-announcement effect may be displayed, or it may not be displayed.
During the aforementioned pattern variation period, two or more of the aforementioned pre-announcement effects may be displayed.
When the aforementioned preview effect is displayed, a string animation corresponding to the content of the preview effect can be displayed on the effect display device.
The aforementioned string animation can suggest the high level of expectation for the aforementioned予告演出 (preview animation) through display methods other than the content of the string,
The frequency of the aforementioned string animation can be set by input from the player.
The display frequency of the aforementioned preview animation differs depending on the setting of the execution frequency of the aforementioned text animation.
Pinball game machine.

[Pattern 22]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
The system includes a specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of ball entry is normal, a high base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state, and a special base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state and lower than that of the high base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which can be set when a specific winning symbol is displayed in a fixed position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the first high base state, and a third high base state which can be set when a specific winning symbol is displayed in a fixed position on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a variable manner in the second high base state.
When the first losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state, the second high base state, and the third high base state, the device is set to the special base state.
When the second losing symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state and the second high base state, for a predetermined number of stops, the low base state can be set as a trigger for the display of the predetermined number of stops.
When the second losing symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the third high base state, for a predetermined number of times, the low base state is not set as a result of the predetermined number of times the symbol is displayed.
Pinball game machine.

[23rd aspect]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
The system includes a specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
The aforementioned multiple base states include a low base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is higher than that of the low base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state, and a third high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the second high base state.
The second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state, can be set to the low base state when the second winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device.
The low base state can be set when the third winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state or the second high base state.
The third high base state can be set when the first winning symbol or the third winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the third high base state.
Pinball game machine.

[24th form]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A symbol display device that displays a changing pattern and indicates the result of the first or second win/fail judgment by indicating the stopping of the pattern,
When a symbol is stopped on the symbol display device, a special game control means is provided that enables the execution of a special game that includes opening the big prize slot, triggered by the stop display.
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of ball entry is normal, a high base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state, and a special base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state and lower than that of the high base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which is more advantageous to the player than the first high base state, and a third high base state which is more advantageous to the player than the second high base state.
The first high base state can be set when the first losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The second high base state can be set when the second losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The third high base state can be set when the third losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The special base state can be set when the fourth losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
If the fifth losing symbol is displayed as stopped on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state, the low base state continues.
The third expected value for the number of times a win occurs and a special game is executed in the third high base state before the third high base state ends is higher than the first expected value for the number of times a win occurs and a special game is executed in the first high base state before the first high base state ends, and the second expected value for the number of times a win occurs and a special game is executed in the second high base state before the second high base state ends.
The probability of transitioning to a high base, which is the sum of the first probability that the first losing symbol stops in the low base state, the second probability that the second losing symbol stops in the low base state, and the third probability that the third losing symbol stops in the low base state, is greater than the expected value per win at high base, which is the sum of the product of the first probability and the first expected value, the product of the second probability and the second expected value, and the product of the third probability and the third expected value.
During the display of the symbol variation in the low base state, a special effect can be executed that suggests the base state to be set when the symbol stops.
Even if the fifth losing symbol is displayed in the low base state, the special effect can be executed during the fluctuation display before the fifth losing symbol is displayed in the low base state.
If the fifth losing symbol is displayed as stopped in the low base state and the low base state continues, the special effect can be executed during the display of the next symbol after the fifth losing symbol has been displayed as stopped.
Pinball game machine.

[25th form]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A symbol display device that displays a changing pattern and indicates the result of the first or second win/fail judgment by indicating the stopping of the pattern,
When a symbol is stopped on the symbol display device, a special game control means is provided that enables the execution of a special game that includes opening the big prize slot, triggered by the stop display.
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
An initial processing execution means that performs an initialization process to reset the game state,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of ball entry is normal, a high base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state, and a special base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state and lower than that of the high base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which is more advantageous to the player than the first high base state, and a third high base state which is more advantageous to the player than the second high base state.
The first high base state can be set when the first losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The second high base state can be set when the second losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The third high base state can be set when the third losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
The special base state can be set when the fourth losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state.
If the fifth losing symbol is displayed as stopped on the symbol display device that is fluctuating in the low base state, the low base state continues.
The low base state can be set upon termination of the high base state or upon execution of the initialization process.
During the display of the symbol variation in the low base state, a special effect can be executed that suggests the base state to be set when the symbol stops.
The special effects include a first special effect that can be executed in the low base state, which is set when the first high base state or the second high base state ends, and a second special effect that can be executed in the low base state, which is set when the third high base state ends or when the initialization process is executed.
The execution time of the second special effect is longer than the execution time of the first special effect.
Pinball game machine.

[26th aspect]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
An effect display device that shows effects,
It comprises an input operation means for receiving input operations from the player,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of ball entry is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state.
The high base state includes a first high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is a predetermined number of times, a second high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is the predetermined number of times, and a third high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is greater than the predetermined number of times.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the first high base state, stops displaying, the system can be set to the first high base state or the second high base state after the execution of the special game.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the second high base state, stops displaying, the system can be set to the third high base state after the execution of the special game.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the third high base state, stops displaying, it is possible to set the system to the first high base state or the second high base state after the execution of the special game.
The probability that the special game is executed after the first high base state is set and the first high base state is set is the same as the probability that the special game is executed after the third high base state is set and the first high base state is set.
The probability that the special game is executed after the first high base state is set and the second high base state is set is the same as the probability that the special game is executed after the third high base state is set and the second high base state is set.
In the first high base state and the second high base state, it is possible to inform the player whether the game is set to the first high base state or the second high base state before the winning symbol stops, and the presence or absence of such notification can be set by input from the player.
Pinball game machine.

[27th aspect]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
An effect display device that shows effects,
It comprises an input operation means for receiving input operations from the player,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of ball entry is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of ball entry is higher than that of the low base state.
The high base state includes a first high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is a predetermined number of times, a second high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is the predetermined number of times, and a third high base state in which the number of variations of the second symbol at the end of the high base state is greater than the predetermined number of times.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the first high base state, stops displaying, the system can be set to the first high base state or the second high base state after the execution of the special game.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the second high base state, stops displaying, the system can be set to the third high base state after the execution of the special game.
When the symbol displayed on the symbol display device, which is fluctuating in the third high base state, stops displaying, it is possible to set the system to the first high base state or the second high base state after the execution of the special game.
In the first high base state and the second high base state, the player can set either a notification mode, which notifies the player of which state is set (first high base state or second high base state) before the winning symbol stops, or a non-notification mode, which does not notify the player.
When set to the notification mode, it is set to the first performance mode in the first high base state, and set to the second performance mode in the second high base state.
When set to the non-notification mode, the first performance mode is set in the first high base state and the second high base state,
In the non-notification mode and the first performance mode, special performances can be executed.
In the notification mode and the first performance mode, the special performance cannot be executed, and an alternative performance that takes the place of the special performance can be executed.
Pinball game machine.

[28th Pattern]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
The system includes a specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
The aforementioned plurality of base states include a low base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is higher than that of the low base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state and a second high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device which is displayed in the first high base state.
The low base state can be set when the second winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state or the second high base state.
The low base state can be set when the third winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state.
The second high base state can be set when the third winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the second high base state.
When the number of times the fourth winning symbol is displayed in a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable state in the first high base state, satisfies a predetermined condition, the demo time for the end of the special game, which is executed when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable state in the first high base state, is longer than the demo time for the end of the special game, which is executed when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable state in the second high base state, when the number of times the fourth winning symbol is displayed in a stop on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in a variable state, satisfies the predetermined condition.
Pinball game machine.

[29th form]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The aforementioned multiple base states include a low base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is higher than that of the low base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state, and a third high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the second high base state.
The second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state, can be set to the low base state when the second winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device.
The low base state can be set when the third winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state or the second high base state.
The third high base state can be set when the first winning symbol or the third winning symbol is displayed as stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the third high base state.
A common performance mode is set in the first high base state and the second high base state.
The frequency of execution of special effects in a special game that is performed when the first winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device that is displayed in the second high base state is higher than the frequency of execution of special effects in a special game that is performed when the first winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device that is displayed in the first high base state.
Pinball game machine.

[The 30th aspect]
The first starting opening into which the game ball can be inserted,
A second starting port is provided with a variable member that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls when opened,
A large prize slot that, when opened, allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter,
A first win/fail determination means that performs a first win/fail determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening,
A second success/failure determination means that performs a second success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the second start opening,
A first symbol display device that shows a first symbol changing and indicates the result of the first win/fail determination by indicating the first symbol stopping,
A second symbol display device that shows the result of the second win/fail judgment by indicating the second symbol's stop, and
A special game control means that enables the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize slot when a symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device or the second symbol display device,
A specific game control means capable of setting one of a plurality of base states that differ in the ease with which the ball enters the second starting opening,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The aforementioned multiple base states include a low base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is normal, and a high base state in which the ease of getting the ball in is higher than that of the low base state.
The aforementioned high base state includes a first high base state, a second high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first high base state, and a third high base state which can be set when the first winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second symbol display device which is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the second high base state.
The second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state, the second high base state, or the third high base state, can be set to the low base state when the second winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device.
The low base state can be set when the third winning symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the first high base state or the second high base state.
The third high base state can be set when the first winning symbol or the third winning symbol is displayed as stopped on the second symbol display device, which is displayed in the third high base state.
In the first high base state and the second high base state, a special effect can be performed that indicates the expected probability of transitioning to the third high base state when a special game is played.
The aforementioned special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect.
The first special effect can be executed in the first high base state, and can also be executed in the second high base state.
The second special effect cannot be performed in the first high base state, but can be performed in the second high base state.
Pinball game machine.

The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment.

If power is restored after a power outage, the displays of the information display device and the performance display device will be restored after the power is restored. The information display device is a display unit that displays information related to the game, and is, for example, a display unit included in the symbol display unit 120 in Figure 3. The information display device is a so-called main lamp and may include at least one of the following: first special symbol display unit 41, second special symbol display unit 42, normal symbol display unit 45, first special symbol hold display unit 71, second special symbol hold display unit 72, normal symbol hold display unit 75, game status display unit 76, and abnormal notification unit 77. The information display device may also include the first and second lamps of the status indicator lamp 802 (the first lamp indicates whether or not it is in a time-saving state (in this embodiment, accompanied by a state where balls are easily entered by the normal electric mechanism), and the second lamp indicates whether or not it is in a game state where right-handed shooting is required (a state where balls are easily entered by the normal electric mechanism, or an operating state of the special electric mechanism, i.e., during a special game)). Display recovery may mean that after the display goes out due to a power outage, it lights up and some kind of display starts when the power is restored. Display recovery for information display devices may mean that the main lamp lights up. Display recovery for performance display devices may mean that the performance display device lights up, or that some kind of initial display (such as the game machine logo, or text indicating startup or data loading) appears on the performance display device. Note that the initial display also indicates recovery/restoration, so it may be called a recovery display, and may include the "specific performances" (performances indicating recovery and/or fluctuations, as described later) and "special performances" (performances indicating recovery and/or special gameplay, as described later).

(1) If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode (for example, during the execution of a predetermined standby animation) and then power is restored, the animation display will restore its display before the information display (for example, the special symbol display). In other words, the animation display will restore its display before the information display (for example, the special symbol display). The initial display will be displayed for a specific period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then will disappear. The display will then switch to a game standby display (not the predetermined standby animation, but a display showing the stage background with the normal and simplified decorative symbols stopped in a fixed position). After 240 seconds, the predetermined standby animation will be displayed. By prioritizing the restoration of the animation display, which is easily visible to the player, the player can be quickly informed that power is being restored.

(2) If a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (for example, while special symbols are being displayed) and then the power is restored, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (for example, the special symbols display unit). In other words, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (for example, the special symbols display unit). The initial display will be displayed until the restored symbol variation ends after the power is restored, that is, it will be displayed for the remaining time of the symbol variation after the power is restored (for example, if the variation is displayed for 30 seconds and a power outage occurs after 5 seconds have passed and the power is restored, the initial display will be displayed for the remaining 25 seconds), and then it will be hidden. If there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, it will then switch to a game standby display (not a predetermined standby animation, but a display in which the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop), and after 240 seconds, the predetermined standby animation will be displayed. Even during normal gameplay, by prioritizing the restoration of the display of the performance display device, which is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the display is being restored. Furthermore, after the display on the performance display device returns to normal and the initial display (e.g., display of the game machine logo, text indicating startup or data loading) is shown, a specific performance described later will be executed after a certain period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. The specific performance may continue to run until the reel spinning that resumed after power restoration is complete. In this configuration, the performance will run for the remaining time of the reel spinning after power restoration (for example, if a power outage occurs after 5 seconds of a 30-second spinning display and power is restored, the specific performance will run for the remaining 25 seconds). If there are no pending lottery values related to the special reel spinning thereafter, the display will switch to a "waiting for gameplay" display (not the predetermined waiting performance, but a display showing the stage background and the normal and simplified decorative reel symbols stopped in a fixed position). After 240 seconds, the predetermined waiting performance will be displayed.

(3) If a power outage occurs during a special game (for example, during the start demo, round game, or end demo) and then the power is restored, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (for example, the special symbol display unit). In other words, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (for example, the special symbol display unit). The initial display will be shown until the special game that was restored after the power was restored is finished, and then it will be hidden. If there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of the special symbols, it will then switch to a game standby display (not a predetermined standby animation, but a display in which the stage background is shown and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop), and then after 240 seconds the predetermined standby animation will be displayed. As a variation, the initial display may be configured to be shown until the round game that was restored after the power was restored is finished (for example, if a power outage occurs in the 5th round and the power is restored, it will be shown until the restored 5th round is finished), and then it will be hidden (for example, it will be hidden at the start of the 6th round and will switch to the special game animation). As another variation, if a power outage occurs during the opening demo and power is restored, the initial display may be configured to remain visible until the resumed opening demo ends, and then disappear (for example, it may disappear at the start of the first round and switch to the special game animation). Even during special gameplay, prioritizing the restoration of the display on the animation display device, which is easily visible to the player, allows the player to be quickly informed that the display is being restored. Furthermore, after the display on the performance display device returns to normal and the initial display (e.g., display of the game machine logo, display of text indicating startup or data loading) is shown, a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed before the special performance described below is executed. This special performance may continue to run until the resumed special game (or resumed round game, or resumed start demo) ends after the power is restored. If configured in this way, the special performance will cease to run once the resumed special game (or resumed round game, or resumed start demo) ends. Subsequently (regardless of whether the special performance ceases to run at the end of the resumed special game, the resumed round game, or the resumed start demo), if there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols after the special game ends, the display will switch to a game standby display (not the predetermined standby performance, but a display showing the stage background with the normal and simplified decorative symbols stopped in a fixed position). After 240 seconds, the predetermined standby performance will be displayed.

(4) If power is restored after a power outage occurs while the suppression state is active, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit). In other words, the display of the performance display device will be restored before the display of the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit). Here, "while in the suppression state" means the state or situation in which the operating conditions for the suppression function are met when the difference between the number of game values to be granted and the number of game values used reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches the upper limit of 95,000), and the suppression function is activated (in other words, the state or situation in which the suppression function is activated as described above may also be called the suppression state). The initial display is displayed for a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then becomes invisible, and switches to the display of the suppression notification (also called the suppression notification effect or suppression state effect) (the predetermined standby effect will not be displayed even after 240 seconds have passed). As a variation, the display may return directly to the suppression state effect without going through the initial display after power is restored. Even during suppression, prioritizing the restoration of the display on the visual indicator, which is easily noticeable to the player, allows for quick notification to the player that the system is being restored.

(5) When power is restored after a power outage, a predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism is performed. When power is restored after a power outage, the display on the performance display device returns to normal before the start of the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism. In other words, the timing of the display on the performance display device returning to normal precedes the timing of the start of the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism. The display on the information display device returns to normal before the completion of the initial operation of the movable mechanism. In other words, the timing of the display on the information display device returning to normal precedes the timing of the completion of the initial operation of the movable mechanism. Regardless of whether the power outage occurs during game standby, normal gameplay, special gameplay, or suppression state and then power is restored, the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism can be performed after the display on the performance display device returns to normal. Here, the initial operation of the movable mechanism is an operation to return the movable mechanism to its initial position or to check whether it is operating normally by putting one or more movable mechanisms that can operate in accordance with the performance into a predetermined operating state. If there are multiple movable mechanisms, it is preferable that the above specifications be satisfied for the initial operation of at least one of the multiple movable mechanisms. The predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism applies to any of the following cases: "when power is restored after a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode (e.g., during the execution of a predetermined standby animation)," "when power is restored after a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (e.g., during the display of special symbols)," "when power is restored after a power outage occurs during special gameplay (e.g., during the start demo, round gameplay, or end demo)," and "when power is restored after a power outage occurs while the system is in a suppressed state." However, as a variation, the system may be configured not to execute the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism in the case of "when power is restored after a power outage while the system is in a suppressed state." By executing the initial operation of the movable mechanism after the display on the animation display device has returned to normal, the movable mechanism can be operated while the animation display device shows a "recovering" indication, and the player can be shown that the movable mechanism is operating in relation to the power outage recovery (referred to as power restoration after a power outage).

(6) If power is restored after a power outage, the display on the information display device will return to normal before the completion of the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism. In other words, the display on the information display device will return to normal before the completion of the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism. Regardless of whether the power outage occurs during game standby, normal gameplay, special gameplay, or suppression state and then power is restored, the display on the information display device can return to normal before the completion of the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism. The predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism applies to any of the following cases: "when power is restored after a power outage during game standby (for example, during the execution of a predetermined standby effect)", "when power is restored after a power outage during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variations)", "when power is restored after a power outage during special gameplay (for example, during the start demo, round gameplay, or end demo)", and "when power is restored after a power outage while in a suppression state". However, as a variation, the system may be configured not to perform the predetermined initial operation of the movable mechanism in the case of "when power is restored after a power outage while in a suppression state". By prioritizing the restoration of the information display on the display device over the completion of the initial operation of the movable mechanism, important information related to the game can be quickly shown to the player.

(7) While the game is in standby mode, a predetermined standby animation (for example, playback of a demo video) can be performed. If the power is interrupted and then restored under predetermined conditions while the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby animation is being performed, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power interruption, will be performed after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored. If the power is interrupted and then restored under predetermined conditions while the game is in standby mode, the display on the animation display device will be restored and the initial display (for example, display of the game machine logo, display of text such as "starting up" or "reading data") will be performed, and the predetermined standby animation will be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power is restored). Specifically, if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being displayed, and then power is restored, the initial display will be shown for a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). After that, the display will switch to a game standby display (not the predetermined standby animation, but a display showing the stage background with the normal and simplified decorative symbols stopped in a confirmed state). After 240 seconds, the predetermined standby animation will be displayed. The 240-second period may also start from the beginning of the initial display (for example, the predetermined standby animation may be displayed 239.5 seconds after switching to the game standby display). By displaying the initial display until the predetermined period has elapsed, the player can be reliably informed that a power outage has occurred. Furthermore, by executing the same predetermined standby animation as before the power outage after the predetermined period has elapsed, the system can be restored to the same state as before the power outage, preventing any disruption to the player's gameplay.

(8) During normal gameplay (for example, while special symbols are being displayed in a variation), variation effects in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variation are possible. Variation effects that can be performed include development effects (super reach effects and battle effects) that are executed after the decorative symbols have entered a reach state, and win/loss branching effects (preferably executed at the end of super reach effects and battle effects) that build anticipation about whether or not the decorative symbols will stop and display in a winning state. If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while special symbols are being displayed in a variation and a predetermined variation effect (for example, a development effect or a win/loss branching effect) is being executed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined variation effect, which is the same as the effect before the power outage, will not be executed even after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored. However, a specific effect different from the predetermined variation effect will be executed after the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power was restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols are generated after the power was restored). For example, after the display on the performance display device returns to normal and the initial display (e.g., display of the game machine logo, display of text indicating startup or data loading) is made, a specific performance is executed after a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Here, the specific performance is a performance that indicates recovery and/or during a spin, and has a different display mode from the initial display after power recovery, but the initial display may remain on (if a spin is in progress after power recovery, the initial display may continue until the end of that spin), and as mentioned above, the specific performance may be included as the initial display. The specific performance may include text indicating performance recovery or LCD recovery, or it may include text indicating gameplay or game resumption, or it may include text indicating that gameplay on the game board has started (e.g., text such as "Currently recovering" or "Currently spinning, please wait"). If a power outage occurs while a special symbol is being displayed and then power is restored, executing a specific animation different from the one before the power outage allows the player to be quickly informed that normal gameplay with the special symbol display has resumed, without having to worry about consistency with the progress of the animation before the power outage.

(9) If a power outage occurs while a special game is in progress and a predetermined special game animation is being performed (for example, if it is a round game in the third round, the text "Currently in the third round" is displayed, or if it is an opening demo, the text "Aim for the attacker!" is displayed), and then the power is restored, even if a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined special game animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed. Instead, a special animation different from the predetermined special game animation will be performed after the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power was restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power was restored). For example, the special animation is performed after a specific period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display on the animation display device was restored and the initial display (for example, the display of the game machine logo, the display of text indicating startup or data loading) was made. Here, a special effect is an effect that indicates recovery and/or special gameplay, and has a different display mode from the initial display after power restoration, but the initial display may remain on (if special gameplay is underway after power restoration, the initial display may continue until the end of the special gameplay, or if the start demo is underway after power restoration, the initial display may continue until the end of the start demo, or if a certain round is underway after power restoration, the initial display may continue until the end of that round), and as mentioned above, the initial display may include a specific effect. In a special effect, the following may be displayed: "Currently restoring," "Currently in the middle of a jackpot, please wait," "Currently in a round, please wait," or "Currently in the start demo, please wait." In a special effect, the following may be displayed: If a power outage occurs during a special game under specific circumstances, and then power is restored, executing a different special animation than the one before the power outage allows the player to be quickly informed that the special game has resumed, without having to worry about consistency with the progress of the special game animation before the power outage.

(10) While in the suppression state, a predetermined suppression state animation can be executed. The suppression state animation is an animation that indicates that the suppression function is activated. The suppression state animation displays the following message: "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, the suppression function has been activated, today's game is over, please be careful not to forget your card." (In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols are generated after the power is restored, but since the suppression state is active, the situation in which pending values exist does not occur in the first place.) If the power is interrupted while in the suppression state and the predetermined suppression state animation is being executed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power interruption, will be executed after a specific period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored. If a power outage occurs while the machine is in a suppressed state, and then power is restored, the display on the display device will return to its initial state (e.g., display of the game machine logo, or text indicating startup or data loading), and after a specific period of time has elapsed, the suppressed state animation will be executed. Even after a predetermined period (e.g., 240 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined standby animation will not be displayed; instead, the predetermined suppressed state animation will continue to be executed. By displaying the initial animation until the specified period has elapsed, the player can be reliably informed that a power outage has occurred. Furthermore, by executing the same suppressed state animation as before the power outage after the specified period has elapsed, the machine can be restored to the same state as before the power outage, reliably demonstrating to the player that the suppression function is still active even after a power outage. As a variation, the suppressed state animation may be displayed directly after power restoration without going through the initial animation.

(11) If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, a predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, is performed after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power is restored). If a power outage occurs while the game is in a suppression state and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, a predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, is performed after a specific period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power is restored, but since the game is in a suppression state, the situation in which pending values exist does not occur in the first place). Here, the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period. In other words, the specific period from power restoration to the execution of a predetermined suppression state animation is shorter than the predetermined period from power restoration to the execution of a predetermined standby animation. This allows the player to be quickly informed that power has been restored while the suppression function is active, even if a power outage occurs while the system is under suppression.

(12) If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, a predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power is restored). If a power outage occurs while the game is in special game mode and a predetermined special game animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined special game animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, but a special animation different from the predetermined special game animation will be performed after a specific period has elapsed since the power was restored (in this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after the power is restored). Here, the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period. In other words, the specific period from power restoration to the execution of a special effect is shorter than the predetermined period from power restoration to the execution of a predetermined standby effect. This allows for quick and reliable indication to the player that the special game has resumed even if a power outage occurs during the special game. In particular, in systems where a V-win triggers round continuation or transitions to a high-base state after the special game ends, this allows for warnings to prevent disadvantages such as the inability to win an attacker or V-win due to the absence of game balls upon resumption of the special game after a power outage.

(13) When a power outage occurs under predetermined conditions, such as during game standby and the execution of a predetermined standby animation, and then power is restored, the display on the information display device (main lamp that displays information related to the game) returns to normal before the execution of the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage. In other words, the timing of the display on the information display device (main lamp that displays information related to the game) returns to normal before the execution timing (start timing) of the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after power restoration, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after power restoration. When power is restored after a power outage during game standby, the restoration process is performed in the following order: restoration of the animation display device, restoration of the information display device, and execution of the predetermined standby animation. By prioritizing the restoration of the information display device before the execution of the predetermined standby animation, important information related to the game can be quickly shown to the player.

(14) As a display of the variation of the special symbol, the information display device (e.g., special symbol display unit) can perform a cyclic variation multiple times, and the special symbol can be displayed stopped after the execution of the multiple cyclic variations. If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored under specific circumstances while the variation of the special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed, the end of the last cyclic variation will be earlier than the end of a specific effect (e.g., a restoration effect) that is performed after the power outage and restoration. In other words, the end timing of the last cyclic variation will be earlier than the end timing of a specific effect (e.g., a restoration effect) that is performed after the power outage and restoration. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of the special symbol before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of the special symbol arise after the power is restored. Here, a cyclic variation is a display process that switches and displays multiple display modes in a predetermined order, and means a display process of one cycle that constitutes the variation display. The multiple display modes that constitute one cyclic variation are configured to have different display modes from each other. The number of multiple display modes that constitute one cyclic variation can be any number of two or more. The number of display modes constituting one cyclical variation may be the same as the number of lamps constituting the special symbol display unit. For example, the cyclical variation of the first special symbol may be performed by sequentially displaying the same number of display modes (e.g., 8) as the number of lamps included in the first special symbol display unit 41 (e.g., 8). For example, one of the 8 lamps may be lit sequentially to perform one cyclical display. For example, if ● is lit and ○ is off, and the display pattern indicating a miss is ○○○○○○●●, then when the conditions for starting a variation are met while the variation is stopped at ○○○○○○●●, that is, when a ball enters the first or second start gate while the game is waiting, or when the reserved lottery value related to the variation of the special symbol that is present during variation or during the symbol fixing period (a period during which the stop display pattern is fixed so that the next variation display does not start immediately after the variation display stops, that is, until the next variation display starts, the stop display pattern of the special symbol is visible, for example, 0.3 seconds), then it switches from (0)○○○○○○●● to (1)●○○○○○○○ and starts a cyclic variation. In other words, after executing one cyclical variation, such as (0) ○○○○○○●● → (1) ●○○○○○○○ → (2) ○●○○○○○○ → (3) ○○●○○○○○ → (4) ○○○●○○○○ → (5) ○○○○●○○○ → (6) ○○○○○●○○ → (7) ○○○○○○●○ → (8) ○○○○○○○● → (1) ●○○○○○○○ → ..., the next cyclical variation following that previous one may be executed. In this configuration, pattern (1) is the initial display mode in one cyclical variation, pattern (8) is the final display mode in one cyclical variation, and after the display of pattern (8), the system returns to pattern (1) to execute the next cyclical variation. Each pattern is displayed for 15 ms before switching to the next pattern (therefore, the execution time for one cyclical variation is 15 ms × 8 = 120 ms). Furthermore, the "first cyclical variation" refers to the first cyclical variation immediately after the start of the variation display, and the "last cyclical variation" refers to the cyclical variation when the variation display ends. The variation display (variation pattern) of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to only have variation displays (variation patterns) of 120ms or longer. This ensures that the "first cyclical variation" always executes all patterns regardless of the variation display (variation pattern), while the "last cyclical variation" may not execute all patterns depending on the type of variation display (variation pattern), and will end with one of patterns (1) to (8) differently. For example, if the out-of-bounds fluctuation display is 23995ms, then (120ms × 199) + (15ms × 7) + (10ms) means that the cycle ends with pattern (8) at the 200th cycle and can switch from (8) to (1) (because 199 cycles of fluctuation have been completed and there is 105ms remaining, so it is possible to perform the pattern switch at the 200th cycle seven times). However, if the out-of-bounds fluctuation display is 36050ms, then (120ms × 300) + (15ms × 3) + (5ms) means that the cycle ends with pattern (4) at the 301st cycle and can switch from (4) to (1) (because 300 cycles of fluctuation have been completed and there is 50ms remaining, so it is possible to perform the pattern switch at the 301st cycle three times). By prioritizing the end of the final cyclical fluctuation, specific effects (such as recovery effects) can continue until the display of the special symbol fluctuations, which resumed after the power outage, ends. This ensures that the player is clearly shown that normal gameplay is underway after the power outage, until the special symbol stops displaying.

(15) If a power outage occurs under special circumstances during a special game and while a predetermined special game effect is being executed, and then power is restored, a special effect different from the predetermined special game effect will be executed after the power is restored, and the end of the display on a specific display unit on the information display device (for example, a special game-related display unit such as a round indicator light) will occur before the end of the special effect executed after the power outage (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment"). In other words, the end of the display on a specific display unit on the information display device (for example, a special game-related display unit such as a round indicator light) will occur before the end of the special effect executed after the power outage (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment"). In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after power restoration, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after power restoration. Here, the round indicator light lights up during round play (lights up at the start of the opening demo or at the start of the first round if it is not a minor win leading to a big win, lights up when a V is hit, or at the start of the second round or before the start of the second round, in any case it always lights up at the start of the second round) to display the number of rounds currently in progress, and turns off when all round play is completed (preferably, at the end of the subsequent closing demo). By having specific display units such as the round indicator light turn off first, special effects (for example, displaying the message "Currently being restored" or "Currently in a big win, please wait a moment") can be continued until the special game resumed after the power outage is completed, and the player can be reliably shown that the special game (for example, round play) is in progress until the special game is completed. This allows players to be prompted to launch game balls into the large prize slot that opens during special gameplay, and to be reminded to avoid the disadvantage of not being able to win the special game's benefits due to not launching game balls during the special game after the power is restored.

(16) The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to a volume change operation by the player (the second operation described above, for example, the operation of the up and down buttons on the directional pad 110 that instructs the player to change the volume). Changing the volume level in response to a volume change operation is possible during the execution of a predetermined standby animation while the game is in standby mode, during the execution of a predetermined variation animation while normal gameplay is in progress (for example, while the variation of special symbols is being displayed), and during the execution of a predetermined special game animation while special gameplay is in progress. On the other hand, volume level changes triggered by volume adjustment operations are not permitted during game standby, symbol changes, special gameplay, or while the initial display shown after power is restored during a suppression state (however, exceptionally, volume level changes may be prohibited for, for example, two seconds from the start of the display of the game standby screen, which is displayed after power is restored during game standby and after the initial display, and in which the stage background is displayed and the normal and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed stop); it is not permitted during the execution of specific effects performed after power is restored during symbol changes (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait a moment"); it is not permitted during the execution of special effects performed after power is restored during special gameplay (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment"); and it is also not permitted during the execution of predetermined suppression state effects. By enabling volume level changes during game standby, normal gameplay, and special gameplay while predetermined effects are being executed, the convenience of the player can be improved. By disabling volume level changes during specific or special effects after power restoration, it is possible to prevent the volume from being set to an unintended level when the specific or special effects finish and a predetermined effect (such as a standby effect, variation effect, or special game effect) is executed. Furthermore, by disabling volume level changes during a predetermined suppression state effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is not playable.
Furthermore, the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means (e.g., decorative lamps 111) that emit light according to the performance can be changed by the player's operation to change the light intensity (e.g., by operating the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110 that instructs the player to change the light intensity). The change in the light intensity level triggered by the light intensity change operation can be performed during the execution of a predetermined standby performance while the game is in standby mode, during the execution of a predetermined variation performance during normal gameplay (e.g., during the display of variation of special symbols), and during the execution of a predetermined special game performance during special gameplay. On the other hand, changes to the light intensity level triggered by a light intensity change operation are not permitted during game standby, symbol variation, special gameplay, or while the initial display shown after power outage recovery during suppression (however, as an exception, the light intensity level may be disabled for, for example, two seconds from the start of the display of the game standby screen, which is displayed after power outage recovery during game standby and after the initial display, and in which the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop); it is not permitted during the execution of specific effects performed after power outage recovery during symbol variation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait"); it is not permitted during the execution of special effects performed after power outage recovery during special gameplay (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait"); and it is also not permitted during the execution of predetermined suppression state effects. By enabling changes to the light intensity level during game standby, normal gameplay, and special gameplay while predetermined effects are being executed, the convenience of the player can be improved. By disabling changes to the light intensity level during specific or special effects after power restoration, it is possible to prevent the light intensity level from being set to an unintended level when the specific or special effects finish and a predetermined effect (such as a standby effect, a variation effect, or a special game effect) is executed. Furthermore, by disabling changes to the light intensity level during a predetermined suppression state effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is not playable.

(17) In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed. The volume image can be displayed during the execution of a predetermined standby animation while the game is in standby mode, during the execution of a predetermined variation animation while normal gameplay is in progress (for example, while special symbols are being displayed), and during the execution of a predetermined special game animation while special gameplay is in progress. The volume image can be displayed superimposed in front of (in front of) the predetermined standby animation, predetermined variation animation, or predetermined special game animation, and has a higher display priority than these animations. On the other hand, the sound image cannot be displayed during game standby, symbol variation, special game, or the initial display shown after power is restored during a suppression state (however, exceptionally, the sound image may be disabled for, for example, two seconds from the start of the display of the game standby display, which is displayed after power is restored during game standby and after the initial display, and in which the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop); it cannot be displayed during the execution of specific effects performed after power is restored during symbol variation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait a moment"); it cannot be displayed during the execution of special effects performed after power is restored during special game (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment"); and it cannot be displayed during the execution of predetermined suppression state effects. By making the sound image displayable during game standby, normal game, and special game while predetermined effects are being executed, the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by giving a higher display priority to the sound image than to predetermined effects (such as standby effects, variation effects, and special game effects), the sound image can be displayed to the player in an easily visible manner regardless of the content of the effect being performed. On the other hand, by disabling the display of the sound image during the execution of specific or special effects after power restoration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of specific or special effects indicating that gameplay has resumed after power restoration from being reduced by the display of the sound image, and to reliably show important information to the player. In addition, by disabling the display of the sound image during the execution of a predetermined suppression state effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the predetermined suppression state effect from being reduced by the display of the sound image, and to suggest to the player that gameplay is not possible.
Furthermore, triggered by a player's operation to change the light intensity, a light intensity image can be displayed showing the light intensity level of a light-emitting means (e.g., decorative lamp 111) that emits light in accordance with the performance. The light intensity image can be displayed during the execution of a predetermined standby performance while the game is in standby mode, during the execution of a predetermined variation performance during normal gameplay (e.g., during the display of special symbol variations), and during the execution of a predetermined special game performance during special gameplay. The light intensity image can be displayed superimposed in front of (in front of) the predetermined standby performance, predetermined variation performance, or predetermined special game performance, and has a higher display priority than these performances. On the other hand, the light intensity image cannot be displayed during game standby, symbol variation, special game, or the initial display shown after power is restored during a suppression state (however, exceptionally, the light intensity image may be disabled for, for example, two seconds from the start of the display of the game standby display, which is displayed after power is restored during game standby and after the initial display, and in which the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop); it cannot be displayed during the execution of specific effects performed after power is restored during symbol variation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait a moment"); it cannot be displayed during the execution of special effects performed after power is restored during special game (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment"); and it cannot be displayed during the execution of predetermined suppression state effects. By making the light intensity image displayable during game standby, normal game, and special game while predetermined effects are being executed, the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by giving a higher display priority to the brightness image than to predetermined effects (such as standby effects, variation effects, and special game effects), the brightness image can be displayed to the player in an easily visible manner regardless of the content of the effect being executed. On the other hand, by disabling the display of the brightness image during the execution of specific or special effects after power restoration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of specific or special effects indicating that gameplay has resumed after power restoration from being reduced by the display of the brightness image, thereby ensuring that important information is clearly shown to the player. Additionally, by disabling the display of the brightness image during the execution of a predetermined suppression state effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the predetermined suppression state effect from being reduced by the display of the brightness image, and to suggest to the player that gameplay is not possible.

(18) If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while a special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed, and after the power is restored a specific effect different from the predetermined variation effect (for example, displaying the words "Currently restoring" or "Currently changing, please wait"), and the player starts a volume change operation while the specific effect is being executed, even if the player continues the volume change operation after the specific effect has finished (for example, while the special symbol is stopped after the power is restored, or while the special symbol is changing for the next variation), the volume level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume screen will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the predetermined operation continuation situation in which the volume change operation is being continued. Here, continuing the volume change operation may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button for changing the volume (for example, a volume control button such as the directional key 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, this could mean that the volume control button is pressed during the execution of a specific animation after power restoration, the animation ends while the volume control button is still pressed, and the display of the special symbols for the next spin begins while the volume control button is still pressed (or, assuming a situation where there are no pending lottery values related to the spin of special symbols and no new pending values are generated, the volume control button is pressed during the execution of a specific animation after power restoration, the animation ends while the volume control button is still pressed, the game enters standby mode while the volume control button is still pressed, and the display of "the stage background being displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols being stopped and displayed" begins).
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while a special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed, and then after power is restored a specific effect different from the predetermined variation effect (for example, displaying the words "Currently restoring power" or "Currently changing, please wait"), and the player starts a light intensity change operation while the specific effect is being executed, even if the player continues the light intensity change operation after the specific effect has finished (for example, while the special symbol is stopped after power is restored, or while the special symbol is changing for the next variation), the light intensity level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the light intensity screen will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the predetermined operation continuation situation where the light intensity change operation is being continued. Here, continuing the light intensity change operation may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button for changing the light intensity (for example, a light intensity operation button such as the directional key 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed). For example, this could mean that the light intensity control button is pressed during the execution of a specific animation after power is restored, the animation finishes while the light intensity control button is still pressed, and the display of the special symbols for the next variation begins while the light intensity control button is still pressed (or, assuming a situation where there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols and no new pending values are generated, the light intensity control button is pressed during the execution of a specific animation after power is restored, the animation finishes while the light intensity control button is still pressed, the game enters standby mode while the light intensity control button is still pressed, and the display of "the stage background being displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols being fixed and stopped" begins).
Even if the player continues to adjust the volume or brightness, the system will not change the volume or brightness level, preventing the player from unintentionally changing the volume or brightness level. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume or brightness screen, the system can prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(19) If a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined special game effect is being executed, and after the power is restored a special effect different from the predetermined special game effect (for example, displaying the message "Currently restoring power" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait"), and the player starts adjusting the volume while the special effect is being executed, even if the player continues adjusting the volume after the special effect has finished (for example, during normal gameplay such as the high base state that is entered after the special game has finished), the volume level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume screen will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the predetermined operation continuation situation in which the volume adjustment operation is being continued. Here, continuing to adjust the volume may mean maintaining the state of pressing the volume adjustment button (for example, the volume adjustment button such as the directional pad 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, this could mean that the volume control button is pressed during the execution of a special effect after power restoration, the special effect ends while the volume control button is still pressed, the special game ends while the volume control button is still pressed, and the game transitions to normal gameplay such as a high-base state, and the display of special symbol variations begins while the volume control button is still pressed (or, assuming a situation where there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols and no new pending values are generated, the volume control button is pressed during the execution of a special effect after power restoration, the special effect ends while the volume control button is still pressed, the game enters standby mode while the volume control button is still pressed, and the display of "the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop" begins).
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined special game animation is being performed, and after power is restored a special animation different from the predetermined special game animation (for example, displaying the message "Currently restoring power" or "Currently in a jackpot state, please wait"), and the player starts a light intensity change operation while the special animation is being performed, and continues the light intensity change operation even after the special animation has finished (for example, during normal gameplay such as the high base state transitioned to after the special game has finished), the light intensity level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation), and the light intensity screen will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the light intensity change operation is being continued. Here, continuing the light intensity change operation may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button for changing the light intensity (for example, a light intensity operation button such as the directional pad 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, this could mean that the light intensity control button is pressed during the execution of a special effect after power restoration, the special effect ends while the light intensity control button is still pressed, the special game ends while the volume control button is still pressed, transitioning to normal gameplay such as a high-base state, and the display of special symbol variations begins while the volume control button is still pressed (or, assuming a situation where there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols and no new pending values are generated, the light intensity control button is pressed during the execution of a special effect after power restoration, the special effect ends while the light intensity control button is still pressed, the game enters standby mode while the light intensity control button is still pressed, and the display of "the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop" begins).
Even if the player continues to adjust the volume or brightness, the system will not change the volume or brightness level, preventing the player from unintentionally changing the volume or brightness level. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume or brightness screen, the system can prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(20) Transformation effects (e.g., screen transformation effects) are possible, which transform and display images that can be displayed on the display device into special forms. Predetermined standby effects performed under predetermined conditions during game standby (such as the display of the game machine logo or model introduction, which constitute the entire standby demo effect or a part of the standby demo effect) may be excluded from the transformation effects. Certain variation effects (such as development effects or win/loss branching effects) performed under specific conditions during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variation) may be excluded from the transformation effects, but may also be included in the transformation effects. Predetermined special game effects performed under special conditions during special gameplay (for example, displaying the words "Currently in the 3rd round" in the case of the 3rd round game, or displaying the words "Aim for the attacker!" in the case of the start demo) may be excluded from the transformation effects. ） By excluding these effects from the transformation effects, a decrease in the visibility of the effects can be prevented, and important information for the game can be clearly presented to the player.

(21) The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to a volume change operation by the player, and a volume image indicating the volume level can be displayed. If the power is turned off and then restored while the player is changing the volume, even if the player has been continuing to change the volume since before the power was turned off and after the power was restored, the volume level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) in a predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is continued after the power is restored, and the volume image will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation). Here, continuing the volume change operation may mean maintaining the state of pressing the volume control button (for example, a volume control button such as the directional pad 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, this could mean that the volume control button is pressed before the power is cut off, the power is cut off while the volume control button is still pressed, the power is restored while the volume control button is still pressed, the display on the performance display device is restored while the volume control button is still pressed, and some kind of performance is performed on the performance display device while the volume control button is still pressed (for example, the initial display that is shown after a power cut-off during game standby, symbol variation, special game, or suppression state, or the display that shows the stage background and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols in a fixed stop, a specific performance that is performed after a power cut-off during symbol variation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing symbols, please wait a moment"), or a special performance that is performed after a power cut-off during special game (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment").
Furthermore, the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means, which emits light according to the effects, can be changed in response to the player's operation to change the light intensity, and a light intensity image indicating the light intensity level can be displayed. If the power is interrupted while the player is changing the light intensity and then restored, even if the player continued to change the light intensity from before the power interruption to after the power was restored, the light intensity level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) in a predetermined operation continuation state in which the light intensity change operation is continued after the power was restored, and the light intensity image will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation). Here, "continuing to change the light intensity" may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button for changing the light intensity (for example, a light intensity control button such as the directional pad 110) (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, this could mean that the light intensity control button is pressed before the power is cut off, the power is cut off while the light intensity control button is still pressed, the power is restored while the light intensity control button is still pressed, the display on the performance display device is restored while the light intensity control button is still pressed, and some kind of performance is performed on the performance display device while the light intensity control button is still pressed (for example, the initial display that is shown after a power cut-off during game standby, symbol variation, special game, or suppression state, or the display that shows the stage background and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols in a fixed stop, a specific performance that is performed after a power cut-off during symbol variation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait a moment"), or a special performance that is performed after a power cut-off during special game (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment").
If volume or brightness adjustments are continued after a power outage and subsequent power restoration, preventing the volume or brightness level from being changed unintentionally after power restoration can prevent the player from encountering unintended changes. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume or brightness screen, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(22) Even if the player continues to change the volume from a predetermined timing after a power outage and subsequent power restoration, the volume level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume image will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the predetermined operation continuation status in which the volume change operation is being continued.
Here, the predetermined timing may be a timing before the timing at which a predetermined standby animation is executed after power is restored if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode. The predetermined timing may be, for example, a timing during the execution of the initial display (for example, 0.2 seconds after power is restored), or a timing less than a specific period (0.5 seconds) after power is restored (for example, 0.3 seconds after power is restored). If a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (for example, while special symbols are being displayed), the predetermined timing may be a timing before the timing at which a specific animation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing symbols, please wait a moment") is executed after power is restored. If a power outage occurs during special gameplay, the predetermined timing may be a timing before the timing at which a special animation (for example, the display of the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment") is executed after power is restored. If a power outage occurs during a suppression state, the predetermined timing may be a timing before the timing at which a predetermined suppression state animation is executed after power is restored.
Here, "continuing volume adjustment or brightness adjustment" may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button (e.g., an operation button such as the directional pad 110) used to adjust the volume or brightness (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, it may mean starting to press the operation button at a predetermined timing after power restoration, maintaining the press of the operation button while a predetermined effect (e.g., a standby effect, a specific effect, a special effect, or a suppression state effect) is started, and continuing to hold down the operation button throughout the execution of the predetermined effect.
For example, if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, the volume level (or brightness level) will not change and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed during the predetermined operation continuation status in which the volume change (or brightness change) operation is being continued.
For example, if a power outage occurs while a special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of a specific variation effect that is different from the predetermined variation effect that was the same as before the power outage, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation (or brightness change operation) is being continued.
For example, if a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined special game animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of a special animation different from the predetermined special game animation that was the same animation as before the power outage, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed during the predetermined operation continuation status in which the volume change operation (or brightness change operation) is being continued.
For example, if a power outage occurs while the system is in a suppressed state and a predetermined suppressed state animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of the predetermined suppressed state animation which is the same animation as before the power outage, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed in the predetermined operation continuation status in which the volume change operation (or brightness change operation) is being continued.
Even if the player continues to adjust the volume or brightness from a predetermined timing, by not changing the volume or brightness level, it is possible to prevent the volume from being changed to a level unintended by the player. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume screen or brightness screen, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(23) If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and the power is restored after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, and the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, is performed, then if the player continues to operate the volume change operation after the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume level will be changed (a change based on the operation will be made), and a volume image will be displayed (a display based on the operation will be made) in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is being continued.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, and a predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, and the player continues to change the volume after the predetermined period has elapsed, then in the predetermined operation continuation state where the volume change operation is being continued, the light intensity level will be changed (a change based on the operation will be made), and the light intensity image will also be displayed (a display based on the operation will be made).
If, after a power outage is resolved and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined standby sequence is executed, and the volume or brightness adjustment operation continues, enabling the adjustment of the volume or brightness level will allow for quick changes to the volume or brightness during the predetermined standby sequence, thereby improving player convenience. Furthermore, by displaying the volume screen or brightness screen, the player can be shown the changed volume or brightness level, further improving player convenience.

(24) If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while a special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed, and then power is restored, and a specific effect different from the predetermined variation effect (for example, displaying the words "Currently being restored" or "Currently changing, please wait a moment") is executed after a specific period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) after the specific period has elapsed, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the specific operation continuation situation in which the volume change operation (or brightness change operation) is being continued (especially during the execution of the specific effect), and even in the specific operation continuation situation in which the volume change operation is being continued from after the specific period has elapsed until after the end of the specific effect, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation).
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined special game animation is being performed, and then power is restored, and a special animation different from the predetermined special game animation (for example, displaying the message "Currently restoring power" or "Currently a jackpot, please wait") is performed after a specific period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, even if the player continues to change the volume (or brightness) after the specified period has elapsed, in the predetermined operation continuation situation where the volume (or brightness) operation is being continued (especially during the execution of a special animation), the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation), and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation). Similarly, in the specific operation continuation situation where the volume change operation is being continued from after the specified period has elapsed until after the special animation has finished, the volume level (or brightness level) will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation), and the volume image (or brightness image) will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation).
Here, "continuing volume adjustment or brightness adjustment" may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button (for example, the directional pad 110) used to adjust the volume or brightness (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, it may mean starting to press the operation button after a specific period has elapsed since power was restored, maintaining the press of the operation button while a specific or special effect is performed (the specific or special effect starts before the press begins), maintaining the press of the operation button until the specific or special effect ends, and continuing to hold down the operation button even after the specific or special effect has ended.
In situations where a specific period of time has elapsed since power was restored and a specific or special effect is being executed, if the player continues to change the volume or brightness, the system can prevent the volume or brightness level from being changed unintentionally by not changing it even after the specific or special effect has finished. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume or brightness screen, it can prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(25) If a power outage occurs while the suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state effect is being performed, and the power is restored, and a predetermined suppression state effect that is the same as the effect before the power outage is performed after a specific period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, even if the player continues to operate the volume change operation after the specific period of time has elapsed, the volume level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the volume image will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the specific operation continuation situation in which the volume change operation is being continued.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the system is in a suppressed state and a predetermined suppressed state animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, and a predetermined suppressed state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, is performed after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, even if the player continues to operate the light intensity change operation after the specific period of time has elapsed, the light intensity level will not be changed (no change will be made based on the operation) and the light intensity image will not be displayed (no display will be made based on the operation) in the specific operation continuation situation in which the light intensity change operation is being continued.
Here, "continuing volume adjustment or brightness adjustment" may mean maintaining the state of pressing the operation button (for example, the directional pad 110) used to adjust the volume or brightness (i.e., keeping it pressed down). For example, it may mean starting to press the operation button after a specific period has elapsed since power restoration, maintaining the press of the operation button while the suppression state effect is executed, and continuing to maintain the press of the operation button throughout the execution of the suppression state effect.
In situations where a specific period has elapsed after a power outage and a predetermined suppression state is executed, if the player continues to change the volume or brightness, the system can indicate to the player that the game is unplayable by not changing the volume or brightness level. Furthermore, by not displaying the volume or brightness screen, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the volume or brightness level has been changed when it has not.

(26) The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed by the player's volume change operation, and a volume image indicating the volume level can be displayed. However, even if the player continues to change the volume when it is possible to change the volume by the player's volume change operation, the volume level will not be changed by multiple levels in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is continued (no multiple level changes will be made based on the operation). For example, the volume can be changed by one level by pressing the volume control button (e.g., the directional pad 110) for changing the volume while the volume image is displayed, but even if the press is continued, the volume will not be changed by two or more levels. In other words, if the volume is changed by one level while the volume control button is held down, the volume will not be changed by another level even if the press is continued after the volume has been changed by one level.
Furthermore, while it is possible to change the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means that emits light according to the effects, triggered by the player's operation to change the light intensity, and a light intensity screen indicating the light intensity level can be displayed, even if the player continues to change the light intensity when it is possible to change the light intensity by the player's operation, the light intensity level will not be changed by multiple steps in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the operation to change the light intensity is continued (multiple steps of change based on the operation will not be made). For example, while a light intensity image is displayed, the light intensity can be changed by one step by pressing the light intensity control button (for example, the directional keys 110), but even if the button is kept pressed, the light intensity will not be changed by two or more steps. In other words, if the light intensity is changed by one step while the light intensity control button is kept pressed, the light intensity will not be changed by another step even if the button is kept pressed after the light intensity has been changed by one step.
Even if the player continues to adjust the volume or brightness, the system prevents the volume or brightness level from changing by multiple steps. This prevents the volume or brightness level from being excessively altered and set to a level unintended by the player.

(27) When the player changes the volume, a volume image can be displayed showing the volume level of the sound output from the speaker. When the player changes the light intensity, a light intensity image can be displayed showing the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means that emits light according to the effect. When the player performs an effect operation (for example, operation of the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112), a predetermined effect (for example, a button effect in which the button image is hidden and a new dialogue予告 effect is displayed when the button image is displayed, also called a post-operation effect) can be executed. If the player changes the volume while the volume image is displayed, the period until the volume image is hidden is extended, and if the player changes the light intensity while the volume image is displayed, the period until the volume image is hidden is extended, but if the player performs an effect operation while the volume image is displayed, the period until the volume image is hidden is not extended. Specifically, when the volume is changed, the volume image is displayed for 3 seconds from the start to the end of the display (if no further operation is performed after this operation, the display ends after 3 seconds). However, if the volume is changed again while the volume image is displayed, the display time is extended (the time until the display ends is reset to 3 seconds from the point of the second operation). However, if a performance operation is performed, the display time is not extended (the time until the display ends is not reset to 3 seconds from the point of the performance operation). On the other hand, if the brightness is changed, the display time of the volume image is extended (the time until the display ends is reset to 3 seconds from the point of the brightness change operation). Furthermore, if the player changes the brightness while the brightness image is displayed, the period until the brightness image disappears is extended. Similarly, if the player changes the volume while the brightness image is displayed, the period until the brightness image disappears is extended. However, if the player performs a performance operation while the brightness image is displayed, the period until the volume image disappears is not extended. Specifically, when a light intensity change operation is performed, the light intensity image is displayed for 3 seconds from the start to the end of the display (if no further operation is performed after this operation, the display ends after 3 seconds). However, if the light intensity change operation is performed again while the light intensity image is displayed, the display time is extended (the time until the display ends is reset to 3 seconds starting from the second operation). However, even if a performance operation is performed, the display time is not extended (the time until the display ends is not reset to 3 seconds starting from the performance operation). On the other hand, if a volume change operation is performed, the display time of the light intensity image is extended (the time until the display ends is reset to 3 seconds starting from the volume change operation). By extending the period until the volume image or light intensity image disappears when the player performs a volume change operation or light intensity change operation while the volume image or light intensity image is displayed, the convenience of the player can be improved. For example, when volume change operations or light intensity change operations are performed using a common operation button (e.g., the directional pad 110), the convenience of the player can be improved by extending the display period of the volume image or light intensity image regardless of which operation is performed. On the other hand, by not extending the display period of the volume or brightness image when a visual effect operation unrelated to volume or brightness adjustment is performed, it is possible to prevent the display period of the volume or brightness image from being extended unintentionally by the player.

(28) The system is capable of displaying a volume image showing the volume level of sound output from a speaker, and a light intensity image showing the light intensity level of light emitted by a light-emitting means that emits light according to the performance. The volume image has a volume display element whose display changes according to the volume level. The light intensity image has a light intensity display element whose display changes according to the light intensity level. The predetermined attributes of the volume display element (e.g., shape and size) are the same as the predetermined attributes of the light intensity display element (e.g., shape and size), but certain attributes that differ from the predetermined attributes of the volume display element (e.g., display color) differ from certain attributes of the light intensity display element (e.g., display color), and the display position of the volume display element in the performance display device differs from the display position of the light intensity display element in the performance display device. By making the predetermined attributes of the display elements used for the volume image and the light intensity image common, the volume image and the light intensity image, which are common in that their levels can be changed by modification operations, can be displayed in association. Furthermore, by making certain attributes of the display elements used for the volume image and the light intensity image different, the volume image and the light intensity image can be displayed clearly distinguishably. Furthermore, by differentiating the display positions of the volume and light intensity images, they can be displayed simultaneously in separate locations without superimposing them, thereby improving the player's visibility.

Figure 66 shows examples of displaying a volume image 900 and a light intensity image 910. The volume image 900 includes a speaker image 902 that mimics a speaker, a numerical image 904 that indicates the volume level, and a plurality of volume display elements 906 that indicate the volume level. The volume image 900 has a first display color (e.g., green). The speaker image 902, numerical image 904, and volume display elements 906 that constitute the volume image 900 have a common first display color. The light intensity image 910 includes a lamp image 912 that mimics a lamp, a numerical image 914 that indicates the light intensity level, and a plurality of light intensity display elements 916 that indicate the light intensity level. The light intensity image 910 has a second display color (e.g., yellow). The lamp image 912, numerical image 914, and light intensity display elements 916 that constitute the light intensity image 910 have a common second display color. The plurality of volume display elements 906 have a rectangular shape and are of the same size. Multiple volume display elements 906 have two display modes: on and off, and the number of on volume display elements 906 indicates the volume level. Similarly, multiple light intensity display elements 916 have a rectangular shape and are of the same size. Multiple light intensity display elements 916 also have two display modes: on and off, and the number of on light intensity display elements 916 indicates the light intensity level. In the example shown in Figure 66, there are 7 on volume display elements 906, 3 off volume display elements 906, 6 on light intensity display elements 916, and 4 off light intensity display elements 916. While the volume display elements 906 and light intensity display elements 916 share predetermined attributes (e.g., shape and size), they differ in certain attributes (e.g., display color) that are different from the predetermined attributes.

(29) The display device can display normal decorative symbols, and the normal decorative symbols can be displayed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable state. A volume image indicating the volume level of sound output from the speaker can be displayed. The display stage has at least a first display stage (for example, stage A as described above) and a second display stage (for example, stage B as described above), and the display manner of the normal decorative symbols displayed in the first display stage differs from the display manner of the normal decorative symbols displayed in the second display stage, but the display manner of the volume image displayed in the first display stage is the same as the display manner of the volume image displayed in the second display stage. The volume image can be displayed superimposed on the normally displayed decorative symbols. The overlap ratio (overlap position or overlap range) of the normal decorative symbols and sound images displayed when the reels stop in a losing state differs depending on whether it is the first or second performance stage. However, the overlap ratio (overlap position or overlap range) of the normal decorative symbols and sound images displayed (or temporarily stopped) when the reels stop in a winning state is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second performance stage. Specifically, the overlap ratio between the normal decorative symbols (especially specific symbols, such as the 7 in the middle row of the "375" losing pattern, the 3 in the left row of the "375" losing pattern, and the 5 in the right row of the "375" losing pattern) and the sound image differs depending on whether it is the first or second performance stage (the overlap ratio between specific symbols and sound images differs depending on the performance stage). However, the overlap ratio between the normal decorative symbols (especially specific symbols, such as the 7 in the middle row of the "777" winning pattern, the 3 in the left row of the "333" winning pattern, and the 5 in the right row of the "555" winning pattern) and the sound image is the same when the normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (or when they are confirmed to stop) in a winning pattern. In particular, it is preferable that the overlap ratio be the same when the variable display starts in the first performance stage and then develops into a super reach and results in a jackpot, and when the variable display starts in the second performance stage and then develops into a super reach and results in a jackpot. Thus, when the normal decorative symbols are stopped (or temporarily stopped) in the winning pattern of a specific symbol (e.g., the 7 symbol), the overlap ratio (overlap position or overlap range) of the normal decorative symbols and the sound image may be the same regardless of whether it is the first or second performance stage. When the symbols are stopped (or temporarily stopped) in the winning pattern of a symbol other than the specific symbol (e.g., the 2 symbol), the overlap ratio may differ depending on whether it is the first or second performance stage. By differentiating the overlap ratio of the normal decorative symbols and the sound image at the time of stopping display according to the performance stage, different variable effects can be provided according to the performance stage, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the performance. Furthermore, when a regular decorative symbol is used in a winning pattern, and especially when a specific symbol (for example, the number 7) is used in a winning pattern and is displayed as a stop or temporary stop, by making the superposition ratio of the regular decorative symbol and the sound image the same regardless of the performance stage, it is possible to execute a common premium performance across multiple performance stages, thereby enhancing the excitement of the performance.
The volume image may be replaced with a light intensity image. A light intensity image indicating the light intensity level of light emitted by the light-emitting means can be displayed, and the performance stage has at least a first performance stage and a second performance stage, and the display manner of the normal decorative symbols displayed on the first performance stage differs from the display manner of the normal decorative symbols displayed on the second performance stage, but the display manner of the light intensity image displayed on the first performance stage is the same as the display manner of the light intensity image displayed on the second performance stage. The light intensity image can be displayed superimposed on the normal decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state, and the superposition ratio (superposition position or superposition range) of the normal decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in a losing state and the light intensity image differs depending on whether it is the first performance stage or the second performance stage, but the superposition ratio (superposition position or superposition range) of the normal decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state (or temporarily stopped state) in a winning state and the light intensity image may be the same regardless of whether it is the first performance stage or the second performance stage. Specifically, the overlap ratio between the regular decorative symbols (especially specific symbols, such as the 7 in the middle row of the "375" losing pattern, the 3 in the left row of the "375" losing pattern, and the 5 in the right row of the "375" losing pattern) and the light intensity image differs depending on whether it is the first or second performance stage (the overlap ratio between specific symbols and the light intensity image differs depending on the performance stage). However, the overlap ratio between the regular decorative symbols (especially specific symbols, such as the 7 in the middle row of the "777" winning pattern, the 3 in the left row of the "333" winning pattern, and the 5 in the right row of the "555" winning pattern) and the light intensity image is the same when the regular decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (or when they are confirmed to be stopped) in a winning pattern. In particular, it is preferable that the overlap ratio is the same for cases where the variable display starts in the first performance stage and then develops into a super reach resulting in a jackpot, and for cases where the variable display starts in the second performance stage and then develops into a super reach resulting in a jackpot.

(30) The number of color types in a sound image is less than the number of color types in a typical decorative pattern (e.g., a typical decorative pattern), but the display priority of a sound image is higher than that of a typical decorative pattern. Similarly, the number of color types in a light intensity image is less than the number of color types in a typical decorative pattern (e.g., a typical decorative pattern), but the display priority of a light intensity image is higher than that of a typical decorative pattern. Here, "color type" may mean the type of hue among the three elements of color: hue, lightness, and saturation. "Color type" may also mean the type of combination of RGB values representing the brightness of red, green, and blue. For example, the number of color types in a sound image or a light intensity image may be only one type (i.e., monochromatic), while the number of color types in a typical decorative pattern may be two or more types (i.e., multiple colors). In other words, the sound volume image (light intensity image) is composed of one color, green (yellow), or two colors, including black as the border color (for example, one or two colors from a maximum of 16.77 million colors in 24-bit color, where the color of one pixel is represented by three primary colors: R for red, G for green, and B for blue, and each element is represented by 8 bits). The decorative pattern may be composed of multiple colors (for example, 100,000 colors from a maximum of 16.77 million colors in 24-bit color, where the color of one pixel is represented by three primary colors: R for red, G for green, and B for blue, and each element is represented by 8 bits). The number of multiple colors in the decorative pattern may be configured to be greater than the number of types of light-emitting colors in the rainbow light-emitting pattern of a specific light-emitting means (for example, decorative lamp 111). A rainbow light emission pattern is a light emission pattern in which, in a specific light-emitting means (for example, a decorative lamp 111), seven types of light emission are alternately switched between the R element (red light emission), the G element (green light emission), the B element (blue light emission), the R and G elements (yellow light emission), the R and B elements (magenta light emission), the G and B elements (cyan light emission), and the R, G, and B elements (white light emission), making it appear as if the light is emitting rainbow colors. Furthermore, if multiple RGB elements (multiple full-color LEDs) are provided as decorative LEDs, the starting point of each rainbow light emission mode can be made different (for example). The system incorporates multiple RGB elements A through G. RGB element A uses red emission as the starting point for the rainbow's light pattern, RGB element B uses green emission, RGB element C uses blue emission, RGB element D uses magenta emission, RGB element E uses cyan emission, RGB element F uses yellow emission, and RGB element G uses white emission. By varying the light emission combinations (number of emission points) of the light-emitting elements in the RGB elements at the same time, a more rainbow-like appearance is achieved (achieving a gradient). Increasing the number of colors in the decorative pattern enhances the visual appeal. Furthermore, reducing the number of colors in the sound or light intensity image improves the visibility of the sound or light intensity image when superimposed on the decorative pattern.

(31) There is a first state (e.g., non-power saving mode) in which the brightness of a specific light-emitting means (e.g., decorative lamp 111) is not reduced, and a second state (e.g., power saving mode) in which the brightness of a specific light-emitting means is reduced compared to the first state. The player can transition from the second state to the first state by an action operation other than the light intensity change operation. The brightness of the performance display device (e.g., performance display unit 159) that displays information about the performance of the gaming machine, or the brightness of the game ball count display device (e.g., game ball count display W10) that displays information about the number of game balls, is not reduced in the second state and does not change even when transitioning from the second state to the first state. Even if a second state is provided in which the brightness of a specific light-emitting means that emits light in response to an effect is reduced, by not reducing the brightness of the performance display device or the game ball count display device in the second state, a decrease in the visibility of important information related to the game can be prevented. To explain the power-saving mode, after a certain period of time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed since entering the game standby state, the game machine is configured to switch to a power-saving mode that reduces power consumption compared to the non-power-saving mode. When this power-saving mode is activated, specific light-emitting means (for example, decorative lamps 111) are dimmed (or their brightness is suppressed even if they emit the same color light) or turned off, and the brightness of the LCD screen (backlight) is reduced, thereby achieving a power-saving state with reduced power consumption. While the power-saving mode is active, a power-saving display including the words "Power Saving" is shown. This power-saving display is a unique additional display (supplementary display) that is shown during game standby (including during the standby demo screen display). The text color of this power-saving display is blue or green, which evokes the image of power saving. This power-saving mode ends when the game standby state ends (when the conditions for starting a variation are met) or when a performance button is operated.

(32) If a game ball can be launched in response to a game ball launch operation by a player, and the power is restored after a power outage occurs during the game ball launch operation by the player, and the player has continued the game ball launch operation from before the power outage to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched in a specific continuous operation state in which the game ball launch operation was continued after the power restoration (a launch based on the operation will be made). Here, the continuation of the game ball launch operation may mean maintaining the state in which the launch handle 107 is touched and rotated, or it may mean keeping the rotation angle of the launch handle 107 at a predetermined angle in which the game ball can be launched (and also keeping it touched). For example, it may mean that the launch handle 107 was touched and rotated before the power outage, the power outage occurred while the launch handle 107 was being touched and rotated, the power was restored while the launch handle 107 was being touched and rotated, and the launch handle 107 was being touched and rotated even after the power restoration. Even if a power outage occurs, continuing the game ball launching operation will allow game ball launching to resume after power is restored, thus preventing lost opportunities due to the game balls not being launched after power restoration.

(33) If a power outage occurs during a player's ball launch operation and then power is restored, and the player has continued launching balls from before the power outage to after the power restoration, the ball will be launched at a specific operation continuation state after the power restoration. However, the display on the display device will return to normal before the launch of the ball at that specific operation continuation state (the launch based on that operation). In other words, the timing of the launch of the ball at that specific operation continuation state (the launch based on that operation), i.e., the timing of the first ball launch after power restoration, will be preceded by the timing of the display on the display device returning to normal. By prioritizing the return of the display on the display device, which is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that power is being restored.

(34) If a power outage occurs while the suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed after a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored. However, even if the player continues to launch game balls from before the power outage while the suppression state was in progress until after the power was restored, in a specific operation continuation situation where the game ball launch operation is continued after the power was restored, the game balls will not be launched after the specific period has elapsed since the power was restored. Even if the game ball launch operation is continued from before the power outage, if the suppression state is in progress, the game balls will not be launched after the power was restored, thus ensuring that the suppression function is reliably activated.

(35) A predetermined performance (for example, a welcome performance in which the words "Welcome" or "Welcome" are displayed or voiced) can be executed when a player launches a game ball while the game is in standby mode. If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, a game ball will be launched in a specific operation continuation state after the power restoration (a launch based on that operation will occur), but the predetermined performance (for example, a welcome performance) will not be executed in that specific operation continuation state after the power restoration (the predetermined performance based on that operation will not be executed). In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending balls before and after the power restoration, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power restoration (more precisely, that the game is in standby mode). This prevents players from feeling uneasy by having a predetermined animation (e.g., a welcome animation) executed again while they are continuing to launch the game balls. The "welcome animation" is also called a "touch animation," and is an animation that is executed, for example, when the player launches a ball (including touching it) while the game is in standby mode (especially during the execution of a predetermined standby animation). (If the player launches a ball while the predetermined standby animation is running, it will be accompanied by the termination (clearance) of that predetermined standby animation.) The player launching operation that triggers the "welcome animation" may be simply touching the launch handle 107, or it may include both touching and rotating the handle.

(36) A predetermined performance (e.g., a welcome performance) can be executed when a player launches a game ball while the game is in standby mode. If the player continues launching game balls after a predetermined period (e.g., 240 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored following a power outage, the predetermined performance will be executed once in a specific operation continuation situation where the game ball launch operation is continued after the predetermined period has elapsed (the first predetermined performance based on the operation will be executed), but not twice (the second predetermined performance based on the operation will not be executed). In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending balls before and after the power outage, and that no new pending balls related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power outage (more precisely, that the game is in standby mode). Here, the predetermined period may be the same as the predetermined period from the restoration of power until the execution of the predetermined standby performance, which is the same performance as before the power outage, when the power is restored after a power outage occurs under predetermined conditions in which the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby performance is being executed. If the game ball launch operation is resumed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored (i.e., the game ball launch operation that was being continued is terminated before the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, and the game ball launch operation is resumed again after the predetermined period has elapsed), a predetermined performance can be executed as a trigger for the game ball launch operation (the predetermined performance based on the renewed operation is executed). However, if the player continues the game ball launch operation before the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored after the power outage (for example, at the timing of 5 seconds after the power was restored), the predetermined performance does not have to be executed in the specific operation continuation situation where the game ball launch operation was continued before the predetermined period had elapsed (the predetermined performance based on that operation does not have to be executed). Furthermore, even if a player continues to launch game balls before a specific period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since power restoration following a power outage (e.g., 0.2 seconds after power restoration), the predetermined animation does not necessarily have to be executed in the specific operation continuation situation where the game ball launch operation was continued before the expiration of the specified period (the predetermined animation based on that operation does not necessarily have to be executed).

(37) If a game ball is launched by a game ball launching operation, and then a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball on the launch rail is ejected from the launch rail, and the power is restored (for example, accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process) (for example, if the power is restored immediately within 0.1 seconds after a power outage accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process), then even if the game ball enters the start opening (for example, the first start opening related to the first special symbol), the entry will not be detected. For example, the time required for a game ball launched from the launch rail to flow smoothly down the game board or game area and enter the start opening (the standard time/average time when a game ball launched from the launch rail flows smoothly down the left side of the game area without rolling on the stage 65, without getting stuck along the way, and enters the first start opening via guide pins, which are multiple pins arranged to guide the game ball to the vicinity of the first start opening) is shorter than the time required from power restoration to the restoration of the main control means (for example, restoration of ball entry detection into the start opening, that is, restoration to a state in which the starting conditions by ball entry into the first start opening can be satisfied) (that is, the time from power restoration until the entry of a game ball into the first start opening can be detected). Therefore, the timing of the start-up slot ball entry detection will be later than the timing of the ball entering the slot after a game ball launched before power restoration. As a result, ball entry detection will not occur at that time (the ball enters, but the sensor does not detect it, thus failing to meet the activation or prize-winning conditions). This prevents ball entry detection by game balls passing through the game board or game area in situations where abnormality detection is impossible due to a power outage, thus preventing ball entry detection by game balls that may be fraudulent.

(38) When a game ball is launched by a game ball launching operation, and a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball on the launch rail is ejected from the launch rail, and then the power is restored (for example, accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process) (for example, when the power is restored immediately within 0.1 seconds after a power outage accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process), even if the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the first starting opening related to the first special symbol), the number of game value balls corresponding to that entry (for example, the number of safe balls, the number of prize balls) will not be used in calculating the number displayed on the performance display device, and the number of game value balls corresponding to that entry will not be a trigger for satisfying the conditions for the suppression function to be activated. In other words, if a game ball is launched during the game ball launch operation, and then a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball, which is currently on the launch rail, leaves the launch rail, and then power is restored (for example, with initialization or RAM clear processing), even if the game ball enters the starting gate (for example, the first starting gate related to the first special symbol), the total number of prize balls used to calculate the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls in the performance display device will not be updated (calculated) as a result of that ball entering the gate. This prevents the performance display count from changing or the suppression function from being activated due to a game ball entering the starting gate while passing through the game board or game area in a situation where abnormality detection is not possible due to a power outage, thus preventing the influence of game balls that may be potentially fraudulent.

(39) When a game ball is launched by a game ball launching operation, and then a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball on the launch rail is ejected from the launch rail, and the power is restored (for example, accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process) (for example, when the power is restored immediately within 0.1 seconds after a power outage accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process), the game ball will not be detected even if it enters an operating port (for example, an operating port related to a normal symbol, preferably where one prize ball is awarded for a ball entering the operating port). For example, the time required for a game ball launched from the launch rail to flow smoothly down the game board or game area and enter the activation opening (the standard/average time when a game ball launched from the launch rail flows smoothly down the left or right side of the game area without rolling on the stage 65, without getting stuck along the way, and enters the activation opening) is shorter than the time required from power restoration to the restoration of the main control means (for example, restoration of ball entry detection at the activation opening, that is, restoration to a state where the conditions for starting normal symbol changes due to ball entry into the activation opening can be satisfied). Therefore, the timing of the restoration of ball entry detection at the activation opening is later than the timing of a game ball launched before power restoration entering the activation opening, and ball entry detection at the activation opening is not performed at that timing (the ball enters, but the sensor does not detect it, so it does not meet the conditions for starting or awarding prize balls). In situations where an anomaly cannot be detected due to a power outage, it is possible to prevent the detection of game balls entering the activation opening by game balls passing through the game board or game area, and to prevent the detection of game balls entering the activation opening by game balls that cannot be ruled out as potentially fraudulent.

(40) When a game ball is launched by a game ball launching operation, and a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball on the launch rail is ejected from the launch rail, and then the power is restored (for example, accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process) (for example, when the power is restored immediately within 0.1 seconds after a power outage accompanied by an initialization process or RAM clear process), even if the game ball enters the operating port (for example, the operating port related to a normal symbol), the number of game values (for example, the number of prize balls) corresponding to the ball entering the port will not be used in calculating the number displayed on the performance display device, and the number of game values corresponding to the ball entering the port will not be a trigger for satisfying the conditions for the suppression function to be activated. In other words, if a game ball is launched during the game ball launching operation, and then a power outage occurs at the moment the game ball, which is currently on the launch rail, leaves the launch rail, and then power is restored (for example, with an initialization process or RAM clear process), even if the game ball enters an activation opening (for example, an activation opening related to a normal symbol), the total number of prize balls, which is used to calculate the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls in the performance display device, will not be updated (calculated) as a result of that ball entering the opening. This prevents the performance display count from changing or the conditions for the suppression function from being met due to a game ball entering an activation opening while passing through the game board or game area, in a situation where abnormality cannot be detected due to a power outage. This prevents the influence of game balls that may be potentially fraudulent.

(41) A waiting explanation performance can be executed while the game is in standby mode. The waiting explanation performance is part of a predetermined waiting performance (waiting demo performance), and is an performance that introduces the game machine or indicates the age at which the game can be played. A variation explanation performance can be executed during normal gameplay (for example, while the variation of special symbols is displayed). A variation explanation performance is a mission performance that explains the mission to be completed, such as "Defeat the enemy!" or "Aim for the special symbols," and may be executed as part of a development performance (for example, at the beginning of a development performance, it may be explained that "Defeat the enemy!" is the desired outcome of the development performance). A special game explanation performance can be executed during special gameplay (for example, during the start demo, during round gameplay, or during the end demo). A special game explanation performance is an performance that explains the firing operation, such as "Aim for the attacker!" or "Aim for the V!", during the start demo, or explains the instruction to select a performance mode after special gameplay (to which the high base state is transitioned), such as "Please select a mode," during round gameplay or the end demo. Whether the game is in standby mode, during normal gameplay (for example, while special symbols are changing), or during special gameplay, a predetermined explanatory animation can be executed under predetermined conditions. The predetermined explanatory animation can be executed, for example, when an error occurs in the game machine, and is an error explanatory animation that displays an explanation about the error that occurred ("Please remove the balls," "Magnetic field detected," etc.). The predetermined explanatory animation can be executed simultaneously with the standby explanatory animation, simultaneously with the changing symbol explanatory animation, and simultaneously with the special game explanatory animation. Whether the game is in standby mode, during normal gameplay (for example, while special symbols are changing), or during special gameplay, a specific explanatory animation can be executed under specific conditions. The specific explanatory animation is, for example, a pre-notification animation related to the suppression function, which displays an explanation such as "Approximately 5,000 balls remaining until activation" or "5,000 more balls until complete activation" when the MY counter's count value reaches a specific value (for example, 90,000). Certain explanatory sequences can be executed simultaneously with standby explanatory sequences, variable explanatory sequences, special game explanatory sequences, and predetermined explanatory sequences. Special explanatory sequences can be executed under special circumstances. A special explanatory sequence is, for example, a suppression state sequence related to the suppression function, which is executed when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). As special explanatory sequences, there are two types of sequences: one that can be executed during special gameplay when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and which explains that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated, such as "The suppression function will be activated after the big win ends" or "The complete function will be activated after the big win ends"; and another that can be executed while the suppression function is activated, such as when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) during special gameplay and the special game ends, or when the MY counter's count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) while waiting for the game to start or during a spin, and which explains that the suppression function has already been activated, such as "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, the suppression function has been activated, today's gameplay is over, please be careful not to forget to take your card" or "The complete function has been activated". The scheduled activation explanation animation is not executed during game standby or normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbols), but is executable during special gameplay. It cannot be executed simultaneously with the standby explanation animation, the symbol variation explanation animation, the special gameplay explanation animation, a predetermined explanation animation, or a specific explanation animation. The activated explanation animation is not executed during game standby, normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbols), or special gameplay. It cannot be executed simultaneously with the standby explanation animation, the symbol variation explanation animation, the special gameplay explanation animation, a predetermined explanation animation, or a specific explanation animation.

(42) When a waiting explanation animation is performed while the game is in standby mode, no audio corresponding to the waiting explanation animation is output from the speaker. However, when a variation explanation animation is performed during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variations), audio corresponding to the variation explanation animation is output from the speaker. When a special game explanation animation is performed during special gameplay, audio corresponding to the special game explanation animation is output from the speaker. The display area for the waiting explanation animation may be larger than the display area for the variation explanation animation or the special game explanation animation. By making the waiting explanation animation silent, the player can be informed through sound that the game is not progressing. On the other hand, by making the variation explanation animation and the special game explanation animation audible, the game can be provided with audio corresponding to the game's progress, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the animation.

(43) If a ball enters the starting slot while the standby explanation sequence is running, the standby explanation sequence will terminate as a result of the ball entry. However, if a ball enters the starting slot while the variation explanation sequence is running, the variation explanation sequence will not terminate as a result of the ball entry. Similarly, if a ball enters the starting slot while the special game explanation sequence is running, the special game explanation sequence will not terminate as a result of the ball entry. If a ball enters the starting slot while the standby explanation sequence is running, the standby explanation sequence can be terminated to initiate an explanation sequence corresponding to the progress of the game triggered by the ball entry into the starting slot. On the other hand, during the execution of the variation explanation sequence or special game explanation sequence while the game is in progress, even if a ball enters the starting slot, the explanation sequence can be continued to provide an explanation sequence corresponding to the progress of the game.

(44) If a ball enters the start gate while a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanatory animation) is being performed, the predetermined explanatory animation does not terminate as a result of the ball entering the gate. Similarly, if a ball enters the start gate while a specific explanatory animation (e.g., a suppression function pre-notification animation) is being performed, the specific explanatory animation does not terminate as a result of the ball entering the gate. Similarly, if a ball enters the start gate while a special explanatory animation (e.g., a suppression state animation) is being performed, the special explanatory animation does not terminate as a result of the ball entering the gate. Even if a ball enters the start gate, by continuing the execution of these explanatory animations, important information for the game can be continuously explained. Note that specific explanatory animations may be configured to terminate as a result of a ball entering the start gate.

(45) When predetermined conditions are met during the execution of the standby explanation sequence, the standby explanation sequence can be terminated, and the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variations) can be changed. For example, the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence can be changed when a player performs a sequence change operation (for example, changing the sequence settings using the custom function). This sequence change operation may be any of the various sequence setting changes mentioned above. If a player performs a sequence change operation during the execution of the standby explanation sequence, the standby explanation sequence will terminate as a result of this sequence change operation, and a screen such as the custom guidance screen mentioned above will be displayed, and the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence will be changed. By making it possible to change the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence, sequences can be provided according to the player's preferences. Furthermore, by terminating the standby explanation sequence as a result of changing the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence, sequences can be started according to the progress of the game. In addition to pre-announcement and special pre-announcement animations upon ball entry, the execution probability of certain pre-announcement animations (for example, the alien appearance animation, which is a very high-probability animation that guarantees a jackpot when it occurs) can also be changed by modifying the animation settings (animation change operation) in the custom function (custom guidance screen). (For example, the execution probability during a jackpot spin can be set to 1%, 50%, or 90%).

(46) When a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the standby explanation sequence, the standby explanation sequence may be terminated, and the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variations) (for example, a notification sequence, a pre-announcement sequence, or a special pre-announcement sequence upon ball entry) may be changed. However, the execution probability of the standby explanation sequence will not be changed as a result of the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, nor will the execution probability of the special game explanation sequence be changed as a result of the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. When a player performs an operation to change the sequence (for example, an operation to change the sequence settings using the custom function), the execution probability of predetermined sequences that can be executed simultaneously with the variation explanation sequence may be changed. However, the execution probability of the standby explanation sequence during gameplay standby cannot be changed (it will not be changed as a result of the sequence change operation), and the execution probability of the special game explanation sequence during special gameplay cannot be changed (it will not be changed as a result of the sequence change operation). Note that the sequence change operation may be any of the player operations related to the various sequence setting changes mentioned above. By making the execution probability of the waiting explanation animation unchangeable, it is possible to maintain a state where the waiting explanation animation, which explains that the game is not progressing, is executed appropriately. Furthermore, by making the execution probability of the special game explanation animation unchangeable, it is possible to maintain a state where the special game explanation animation, which explains information that should be conveyed to the player during special gameplay, is executed appropriately.

(47) If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby explanation sequence is being executed, and then power is restored, the predetermined standby explanation sequence will be executed again during the game standby mode after the power is restored (for example, the predetermined standby sequence starts 240 seconds after power is restored, and then runs as part of the predetermined standby sequence/scene after another 10 seconds). In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after power restoration, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols arise after power restoration. By executing the standby explanation sequence again even after power restoration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is in standby mode and not progressing.

(48) If a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (for example, while a special symbol is being displayed) and while a predetermined variation explanation animation is being performed, and then power is restored, and the display of the special symbol's variation resumes after the power is restored, the predetermined variation explanation animation will not be performed during the display of the special symbol's variation that resumes after the power is restored. However, a specific variation explanation animation different from the predetermined one (for example, "Currently restoring power," or "Currently changing, please wait") can be performed. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of the special symbol before and after power restoration, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of the special symbol arise after power restoration. It is also acceptable that the predetermined variation explanation animation does not have to be performed even after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed after power restoration. By not performing the predetermined variation explanation animation during the display of the variation of the special symbol that resumes after power restoration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the animation caused by the predetermined variation explanation animation not being properly performed before the special symbol stops and is displayed.

(49) If a power outage occurs while a special game is in progress and a predetermined special game explanation sequence is being executed, and then the power is restored, and the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the predetermined special game explanation sequence will not be executed during the special game that resumes after the power is restored, but a specific special game explanation sequence different from the predetermined special game explanation sequence (for example, "Currently being restored," or "Currently a jackpot, please wait a moment") can be executed. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power is restored, and the predetermined special game explanation sequence does not need to be executed even after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed after the power outage is restored. By not executing the same predetermined special game explanation sequence as before the power outage during the special game that resumes after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies with the execution process of the special game after it has resumed. Furthermore, by enabling the execution of specific special game explanation sequences that differ from those before the power outage during the special game resumed after power restoration, it is possible to warn players against the disadvantage of not being able to obtain the benefits of the special game due to not firing game balls during the special game after power restoration.

(50) If a power outage occurs while a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanatory animation) is being performed, and then the power is restored, if the predetermined conditions (e.g., error clearing) are not met after the power is restored, the same predetermined explanatory animation as before the power outage will be performed after the power is restored. Even if a power outage occurs, if the predetermined conditions are not met, the predetermined explanatory animation explaining that the predetermined conditions are not met can be reliably performed after the power is restored. For example, if the predetermined explanatory animation displays "Please remove the ball" and the power is cut off and then restored, if the error cause (full tank detection) is not resolved after the power is restored, "Please remove the ball" will be displayed (the timing of its re-display will be after the initial display). In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power is restored, and the predetermined explanatory animation may also be performed after a predetermined period (e.g., 240 seconds) has elapsed after the power is restored. Furthermore, if the error cause (full tank detection) is resolved after the power is restored, the message "Please remove the bulb" will not be displayed.
This may be the same whether the game is waiting to start, during normal gameplay (for example, when special symbols are being displayed), or during special gameplay.
For example, if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanation animation) is being played, and then the power is restored, if a predetermined condition (e.g., error clearing) is not met after the power is restored, the same predetermined explanatory animation as before the power outage will be played while the game is in standby mode after the power is restored.
For example, if a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (e.g., while special symbols are changing) and a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanation animation) is being performed, and then the power is restored, if a predetermined condition (e.g., error clearing) is not met after the power is restored, the same predetermined explanatory animation as before the power outage will be performed during normal gameplay after the power is restored (e.g., while special symbols are changing).
For example, if a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanation animation) is being performed, and then the power is restored, if a predetermined condition (e.g., error clearing) is not met after the power is restored, the same predetermined explanatory animation as before the power outage will be performed during the special game after the power is restored.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while a predetermined explanatory animation (e.g., an error explanatory animation) is being performed, and then power is restored after initialization or RAM clearing, if the predetermined conditions (e.g., error clearing) are not met after the power is restored, the same predetermined explanatory animation as before the power outage will be executed after the power is restored. This ensures that, if the predetermined conditions are not met, the predetermined explanatory animation explaining that the predetermined conditions are not met will be reliably executed after power is restored, even if power is restored after initialization or RAM clearing.

(51) If a power outage occurs while a specific explanatory animation (for example, a pre-notification animation for a suppression function) is being performed, and then the power is restored, the same specific explanatory animation that was performed before the power outage will not be performed again after the power is restored. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the MY counter has reached a specific value even though the count value has exceeded that value. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power is restored, and the specific explanatory animation does not need to be performed even after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed after the power outage is restored.
This may be the same whether the game is waiting to start, during normal gameplay (for example, when special symbols are being displayed), or during special gameplay.
For example, if a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a specific explanatory animation (e.g., a pre-notification animation for a suppression function) is being played, and then the power is restored, the same specific explanatory animation that was played before the power outage will not be played again during the game standby mode after the power is restored.
For example, if a power outage occurs during normal gameplay (e.g., while special symbols are being displayed) and a specific explanatory animation (e.g., a pre-notification animation for a suppression function) is being performed, and then the power is restored, the same specific explanatory animation that was performed before the power outage will not be performed again during normal gameplay after the power is restored (e.g., while special symbols are being displayed).
For example, if a power outage occurs during a special game and while a specific explanatory animation (such as a pre-notification animation for a suppression function) is being performed, and then the power is restored, the same specific explanatory animation that was performed before the power outage will not be performed again during the special game after the power is restored.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while a specific explanatory animation (for example, a pre-notification animation for a suppression function) is being performed, and then power is restored after an initialization or RAM clear process, the same specific explanatory animation will not be performed again after the power is restored. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that a specific value has been reached, even though the MY counter's count value has been reset.

(52) If a power outage occurs while a special explanatory performance (for example, a performance showing the suppression state of the suppression function) is being performed, and then the power is restored, the same special explanatory performance as before the power outage will be performed again after the power is restored. This ensures that even if a power outage occurs, the player is reliably shown that the MY counter's count value has reached a predetermined value and that no game is being played. In this case, it is preferable that there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols before and after the power is restored, and that no new pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols occur after the power is restored. The special explanatory performance may also be performed after a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds) has elapsed after the power is restored.
For example, if a power outage occurs and power is restored while a special game is in progress and a special explanatory animation (e.g., an animation explaining the planned activation of a suppression function) is being performed, the same special explanatory animation (e.g., an animation explaining the planned activation of a suppression function) will be performed again during the special game after the power is restored. Also, if a power outage occurs and power is restored while a special explanatory animation (e.g., an animation explaining that the suppression function has been activated) is being performed, the same special explanatory animation (e.g., an animation explaining that the suppression function has been activated) will be performed again during the special game after the power is restored. Note that the execution method of the planned activation explanation animation may differ before and after power restoration (including differences in the display method of the planned activation explanation animation itself, as well as differences in the content of other animations that are performed simultaneously with/overlapping with the planned activation explanation animation), or it may not be performed after power restoration. Furthermore, it is preferable that the execution method of the activated explanation animation be the same before and after power restoration (including not only that the display method of the activated explanation animation itself is the same, but also that the content of other animations that are executed simultaneously with/overlapping with the scheduled activation explanation animation is the same), and that it be executed even after power restoration.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while a special explanatory animation (for example, an animation showing the suppression state of the suppression function) is being performed, and then power is restored after an initialization or RAM clear process, the same special explanatory animation (neither the scheduled activation explanation animation nor the activated explanation animation) that was performed before the power outage will be executed again after the power is restored. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the game is in a suppression state and not being played, even though the MY counter's count value has been reset.

(53) When a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special game starts, when a winning variation stops, etc.), it is possible to execute a special game explanation sequence (for example, an explanation sequence such as "Aim for the attacker!" or "Aim for the V!"), and it is possible to execute a predetermined notification sequence different from the special game explanation sequence (for example, a display of the words "shoot to the right," which may be the aforementioned "shoot to the right" notification image), and the start timing of the execution of the predetermined notification sequence is earlier than the start timing of the execution of the special game explanation sequence. If a power outage occurs during a special game and while a predetermined notification sequence (for example, a display of the words "shoot to the right") is being executed, and then the power is restored, it is possible to execute the same predetermined notification sequence as before the power outage during the special game after the power is restored. By executing the predetermined notification sequence first, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the firing operation explained in the special game explanation sequence in advance, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages due to being unable to perform the content explained in the special game explanation sequence. Furthermore, a predetermined notification effect (which may also be called a predetermined notification display) may be performed by the first lamp and/or the second lamp of the status indicator lamp 802 switching from an off state to an on state (becoming on). In addition, a right-hand shooting lamp (a single LED that lights up red when lit, and does not have any other lighting colors) is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position adjacent to the right side of the effect display device) and its on/off state is controlled by sub-control (control by a sub-board), and the switching of this right-hand shooting lamp from an off state to an on state (becoming on) may also be considered a predetermined notification effect (predetermined notification display). In such a configuration, the timing at which the first lamp and/or the second lamp illuminate (start timing), triggered by the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, and the timing at which the right-hand shooting lamp illuminates (start timing), are both earlier than the start timing of the special game explanation performance. It is preferable that the timing at which the first lamp and/or the second lamp illuminates (start timing) is earlier than the timing at which the right-hand shooting lamp illuminates (start timing).

(54) When a variation explanation animation is performed during normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbols), the special game explanation animation is more likely to be performed than when the variation explanation animation is not performed. By increasing the probability of the special game explanation animation being performed when the variation explanation animation is performed, the expectation of a big win due to the performance of the variation explanation animation can be increased, and the enjoyment of the animation can be enhanced.

(55) Transformation effects (e.g., screen transformation effects) that transform and display images on the display device into special forms are possible. Waiting explanation effects that can be executed during game standby may be excluded from transformation effects. Variation explanation effects that can be executed during normal gameplay (e.g., during the display of special symbol variations) may be included in transformation effects. Special game explanation effects that can be executed during special gameplay may be excluded from transformation effects. By excluding waiting explanation effects and special game explanation effects from transformation effects, a decrease in the visibility of the effects can be prevented, and important information for the game can be clearly presented to the player. On the other hand, by including variation explanation effects in transformation effects, the variety of effects during normal gameplay can be increased, and unexpected effects can be provided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the effects.

(56) Transformation effects (e.g., screen transformation effects) are possible, which transform and display images that can be shown on the display device into special forms. Predetermined explanatory effects (e.g., error explanatory effects) may be excluded from transformation effects. Specific explanatory effects (e.g., pre-notification effects for suppression functions) may be excluded from transformation effects. Special explanatory effects (e.g., suppression status effects for suppression functions) may be excluded from transformation effects. Furthermore, while a predetermined variation explanatory effect is being executed in a transformed state, the system is configured to allow the execution of a predetermined explanatory effect or a specific explanatory effect without transformation. By excluding these effects from transformation effects, a decrease in the visibility of the effects can be prevented, and important information for the game can be clearly presented to the player.

(57) The probability that a waiting explanation sequence is executed during the game waiting period, and that the special symbol variation display begins and the variation explanation sequence is executed after the waiting explanation sequence is completed, is the same as the probability that the special symbol variation display begins and the variation explanation sequence is executed after the waiting explanation sequence is interrupted without completion. Here, completion of the waiting explanation sequence may mean that the demo movie executed as the waiting explanation sequence (a movie display that is part of the predetermined waiting demo sequence) is displayed from beginning to end, and then the demo movie disappears (after which the display of "the stage background is displayed and the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed in a confirmed stop" is shown). By making the probability of executing the variation explanation sequence the same regardless of whether the waiting explanation sequence is completed or not, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage by starting the game at any timing before the completion of the waiting explanation sequence.

(58) During game standby, a standby explanation animation is performed. If a predetermined condition is met during the execution of this standby explanation animation (for example, by changing the animation settings using the custom function), the standby explanation animation can be terminated. Furthermore, if this predetermined condition is met, the probability of the animation being performed during normal gameplay after the standby explanation animation ends (for example, during the display of special symbols) can be changed. For example, the probability that a standby explanation animation is performed during game standby, and that the predetermined condition is met during the execution of this standby explanation animation before the display of special symbols begins and the animation is performed is different from the probability that the display of special symbols begins and the animation is performed without the predetermined condition being met during the execution of this standby explanation animation. By making it possible to change the probability of the animation being performed, animations tailored to the player's preferences can be provided.

(59) During normal gameplay (for example, during the display of special symbol variations), the probability of executing a predetermined effect (e.g., a pre-announcement effect, a pre-read effect, or a special pre-read effect upon ball entry) can be changed simultaneously with the explanation effect. For example, during the execution of a predetermined effect while special symbol variations are being displayed, the probability of executing the predetermined effect can be changed by the player's effect setting operation. By allowing the player to change the probability of executing a predetermined effect even during its execution, the convenience of the player can be improved. In addition to pre-read effects and special pre-read effects upon ball entry, the probability of executing certain pre-announcement effects (e.g., the alien appearance effect, which is a very high-expectation effect that guarantees a jackpot when it occurs) can also be changed by changing the effect settings (effect change operation) in the custom function (custom guidance screen) (for example, the probability of execution during a jackpot variation can be set to 1%, 50%, or 90%).

(60) If the suppression function activation condition (for example, the MY counter's count value reaches a specified value (e.g., 95,000)) is met while the game is in standby mode and during the standby explanation animation, the standby explanation animation will terminate upon this condition being met. If the suppression function activation condition is met during normal gameplay (for example, while a special symbol variation is being displayed) and during the variation explanation animation, the variation explanation animation will terminate upon this condition being met. However, if the suppression function activation condition is met during special gameplay and during the special game explanation animation, the special game explanation animation will continue to run without terminating upon this condition being met. By terminating the animation when the suppression function activation condition is met during game standby mode or normal gameplay, the player can be quickly informed that the game is unavailable. On the other hand, by continuing the animation when the suppression function activation condition is met during special gameplay, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the interruption of the game.

(61) If the pre-notification condition for the suppression function (for example, the MY counter's count value reaches a specific value (e.g., 90,000)) is met while the game is in standby mode and the standby explanation animation is being performed, the standby explanation animation can be continued without termination, triggered by the meeting of the condition. If the pre-notification condition for the suppression function is met during normal gameplay (for example, while a special symbol variation is being displayed) and the variation explanation animation is being performed, the variation explanation animation can be continued without termination, triggered by the meeting of the condition. If the pre-notification condition for the suppression function is met during special gameplay and the special game explanation animation is being performed, the special game explanation animation can be continued without termination, triggered by the meeting of the condition. In any of the modes—game standby, normal gameplay, or special gameplay—by allowing the currently running animation to continue without termination upon the meeting of the pre-notification condition for the suppression function, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game can be continued.

(62) In a situation where the game is in standby mode and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, there are two states: one in which a predetermined sound (e.g., the normal background music, stage BGM) is output from the speaker (this may be called the output state), and another in which the predetermined sound (e.g., the normal background music, stage BGM) is not output from the speaker (this may be called the non-output state). For example, if the display of the variation of special symbols ends and the game enters standby mode when there are no pending values, outputting the predetermined sound from the speaker allows the predetermined sound to continue outputting when the next variation of the special symbols begins, suggesting to the player that the game can be continued. On the other hand, if a predetermined period (e.g., 240 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the stop of the special symbols, not outputting the predetermined sound from the speaker suggests to the player that a new game can be started. Note that the state changes from output state to non-output state after 20 seconds have elapsed since the display of the stop of the special symbols when there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols.

(63) In the state of waiting for a game to start and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, and when a predetermined sound (for example, the stage BGM which is the normal background music) is not output from the speaker, if the conditions for starting the variation of special symbols (for example, a ball entering the first start opening) are met, the start timing of the first cycle variation of the cycle variation which is performed multiple times on the information display device (for example, the special symbol display unit) will be earlier than the start timing when the predetermined sound is output from the speaker. The cyclical variations executed by the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit) include a normal variation pattern (e.g., a pattern where no reach or development effects are performed and the result is a loss, with a variation time of 5 seconds) and a special variation pattern that has more executions of cyclical variations than the normal variation pattern (e.g., a pattern where a super reach or development effect is performed and the result is a win, with a variation time of 120 seconds). In either the case of a normal variation pattern or a special variation pattern, the start timing of the first cyclical variation executed by the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit) when the conditions for starting the variation of the special symbols are met may be earlier than the start timing of the output of a predetermined sound from the speaker. By starting the output of a predetermined sound, such as the normal background music (stage BGM), after the start of the first cyclical variation, the player can be informed that the game has started triggered by the start of the variation of the special symbols.

(64) In a situation where the game is in standby mode and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, and where no predetermined sound (e.g., the normal background music, stage BGM) is being output from the speaker, if the condition for starting the variation of special symbols (e.g., ball entering the first start slot) is met, and the variation related to that condition is a normal variation pattern (e.g., a pattern where a reach or development animation is not performed and the result is a miss, with a variation time of 5 seconds), then the predetermined sound that is started to be output from the speaker upon the fulfillment of that condition can continue to be output even at the end of the last cycle of a cyclic variation that is executed multiple times on the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit). By allowing the output of predetermined sound, such as the normal background music, stage BGM, to continue even at the end of the last cycle of variation, the player can be suggested by the continued output of the predetermined sound that the game is continuing even after the end of the last cycle of variation.

(65) In a situation where the game is in standby mode and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, and where no predetermined sound (e.g., the normal background music, stage BGM) is being output from the speaker, if the conditions for starting the variation of special symbols (e.g., ball entering the first starting slot) are met, and the variation related to said conditions is a special variation pattern (e.g., a pattern in which a super reach or development sequence is executed and a win occurs, with a variation time of 120 seconds), then the predetermined sound that is output from the speaker upon the fulfillment of said conditions is not output at the end of the last cycle of the multiple cycles of variation executed on the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit). In the case of a special variation pattern, by not outputting the predetermined sound at the end of the last cycle, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from a normal variation pattern, thereby enhancing the entertainment value of the presentation.

(66) In the state of waiting for a game to start and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, and when no predetermined sound (for example, the stage BGM, which is the normal background music) is output from the speaker, when the conditions for starting the variation of special symbols (for example, balls entering the first start slot) are met, and the variation related to the conditions for starting the variation is a specific variation pattern (for example, a pattern in which a super reach or development performance is executed but it is a miss, and the variation time is 110 seconds), the predetermined sound that is started to be output from the speaker when the conditions for starting the variation are met is not output at the end of the last cycle of the cycle of variation that is executed multiple times on the information display device (for example, the special symbol display unit). In the case of a specific variation pattern, by not outputting the predetermined sound at the end of the last cycle of variation, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal variation pattern, and the enjoyment of the performance can be enhanced.
Furthermore, if the variation related to the variation initiation condition is a specific variation pattern, a predetermined display shown on the display device when the variation initiation condition is met (for example, a normal background display, such as a background image corresponding to Stage A or a background image corresponding to Stage B) may be displayed (for example, redisplayed) at the end of the last cycle of a cycle that is executed multiple times on the information display device (for example, a special symbol display unit). Specifically, in stages such as "Stage A" and "Stage B," when the game progresses to a Super Reach sequence, the background image switches from the background image of the current stage to the background image of the Super Reach sequence (and simultaneously switches to the BGM specifically for the Super Reach sequence). During the Super Reach sequence, the stage BGM is not played. When the Super Reach sequence displays an animation indicating a miss, the background image switches back to the background image of the current stage (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach sequence began) within the spin display where the Super Reach sequence was performed. However, in this situation, until the next spin display begins, that is, at the end of the last spin of a cyclic spin sequence that is performed multiple times, the stage background image is displayed, the stage BGM is not played, and the BGM specifically for the Super Reach sequence is also not played (it is silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the Super Reach sequence BGM is not played). The stage BGM will start from the beginning at the start of the next spin, but the same background image will be displayed before and after the start of that next spin. In the case of a specific fluctuation pattern, the display returns to the normal background at the end of the last cyclical fluctuation, thereby indicating to the player that the game can continue for the next fluctuation.

(67) Before the end of a special symbol variation related to a specific variation pattern (for example, a pattern in which a super reach or development animation is performed but results in a loss), one lottery value related to the variation of the special symbol is reserved. When the variation display related to the specific variation pattern ends and the conditions for starting the variation of the reserved special symbol are met, the speaker can start outputting a predetermined sound (for example, the normal background music, stage BGM) from the beginning, triggered by the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variation. The start timing of the first cyclic variation of the cyclic variation, which is executed multiple times on the information display device (for example, the special symbol display unit) triggered by the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variation of the reserved special symbol, is earlier than the start timing of the predetermined sound output. By starting the output of a predetermined sound, such as the normal background music, stage BGM, after the start of the first cyclic variation, the player can be shown by the start of the predetermined sound output that the game related to the next variation has started, triggered by the start of the first cyclic variation of the special symbol.

(68) During the display of special symbols related to a specific variation pattern (for example, a pattern in which a super reach or development effect is performed but the result is a miss), unlike during the display of special symbols related to a normal variation pattern (for example, a pattern in which a reach or development effect is not performed and the result is a miss) or a special variation pattern (for example, a pattern in which a super reach or development effect is performed but the result is a miss), specific display effects (for example, a blackout effect in which the entire screen turns black, or a background switching effect in which the display switches to a special background different from the normal background) can be executed. For example, during a variation related to a specific variation pattern, specific display effects can be executed, but during a variation related to a normal variation pattern, specific display effects are not executed, and during a variation related to a special variation pattern, specific display effects are not executed. In specific variation patterns, a loss is suggested or announced during the Super Reach animation (for example, by losing a battle or failing a mission). During the Super Reach animation, the normal decorative symbols are displayed as numbers without images, such as "454" or "232," followed by a specific display animation, while the Super Reach animation and normal decorative symbols are hidden. Then, the specific display animation is hidden, the stage background is displayed, and the normal decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of images and numbers. Finally, the normal decorative symbols and simplified decorative symbols are displayed as confirmed stops (the simplified decorative symbols remain displayed throughout the variation from the start to the very end of the variation related to the specific variation pattern). By enabling a specific display animation different from the normal and special variation patterns in specific variation patterns, the entertainment value of the animation can be enhanced.

(69) Specific display effects (e.g., blackout effects or background switching effects) that can be executed during the display of special symbols related to specific variation patterns (e.g., patterns where a super reach or development effect is executed but results in a loss) can be executed after the normal decorative symbols have entered a reach state, followed by the execution of a super reach effect, and then after the normal decorative symbols have temporarily stopped in a loss state. By making it possible to execute the specific display effect after the super reach effect appears to result in a loss, the expectation that a win may occur after the specific display effect occurs can be increased, thereby improving the entertainment value of the effect. Furthermore, even if the normal decorative symbols are displayed (re-displayed) in a loss state rather than a win state after the specific display effect occurs, it can also be made easier to recognize that a scene change has occurred from the super reach effect.

(70) The display mode of the normal decorative symbols before the execution of a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) may differ from the display mode of the normal decorative symbols after the execution of the specific display effect. For example, the normal decorative symbols before the execution of the specific display effect may have a display mode in which a character image is attached to a text image indicating the symbol type, while the normal decorative symbols after the execution of the specific display effect may have a display mode in which only a text image is attached, without a character image. By differentiating the display mode of the normal decorative symbols before and after the execution of the specific display effect, it becomes possible, for example, to display a normal decorative symbol with a display mode that has a relatively high expectation level after the occurrence of the specific display effect, thereby increasing the expectation that a win may occur.

(71) When a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) is executed during the display of a special symbol variation (especially during a variation display related to a specific variation pattern), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (e.g., a win/loss branching effect that can be executed during a super reach effect, which is a development effect, or a button effect that prompts the player to operate effect button 109, etc.) before the execution of the specific display effect. However, after the execution of the specific display effect (e.g., before the special symbol displayed during the execution of the specific display effect stops), the predetermined effect cannot be executed. By making the predetermined effect unexecutable after the execution of the specific display effect, the specific display effect can be executed at a timing closer to the moment when the symbols stop and a win may be confirmed, thereby positioning the specific display effect as an effect with a higher expectation than the predetermined effect.

(72) When a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) is executed during the display of a special symbol variation, a period of valid player action (e.g., operation of the effect button 109) occurs before the execution of the specific display effect (e.g., during the Super Reach effect, which is a development effect). However, no such period of valid player action occurs during the execution of the specific display effect. By preventing the period of valid player action from occurring during the execution of the specific display effect, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific display effect from being interrupted by the player action and to enhance the effect of the specific display effect.

(73) The display device is capable of displaying both normal and simple decorative symbols, and the normal and simple decorative symbols are capable of being displayed while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. When a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) is performed while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the normal decorative symbols become invisible (including hidden) or difficult to see during the execution of the specific display effect, but the simple decorative symbols remain visible or easily visible during the execution of the specific display effect. For example, the display priority of the simple decorative symbols during the execution of the specific display effect may be higher than the display priority of the specific display effect, and the simple decorative symbols may be displayed superimposed on the specific display effect. By making the normal decorative symbols invisible (including hidden) or difficult to see during the execution of the specific display effect, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific display effect from being obstructed by the display of the normal decorative symbols, thereby enhancing the effect of the specific display effect. On the other hand, by making the simplified decorative symbols visible or easily visible even during the execution of specific display effects, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the symbols are changing. For example, it can be shown to the player that the screen is not simply darkening due to a power outage, but rather that a blackout effect is being executed as part of the symbol change effect.

(74) As a variation display of the special symbol, a cyclic variation is performed on the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit), the normal decorative symbols can be varied and displayed while the special symbol is varying, specific display effects (e.g., blackout effect or background switching effect) can be performed while the special symbol is varying, multiple cyclic variations can be performed on the information display device during the first period from the start to the end of the specific display effect, and multiple cyclic variations can also be performed on the information display device during the second period from the end of the specific display effect to the stop display (confirmed stop) of the normal decorative symbols. By enabling multiple cyclic variations in both the first period from the start to the end of the specific display effect and the second period from the end of the specific display effect to the stop of the normal decorative symbols, the entertainment value of the effects during and after the execution of the specific display effect can be enhanced.

(75) In the second period from the end of a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) to the stop display (confirmed stop) of the normal decorative symbols, the timing of the stop display of the normal decorative symbols is after the end of the last cycle of the multiple cycles executed by the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit), and before the expiration of the aforementioned symbol fixing period (which is also the period during which the display of the information display device is fixed until the next cycle of cycles begins). By stopping the normal decorative symbols at the timing after the end of the last cycle of cycles and before the expiration of the symbol fixing period, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the normal decorative symbols can be made consistent.

(76) Whether during the first period from the start to the end of a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect), or during the second period from the end of the specific display effect to the display of the normal decorative symbols, the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed by the player's volume adjustment operation, and a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed. Similarly, whether during the first or second period, the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means that emits light according to the effect can be changed by the player's light intensity adjustment operation, and a light intensity image indicating the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means can be displayed. By enabling volume and light intensity changes in either the first or second period, the convenience of the player can be improved.

(77) In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image showing the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed. Furthermore, in response to a volume change operation while the volume image is displayed, the volume image can be updated from showing the volume level before the change to showing the volume level after the change (for example, the volume display element 906 can switch from the 7th level display of meter 7 to the 8th level display of meter 8). The time required to update the volume image from the volume level before the change to the volume level after the change (for example, the time required to switch from the 7th level display of meter 7 to the 8th level display of meter 8 in response to a volume change operation) is shorter than the execution period of one cycle of a cyclic variation that is performed multiple times on the information display device (e.g., the special symbol display unit) as a display of special symbol variations. By enabling the updating and display of the volume image in a shorter period than the execution period of one cycle of variation, the convenience of the player can be improved.

(78) As a display of the variation of the special symbol, a cyclic variation is performed on an information display device (e.g., a special symbol display unit), and the normal decorative symbol can be displayed while the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, and a specific display effect (e.g., a blackout effect or a background switching effect) can be performed while the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, and there is a first period in which multiple cyclic variations are performed from the start to the end of the specific display effect, and a second period in which multiple cyclic variations are performed from the end of the specific display effect to the stop display of the normal decorative symbol, and if the condition for starting the variation of the special symbol is met in the first period (for example, if the main control means mistakenly determines that the condition for starting the variation is met, that is, if it determines that the reserve of the lottery value related to the variation of the special symbol has been consumed despite the variation being in progress), before the condition is met The cyclic variation currently running on the information display device is forcibly terminated and a new cyclic variation is started (starting from pattern (1) as described above; however, as a variation, the cyclic variation running on the information display device before this condition is met may be continued, that is, even if this condition is met at the time of pattern (5), (5) → (6) → (7) → ... may be continued). When the performance control means receives a variation start command transmitted from the main control means upon this condition being met, the specific display performance is forcibly terminated and the normal decorative symbols begin to display in the same display manner as the second period (for example, a combination of symbols and numbers). However, the start timing of the first cyclic variation of the new cyclic variation is earlier than the start timing of the normal decorative symbols' display after the forced termination of the specific display performance. When a cyclic variation is forcibly terminated and a new cyclic variation is started, the new cyclic variation may be started in such a way that the display order of the multiple display manners of the special symbols constituting one cyclic variation is maintained, or the display order may be reset before the new cyclic variation is started. Even if an irregularity occurs during the first period of the cyclical variation where the variation start conditions are met, displaying the normal decorative symbols in the same manner as in the second period can prevent the presentation process after the forced end of the first period from becoming unnatural. Furthermore, by setting the start timing of the first cyclical variation of a new variation to precede the start timing of the normal decorative symbol variation display, the variation display of the special symbols and the variation display of the normal decorative symbols can be made consistent.

The technology described in the above-mentioned examples may be specified by the following embodiments.

[Aspect 1]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was restored.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 2]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the special symbol is being displayed and then power is restored, the display of the performance display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs while the special symbol is being displayed and a predetermined variation effect is being executed under specific circumstances, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined variation effect, which is the same as the effect before the power outage, will not be executed. However, a specific effect different from the predetermined variation effect will be executed after the power restoration.
Gaming machine.

[Appearance 3]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will be restored before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed after the power restoration.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 4]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
The aforementioned specific period is shorter than the aforementioned predetermined period.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 5]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
The aforementioned specific period is shorter than the aforementioned predetermined period.
Gaming machine.

[Pattern 6]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was restored.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, the display on the information display device will return to normal before the execution of the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage.
Gaming machine.

[Pattern 7]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable effect is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable effect, which is the same as the effect before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after the power is restored, a specific effect different from the predetermined variable effect will be executed.
As a variation display of the special symbol, the information display device performs a cyclic variation multiple times, and after the execution of the multiple cyclic variations, the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
If a power outage occurs and then power is restored under the specific circumstances while the special symbol is being displayed and the predetermined variation effect is being executed, the end of the final cyclic variation will occur before the end of the specific effect.
Gaming machine.

[Patent 8]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even after the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed. However, after the power is restored, a specific animation different from the predetermined variable animation will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
During the execution of the predetermined standby animation, the predetermined variation animation, and the predetermined special game animation, the player can change the volume level by operating the volume control; however, during the execution of the special animation, the specific animation, and the suppression state animation, the player cannot change the volume level by operating the volume control.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 9]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even after the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed. However, after the power is restored, a specific animation different from the predetermined variable animation will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed.
During the execution of the predetermined standby animation, the predetermined variation animation, and the predetermined special game animation, the sound image can be displayed in response to a volume change operation by the player. However, during the execution of the special animation, the specific animation, and the suppression state animation, the sound image cannot be displayed in response to a volume change operation by the player.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 10]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of the predetermined standby animation which is the same animation as before the power outage, the volume level will not be changed in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is being continued.
Gaming machine.

[Personalization 11]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
If a power outage occurs while the suppression state is in progress and the predetermined suppression state effect is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume from a specific timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of the predetermined suppression state effect which is the same effect as before the power outage, the volume level will not be changed in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is being continued.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 12]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to games,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed.
Equipped with a light-emitting mechanism that illuminates in accordance with the performance,
In response to a player's operation to change the light intensity, a light intensity image indicating the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means can be displayed.
The game can execute predetermined effects triggered by the player's manipulation of the game's presentation.
If the player changes the volume while the volume image is displayed, the period until the volume image disappears is extended.
If the player changes the light intensity while the sound image is displayed, the period until the sound image disappears is extended.
If the player performs an action while the sound image is displayed, the period until the sound image disappears will not be extended.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 13]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If a power outage occurs while a player is adjusting the volume, and then the power is restored, even if the player continued adjusting the volume from before the power outage to after the power was restored, the volume level will not be changed in the specified operation continuation status after the power was restored.
If the power is interrupted while a player is launching a game ball, and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched at a specific point in time when the player was continuing to launch game balls after the power restoration.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 14]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched in a specific state of continued operation after the power restoration, but the display on the display device will return to normal before the game ball is launched in that specific state of continued operation.
Gaming machine.

[Phenomenon 15]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched in a specific state of continued operation after the power restoration. However, the display on the display device will be restored before the game ball is launched in that specific state of continued operation.
If a power outage occurs while a player is launching a game ball under the aforementioned suppression state and while the predetermined suppression state effect is being executed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined suppression state effect, which is the same effect as before the power outage, will be executed after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power was restored. However, even if the player has continued launching game balls from before the power outage to after the power was restored, the game ball will not be launched in a specific operation continuation state after the power was restored during which the game ball launching operation is being continued.
Gaming machine.

[Personal 16]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Personal 17]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the special symbol is being displayed and then power is restored, the display of the performance display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable effect is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable effect, which is the same as the effect before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after the power is restored, a specific effect different from the predetermined variable effect will be executed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Pattern 18]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will be restored before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed after the power restoration.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 19]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
The aforementioned specific period is shorter than the aforementioned predetermined period.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 20]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
The aforementioned specific period is shorter than the aforementioned predetermined period.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 21]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and then power is restored, the display of the presentation display device will restore before the display of the information display device.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, the display on the information display device will return to normal before the execution of the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 22]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable effect is being executed, and then the power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable effect, which is the same as the effect before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after the power is restored, a specific effect different from the predetermined variable effect will be executed.
As a variation display of the special symbol, the information display device performs a cyclic variation multiple times, and after the execution of the multiple cyclic variations, the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
If a power outage occurs and then power is restored under the specific circumstances while the special symbol is being displayed and the predetermined variation effect is being executed, the end of the last cycle of variation will occur before the end of the specific effect.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Appearance 23]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even after the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed. However, after the power is restored, a specific animation different from the predetermined variable animation will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
During the execution of the predetermined standby animation, the predetermined variation animation, and the predetermined special game animation, the player can change the volume level by operating the volume control; however, during the execution of the special animation, the specific animation, and the suppression state animation, the player cannot change the volume level by operating the volume control.
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Personal Model 24]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
If a power outage occurs under specific circumstances while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state and a predetermined variable animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even after the predetermined period has elapsed since the power was restored, the predetermined variable animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will not be performed. However, after the power is restored, a specific animation different from the predetermined variable animation will be performed.
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special game and while a predetermined special game performance is being executed, and then power is restored, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined special game performance, which is the same as the performance before the power outage, will not be executed. However, after a specific period has elapsed since the power restoration, a special performance different from the predetermined special game performance will be executed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed.
During the execution of the predetermined standby animation, the predetermined variation animation, and the predetermined special game animation, the sound image can be displayed in response to a volume change operation by the player. However, during the execution of the special animation, the specific animation, and the suppression state animation, the sound image cannot be displayed in response to a volume change operation by the player.
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 25]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and a predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined standby animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
If a power outage occurs while the game is in standby mode and the predetermined standby animation is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume from a predetermined timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of the predetermined standby animation which is the same animation as before the power outage, the volume level will not be changed in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is being continued.
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 26]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
If a power outage occurs while the suppression state is in progress and the predetermined suppression state effect is being performed, and then the power is restored, even if the player continues to change the volume from a specific timing that is after the power is restored and before the execution of the predetermined suppression state effect which is the same effect as before the power outage, the volume level will not be changed in the predetermined operation continuation state in which the volume change operation is being continued.
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Personal Example 27]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
In response to a volume change operation by the player, a volume image indicating the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be displayed.
Equipped with a light-emitting mechanism that illuminates in accordance with the performance,
In response to a player's operation to change the light intensity, a light intensity image indicating the light intensity level of the light emitted by the light-emitting means can be displayed.
The game can execute predetermined effects triggered by the player's manipulation of the game's presentation.
If the player changes the volume while the volume image is displayed, the period until the volume image disappears is extended.
If the player changes the light intensity while the sound image is displayed, the period until the sound image disappears is extended.
If the player performs an action while the sound image is displayed, the period until the sound image disappears will not be extended.
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Pattern 28]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If a power outage occurs while a player is adjusting the volume, and then the power is restored, even if the player continued adjusting the volume from before the power outage to after the power was restored, the volume level will not be changed in the specified operation continuation status after the power was restored.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched at a specific point in time when the player is continuing to launch game balls after the power restoration.
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Pattern 29]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched in a specific state of continued operation after the power restoration. However, the display on the display device will be restored before the game ball is launched in that specific state of continued operation.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

[Aspect 30]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
The main control means can perform a determination of whether the result is correct or incorrect.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
The difference between the number of game values assigned and the number of game values used can be stored.
When the aforementioned difference reaches a predetermined number, the game enters a suppressed state where it cannot proceed.
If a power outage occurs while the aforementioned suppression state is in progress and a predetermined suppression state animation is being performed, and then power is restored, after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power restoration, the predetermined suppression state animation, which is the same animation as before the power outage, will be performed.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched in a specific state of continued operation after the power restoration. However, the display on the display device will be restored before the game ball is launched in that specific state of continued operation.
If a power outage occurs while a player is launching a game ball under the aforementioned suppression state and while the predetermined suppression state effect is being executed, and then the power is restored, the predetermined suppression state effect, which is the same effect as before the power outage, will be executed after a specific period of time has elapsed since the power was restored. However, even if the player has continued launching game balls from before the power outage to after the power was restored, the game ball will not be launched in a specific operation continuation state after the power was restored.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The sound output from the speaker can display a volume image on the sound display device,
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns are capable of being displayed in a variable manner while the special patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.
The number of color variations in the sound image is fewer than the number of color variations in the decorative pattern.
The display priority of the sound image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
Gaming machine.

11…First starting gate, 12…Second starting gate, 20…Big prize gate, 60…Performance display device, 100…Game machine, 221…First win/failure determination means, 222…Second win/failure determination means, 260…Special game control means.

Claims (1)

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display device that displays information related to the game,
It comprises a performance display device that displays performance effects,
There is a starting opening into which the game balls can be inserted.
Based on the lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting opening, the main control means can perform a win/fail determination.
The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the information display device, and the result of the win/loss determination is indicated by the stopping of the special symbol.
When a special symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss determination is a win is displayed on the information display device, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay can be played.
Equipped with speakers that output sound according to the performance,
The volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be changed in response to the player's volume adjustment operation.
The game ball can be launched in response to the player's action of launching the game ball.
If a power outage occurs while a player is adjusting the volume, and then the power is restored, even if the player continued adjusting the volume from before the power outage to after the power was restored, the volume level will not be changed in the specified operation continuation status after the power was restored.
If the power is interrupted while the player is launching a game ball and then restored, and the player has continued launching game balls from before the power interruption to after the power restoration, the game ball will be launched at a specific point in time when the player is continuing to launch game balls after the power restoration .
The lottery values related to the variation of special symbols can be held up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation of the corresponding special symbol.
In a situation where the game is in standby mode and there are no pending lottery values related to the variation of special symbols, there is a first situation in which a predetermined sound is output from the speaker, and a second situation in which the predetermined sound is not output.
As a variation display of the special symbol, the information display device performs a cyclic variation multiple times, and after the execution of the multiple cyclic variations, the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In the second situation described above, if the conditions for starting the variation of the special symbol are met, the start timing of the first of the multiple cyclic variations executed by the information display device will be earlier than the start timing at which the predetermined sound is output.
In the second situation described above, if the conditions for starting the variation of a special symbol are met, and the variation related to said variation start conditions is a normal variation pattern, the predetermined sound that is started to be output when said variation start conditions are met can continue to be output without terminating, even at the end of the last cycle of a cycle of variations that are executed multiple times on the information display device.
In the second situation described above, if the conditions for starting a variation of a special symbol are met, and the variation related to said variation start conditions is a special variation pattern, the predetermined sound that is started to be output when said variation start conditions are met is not output at the end of the last cycle variation of the cycle variation that is executed multiple times on the information display device.
In the second situation described above, if the conditions for starting the variation of a special symbol are met, and the variation related to said variation start conditions is a specific variation pattern, the predetermined sound that is started to be output when said variation start conditions are met is not output at the end of the last cycle of the cycle that is executed multiple times on the information display device.
Before the end of the special symbol variation related to the specified variation pattern, one lottery value related to the variation of the special symbol is reserved, and when the variation display related to the specified variation pattern ends and the condition for starting the variation of the reserved special symbol is met, the predetermined sound output can be started from the beginning as a result of the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variation, and the start timing of the first cycle variation of the cycle variation, which is executed multiple times by the information display device as a result of the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variation of the reserved special symbol, is earlier than the start timing of the predetermined sound output.
Gaming machine.